f3 Technical Po Documents - fuel Metering (Samil) - 삼일 사인본

FOR CONTRACT
A For Contract 03.SEP.2020 J.H. BAK K.M LIM S.W CHOI
Rev Description Date Prepd Rvwd Appd

Owner:
Owner’s Engineer:
Contractor:
Supplier:
Project Title:
FUJAIRAH F3 INDEPENDENT POWER PLANT
Drawing/Document Title
TECHNICAL DOCUMENT OF PURCHASER ORDER FOR
FUEL METERING SYSTEM

Project Doc. No. N/A Page no. Rev
Fujairah F3 Independent
Power Plant
List of Contents
1 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE ............................................................................

2 CORRESPONDENCE .....................................................................................
3 TECHNICAL BID EVALUATION SHEET & SUMMARY SHEET ....................
4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION........................................................................
5 SUPPLIER’S TECHNICAL PROPOSAL DOCUMENT ...................................
Power Plant
1 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE
Supplier confirmed that all items specified in Technical Specification are included in Supplier's
Scope of supply and all technical parts are complied with technical requirements of Samsung's
Technical Specification except for the items discussed in TBE and Deviations and clarifications.
The Parties agree that the following order of precedence shall be applied to resolve any
omission, ambiguity, inadequacy or inconsistency in or between of the documents comprising
or relating to the Technical Purchase Order;
Order of
No. Documents
Priority
1 CORRESPONDENCE – N/A 1
2 TECHNICAL BID EVALUATION SHEET & SUMMARY SHEET 2

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
19CN-00EZU00-J30-0001_MR for FUEL METERING SYSTEM_RB
Annex#1. 19CN-00GEN00-G09-0001 General Technical Requirements-General
Annex#2. 19CN-00GEN00-M02-0001 General Technical Requirements-Mechanical
Annex#3. 19CN-00GEN00-J02-0001_R0_General Technical Requirement-I&C
Annex#4. 19CN-00GEN00-E02-0001_Rev.B _General Technical Requirement for Electrical
Annex#5. 19CN-00GEN00-P04-0001_RC_Piping Material Specification (PMS sheet is extracted

only related Fuel Metering system (HB2, FB2)
Annex#5. 19CN-00GEN00-P04-0004_R0_Painting Specification

3 Annex#5. 19CN-00GEN00-P04-0101_R0_Piping Insulation Specification
3
Annex#5. UAE F3 Painting Product List_Rev.0
Annex#7. F3_Minimum document submission requirements
Annex#9. Fuel Gas & Oil Specification and Analysis
Annex#10. Meter Arrangement and Meter Details
Annex#11. MDEC (Exclude due to Supplier shall refer to latest version in web site)
Att#1. 19CN-00EZU00-J34-0001_Technical Specification for FUEL METERING SYSTEM_RA
Att#2. Preliminary Configuration for FUEL METERING SYSTEM_RA_Final concept_200830
Att#8_Owner's Requirements for Fuel System (add)
4 SUPPLIER’S TECHNICAL PROPOSAL DOCUMENT (FINAL) 4
Doc. Title : N/A Rev. A

PJT Doc. No : N/A Page 1 of 1
Power Plant
2 CORRESPONDENCE
- N/A

Power Plant
3 TECHNICAL BID EVALUATION SHEET & SUMMARY SHEET

PJT : FUJAIRAH 3 CCPP, UAE
TECHNICAL BID EVALUATION FOR METERING SYSTEM RFQ No : 19CN-00EZU00-J30-0001
TBE No. :
ATTACHMENT #1 TABULATION
Date: 08 MAY, 2020
SAMIL
REMARK
SAMIL SAMSUNG COMMENTS SAMIL SAMSUNG COMMENTS SAMIL SAMSUNG COMMENTS SAMIL SAMSUNG COMMENTS
NO. DESCRIPTION UNIT REQUIREMENTS
(15-06-2020) (21-06-2020) (02-07-2020) (10-07-2020) (20-08-2020) (XX-07-2020) (16-10-2020) (XX-07-2020)
ABBREVIATION MEANS; V (COMPLY WITH SPEC.), A (ACCEPTABLE), A* (ACCEPTED WITH COMMENT), X (NOT ACCEPTABLE), * (TO BE SPECIFIED BY BIDDER), NA (NOT APPLICABLE)
1 SERVICES REQUIREMENTS 1st 1st 1st 2nd 2nd 2nd 3rd 3rd 3rd
1) Quotation No. Bidder to specify SI-M0399-SCT Noted
2) Quotation Date Bidder to specify 9th June 2020 Noted
3) Quotation Validity Bidder to specify 30 Days Noted
4) Fabrication Location (Country of origin) Bidder to specify South Korea Noted
5) Delievery Bidder to specify 46 Weeks from the date of receipt of approval Noted
6) Transportation FOB at Export Harbor FOB Busan or Masan Port Noted
To be discussed
Samil's warranty as below;
7) Warranty 2 years after PCOD X Bidder to comply V Comply Noted, closed.
12 months from the date of PCOD or 18 months
from delivery
8) Service - V
Agent in U.A.E
- Service Center in UAE Bidder to specify A* To be discussed before award of contract V Noted Noted, closed.
Company name is Gulf Commercial Agency
- Spare Part available in UAE Bidder to specify A* It shall be possible To be discussed before award of contract V Noted Noted, closed.
Item closed. But Bidder to explicitly bring out

exception and deviation if any. Also Please refer to
9) Deviation / Clarification Yes / No A* Refer to the technical proposal doc. Please refer our replies A* Noted Comply
our replies on Metering TBE Bidder Summary
10) Breakdown price for each system shall be provided for detailed review Required A* To be updated Received. But please revise as per 1st comments all. A* Noted Bidder to submit it with final result. Refer to the commcercial document.
11) Site Supervision - A* Bidder to submit it after discussion with Buyer. Refer to the commcercial document. (35 MD)
- Site Supervision for Installation, Start-up and Commissioning Option (per diem rate) Refer to the commcerial doc. [per-diem rate] Noted
- Site Calibration for G.C Option (per diem rate) Refer to the commcerial doc. [per-diem rate] Noted
- Site Acceptance Test (SAT) Option (per diem rate) Refer to the commcerial doc. [per-diem rate] Noted
2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA
Noted. The signals from field electronic

No single failure shall result in any impact to the process control system and Noted, if indicated instruments will be used for
1) Required * Comply A* Comply instruments will be duplicated to both the Flow
process. calculation then it shall be redundant
Computers to achieve the redundancy
Material : SS316L
2) Nameplate V Comply Noted, closed.
Tag no. with service description.
3) Certificate and Test Report Required V Comply Noted, closed.
In case of any discrepancy, conflict or
inconsistency between TBE sheet
4) I&C GTR V Comply Noted, closed.
and I&C GTR, I&C GTR will have to
be priority.
2.2 INSTRUMENTS for METERING
General
1) Cables
Instrument Cables : 0.6/1kV XLPE Insulation Individual/Overall Shield Flame
Retardant Low Smoke Halogen Free Sheath Cable
Control Cables : 0.6/1kV XLPE Insulation Individual/Overall Shield Flame Retardant Required V Comply Noted, closed.
Low Smoke Halogen Free Sheath Cable.
Special Cables : Vendor's Standard
Sunshades, protection covers against splashing water, rain water and sand,
Required V Comply Noted, closed.
additional sealing, special seawater or acid resistive coating etc., if neccesery
Ultrasonic flowmeter
1) Maker / Model No. Bidder to Specify EMERSON / SensorSonic 3414 Noted V KROHNE / ALTOSONIC V12 Noted, closed.
2) Accuracy % ± 0.1% of span or better Comply Noted V Comply Noted, closed.
1. Noted, 4-20mA signal is not required.
2. For purpose of checking by operator, Metering
Equipment shall be capable of providing one
voltage free pulse output per metered quantity.
4-20mA, Noted, Please confirm redundant RS485 from
These outputs may be provided either direct from
Dual Pulse, instrument or signal is split at Flow computer panel. And No.2 Comply
3) Signal Output A* 4-20mA, Dual Pulse, RS485 A* Comply the Meter or from an isolating relay supplied by
RS485 Redundant, Status(Fault, Alarm, etc. signal) also to be output. Bidder No.3 Comply (Max 3,000 Hz for USM)
such Meter.
Status to confirm
3. The pulse rate at the Meter full load rating shall
be such that 2000 or more pulses are produced in
a Demand Period.
Please confirm to point 2 and 3
4) Smart type Yes x Not applicable Bidder to comply Comply Noted
1. Flow conditioner to be excluded.

Noted, But Bidder to propose 2 case of F.C including 2. The normal flow operation will be Z
Required
5) Flow conditioner A* Included and excluding with skid GA, Calculcation, Skid DP, A* Refer to the revised technical proposal doc. configuration . The presurre drop in Z configuration Comply
Not Required
revised price quote. shall be without Flow conditioner within allowable
limit(0.2bar). Bidder to confirm
Noted, Bidder see revised requirement as T3 or T4

6) Explosion Proof Exd IIA&B T3 or T4 IP65 or better Ex db ia IIB T4 Gb IP66 to EN60529 A IP66 / Ex de ma IIB T6…T4 Noted, closed.
class applicable.
Coriolis flowmeter
1) Maker / Model No. Bidder to Specify EMERSON / CMFHC2M Noted. V KROHNE / OPTIMASS 2400 Noted, closed.
2) Type Coriolis Comply Noted. V Comply Noted, closed.
3) Accuracy ± 0.1% of span or better ± 0.10% Noted. V Comply Noted, closed.
Please confirm below output

a. Pulse X 2 i.e Redundant
c. RS485 X 2 i.e Redundant
d. Status
2. For purpose of checking by operator, Metering
Refer to the comment dated on 15th of Jun, Coriolis meter is not
4-20mA, RS485 supports, but redundancy is not Equipment shall be capable of providing one
Noted, Please confirm redundant RS485 from Comply applied redundant output for RS485.
Dual Pulse, supported voltage free pulse output per metered quantity. Corilolis meter Signal output
4) Signal Output A* instrument or signal is split at Flow computer panel x During the TBE meeting, 4-20 mA, Status & Pulse
RS485 Redundant, If required RS485 redundant, One transmitter These outputs may be provided either direct from Pulse x2, RS-485 x1
Bidder to confirm signal applied. No. a, d & 2 Comply
Status shall be added. the Meter or from an isolating relay supplied by
No.3 Comply (Max 10,000 Hz for CM)
such Meter.
a Demand Period.
5) Smart type Yes Comply Noted Comply Noted, closed.

Essential accessory for a trouble free & accurate Flow
Noted. SCT decided Air Eliminator to include in
If required Meter operation. Please clarify how removal of solid Accuracy deviation of 1% occurs when about 5% of Comply
6) Air Eliminator A* Optional A* this for high measuring accuracy. Please reflect
Required. impurities, air or vapour from the liquid is done before it gas is mixed. Refer to the commercial document.
base quote.
enters the Flow Meter
7) Explosion Proof Exd IIA&B T3 or T4 IP65 or better x II 2G II 2D Ex tb IIIC T65 °C Db IP66/IP67 Please rate for Gas and not for Dust application A IP66/67 / Ex d IIC T6…T1 Noted, closed.
Pressure Transmitter with Accessories
Noted, Maker to be discussed during detail stage
1) Maker / Model No. Bidder to Specify SIEMENS / 7MF4033 Noted, closed. A* Comply
to align with BOP Instrument maker.
2) Accuracy % ± 0.25% of span or better ± 0.075 Noted, closed.
3) Signal Output mA 4~20 Comply Noted, closed.
4) Smart type Yes Comply Noted, closed.
GAS- 2 way manifold valve shall also be provided
Gas : Ball type with Double Block and
after DBB function Isolation valve
5) Isolation Valve Bleed Function Comply Noted, Please update PID accordingly. x Comply
Oil- Instrument shall be diapghram seal type.
Oil : 3-way manifold Valve
Please corect and update
6) Explosion Proof Exd IIA&B T3 or T4 IP65 or better A* II 1/2 G Ex d IIC T4, T6 Ga/Gb IP65 Please confirm for IIA&B, T3 or T4 Comply Noted
Pressure Guages with Accessories
1) Maker / Model No. Bidder to Specify WISE / P258 Noted. A* WISE / LV42 Comply
2) Accuracy Class 1 (EN 13190) ± 1.0 % of F.S Noted, closed.
3) Dial size mm 100 Comply Noted, closed.
Gas : Ball type with Double Block and
after Isolation valve
4) Isolation Valve Bleed Function x 2-Way Manifold Valve Bidder to comply and update PID accordingly. x Comply Comply
Oil- instrument shall be diapghram seal type.
Oil : 3-way manifold Valve
Please confirm for IIA&B but It can be discussed during
5) Explosion Proof Exd IIA&B T3 or T4 IP65 or better A* Ex II GD c IIc TX IP67 * Bidder to reply Comply for explosion proof
TBE meeting.
Temperature Transmitter with Accessories
1) Maker / Model No. Bidder to Specify SIEMENS / 7NG3136 Noted, closed. A* Comply
To maintain uniformity in plant 3 wire type shall be
2) Element Type Duplex RTD (Pt 100Ω) 3-wire type x Duplex RTD 4-Wire Type Comply Noted, closed.
supplied
316 Stainless Steel
3) Thermowell Material Comply Noted, closed.
316/316L
4) Accuracy % ± 0.25% of span or better ± 0.025% of Span Noted, closed.
4~20 mA w/Digital Signal Based on HART
5) Signal Output mA 4~20 Noted, closed.
Protocol
6) Smart type Yes Comply Noted, closed.
7) Explosion Proof Exd IIA&B T3 or T4 IP65 or better A* ExD IIC T5 / T6 Gb IP67 Please confirm for IIA&B, T3 or T4 Comply Noted, closed.
Temperature Gauges with Accessories
1) Maker / Model No. Bidder to Specify WISE / T190 Noted, closed. A* NAGANO / TB44 Comply
2) Element Type Bimetallic Comply Noted, closed.
316 Stainless Steel
3) Thermowell Material Comply Noted, closed.
316/316L
4) Accuracy Class 1 (EN 13190) ± 1.0 % of F.S Noted, closed.
5) Dial size mm 100 Comply Noted, closed.
6) Explosion Proof Exd IIA&B T3 or T4 IP65 or better A* EN60529 / IEC529 / IP67 Please confirm for explosion proof * Bidder to reply Comply for explosion proof
Function of Flow Computer
Measurement signals from field instruments of the gas metering system shall be
1) Required Comply Noted, closed.
connected to redundant flow computers mounted in a cabinet.
The flow computers shall read all field signals, perform volume and energy
calculations and generate reports and alarms.
3) The flow computers shall read the following data (as a minimum): Noted, closed.
- Static pressure and temperature Required Comply Noted, closed.
- Dual pulses and serial communication from the UFM/CM. Pulses to be configured
Required Comply Noted, closed.
as primary to calculate the flow rate.
- Gas composition from an on-line GC Required Comply Noted, closed.
The flow computer shall send the cumulative standard volume and total energy of
4) the meter run as digital outputs to non-resettable electronic counters with LCD Required Comply Noted, closed.
displays.
The S600+ supports up to 333 days of reports from a 10 stream
application, where monthly,
weekly, daily, and hourly reports are each archived as standard
5) The flow computer shall have the following computational capability: - A* Bidder to inform Data storage capacity individual reports.
Example: 11 months of monthly, weekly, daily, and hourly reports;
plus 50,000 events and
50,000 alarms.
The default unit shall be Sm3. Please consider

below Standard reference conditions of
- Volume flow rate at standard, normal or operator specified base conditions temperature and pressure to define the gas
Required Comply Unit revised. Bidder check it again. A* Comply Comply
(Sm3/s, Nm3/s) volume
a) Standard Pressure is 1.01324 bar A
b) Standard Temperature is 15 degrees Celsius
- Integrated corrected volume Required Comply Noted, closed.
- Mass flow rate and integrated mass Required Comply Noted, closed.
- Energy flow rate and integrated energy Required Comply Noted, closed.
- Linearisation of temperature input Required Comply Noted, closed.
HMI in Metering panel to be considered.

All the diagnostic and configuration setting of FC
shall be made available in control panel common
HMI. The rights of operator/ viewing shall be
- Generation of standard and user defined reports at ticket printer. All reports shall different and for engineering changes the rights
Required Comply Noted. A* Comply
be user configurable shall be different using different logic credentials.
Shall also have feature to bypass reading of any
one flow meter when a meter is in maintenance
and all generated reports will be visible and
transferred to operator via this HMI.
- Co-efficient of deviation from ideal gas law as per AGA 8 Required Comply Noted, closed.
- Previous day's flow/energy Required Comply Noted, closed.
- Today's accumulated flow/energy Required Comply Noted, closed.

- Generation of reports for totalizer volume & energy at daily, weekly fortnightly & different and for engineering changes the rights
Required Comply Noted. A* Comply
monthly intervals etc. shall be user configurable. shall be different using different logic credentials.
2.3 CONTROL PANEL
1) Ingress Protection ( Indoor / Outdoor) IP32 / IP 54W IP42 Noted, closed.

2) Exterior -
Plinth Color to be discussed during details.But
- Panel painting color RAL 7035 Body : RAL7035 and Plinth : RAL 7022 Noted. Panel demension shall be complied with I&C GTR Comply (Plint height is 200 mm)
(800x800x2200)
- Nameplate for Instrument, Push-button, lamp, valve, tubing line, any equipment etc KKS No. with description in English Comply Noted, closed.
Labels shall be provided on front and rear access doors of all cubicles, racks,
- Required Comply Noted, closed.
container.
- Door key type Lift-off type Comply Noted, closed.
Required for all metal part
- Earthing Comply Noted, closed.
(enclosure, door)
3) Interior -
- Therminal Block Required with identification * To be updated TO BE SPECIFIED BY BIDDER Comply Noted, closed.
- Internal lighting Required * To be updated TO BE SPECIFIED BY BIDDER Comply Noted, closed.
- Termostat with space heater Required * To be updated TO BE SPECIFIED BY BIDDER Comply Noted, closed.
- Socket outlet Min.2 Nos (UAE standard socket) * To be updated TO BE SPECIFIED BY BIDDER Comply Noted, closed.
- Pocket for panel drawing Required * To be updated TO BE SPECIFIED BY BIDDER Comply Noted, closed.
- Earthing Required * To be updated TO BE SPECIFIED BY BIDDER Comply Noted, closed.
- Cable Gland & Gland Plate Required * To be updated TO BE SPECIFIED BY BIDDER Comply Noted, closed.
4) Spare -
Wiring, Terminal, I/O Slot,
- Cable entry hole with plug % 20 A* Comply Please confirm revised I&C GTR requirment Comply Noted, closed.
(only Panel Space 10%)
40% (Filling rate shall not be exceed
- PVC cable duct in cabinet Comply Noted, closed.
more than 60%)
Required. Detail format will be
5) Hardwiring Interface Signal List Comply Noted, closed.
provided.
Required. Detail format will be
6) Mapping List for Communication Interface Comply Noted, closed.
provided.
Control Logic & Loop (ISO/IEC or ISA
7) Documentation Comply Noted, closed.
5.1 & 5.2 standard)

Min. 17" size LCD Touch Screen, if Noted, Bidder to consider min. 17" touch screen HMI of different and for engineering changes the rights
8) Touch Screen A* Comply x Deleted during TBE Stage Comply
required. Metering PLC attach on panel door or Rack type. shall be different using different logic credentials.
9) Document Pocket Required (A3 size) Comply Noted, closed.

3 SCOPE OF SUPPLY
3.1 FUEL GAS METERING SYSTEM - SETTLEMENT
Ultrasonic flowmeter
1) Maker / Model No. - Bidder to Specify EMERSON / SensorSonic 3414 Noted KROHNE / ALTOSONIC V12 Noted, closed.
2) Quantity set 2 (Main and Check) Comply Noted, closed.
1. We understand below provision bidder has

considered
Pulse *2ea
Rs-485 *2ea
Status(DO)*1ea
2. For purpose of checking by operator, Metering Refer to the comment dated on 15th of Jun, Coriolis meter is not
Equipment shall be capable of providing one applied redundant output for RS485.
Please confirm redundant RS485 from instrument or
3) Signal Output - 4-20mA, Pulse, RS485 A* Comply A* Comply voltage free pulse output per metered quantity.
signal is split at Flow computer panel
These outputs may be provided either direct from No. a, d & 2 Comply
the Meter or from an isolating relay supplied by No.3 Comply (Max 10,000 Hz for CM)
such Meter.
a Demand Period.
Noted, Maker to be discussed during detail stage to align Noted, Maker to be discussed during detail stage
1) Maker / Model No. - Bidder to Specify SIEMENS / 7MF4033 A* Comply
with BOP Instrument maker. to align with BOP Instrument maker.
2) Quantity set 2 as minimum Comply Noted, closed.
3) Isolation Valve (DBBV) - Required Comply Noted, PID to be revised accordingly.
Pressure Gauges with Accessories

1) Maker / Model No. - Bidder to Specify WISE / P258 Noted A* NAGANO / LV42 Comply
Page 1 of 2
PJT : FUJAIRAH 3 CCPP, UAE
TECHNICAL BID EVALUATION FOR METERING SYSTEM RFQ No : 19CN-00EZU00-J30-0001
TBE No. :
ATTACHMENT #1 TABULATION
Date: 08 MAY, 2020
SAMIL
REMARK
after Isolation valve
3) Isolation Valve (DBBV) - Required Comply Noted, PID to be revised accordingly. x Comply
Oil- instrument shall be diapghram seal type.
Temperature Transmitter with Accessories

1) Maker / Model No. - Bidder to Specify SIEMENS / 7NG3136 Noted, closed. A* Comply
To maintain uniformity in plant 3 wire type shall be

3) Element Type - Duplex RTD (Pt 100Ω) 3-wire type A* Duplex RTD 4-Wire Type Comply (3-Wire) Noted, closed.
supplied
316 Stainless Steel

4) Thermowell Material - Comply Noted, closed.
316/316L

1) Maker / Model No. - Bidder to Specify WISE / T190 Noted A* NAGANO / TB44 Comply

3) Element Type - Bimetallic Comply Noted, closed.
316 Stainless Steel

316/316L
Gas Chromatograph with Sample Probe

1) Maker / Model No. - Bidder to Specify EMERSON / 370XA Noted, closed.
2) Quantity set 2 Comply Noted, closed.
3) Oven - Bidder to Specify * To be updated Bidder to update. Airless iso-thermal Noted, closed.
4) Sample Conditioning System - Bidder to Specify Sample Probe, Valves, etc. by SAMIL Noted
Noted, G.C analyzer needs to be enclosure as

5) 3-side shelter for GC - Required Comply (4,000W x 1,500D x 2,700H) Noted A* Revised 5,000W x 2,400D x 2,800H mm Comply
same as H2S analyzer as per discussed.
6) Analyser Accuracy % Bidder to Specify A* Bidder to reply ± 1% of Heating Value

Metering Panel for Fuel Gas Metering
Bidder to comply with I&C GTR as Panel

2) Dimension (W x D x H) - Bidder to Specify 800W x 800D x 2100H Noted A* Comply (Plint height is 200 mm)
dimension (800x800x2200)
Interface Device
3) - Required Comply Noted, closed.
(Network Switch, Fiber Optic Converter, Fiber optic Dispatch Frame, as required)
2nos 230Vac UPS and 1no 230

Normal power feeder by SCT. Bidder
4) Redundant UPS, 1 Normal power supply - shall further distribute to use for own A* Comply Noted, please check revised requirement. Noted Noted, closed.
system.
Flow Computer for Fuel Gas Metering

1) Maker / Model No. - Bidder to Specify EMERSON / Floboss S600+ Noted, closed.
3) Communication
- Configuration Port - Bidder to Specify Two configurable RS-232 serial ports Noted, closed.
- Serial Ports - Bidder to Specify Three RS-422/RS-485 serial ports Noted, closed.
- Ehternet Port - Bidder to Specify NTWK1 and NTWK2 Noted, closed.
Fuel Gas Metering System SKID
Noted, Bidder provide 2 case for F.C including and Please indicate dimension of w/o flow conditioner
2) Dimension (W x D x H) - Bidder to Specify A* 29,000W x 5,500D x 2,500H A* Refer to the revised technical proposal doc. 24 W x 4.4 D x 3 H (m)
excluding. case final version.
3) All required valves, piping, signal J/B and other accessories - Required Comply Noted, closed.
3-side Analyzer Shelter

Bidder to consider Calorimeter panel (supplied by
GT) space to allocate in Bidder shelter inside.
2) Dimension (W x D x H) - Bidder to Specify 4,000W x 1,500D x 2,700H Noted A* 5,000W x 2,400D x 2,800H Comply
Please refer GT calorimenter panel GA as shared
via email
3.2 BACKUP FUEL OIL UNLOADING METERING SYSTEM - OPERATION

Coriolis mass flowmeter
1) Maker / Model No. - To be specified EMERSON / CMFHC2M Noted KROHNE / OPTIMASS 2400 Noted, closed.

3) Accuracy - ± 0.1% of span or better ± 0.10% Noted, closed.

1) Maker / Model No. - Bidder to Specify SIEMENS / To be updated Noted A* Comply
for Oil skid, Isolation valve required and

3) 3-way manifold Valve - Required x 2-Way Manifold Valve Bidder to comply and update PID accordingly. A* Comply instrument shall be diapghram seal type. Please Comply
corect and update

1) Maker / Model No. - Bidder to Specify WISE / T190 Noted A* Comply
316 Stainless Steel
316/316L
Backup Fuel Oil Unloading Metering System SKID
1) Quantity set 1 Comply Noted
Please indicate dimention of Air Eliminator

2) Dimension (W x D x H) - Bidder to Specify 10,000W x 2,300D x 2,500H Noted A* Refer to the revised technical doc. 8.5 W x 1.8 D x 2.2 H (m)
included case as final version here also
3.3 BACKUP FUEL OIL METERING FOR PROCESS (GT) - SETTLEMENT (3 LOTs)
Coriolis mass flowmeter
1) Maker / Model No. - To be specified EMERSON / CMF400M Noted. KROHNE / OPTIMASS 2400 Noted.
3) Accuracy - ± 0.1% of span or better ± 0.10% Noted, closed.

1) Maker / Model No. - Bidder to Specify SIEMENS / 7MF4033 Noted, closed.
for Oil skid, Isolation valve required and

3) 3-way manifold Valve - Required x 2-Way Manifold Valve Bidder to comply and update PID accordingly. A* Comply instrument shall be diapghram seal type. Please Comply
corect and update

How is tempreature compensations shall be done? Noted we understand there is built in temperature
1) Maker / Model No. - Bidder to Specify A* WISE / T190 Bidder to consider temp trnasmitter if temp A* NAGANO / TB44 sensor within coriolis meter to compensate for Will be updated.
compensation is required tube stifness
316 Stainless Steel
316/316L
Backup Fuel Oil Metering for Process (GT) System SKID
1) Quantity set 6 2 per Unit (Total 6 six skid) Comply Noted.
Please indicate dismension of Air Eliminator

2) Dimension (W x D x H) - Bidder to Specify 7,000W x 1,100D x 2,000H Noted. A* Refer to the revised technical doc. 6.8 W x 1.3 D x 1.5 H (m)
included case as final version here also
Metering Panel for Fuel Oil Metering
SCT decide case 1 which is consist of 1no panel

Case 1 : 3 set (1 set for each unit) with 2nos flow computer per unit (total 3nos
1) Quantity set Comply Noted. Please Bidder shall propose 2 case separately. A* Refer to the revised technical doc. Comply
Case 2 : 1 set for GT common metering panels for Oil settlement skid. So Bidder
to update dimenstion of this case as final version.

with 2nos flow computer per unit (total 3nos
2) Dimension (W x D x H) - Bidder to Specify 800W x 800D x 2,100H Noted. A* Comply
metering panels for Oil settlement skid. So Bidder
to update dimenstion of this case as final version.
Interface Device
3) - Required Comply Noted.
(Network Switch, Fiber Optic Converter, Fiber optic Dispatch Frame, as required)
2nos 230Vac UPS and 1no 230

Normal power feeder by SCT. Bidder
4) Redundant UPS, 1 Normal power supply - shall further distribute to use for own UPS supply by SCT Noted. See modified requirement Noted Noted, closed.
system.
Flow Computer for Fuel oil Gas Metering

1) Maker / Model No. - Bidder to Specify EMERSON / Floboss S600+ Noted. EMERSON / Floboss S600+ Noted, closed.

Case 1 : 6 set (1 set for each FM) with 2nos flow computer per unit (total 3nos
2) Quantity set A* Comply Noted. Please Bidder shall propose 2 case separately. A* Refer to the revised technical doc. Comply
Case 2 : 2 set for GT common metering panels for Oil settlement skid. So Bidder
to update qt'y of this case as final version.
3) Communication
- Configuration Port - Bidder to Specify Two configurable RS-232 serial ports Noted, closed.
- Serial Ports - Bidder to Specify Three RS-422/RS-485 serial ports Noted, closed.
- Ehternet Port - Bidder to Specify NTWK1 and NTWK2 Noted, closed.
N / A for Flow Computer

3) All required valves, piping, signal J/B and other accessories - Required * TO BE SPECIFIED BY BIDDER Noted.
Valve, Piping & JB are applied skid
4 INSPECTION, TEST & CERTIFICATE

1) Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) Required Comply Noted, closed.
2) Site Acceptance Test (SAT) Required Comply Noted, closed.
All the test and inspection for the Supplier’s equipment shall be conducted in
3) accordance with the applicable codes and standards, including prudent practices in Required Comply Noted, closed.
the utility industries, unless otherwise specified in this Specification
Any inspection by the Purchaser will not relieve the Supplier of any responsibility for
4) conformance with stated conditions and shall not be considered as a waiver of Required Comply Noted, closed.
warranty or other rights
In case Purchaser and /or Client will indicate its intention to attend on the inspection
5) & test plan (ITP), the Supplier shall give the relevant information to the Purchaser at Required Comply Noted, closed.
least before 2 weeks for the expected inspection/test date.
The Supplier shall prepare and submit the Purchaser the test and inspection
procedures/plan at shop and field for approval.
7) Certificate - Noted, closed.
- Inspection and Test Report Required Comply Noted, closed.
- Calibration report for Field Instruments Required Comply Noted, closed.
- Explosion Certificate for Explosion Components Required Comply Noted, closed.
Shall be supplied with calibration certificates of

accuracy from a third party facility approved for
fiscal measurement proving or suitably accredited
for the purposes of the
calibration undertaken.
WET Calibration with Owner, PURCHASER at the internationally certified lap or
- Required Comply Noted. A* - No calibration adjustment shall be carried out to Comply
factory
any Metering Equipment outside of an
internationally Accredited Laboratory with
traceability of calibration techniques i.e. ISO
17025.
4 SPARE PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS

Recommended spare part List for installation, commissioning & Start-up
1) (To be included as base price) Required Comply (Refer to the techinical doc.) Noted. A* Bidder to specify more detail list. Refer to the technical proposal document
- Vendor to provide filter with required Carrier and calibration gas
Recommended 2 years operation Spare Part List
2) As option price Comply (Refer to the techinical doc.) Noted.
(To be included as optional price with valid date for 3 years)
Special Tool list for installaion and commissioning Comply, To be updated (Our quote suggested
3) Required x Bidder to include base quote. Comply Noted
(To be included as base price) the optional price.)
5 OTHERS
- Item to be added durting TBE period N/A
Page 2 of 2
[F3 IPP] Fuel Metering TBE Summary
SAMIL
Category Item Note
(FINAL_2020.08.19)
Fuel Gas/Oil Metering System in UAE Reference ? No
Bidder shall comply with MDEC code thoroughly

Comply
(If any violation in this, Bidder shall follow up with Owner without any cost impact)
For Gas Metering skid, Bidder shall

comply with design followings;
1. Isolation Valves : Top Entry Trunnion
type(DBB) No. 1 & 2 Comply
Piping Requirement 2. Fire Safety & Antistatic Device No. 3.
3. Refer to Sour Gas & NACE-MR- NACE & PSL2 is not applied according to the meeting.
0175/ISO 15156-1
(c.f) SCT pipe material specification is
API 5L-B EFW PSL2 (RT 100%)
Maker / Model No. KROHNE / ALTOSONIC V12

(Remote / Integral type) (Integral Type)
Size 24" ASME 600# RF
Accuracy +/- 0.1%

FUEL GAS SETTLEMENT UFM ฀
Response Time 120 m/s
IP / Explosion proof IP 66 / Ex de ma IIB T6…T4
Price (USD) Refer to the commercial proposal doc.
Required straight run (inlet / Outlet) 10D / 3D
Pressure drop @single stream(bar) 0.1067

Case B : Skid without Flow
Conditioner
Pressure drop @Z-stream(bar) 0.1669
Total Skid Dimension (WxDxH (m)) 24 x 4.4 x 3 m
Total Skid Price (USD) Refer to the commercial proposal doc.

Maker / Model No. EMERSON / 370XA
Measuring Principle Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD)
Response Time 4 Min.
G.C
Accuracy (%) ± 1% of Heating Value
IP / Explosion proof IP65 / Ex d IIB+H2 T6
Unit Price (USD) Refer to the commercial proposal doc.
Maker / Model No. AMETEK / 5100 HD
Measuring Principle Tunable Diode Laser Absorption Spectroscopy (TDLAS)
H2S Analyzer
<1 sec. Photometic response.
(~max 250ppm can be Response Time
Total system response is depending on sample flowrate
measured)
Accuracy (%) Typical ± 5ppmv or 2% of reading
IP / Explosion proof IP65 and Type 4X / Ex de IIB+h2 T3
Unit Price (USD) Refer to the commercial proposal doc.
N2 for H2S Calibration
Type of gas Zero-Grade Helium for GC Carrier
GC Calibration gas as right chart
ANALYZER SEHLTER
GC Carrier - 2 Bottle (47L)
(3-side)
Amount of gas (L) GC Calibration - 1 Bottle (29L)
H2S Calibration - 1 Bottle (10L)
H2S - 6 Months
Validate
GC - 12 Months
Calibration/Commissioning
carrier gas
Delivery (shipping in Factory? In UAE

In UAE Agency
agency)
3-side shelter dimension (WxDxH (m)) 5 x 2.4 x 2.8 m

Tatal 3-side shelter including analyzers Price (USD) Refer to the commercial proposal doc.
Maker / Model No. EMERSON / FLOBOSS S600+
10 Flow meter run (10 ea)
Computational capability for Custody but it depends on design
Normally 6 Flow meter run applied
Total slot are 4 q’ty. 1st is for CPU, 2nd is for I/O and 3rd/4th is
depend on design. I/O Board, Hart board and Prover board can be
Capability of FM connection
located in slot 3/4.
Flow Computer (Slot, board availability, etc)
Per 1 I/O board(P144), it has below capability and 2 dual pulse or 4
FLOW COMPUTER METERING PANEL
single pulse. 2 additional I/O board(P144) can be applied
SYSTEM for GAS
connection cable sepc with FM

No recommended cable. Generally, it follow FM recommendation.
(cable size, spec.)
Generally pulse signal transmission distance is 1 km.
limitation length of connection cable
However, Meter vendor & SAMIL recommend to apply around 700
with FM (especially puls signal distance)
meter.
Maker RITTAL
Panel
Dimension (WxDxH (m)) 0.8 x 0.8 x 2.2 m
Maker / Model No. KROHNE / OPTIMASS2400

(Remote / Integral type) (Integral)
Accuracy +/- 0.1%
CFM
Response Time N/A
IP / Explosion proof IP 66/67 / Ex d IIC T6…T1

FUEL OIL METER (UNLOADING) SAMIL / Vessel
Maker/ Type
Air Eliminator
Required straight run (inlet / Outlet) N/A
Pressure drop @total stream(bar) 0.3407
Total Skid Dimension (WxDxH (m)) 8.5 x 1.8 x 2.2 m
Case A : Skid with Air
Eliminator


CFM
Accuracy +/- 0.1%
Response Time N/A
FUEL OIL METER (GT supply) Price (USD) Refer to the commercial proposal doc.
Maker/ Type SAMIL / Vessel
Air Eliminator
Case A : Skid with Air Total Skid Dimension (WxDxH (m)) 6.8 x 1.3 x 1.5 m
Eliminator

CFM Accuracy +/- 0.1%
Response Time N/A
Price (USD) To be updated
FUEL OIL METER (GT return) Maker/ Type SAMIL / Vessel
Air Eliminator
Case A : Skid with Air Total Skid Dimension (WxDxH (m)) 6.8 x 1.3 x 1.5 m
Eliminator
Maker / Model No. EMERSON / FLOBOSS S600+
Computational capability for Custody Up to 10 meter runs but it depends on design
Total slot are 4 q’ty. 1st is for CPU, 2nd is for I/O and 3rd/4th is
depend on design. I/O Board, Hart board and Prover board can be
Capability of FM connection
located in slot 3/4.
(Slot, board availability, etc)
Flow Computer Per 1 I/O board(P144), it has below capability and 2 dual pulse or 4
FLOW COMPUTER METERING PANEL single pulse. 2 additional I/O board(P144) can be applied
SYSTEM for Oil
connection cable sepc with FM

No recommended cable. Generally, it follow FM recommendation.
(cable size, spec.)
Generally pulse signal transmission distance is 1 km.
limitation length of connection cable
However, Meter vendor & SAMIL recommend to apply around 700
with FM (especially puls signal distance)
meter.
Maker RITTAL
Panel
Dimension (WxDxH (m)) 0.8 x 0.8 x 2.2 m
Special Note for Bidder N/A

Power Plant
4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
MATERIAL REQUISITION 0001
REV. NO. : B
ISSUED : 05.SEP.2020 FUEL METERING SYSTEM PAGE 1 OF 22
METERIAL REQUISITION

DOCUMENT NO : 19CN-00EZU00-J30-0001
B 05.SEP.2020 Issue For Quotation J.H.BAK K.M.LIM S.W.CHOI
A 08.MAY.2020 Issue For Quotation J.H.BAK K.M.LIM S.W.CHOI
REV DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED BY CHECKED BY APPROVED BY
1 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................ 3
1.1. PROJECT DESCRIPTION ............................................................................................................................ 3
2. CODES AND STANDARDS ........................................................................................................................... 3
3. SCOPE OF SUPPLY / WORK ...................................................................................................................... 10
3.1. SCOPE OF SUPPLY .................................................................................................................................... 10
3.2. SCOPE OF WORK ...................................................................................................................................... 13
4. CLIMATIC CONDITION, NOISE, UTILITY CONDITIONS ................................................................. 15
5. DESIGN REQUIREMENT ........................................................................................................................... 16
6. TEST AND INSECTION .............................................................................................................................. 17
6.1. PRE-FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (PRE-FAT).................................................................................... 17
6.2. FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT) ..................................................................................................... 17
6.3. SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT) .............................................................................................................. 18
6.4. COMMISSIONING AND START UP ......................................................................................................... 18
6.5. TRAINING ................................................................................................................................................... 18
7. MAINTENANCE, SPARE PARTS & SPECIAL TOOLS .......................................................................... 19
8. DOCUMENTATIONS ................................................................................................................................... 20
9. GUARANTEES .............................................................................................................................................. 20
10. PREPARATION OF SHIPMENT ............................................................................................................. 20
11. SUPPLIER DOCUMENT REQUIREMENT (SDR) ............................................................................... 20
12. ATTACHMENT.......................................................................................................................................... 22
13. ANNEX ........................................................................................................................................................ 22
2 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
1. GENERAL
1.1. Project Description
The Project will be situated on a vacant site between the existing Fujairah F1 and
Fujairah F2 power and water plants. The Fujairah F1 Plant was commissioned in 2004
and is owned by Emirates Sembcorp Water and Power Company. The Fujairah F2
Plant was commissioned in 2011 and is owned by Fujairah Asia Power Company.
In between the Fujairah F1 and F2 plants a new greenfield F3 Power Generation Plant
(F3 Plant) shall be implemented as an Independent Power Producer (IPP) within the
Fujairah power and water complex, approximately 300 km north-east of the city of Abu
Dhabi in the Emirate of Fujairah.
The plant facility will be combined cycle configuration. The Plant shall be designed for
dual fuel firing, whereby natural gas (“Gas”) is assumed to be the primary fuel and
diesel oil the secondary fuel (“Back-up Fuel”). Gas shall be transported to the site via a
new Gas pipeline from the existing Fujairah Receiving Facility.
This specification covers the requirements for the design, manufacturing, assembly,
inspection, delivery, commissioning, official test support, documentation and technical
direction the Fuel Metering System including complete auxiliaries with all accessories
for use in the Fujairah F3 Combined Cycle Power Plant in the Emirate of Fujairah.
It is neither the PURCHASER’s intent to specify all technical requirements and BOM, or
to set forth requirements adequately covered by applicable codes and standards.
However, it shall be the responsibility of SUPPLIER to supply all equipment that is in
accordance with high standards of engineering, design and workmanship, suitable for
the intended service as described herein.
Also it shall be consistent with generally accepted standards and practices in the
Combined Cycle Power Plant.
2. CODES AND STANDARDS
The codes and standards applied in each case shall be the latest revision adopted and
published at the time of signing of the Contract. Any conflict between different
applicable codes and standards shall be referred to the Engineer who will determine
which shall govern and the Engineer's decision will be final.
All materials and equipment supplied and all work carried out as well as calculation
sheets, drawings, quality and class of goods, methods of inspection, specific design
features of equipment and parts shall comply in every respect with the applicable codes
and standards.
Any documentation required to satisfy the codes and standards and required for the bid
evaluation regarding on this proposal of F3 plant, shall be made available to the
PURCHASER.
3 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
The table below contains in alphabetical order, institutions and organizations whose
codes and standards may be applied for the Project.
Codes and standards that may be applied for the Project

American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)
PTC 19.2 Pressure Measurement
PTC 19.3 Temperature Measurement
PTC 19.5 Flow Measurement
Steam and Water Sampling, Conditioning and
PTC 19.11
Analysis in the Power Cycle
Forged Fittings, Socket Welding and Threaded
B 16.11
Fittings
B 16.36 Orifice Flanges
B 16.25 Butt Welding Ends
B 16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
B 16.104 / FCI 70.2 Control Valve Seat Leakage
B 16.10 Face to Face & End to End Dimensions of Valves

B 16.47 Large diameter Steel Flanges
German industrial standards (DIN) / European (EN) Standards
DIN EN 837 Pressure Gauges
Measurement of fluid flow in closed conduits:
DIN EN 24006
vocabulary and symbols (ISO 4006)
Flow measurement: ranges, divisions and
DIN 19204
inscriptions of scales for flow indicators
DIN 19205-1 Flow measurement: differential pressure devices
DIN 19206-1 Flow measurement: orifice plates between flanges
DIN 19227 Graphical Symbols for Process Measurements
Measurement and Control: Signaling of
DIN 19235
operating conditions
German Association of Electrical (VDE / VDI)
VDI/VDE 3512, 3516 Measuring arrangement for process requirements
VDI/VDE 3695 Pre-formatted displays

VDI/VDE 3546 Design process-control rooms, rooms for
4 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
auxiliary equipment
VDI/VDE 2880 Programmable controllers

Electronic equipment for use in electrical power
VDE 0160
installations
VDE 0472 Rules for testing insulated cables and flexible cables
VDE 0116 Section 87 Safety requirements for Turbine Protection
Wiring cables for telecommunication and information
VDE 0815
system
International Electrical Commission (IEC)
Functional safety of electrical / electronic /
IEC 61508
programmable electronic safety-related systems
Functional safety - Safety instrumented systems for
IEC 61511 the
process industry sector
General requirements for the competence of testing
IEC 17025
and calibration laboratories
Electrical Apparatus for Explosive Gas Atmosphere –
IEC 60079-10
Classification of Hazardous Area
Degrees of protection provided by enclosures – IP
IEC 60529
code
Industrial Process control valves – Part 4 : Inspection
IEC 60534.4
and Routine testing
Industrial Platinum Resistance Thermometers and
IEC 60751
Platinum Temperature Sensors
Thermocouples: Reference Tables, Tolerances,
IEC 60584 Extension and Compensating Cables-Tolerances and
Identification System
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
IEEE 830 Guide to software requirements specifications
Standard digital interface for programmable
IEEE 488.2
instrumentation
Standard for Local Area Networks: Carrier Sense
Multiple Access with collision detection CSMA-
IEEE 802.3 CD and
Supplements A, B, C and E
Standard for Local Area Networks: Token Ring
IEEE 802.5
Access method and physical layer separation
5 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
IEEE 665 IEEE standard for generating station grounding

International Society of Automation (ISA)
ISA S 5.1 Instrumentation Symbols and Identification
ISA S 5.3 Graphic Symbols for Automation Systems
ISA S 5.4 Instrument Loop Diagrams
ISA S 18.1 Annunciator Sequences and Specifications
ISA S 51.1 Process Instrumentation Terminology
ISA S 75.01 Flow Equations for Sizing Control Valves
Inherent Flow characteristic and rangeability of
ISA S 75.11.01
Control Valves
ISA S 75.19.01 Hydrostatic Testing of Control valves
ISA S 75.17 Control valve Noise Calculations
International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
ISO 5167 Measurement of Fluid Flow
ISO 11064 Ergonomic design of control centers
ISO 13407-1, 2, & Human centered design process for interactive
3 systems
ISO/DIS 6385 Ergonomic principles in the design of work systems
American Petroleum Institute (API)
Non contacting vibration and axial position
API 670
monitoring sys tem
API 678 Accelerometer-based vibration monitoring system
British Standards (BS)
Specification for graphical symbols for general
BS 1553-1:1997
engineering piping systems and plant
Specification for graphical symbols for power
BS 1553-2:1950 generation
Plant
Specification for graphical symbols for compressing
BS 1553-3:1950
plant
Code of practice for instrumentation in process
BS 6739:2009
control systems: installation design and practice
BS 5308 Part-I & II Instrumentation Cables
6 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
BS 5155 Butterfly Valves
In general, the latest editions of the standards, codes, regulations, recommendations

and directives issued by the following organizations shall apply for the design,
construction, testing, commissioning, operation and maintenance of the project.
1. International Standards (shall prevail)
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
ISO International Standards Organization
2. National Standards
ANSI American National Standards institute
EN European standards
BSI British standards institution
DIN DeutschesInstitutfürNormung
JAPS Japanese Standard Organisation
3. Regulations, recommendations, directives
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association
AGA American Gas Association
AIJ Architectural Institute of Japan
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISE Association of Iron and Steel Engineers
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
7 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
API American Petroleum Institute
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air

Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing Materials
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
CIRIA Construction Industry Research and Information Association
HIS Hydraulic Institute Standards
ICE Institution of Civil Engineer
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
ISA Instrument Society of America
ISO Gas Turbine Applications, Safety (21789)
JEC Japanese Electrotechnical Institute
JEMA The Japan Electrical Manufacturers Association
JIS Japanese Industrial Standards
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
VDE Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker (German Society of

Electrical Engineers)
VDI Verband Deutscher Ingenieure (Association of German

Engineers )
8 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
VGB Technische Vereinigung der Grosskraftwerksbetreiber E.V.

(Society of big power plants operator)
SUPPLIER shall at all times comply with all industry codes in force in the Emirate of Abu
Dhabi including the Transmission Code and the Metering and Data Exchange Code
issued under the Water and Electricity Law and Cybersecurity requirements for ICS
latest version. All relevant procedures for commissioning of aforementioned industry
codes in the Emirate of Abu Dhabi shall be strictly followed.
Deviation from this Section (Standards and Codes) and the use of any standards and
codes which are not issued by the organization listed above is principally not acceptable.
The SUPPLIER shall draw PURCHASER's attention to any conflict between the
requirements of this Technical Specification and its references. Should the requirements
of this Technical Specification conflict with the requirements of the codes and standards
references herein or with the applicable UAE law, standards, local regulations and
PURCHASER/Owner's design specifications, then the more stringent requirements shall
apply. Should there be any difference of opinion with regard to the interpretation of
requirements. PURCHASER will instruct the SUPPLIER as to the requirements and the
SUPPLIER shall, at its cost, comply with that instructions.
In case SUPPLIERs are not in the position to provide the respective deviation list, the
certified equivalence list and the respective national standard in English language with
his Proposal, the Proposal would be considered as non-compliant.
9 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
3. SCOPE OF SUPPLY / WORK
3.1. Scope of Supply
The SUPPLIER shall cover the design, engineering, documentation, manufacturing,

assembly, factory testing in the SUPPLIER's workshop and/or wherever possible places.
All necessary test, inspection of the equipment in the SUPPLIER's shop prior to
shipment and supervision for handling, erection, installation, start-up and test of the
equipment shall be completed with appurtenances as specified herein.
The SUPPLIER shall include all necessary and supplementary equipment & services in
his proposal to complete his system, equipment & works and to make them work fully
and properly even though they are not mentioned in this specification.
The SUPPLIER shall design, fabricate and deliver the Fuel Metering System with
accessories assembled as much as practical and ready for installation at the site.
The following equipment, devices and services shall be included in the supply as
minimum but not be limited to the followings:
No Name of Equipment Q’ty Remarks
1. Fuel Gas Metering System for Common - Settlement

Z Configuration UFM based metering system skid
- Two (2) Ultrasonic Flow Meter for Main and
check meter in Z configuration. (MDEC accuracy
requirements shall be applied.)
- Min. 3 meter height of Gas vent and N2 purge
connection for each metering line
- Test Connection for Site Verification Test by 3rd
1-1 party 1 Lot
- Manual Gas Sampler
- Access Ladder, Platform, etc.
- Connection point for Gas Calorie Meter supplied
by GT
- Instrumentation and Signal J/B, Power D/B,
interconnection cables, etc. and All required
accessories for Complete Metering System Skid
10 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
-One (1) Standalone Metering Panel w/ min. 17”

Touch Screen for Flow Computer
- Two (2) Flow Computer
- Flow Computer Configuration and Site Support
1-2 for commissioning 1 Lot
interconnection cables, etc.
- One (1) lot of FO cable connection (incl. media
convertor and patch panel)
Gas Chromatograph System (3-side Analyzer Shelter)
- Gas Conditioning and Sample Handling System
- Two (2) Gas Chromatograph
- H2S and Total Sulfur Analyzer
- Dew Point Analyzer
1-3 - Calibration and Carrier Gas 1 Lot
interconnection cables, etc. and All Required
Accessories for Complete Gas Chromatograph
System
- Gas Chromatograph Configuration and Site
Support for commissioning
2. Backup Fuel Oil Metering for Unloading – Operation
Coriolis type based metering skid
- Parallel Meter Arrangement. MDEC accuracy
party
2-1 - Instrumentation and Signal J/B, Power D/B, 1 Lot
interconnection cables, etc. and All Required
Accessories for Complete Metering System Skid
- Drip tray on whole skid
- One Air Eliminator for each CFM
3. Backup Fuel Oil Metering for Process (GT supply and return) – Settlement
11 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
Two (2) Coriolis type based metering skid for each of GT

supply and Retune line
(Single Meter Arrangement. MDEC accuracy
party
3-1 - One Isolation Valve added 3 Lot
- Drip tray on whole skid
- One Air Eliminator for each CFM
interconnection cables, etc. and All required
accessories for Complete Metering System Skid
- One (1) Standalone Metering Panel w/ min. 17”
Touch Screen for Flow Computer
- Two (2) Flow Computer
- Flow Computer Configuration and Site Support
3-2 for commissioning 3 Lot
interconnection cables, etc.
4. GENERAL
- One (1) of common Laptop PC with connectivity
4-1 and software incl. license, accessories for Flow 1 Lot
Correctors
Field Services shall include and but not limited to,
- Start up, Commissioning
- Witness and Advisement during field
performance testing
4-2 - Training program for PURCHASER’s personnel 1 Lot
to inspect, maintain and operate the supplied
equipment
- WET Calibration as min. 5 test points with Owner,
PURCHASER at the internationally certified lap
or factory
4-3 - Spare Part for Installation, Commissioning & Start 1 Lot
Up
4-4 - Spare Part for 2-year Operation 1 Lot As option
(List and Price to be submitted)
4-5 - Cost Breakdown list of Coriolis Flow Meter w/ Air 1 Lot As option
Eliminator as loosed (DN300, DN200)
Note.
12 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
- N/A
3.2. Scope of work
3.2.1. SUPPLIER shall be include following work
- Metering equipment for settlement and operational meter with all required
accessories
- All necessary pipes and its accessories required for guaranteeing the performance
and accuracy of the metering systems for settlement system and operational meter
- Flow computers and metering panels with communication provision
- Power supply distribution to all the equipment supplied by the SUPPLIER shall be
in the SUPPLIER’s scope of supply
- Cables from the field instruments to junction boxes within skid shall be provided by
the SUPPLIER
- Anchor bolts and nuts for the mounting of the local panel and skid
- Grounding provision such as Grounding Box or Bus-bar of each equipment, skid

and panel (SUPPLIER shall furnish the earthing scheme indicating maximum earth
resistance and specific requirement of dedicated earth pit for Fuel Metering
System along with the proposal, if required.)
- System software packages (for all modules, servers, interfaces, etc.)
- Engineering support
- Documentation & Drawings
- Spare parts for consumable, start-up commissioning and site test up to COD.
- Recommended spare parts for two (2) years operation (Optional basis)
- Special tools
One (1) set required for installation, start-up and commissioning
- Factory Acceptance Test (During the FAT, Functionality shall be demonstrated.)
- Packing, shipment & Delivery to site
- Installation support supervision
- Pre-commissioning & Commissioning services
13 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
- Site Acceptance Test
- Defects & liability and After Sales Support services
- Training course to Operation/ Engineering/ Maintenance (option)
- Protection and Packing for seaworthy export
- Inland transportation to FOB port and FOB works (FOB for the overseas
manufacturer, on truck for the domestic manufacturer).
- Supervision for unpacking, erection, commissioning and operation (Per Diem Rate)
as an option
- Participation in Kick off Meeting in KOREA, Engineering reviews meetings and

Pre-inspection
3.2.2. Work to be provided by PURCHASER
The followings will be provided by the PURCHASER and excluded from the
SUPPLIER’s scope of supply.
- All interconnecting cable between the metering skid and metering system panel
- Electrical power supply feeder
- Site work such as unloading, storage, checking all parts, field installation, field
calibration and test operation.
- Foundations for the local panel, if necessary.
14 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
4. CLIMATIC CONDITION, NOISE, UTILITY CONDITIONS
Refer to Annex#1. 19CN-00GEN00-G09-0001_General Technical Requirements-General
15 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
5. DESIGN REQUIREMENT
Settlement metering systems and Operational metering system for Gas and Back-up Fuel
shall be provided by SUPPLIER in line with the latest version of the Metering and Data
Exchange Code (MDEC). The requirements of the latest revision of the Metering Data
Exchange Code (MDEC) issue have to be fulfilled for all settlement metering equipment.
MDEC is available via the Web-address: http://www.rsb.gov.ae/English/.
And it shall achieve all functions described on the Technical Specification as attached.
(Att#1. 19CN-00EZU00-J34-0001_Technical Specification for FUEL METERING
SYSTEM)
16 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
6. TEST AND INSECTION
6.1. PRE-FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (Pre-FAT)
The system equipment shall be inspected by PURCHASER and test documentation

checked for satisfactory results of quality and workmanship.
The entire pre-FAT procedure including the application software must have been
successfully exercised on the system prior to the FAT; this shall include all integration
with third party equipment supplied by others.
SUPPLIER shall assure that the latest proven software release is loaded prior to the
FAT.
6.2. FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST (FAT)
Tests to be performed by SUPPLIER shall consist of a loop-by-loop functional test of

each input, alarm and control function for proper project operation and display. The final
database shall be used for testing.
PURCHASER/OWNER shall have the right to perform acceptance test of the design on
selected critical loops after system configuration has been determined. SUPPLIER shall
provide, for approval, a proposed written procedure and configuration description for
acceptance at least four (4) weeks prior to factory test. Tests shall be performed using
simulated inputs.
SUPPLIER shall verify that the system has been operated without failure for a week
before the scheduled FAT.
PURCHASER/OWNER shall have the option to assign engineers to witness the tests.
These engineers shall also witness the subsequent debugging of hardware and
configuration problems until the test is completed satisfactorily.
SUPPLIER shall be responsible for the supply of qualified technician(s) to perform tests
and debug the system during the scheduled acceptance test. SUPPLIER is also
responsible for recording and summarizing all test results as part of the project record.
The following system tests shall be carried out as part of FAT but not be limited to:
1. All Signal Check (100%)
2. Visual and Functional Test
3. Application program testing by Simulation
4. System Failure Test (Diagnostic)
5. System Communication Tests
17 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
6. Power supply failure Test.
7. Redundancy Verification
8. Heat Soak Test Certificate
9. Bill of materials
10.If any required by F3 SCT Inspection team to follow
6.3. SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST (SAT)
The SAT plan shall be prepared by SUPPLIER to assist in developing scope and
resource requirements for all the pre-commissioning, commissioning and start-up
requirements for their systems.
The SAT shall be based on a sub-set of the FAT procedures supplemented by tests
which can be carried out only at site, for location, logistical or technical reasons.
SUPPLIER shall be responsible for maintaining detailed test records for all inspection
and testing carried out in the format agreed in the SAT procedures documentation.
The purpose of the SAT is to establish that the equipment has been shipped without
damage, has been correctly installed, and operates correctly in its final environment.
SUPPLIER shall supply with the bid unit personnel man-day rates for the site services
for the days exceeded beyond the agreed contractual period. This shall be quoted (in
$US/Day) inclusive of all travel, accommodation, messing and incidental allowance.
6.4. Commissioning and Start up
SUPPLIER shall identify any special requirements or recommendations for

manufacturer’s support during commissioning and startup of the equipment supplied.
OWNER's final acceptance of the equipment will be subject to an acceptance test once
the system and equipment has been installed and commissioned at site.
6.5. Training
SUPPLIER shall provide and arrange training services for OWNER’s representatives in
all aspects of the operation and maintenance of the equipment. The requirement of
training shall be designated at detailed design stage before order.
SUPPLIER shall submit the training course details and duration proposal for OWNER’s
review.
The minimum requirements for training are:
• Operator Training
18 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
• Engineer/Supervisor Training
• Maintenance Training
7. MAINTENANCE, SPARE PARTS & SPECIAL TOOLS
One complete set of all special tools, fixtures, and appurtenances required for
maintenance and operation shall be furnished with each system. The SUPPLIER shall
itemize the special tools that shall be furnished. If no special tools are required, the
SUPPLIER shall make a clear statement to this effect in the proposal to the
PURCHASER.
The SUPPLIER shall provide all spares necessary for discharging his responsibilities in
carrying out the work, including commissioning and during the Warranty Period.
Spare parts, special tools and consumables shall be filled up on that attached form
sheet.
All spares shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding parts installed in the
plant and shall meet the requirements of the specification of the plant. Spares shall be
warranted for a period equivalent to the warranty period for the original plant.
Spare parts shall be submitted with details contents.
• Consumable for startup and commissioning
• Spare for startup and commissioning
• Two (2) years operational spare(optional)
• Special Tools & Toolkits, if required
The SUPPLIER shall provide a priced list of spares which he recommends the F3
Project Company should hold. These recommended spares should be classified as
follows:
(a) Maintenance Spares and Consumables
These are items for which the Bidder anticipates that demands will arise in normal
operation of the plant.
(b) Overhaul Spares and Consumables
These are items for which the Bidder anticipates that demands will arise during the
programmed minor and major overhauls. The Bidder shall provide prices and estimated
quantities required for each item for both minor and major overhauls.
(c) Strategic/Breakdown Spares
19 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
These are items for which the Bidder anticipates that demands may arise through
breakdowns which could jeopardize the availability or safety of the plant. The Bidder
shall state the proposed stock holdings for such items together with the prices of each.
8. DOCUMENTATIONS
SUPPLIER shall provide a hard copy of drawings and other appropriate documents
developed on a CAD system and data stored on CD or USB for future use and
modification by OWNER as detailed out in the material requisition. Raw files shall be
provided after completion of As-built document.
The document list shall identify the requirement of design documents and drawings,
loop drawings and As-built documentation, O&M Manual, Application software manual,
System log, Training course documentation needs and their schedule for submission for
review and approval and final submission.
All documents shall be:
• In English language
• SI-units shall be used for all technical documents
• Complete, accurate and internally consistent
• Clearly indexed and detailed
• Easily updated
9. GUARANTEES
SUPPLIER shall have the final and total responsibility for design of all equipment
supplied and covered by this requisition.
All equipment supplied by SUPPLIER shall be guaranteed for a minimum of two (2)
years after the issue of the Provisional Acceptance certificate. And all detailed
guarantees requirements shall be followed Project Specification.
10. PREPARATION OF SHIPMENT
The packing shall be sufficient to seaworthy export with rough handling during transit
and exposure to severe environments such as moisture, sand, salt and heat.
Protection and packing procedure including packing drawing shall be prepared in

accordance with Project Specification. Spare parts or loose materials shall be shipped
in separate packages clearly marked.
11. SUPPLIER DOCUMENT REQUIREMENT (SDR)
20 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
The SUPPLIER shall submit all the documents and drawings in line with SUPPLIER’s
proposal as minimum and mandatory. Detailed vendor document list and schedule to be
discussed at detail design stage after bidding.
Refer to Annex#6. F3_Minimum document submission requirements.
21 / 22
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J30-
REV. NO. : B
12. ATTACHMENT
1. 19CN-00EZU00-J34-0001_Technical Specification for FUEL METERING

SYSTEM
2. Configuration for Fuel Metering System (Preliminary)
3. Datasheet for Flow Computer of Settlement Meter
4. Datasheet for Flow Meter (Ultrasonic, Corioils)
5. Technical Bid Evaluation Sheet for Fuel Metering System
6. Exception and Deviation List
7. Electrical Load List
8. Utility Consumption List
13. ANNEX
1. 19CN-00GEN00-G09-0001 General Technical Requirements - General
2. 19CN-00GEN00-M02-0001 General Technical Requirements - Mechanical
3. 19CN-00GEN00-J02-0001 General Technical Requirement - I&C
4. 19CN-00GEN00-E02-0001 General Technical Requirements - Electrical
5. 19CN-00GEN00-P04-0004 Painting Specification
6. 19CN-00GEN00-P04-0101 Piping Insulation Specification
7. F3 Minimum document submission requirements
8. Reference PID for Fuel Gas Oil System_RA
9. Fuel Gas & Oil Specification and Analysis
10. Meter Arrangement and Meter Details
11. MDEC (latest version to be checked as per website)
22 / 22
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
General
Reference: 19CN-00GEN00-G09-0001
A 30 Jan 2020 Issued for Information B.K.Kim S.W.Choi

Rev. Date Description Prepared Checked Reviewed Approved
GENERAL CONFIDENTIAL -This document contains confidential information that is only to be used for the Project and it is not intended for
any other use or any disclosure to third parties or publication without the express written permission of the Samsung C&T or another duly
authorized by Samsung C&T. Any reproduction is restricted to those portions and copies strictly necessary in order for recipients to make the
intended and permitted use and all such copies shall be returned to Samsung C&T for appropriate disposal after completion of such use.
PLANT ENGINEERING STANDARD
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS - General Document No: 19CN-00GEN00-G09-0001
List of Contents
1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 LOCATION .................................................................................................................................................. 1
1.2 PROJECT CONFIGURATION .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.3 DESIGN LIFE ............................................................................................................................................... 1
2 ENVIRONMENTAL DATA ................................................................................................. 1
2.1 SITE ELEVATION .......................................................................................................................................... 1
2.2 DESIGN CLIMATIC CONDITIONS .................................................................................................................... 1
2.3 REFERENCE SITE CONDITION FOR PERFORMANCE ....................................................................... 2
2.4 AMBIENT TEMPERATURES (DRY BULB) .......................................................................................................... 2
2.5 RELATIVE HUMIDITY .................................................................................................................................... 2
2.6 WIND ......................................................................................................................................................... 2
2.7 TIDE LEVEL ................................................................................................................................................ 3
2.8 SEISMIC DATA ........................................................................................................................................ 3
3 POLLUTION REGULATION ............................................................................................. 4
3.1 EMISSION LIMITS ................................................................................................................................... 4
3.2 WASTE WATER LIMITS .......................................................................................................................... 4
3.3 NOISE LEVEL LIMIT ...................................................................................................................................... 5
3.4 VIBRATION LIMIT .................................................................................................................................... 5
4 UTILITY SOURCES .......................................................................................................... 6
5 FUEL GAS & OIL ANALYSIS ........................................................................................... 6
5.1 FUEL GAS ............................................................................................................................................... 6
5.2 FUEL OIL ................................................................................................................................................. 7
6 WATER ANALYSIS ........................................................................................................... 7
6.1 CIRCULATING WATER (SEAWATER) ........................................................................................................ 7
6.2 CLOSED COOLING WATER ................................................................................................................... 7
6.3 DEMINERALIZED WATER ...................................................................................................................... 7
6.4 SERVICE WATER .................................................................................................................................... 8
6.5 POTABLE WATER ................................................................................................................................... 8
7 CODES AND STANDARDS ............................................................................................. 9
8 HVAC DESIGN CONDITION .......................................................................................... 11
9 BANNED MATERIALS ................................................................................................... 11
Rev. 0 JUN 4, 2019 Page ii of ii

©Copyright 2019, Samsung C&T. All rights reserved
1 General
1.1 Location
The F3 Plant shall be designed for a power generation of Fujairah in UAE which is huge
complex of power and water plant. The plant is located approximately 300 km north-east
of the city of Abu Dhabi in the Emirate of Fujairah.
1.2 Project configuration

The plant facility will be combined cycle configuration. The Plant shall be designed for dual
fuel firing, whereby natural gas (“Gas”) is assumed to be the primary fuel and diesel oil
the secondary fuel (“Back-up Fuel”). Gas shall be transported to the site via a new Gas
pipeline from the existing Fujairah Receiving Facility.
1.3 Design life

The design life of the facility shall in all circumstances be at least equal to 25 years
2 Environmental data
Supplier shall consider following site condition for equipment design
2.1 Site elevation

Data Unit Value
Ground level m + 5.75 m ACD
2.2 Design climatic conditions

Data Unit Value
Maximum ambient temperature in the shade, to be taken as air inlet degC 50
temperature for air-conditioning and ventilation
Minimum wet bulb temperature at 52°C degC 31
Minimum ambient temperature degC 1

Ambient temperature for outdoor installations degC 55
(in the shade)
Design temperature of equipment (indoor) degC 50
Maximum temperature of metal in the sun degC 85
Minimum barometric pressure mbar 970
Maximum barometric pressure mbar 1,030
Maximum steady wind velocity Km/h 160
Average annual rainfall Mm 135
Rev. A JAN 30, 2020 Page 1 of 11

Maximum recorded rainfall in one day mm 100
Dust in air concentration mg/m3 1.0 ~ 20
Dust concentration in the air under sandstorm condition g/m3 Approx. 100
Maximum ambient humidity % 100
Annual mean humidity % 61
2.3 REFERENCE SITE CONDITION FOR PERFORMANCE

Supplier shall consider following reference site condition for equipment performance;
Data Unit Value

Ambient air temperature degC 46
Relative humidity % 40
Ambient air pressure mbar 1013
Cooling water temperature (@ Consumer inlet) degC 33
Cooling Water Temperature rise K 5
Transmission System frequency Hz 50
2.4 Ambient temperatures (dry bulb)

Data Unit Value
Maximum recorded (July) degC 48.7
Mean daily maximum (July) over 16 years degC 44.0
Annual Mean over 16 years degC 28.2
Mean daily minimum (January) over 16 years degC 15.3
Minimum recorded degC 10.8
2.5 Relative humidity

Data Unit Value
Maximum (recorded at 40 degC) % 100
Annual average % 61
2.6 Wind
Data Unit Value
Prevailing wind direction - From N-W
Extreme wind speed m/s 45

Design wind speed (3 second gusts) m/s 45 (160 km/h)
2.7 Tide level

Data Unit Value
Ground Level m + 5.75 m ACD
Highest Astronomical Tide (HAT) m + 3.20 m ACD
Mean Highest High Water (MHHW) m + 2.50 m ACD
Meal Sea Level m + 1.74 m ACD
Mean Lowest Low Water (MLLW) m + 0.70 m ACD
Lowest Astronomical Tide (LAT) m - 0.20 m ACD
2.8 SEISMIC DATA

Data Unit Value
Design Code - ADIBC[1]
ASCE 7-16[2]
Occupancy Category [1] - IV
Ss (0.2 sec. SA) [1] g 0.86

S1 (1.0 sec. SA) [1] g 0.26
TL(Transition Period) [1] sec 8

Site Class - D
Importance Factor Ie [2] - 1.5
 ADIBC: Abu Dhabi International Building Code 2013, edition

3 POLLUTION REGULATION
3.1 EMISSION LIMITS
Simple Cycle Combined Cycle
Parameter Unit
NG3) FO NG3) FO
NOx, mg/Nm3 50 1201) 20 1201)

2) 2) 2) 2)
SO2 mg/Nm3
CO Mg/Nm3 50 50 50 50
Smoke number Bacharach 2 2 2 2
Ammonia Slip mg/Nm3 - - 5 -
Reference O2 Vol,% 15 15 15 15
Notes:
1) NOX emissions for Back-up Fuel (FO) are based on maximum fuel bound nitrogen
content of 0.015 % by weight.
2) According to sulphur content in the fuel.
3) Emission guarantees are given for a daily average and for steady state operation and
normal loading and deloading transients. Emissions guarantees will not apply to grid code
compliance or frequency following transients.
3.2 WASTE WATER LIMITS
Parameter Unit Value
pH - 6.5 ~ 8.5
TDS (Total Dissolved Solid) above receiving water at the edge of < 5%
the mixing zone (100 m from point of discharge point)
Oil and grease mg/l 10
Free available chlorine or total residual chlorine1) mg/l 0.15
Chromium – total (Cr) mg/l 0.5
Copper – total (Cu) mg/l 0.5
Iron – total (Fe) mg/l 1.0
Zinc (Zn) mg/l 0.5
Lead (Pb) mg/l 0.1
Cadmium (Cd) mg/l 0.1
Mercury (Hg) mg/l 0.001
Arsenic (As) mg/l 0.05
Phosphate (total as P) mg/l 2.0
Ammoniacal nitrogen mg/l 0.5

Bio-chemical oxygen demand (BOD) mg/l 30

COD mg/l 100
Cyanide (CN) mg/l 0.1
Manganese (Mn) mg/l 1.0
Nickel (Ni) mg/l 0.5
Phenols mg/l 0.1
Selenium (Se) mg/l 0.05
Silver (Ag) mg/l 0.1
Sulphide mg/l 0.2
Suspended solids mg/l 30
Vanadium mg/l 1.0
Notes:
1) The limit refers to continuous chlorination. In case of shock chlorination (according to

WB limit), the maximum value is 2 mg/l for up to 2 hours, not to be repeated more
frequently than once in 24 hours, within a 24 hours average of 0.2 mg/l.
3.3 Noise level limit

Noise level limit during normal operation
The sound levels adopted for equipment that creates a significantly high noise level are
summarized in Table below
Data Levels Limits dB(A) Remark
At 1 meter outside the F3 Plant,

< 60
when all equipment is in operation
Equipment noise
At 1 meter distance of open air
< 85
installations or turbine buildings:
at 1.5 meters above operating
Safety valve < 115
levels or personnel platforms
at 1.5 meters above operating
Gas, Air and steam vent < 105
levels or personnel platforms
Within the Central Control Room (CCR): < 50 -
Within other machine rooms and workshops < 85 -
Exclusion to the near field guarantee
- Steam turbine bypass operation
- Start-up and shutdown of the plant
- Areas within acoustic enclosure
- Equipment failures and unit trip
3.4 VIBRATION LIMIT

The site utilities shall follow vibration requirement refer to ISO 7919 and ISO 10816, Zone

B. The vibration level of all equipment, measured on the rotating parts at each main
bearing, shall not exceed the upper limit of the zone “A” as defined in ISO 7919 at steady
conditions; and shall not exceed the upper limit of zone ”B” as defined in ISO 7919 for
transient operation at rated speed.
4 UTILITY SOURCES
The following site utilities will be available for equipment service:
Utility Pressure (barg) Temperature (degC) Remark
Auxiliary Steam 7 220

Closed cooling water 6~8 38
Demineralized water 4~7 Max 38
Service water 3~5 Max 38
Portable water 3~5 Max 38
Instrument air 6.0 ~ 8.8 Max 55 Dry, Oil free
Service air 6.0 ~ 8.8 Max 55
5 FUEL GAS & OIL ANALYSIS
5.1 FUEL GAS

The gas turbine and related auxiliary systems shall be designed to fire natural gas within
the following range.
Component Unit Range

C1 Mole% 85-95
C2 Mole% 1-10
C3 Mole% 0-2
I-C4 Mole% 0-0.5
N-C4 Mole% 0-0.5
I-C5 Mole% 0-0.5
N-C5 Mole% 0-0.5
C6+ Mole% 0-0.5
CO2 Mole% 0-5
N2 Mole% 0-5
H2S (normal / max.) ppm 20-150 / 250
Relative density - 0.55-0.65
Gross heating value (according ISO 6976) BTU/SCF 950-1150
Low heating value BTU/SCF 855-1035

Hydrocarbon dewpoint °C < -10

Temperature °C >5
Pressure (min. /max.) bar(g) 25 / 59
Bidder shall consider that an alternative source of Gas supply exists, with the specification
given in the attachment #1 ‘Gas Specification’.
5.2 FUEL OIL

Please find the attachment #2 ‘Fuel Oil Specification and Analysis’.
6 WATER ANALYSIS
6.1 CIRCULATING WATER (Seawater)
Parameter Unit Values
pH - 7.0 ~ 8.0
Salinity ppt 40.4
Temperature – Max deg C 35
Temperature – Min deg C 18

TDS (Total Dissolved Solid) mg/L 26000 – 40600
6.2 CLOSED COOLING WATER

Conductivity μS/cm < 0.1
Silica mg/l < 0.01
Sodium (Na) mg/l < 0.005
Dissolved organic carbon (DOC) mg/l < 0.200
6.3 DEMINERALIZED WATER

Specific conductivity μS/cm < 0.1
Silica as SIO2 ppb < 10
Sodium as Na ppb <5
Iron as Fe ppb < 20
Copper as Cu ppb <2
TOC ppb < 100

6.4 SERVICE WATER

pH 7.0 – 8.5
Conductivity μS/cm <750
Chlorides (as Cl) ppm < 50
Calcium hardness (as CaCO3) ppm 50 ~ 60
Total Alkalinity (as CaCO3) ppm 50 ~ 60
Silica (as SiO2) ppm < 16
Iron (as Fe) ppm < 0.2
Oil and grease ppm < 2.0
Suspended solids ppm <5
6.5 POTABLE WATER

Quality parameter Unit Values
pH 6.5 – 8.5
Fluoride (as F) mg/l < 1.5
Chlorides (as Cl) mg/l < 250
Residual chlorine mg/l <5
Total hardness (as CaCO3) mg/l 200 ~ 500
Copper (as Cu) mg/l <2
Iron (as Fe) mg/l 1~3
Oil and grease mg/l N/A
Total dissolved solids mg/l < 1000
Suspended particulate matters mg/l N/A

7 CODES AND STANDARDS

The Supplier shall ensure that the engineering, design, construction, testing, etc. of all
power plant components, including all auxiliary facilities and systems as well all other
common facilities (e.g. seawater intake and outfall, fuel facilities, desalination units for
own water production etc.), shall follow internationally recognized standards and codes in
their latest edition and as defined in this section.
The latest editions of the standards, codes, regulations, recommendations and directives
issued by the following organizations shall apply for the design, construction, testing,
commissioning, operation and maintenance of the project.
· International standards
Abbreviation Title
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
ISO International Standards Organization
· National standards
Abbreviation Title
ANSI American National Standards institute
EN European standards
BSI British standards institution
DIN Deutsches Institut fuer Normung
JAPS Japanese Standard Organisation
· Regulations, recommendations, directives
Abbreviation Title
American Association of State Highway and transportation
AASHTO
Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufactures Association
AFNOR Association Francaise de Normalisation
AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association
AIJ Architectural Institute of Japan
AISC American Institute and Steel Engineers
AISE Association of Iron and Steel Engineers
AISI American Institute and Steel Institute
AMCA American Moving and Conditioning Association
APHA American Public Health Association
API American Petroleum Institute

American Society of Civil Engineers

ASCE
ASE Society of Automotive Engineers

ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWG American Wire Gauge
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
CI Chlorine Institute
CIRIA Construction Industry Research and Information Association
CMAA Crane Manufacturers Association of America
DEMA Diesel Engine Manufacturers Association
HEI Heat Exchanger Institute
HIS Hydraulic Institute Standards
IBC 2012 International Building Code
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IES Illuminating Engineers Society
IPCEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
ISA Instrument Society of America
JASS Japanese Architectural Standard Specification
JEC Japanese Electrotechnical Institute
JEMA Japanese Electrical Manufacturers Association
JIS Japanese Industrial Standards
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NEC National Electrical Code (USA)
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association (USA)
NESC National Electrical Safety Code
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NSCB National Structural Code for Building
OSHA Occupation Safety and Health Administration
PCA Portland Cement Association
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
Sheet Metal and Air-Conditioning Contractors’ National
SMACNA
Association, Inc.
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council
TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association
IBC International Building Code
UL Underwriters Laboratory
UPC Uniform Plumbing Code
VDE Vrand Deutsches Electrotechniker
VDI Verband Deutscher Ingenieure (Association of German Engineers )
Rev. A JAN 30, 2020 Page 10 of 11

Technische Vereinigung der Grosskraftwerksbetreiber E.V.

VGB
(Society of big power plants operator)
Deviation from this Section 7 (Codes and Standards) and the use of any standards and
codes which are not issued by the organization listed above is principally not acceptable
to Purchaser.
8 HVAC design condition

Max. Indoor Temperature Relative Humidity
Area
(°C) (%)
Control & Electronic, Office Area 23±2 50±10
Electrical Area 27±2 N/A
Battery Rooms 25 50±10
Ventilation Area Amb.+5 N/A
9 Banned materials
No materials or products containing the following materials shall be utilized in the design
▪ Asbestos
▪ PCBs
▪ Hexavalent chromium
▪ Mercury
▪ Lead (except in electrical equipment)
▪ Ceramic fiber insulation
▪ Hydrazine
▪ HCFC refrigerants
Rev. A JAN 30, 2020 Page 11 of 11

Attachment #1
Annex IIA-2.1 Gas Specification
Attachment #2
FOR APPROVAL
A Issued for Approval 29.JAN.20 B.K.KIM H.J.YOUN W.J.CHOI S.W.CHOI
Rev Description Date Prepd Chkd Apprd Apprd

Owner:
Owner’s Engineer:
Project:
Contractor:
GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT - MECHANICAL

Drawing/Document No.
19CN-00GEN00-M02-001
FUJAIRAH3
INDEPENDENT POWER PLANT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................. 2
1.1 PURPOSE ............................................................................................................................... 2
2 GENERAL ........................................................................................................... 2
2.1 DESIGN, STANDARDS AND CODES ..................................................................................... 2
2.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS ............................................................... 2
2.3 VIBRATION AND BALANCE.................................................................................................... 3
3 MAIN COMBINED CYCLE SYSTEMS ................................................................ 4
4 MECHANICAL PART AND SYSTEMS ............................................................... 4
4.1 GAS TURBINE (GT) GENERATOR ISLAND ........................................................................... 4
4.2 HEAT RECOVERY STEAM GENERATORS (HRSGS) ............................................................ 4
4.3 STEAM TURBINE (ST) GENERATOR ISLAND ....................................................................... 5
4.4 STEAM SYSTEMS .................................................................................................................. 7
4.5 FEED WATER SYSTEMS ........................................................................................................ 8
4.6 CONDENSATE SYSTEMS ...................................................................................................... 8
4.7 FUEL SYSTEMS ...................................................................................................................... 8
4.8 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS ............................................................................................ 10
4.9 SEAWATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS .......................................................................................... 10
4.10 CLOSED COOLING WATER SYSTEM .............................................................................. 12
4.11 ELECTRO CHLORINATION SYSTEM ............................................................................... 12
4.12 WATER PLANTS AND SYSTEMS ..................................................................................... 13
4.13 WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM ........................................................................... 16
4.14 CHEMICAL DOSING SYSTEM .......................................................................................... 17
4.15 CRANES AND HOISTS...................................................................................................... 18
5 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT............................................................................. 18
5.1 PUMPS .................................................................................................................................. 18
5.2 STORAGE TANK ................................................................................................................... 22
5.3 PRESSURE VESSEL ............................................................................................................ 24
5.4 HEAT EXCHANGER .............................................................................................................. 26
6 PIPING ............................................................................................................... 27
6.1 DEFINITION........................................................................................................................... 27
6.2 GENERAL .............................................................................................................................. 27
6.3 MATERIALS ........................................................................................................................... 29
6.4 PIPING SYSTEM VELOCITY ................................................................................................ 29
6.5 INSULATION.......................................................................................................................... 30
6.6 PAINTING .............................................................................................................................. 30
6.7 PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS ................................................................................................. 31
6.8 TRENCHES FOR PIPES AND OTHER SERVICES .............................................................. 31
6.9 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING WORK INCLUDED .................................................................... 32
6.10 FITTINGS ........................................................................................................................... 32
6.11 VALVES .............................................................................................................................. 33
Doc. Title : General Technical Requirement - Mechanical Rev. : A 29 Dec ‘19

Doc. No : 19CN-00GEN00-M02-001 Page 1 of 34
FUJAIRAH3
1 INTRODUCTION
1.1 PURPOSE
The purpose of this document is to describe the required general mechanical
characteristics, design philosophy and application guide of the mechanical
equipment for the FUJAIRAH F3 INDEPENDENT POWER PLANT (hereinafter
referred to as “F3 Plant”) in UAE.
2 GENERAL
The general mechanical requirements are valid for all power plant equipment,
except any additional and/or special requirements mentioned in the particular
technical sections specific to the individual requirement/system/works.
2.1 DESIGN, STANDARDS AND CODES

General Compliance with International Standards and Codes
The Supplier/Erector shall fully comply with the applicable Local standards for the
equipment/system under his scope. Provided there is no conflict with the
standards of the country of installation, and unless otherwise stated, all parts of
the equipment/system shall comply with the relevant international standards and
design codes. Where suitable international standards do not exist, internationally
accepted national standards shall apply.
Although the Works shall generally comply with international standards, any
instruction in this specification that a particular aspect of the Works shall comply
with a named code or standard shall take precedence, and that particular aspect
of the Works shall comply with the named code or standard.
All codes and standards referred shall be the latest version on the date of offer
made by the Supplier/Erector unless otherwise indicated.
Notwithstanding the recommendations and stipulations of the codes and

standards mentioned above, the requirement of this specification shall be deemed
minimum and shall be complied with fully.
Nothing in this specification shall be construed to relieve the Supplier/Erector of

his responsibilities as above.
2.2 DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

2.2.1 GENERAL
All the equipment/system/works under this contract shall be designed to operate

safely, reliably and efficiently in accordance with the Design and Operating
Requirements of the Contract.
In the event that the Supplier detects, when preparing designs to national or

FUJAIRAH3
international standards or codes for boilers, pipework, electrical equipment or civil

works, that the specification is in conflict with the standard or code, he shall
immediately contact the Contractor to draw attention to the anomaly and unless
instructed otherwise by the Contractor as stated elsewhere in the tender and then
proceed with the works on the basis of the requirements of the national or
international standard or code.
Particular attention must be paid to internal and external access in order to

facilitate inspection, cleaning and maintenance. The works shall be arranged such
that each major item plant, or group of minor plant items, can be safely isolated
from all hazards for maintenance, if necessary, whilst the remainder of the plant
remains in service.
The design, dimensions and materials of all parts shall be such that they will not
suffer damage as a result of stresses under the most severe service conditions.
The materials used in the construction of the F3 Plant shall be of the highest quality
and selected particularly to meet the duties required of them. The plant shall be
designed and constructed to minimize corrosion. Workmanship and general finish
shall be of the highest class throughout.
All machinery, apparatus, connections, cabling and other works forming part of the
contract shall be designed and arranged to minimize the risk of fire and damage
which may be caused in the event of fire.
The equipment shall also be designed to prevent ingress of all vermin, accidental
contact with live parts and minimize the ingress of dust and dirt.
Access platforms and galleries shall be provided for all equipment that requires
frequent operation, checks or maintenance (manholes, valves, instruments,
pumps). All valves and instruments shall be accessible from fixed installed
platforms, wherever possible. Accessible height for manual valve is recommended
as 1200mm~1400mm, and shall not exceed 1800mm. In case accessible height
exceeds 1800mm, separate platform shall be provided. Provision of mobile
facilities will be subjected to approval by Contractor and it is accepted only in
exceptional conditions.
2.3 VIBRATION AND BALANCE

The equipment/system shall be designed and constructed to operate without
vibration insofar as the nature of the equipment/system will permit. Where vibration
is expected, it shall be reduced to the minimum which can be achieved by good
design, and careful balancing in the case of rotating machinery.
Unless otherwise stated or agreed by the Contractor/Owner/Engineer each

rotating machine has to comply with the requirements for designation as "good"
stipulated by relevant code and standard (e.g. ISO, API and etc.)

FUJAIRAH3
If the vibration level is higher than stipulated as "satisfactory", the Contractor has
the right to reject the corresponding equipment.
3 MAIN COMBINED CYCLE SYSTEMS

The F3 Plant will include two (2) differently configured blocks. One (Block1) is
comprised of two (2) gas turbines (GTs), two (2) heat recovery steam generators
(HRSGs) and one steam turbine generator (2x2x1 arrangement). The other block
(block2) is comprised of one (1) gas turbine (GT), one (1) heat recovery steam
generator (HRSG) and one steam turbine generator (1x1x1 arrangement). The
equipment selected for these units include three (3) gas turbine generators, three
(3) horizontal HRSGs (one per GT), as well as two (2) steam turbine generators in
a combined cycle arrangement.
4 MECHANICAL PART AND SYSTEMS

4.1 GAS TURBINE (GT) GENERATOR ISLAND
The F3 Plant will include three (3) gas turbines. The GTs will consist of the dual
fuel (natural gas and diesel oil) combustor and will be directly coupled to a 50Hz
generator. The dual fuel combustor has provisions for Dry low-NOX combustors.
Water injection for NOx emissions control is made when operating on liquid fuel
(ex. oil burning) shall be supplied. The gas turbine packages of multiple shaft units
may be installed outdoors.
All compartments of the gas turbine generator unit enclosures shall be ventilated.
Ventilation shall be by means of 3 x 50% fans and automatic switch-over in case
of failure of one fan.
Gas detectors shall be installed in the enclosure exhaust duct to trip the gas
turbine. An alarm shall be provided to warn the operator of failure of the enclosure
ventilation system.
Tanks (for the washing detergents, washing water, and washing water collection),
pipe work and nozzles shall be manufactured from stainless steel.
The inlet air filters of the gas turbines shall be suitable for the salty and humid
operating environment; pulse-clean type filters shall be foreseen. The intake air
filter housing shall be made of structural steel and provided on the inside with a
coating of satisfactory properties. Its internals shall be of stainless steel or glass
fiber reinforced plastic.
4.2 HEAT RECOVERY STEAM GENERATORS (HRSGs)

The F3 Plant will include three (3) horizontal HRSGs. The HRSGs have three
pressure sections (LP, IP and HP). Boiler protection and burner management shall
be in accordance with NFPA 85 or EN 12952-8. Each HRSG shall be equipped
with its own exhaust gas stack. Supplementary firing system is applied only for

FUJAIRAH3
Block2 (1 on 1).
Seamless tubes shall be used for heat transfer surfaces and headers. The
components shall have stub ends with sufficient length to ensure that the welding
on tubes will not affect the material of drums, headers, or other portions of the
steam generators.
Thermo-sleeves / thermos-wells shall be used to allow thermal expansion of tubes

and pipes and to prevent thermal shocks of headers and drums.
Pressure parts shall have a design life of at least 200,000 operating hours,
considering projected load transitions, start-ups and shut downs. Natural
circulation-type steam generators are preferred because of the high reliability
requirements of the plant. All heating surfaces shall be fully drainable. Tubes shall
have suitable corrosion allowance. The heating surfaces shall be manufactured
from finned or plain tubes.
Restriction orifices for equalizing flow distribution over parallel tubes are not
allowed for any part of the HRSG.
Platforms with handrails, ladders and stairs shall be provided as required for safe
access for operation and maintenance.
Wet cleaning of the tube banks shall be possible, when the gas turbine and the
HRSG are out of operation.
The design measures shall include, if necessary, provision for the installation of
damping equipment after the initial start-up of the HRSG. Baffles shall preferably
be installed in line with the direction of gas flow.
The sling tube (outer tube) and exhaust gas tube (inner tube) of the stacks shall
be provided with sufficient protection against corrosion.
The stack shall be provided with all necessary steel structures, stairways, ladders,
walkways and platforms (at least one for online emission measuring devices and
one at the top) and with all necessary emission measuring devices,
access/observation doors, drains, grounding and lightning installations and aircraft
warning equipment.
4.3 STEAM TURBINE (ST) GENERATOR ISLAND

4.3.1 STEAM TURBINE
Total of two (2) steam turbines (STs) will be provided, one for each block. STs will
be directly coupled to a 50Hz generator and installed outdoors.
The turbine generator unit which is installed in outdoor is tandem-compound

double-exhaust, condensing reheat turbine, which consists of a combined High
Pressure-Intermediate pressure (HIP) turbine and two (for Block 1) / one (for Block
2) double flows Low Pressure (LP) turbine.

FUJAIRAH3
The STs shall be equipped with full flow bypass steam reducing stations. The
rotors shall be statically and dynamically balanced in the factory so that the
maximum effective vibration magnitudes do not exceed the recommended values
under steady running conditions at all loads according to ISO 20816, Zone A. The
design shall provide also for in-situ site balancing of rotors to be carried out if
necessary. The maximum vibration velocities at the bearings shall not exceed the
requirements of ISO 20816 for Zone A.
Each ST shall be provided with the necessary turning gear and oil system(s) such
as lubricating oil system, control oil system, jacking oil system as far as applicable
for the manufacturer’s standard product. The lubricating oil system shall be
common for the steam turbine and the generator. All oil pipes installed downstream
of the oil filters shall be made of stainless steel.
A mobile centrifugal-type oil purification and clarification plant shall be provided

with the possibility of both operation types, oil purification i.e. removing only solid
particles as well as solid particle removal together with water separation.
Each emergency stop valve shall be provided with facilities to prove the movement
with the turbine unit operating and without the necessity of unloading the turbine
(on-load testing of the functioning of each stop valve).
In order to protect the ST from corrosion during standstill periods, one mobile
package type dehumidification unit shall be provided. The drying unit shall have
adequate performance to reduce the moisture content of the ST hall suction air by
about 30 - 40%. Automatic control by a hydrostat shall be provided.
4.3.2 CONDENSING PLANT
Each ST is to be provided with a condenser to condensate the exhaust steam

using sea water as cooling medium.
Each ST shall be capable of operating with one condenser half and one cooling
water pump shut down (i.e. only one 50% cooling water pump in operation) for an
unlimited period of time. With one condenser half and one cooling water pump,
the condenser shall be capable to condensate at least about 60% of the reference
LP exhaust steam, without triggering low vacuum unloading or alarm.
The condenser shall be of the surface type, built up of two halves each having its
individual sea water supply and shut-off flaps.
Inert gases shall be evacuated by the air extraction system. The system for air
removal from the steam side of the condenser may consist of water ring vacuum
pump system for holding operation (2x100% units for any system). For hogging
prior to start-up of the ST, two (2) water ring vacuum pump will be operated in
parallel.
For air removal from the water side of the condenser, in order to stabilize the

FUJAIRAH3
siphon effect, two (2) 100% water ring vacuum pump units shall be provided for
each condenser.
The condenser tubes shall be made of titanium and tube plate of CuNi 90/10.
Water boxes shall be made out of carbon steel with hard rubber line or carbon
steel gladded with CuNi.
An on-load ball cleaning system with sponge rubber balls shall be provided for
each condenser. The ball cleaning system shall overcome fouling and scaling of
tubes. The system shall be provided for each condenser half -, each complete with
one (1) strainer sections for ball recovery, one (1) ball recirculation pump, one (1)
ball collectors with electric actuator, ball injection nozzles equipped with isolating
valves and ball container.
4.4 STEAM SYSTEMS

The main function of the steam system is to transport steam produced in the
HRSG to the steam turbine. The steam system consists of high pressure steam,
intermediate pressure steam and low pressure steam.
High pressure steam is piped from HRSG high pressure superheater outlet to the
main steam stop and control valve of the steam turbine. Stream is equipped with
flow, pressure and temperature measuring devices along with safety relief valves,
automatic drains, manual free blow valves and a manual shut-off valve.
A high pressure steam bypass line equipped with a steam conditioning valve for
reducing the pressure and temperature of the steam allows steam to be entered
to cold reheat line during startup and shutdown.
An intermediate pressure steam bypass line is equipped on hot reheat and after
the temperature and pressure reducing, dumped to Condenser.
A low pressure steam bypass line equipped with a pressure control valve for
reducing the pressure of the steam allows steam to be dumped to the condenser
during startup and shutdown.
The exhaust of the HP steam turbine is led to HRSG reheater then transferred to
IP steam turbine admission. Then the LP steam mixes with IP turbine exhaust
steam and flows to the LP Turbine. Exhausts from the LP turbine into the surface
condenser where it condenses.
Auxiliary steam will be available from other running unit.
In case of first unit start up, the auxiliary steam system receives superheated
steam either from the cold reheat steam header via Pressure Reducing and
Desuperheating Station (PRDS), depending on the operation mode of the plant.
No auxiliary steam boiler will be provided.

FUJAIRAH3
4.5 FEED WATER SYSTEMS

The feedwater system delivers feedwater from the LP Drum through the high
pressure and intermediate pressure economizers to their respective drum and the
HRSG HP/IP superheater attemperation, and HP bypass attemperators at the
appropriate flow and pressure conditions
The feedwater system also provides water for Fuel gas performance heater and
Turbine cooling air cooler for GT performance.
Each block shall be equipped with a separate feedwater system. Interconnection

between the feedwater systems of each block is not required.
Two(2) x 100% capacity pumps for one (1) HRSG in Block 1,2 will be provided
respectively. Horizontal, multi-stage, ring section, inter-stage bleed feedwater
pumps are provided. The feedwater pumps shall be constructed in chromium steel
containing at least 13%chromium. The pumps shall be equipped with mechanical
shaft seals. Seal faces shall provide at least 8,000 running hours before
replacement becomes necessary. The minimum-flow valves shall be automatically
actuated. The minimum flow lines and shall run individually to the Condenser. For
each block all pumps shall be connected to one header system.
4.6 The feedwater pumps will receive the suction water from LP Drum and
then pump to HP/IP section.CONDENSATE SYSTEMS
The condensate system delivers condensate from the condenser hotwell to the
HRSG. Condensate pumps supply condensate water through condensate
preheater of the HRSG to low pressure drum.
The condenser will be provided with 3 x 50% for Block1 and 2 x 100% for Block2
capacity condensate extraction pumps. The pumps will be of the vertical can type.
The bearings will be self-cooled by condensate. These pumps will supply
condensate to the LP drum via a condensate preheater, Aux steam let down
station, IP/LP bypass control station and other required condensate usages.
The condensed gland steam and the minimum flow of the condensate pumps will
be led to the condenser.
4.7 FUEL SYSTEMS

4.7.1 GENERAL
The F3 plant shall be designed to fire natural gas (“Gas”) as the main fuel and fuel
oil as Back-up Fuel.
The entire firing equipment of the gas turbines of the proposed F3 Plant shall be
designed for 100% dual-fuel capability, without any duration limitations for Gas or
Back-up Fuel firing.

FUJAIRAH3
The capability of the GTs shall be provided for automatic on-load switch-over from
Gas to Back-up Fuel following manual initiation and manual change over from
Back-up Fuel to Gas. During change over the load transient shall be minimized.
Fuel gas will be supplied to F3 Plant from existing Fujairah Receiving Facility (FRF)
operated by DEL. A new pipeline from the DEL facility shall be routed along the
potable water tanks of F2 up to the F3 receiving station.
Back-up Fuel is transferred from F2 Back-up Fuel Storage tank farm (by pumps)
or on F1 Back-up Fuel pipeline.
4.7.2 FUEL GAS SUPPLY SYSTEM
The Gas system shall provide redundancy configuration of major components so

that in case of outage of one (1) component of the Gas system the plant can be
operated at full load with the remaining Gas supply facilities.
For the design and operation of the fuel Gas system, the following main constraints
shall be considered:
▪ The fuel Gas system shall comply with the applicable standards like EN and
API, as far as applicable.
▪ All the equipment shall be fitted with isolating valves to permit repair and
maintenance without interrupting the Gas supply.
▪ All isolating valves shall be ball type with double block and bleed function.
▪ Emergency shut-down (ESD) valves shall be used down-stream the Gas

delivery point (IP-2) to allow the entire Gas supply to the plant to be isolated in
the event of an emergency.
▪ ESD valves shall be “fire-safe” in accordance with API-607 or BS-5146 and of

anti-static design in accordance with BS-5351.
▪ The fuel gas system shall be designed to suit the fuel change-over requirements.
▪ Sufficient permanent installed valve connections and vents shall be provided to

permit the gas system to be purged with inert gas.
▪ All butt welds shall be subject to 100% radiography test and all other welds shall
be subject to 100% non-destructive testing.
▪ The maximum flow velocity for piping and valve dimensioning shall not be higher
than 25 m/s.
▪ Buried gas pipes shall be adequately protected and insulated against the
aggressive environment in which they are found.
▪ Fuel gas pipework for downstream of each performance heater unit shall be of
welded stainless-steel construction.

FUJAIRAH3
4.7.3 BACKUP FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM
Back-up Fuel shall be provided from the F2 Back-up Fuel Storage Facility or F1
Back-up fuel facility via the F3 Back-up Fuel Transfer Facility being part of the F3
Plant into the F3 Site.
The storage capacity of the F3 intermediate Back-up Fuel tank located at the F3
Site shall be sufficient to allow a continuous operation of the F3 Plant at full power
generation at RSC for 12 hours. The following pumps shall be connected to the
intermediate Back-up Fuel tank:
▪ 2 x 100% forwarding pumps for the gas turbines including inlet filters
▪ 2 x 100 % forwarding pumps including inlet filters for emergency diesel

generators, black start facility and firefighting pumps
A slope oil tank shall be provided to enable draining of all piping network.
4.8 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEMS

Compressed air systems for instrument air and for service air shall be provided
The F3 plant common air compressor package is skid mounted and consists of:
▪ Oil free screw type air compressors (Three (3) x 50%)
▪ Dual tower heatless desiccant dryers (Two (2) x 100%)
▪ Pre-filters / After-filters (Two (2) x 100%)
▪ Air receivers (Instrument air receiver, Service air receiver)
4.9 SEAWATER SUPPLY SYSTEMS

The sea water shall be filtered by bar screens and travelling band screens.
The screening trains shall be designed so that after an outage of one (1) train the
maximum sea water demand of the entire F3 Plant can be met even at most
unfavorable conditions regarding sea water level, pollution, clogging of screening
plants, position of operating seawater supply pumps and position of screening train
out of service etc.
The function of the circulating water system is to transfer cooling seawater from
the seawater intake facility to steam surface condensers and seal water heat
exchanger of vacuum pumps for each group and return it back into the sea through
the seal pit.
Circulating water system includes below major components;
▪ Four (4) x 25% Circulating Water Pumps for Block 1
▪ Two (2) x 50% Circulating Water Pumps for Block 2
▪ Piping, valves instruments and etc.

FUJAIRAH3
The purpose of the auxiliary cooling water system is to transfer cooling seawater
from the seawater intake facility to closed cooling water heat exchangers for each
block and return it back into the sea through circulating water discharge pipeline.
Auxiliary cooling water system includes below major components;
▪ Two (2) x 100% auxiliary cooling water pumps for each block
▪ Piping, valves, instruments and etc.
Components of the plant which are in contact with seawater or are subject to
erosion or high rates of wear including heat transfer surfaces shall be made of
proven grades of highly corrosion/erosion resistant materials. Austenitic cast iron
and Ni-Resist shall not be used for pump casings for seawater application.
As far as required, equipment is to be provided with cathodic corrosion protection

of the impressed current type.
[Minimum requirements for material quality]
Equipment or component Material Standard
Stop logs and screens
Screen Austenitic SS316L UNS S31603
Screen hoods GRP
Stop logs Carbon steel painted
Balancing valves Austenitic SS317L UNS S31703
Guide frame AISI SS316L UNS S31603
Pumps for seawater service
Casing (including bell Duplex steel type CD-4MCu or UNS J93370

mouth, bowl diffuser, CD-4MCuN or DIN material No.
UNS J93372
column riser, discharge 1.4462 or equivalent
etc.) UNS S31803
UNS S32205
UNS S32250
Impeller Duplex steel type CD-4MCu or UNS J93370

CD-4MCuN
UNS J93372
Shaft Duplex stainless steel grade UNS S32550

S32550 or equivalent
Wear rings and sleeves Monel K 500 or equivalent UNS N05500
Lines, headers and valves

FUJAIRAH3
Deep Seawater lines GRP
Headers GRP (aboveground /

underground)
Check & shut-off butterfly AISI SS 316L plus cathodic UNS S31603
valves, burried protection or nickel aluminum
UNS C95800
bronze for body and disc and
alloy 400 for the shaft or carbon UNS N04400
steel or ductile iron plus rubber
lined
Check & shut-off valves Carbon steel rubber lined
4.10 CLOSED COOLING WATER SYSTEM

The closed cooling water system is a closed-loop system. Closed cooling water
pumps takes suction from the CCW return header and pumps the water through
the CCW heat exchangers. Closed cooling water heat exchangers are provided
as plate heat exchanger.
The water from the heat exchangers is sent to the following coolers:
▪ Lube oil system for gas turbine and steam turbine
▪ Generator H2 to water cooler
▪ Steam turbine hydraulic unit cooler
▪ HRSG boiler feed pump coolers
▪ Condensate preheater recirculation pumps coolers
▪ Steam/water sampling coolers
▪ Lube oil system for fuel gas compressor
▪ Etc.,
Manual throttling valves are provided on the outlet of each component to balance
system flows and pressures and temperature.
Head tank provide to adequate pressure to closed cooling water pump suction.
And chemical dosing is considered to avoid corrosion.
4.11 ELECTRO CHLORINATION SYSTEM

The purpose of Electro-chlorination system is to inject chlorine solution into the
cooling water intake to inhibit the growth of biological organisms at the cooling
water intake and to prevent slime deposit at the inner wall of cooling water pipes.
The Electro-chlorination package will be designed to continuously dose up to
maximum 2.0 ppm chlorine and shock dose plus up to maximum 2 ppm chlorine

FUJAIRAH3
into the seawater. The shock dosing will be done for 20 min per every 24 hours
interval.
Continuous dosing of hypochlorite solution will be pumped from the hypochlorite
solution storage tanks to the intake riser. Shock dosing of hypochlorite solution will
be pumped to the intake riser as well. Chlorination will be continuous with the rate
manually set to maintain less than 0.15 ppm residual chlorine at downstream of
the condenser and it is in exception during shock dosing.
H2 detector shall be installed at high point of EC plant area in common. A provision
to perform periodically manual acid washing of the electrolyzers with HCl has been
provided.
Electro chlorination system is package item will be applied.
4.12 WATER PLANTS AND SYSTEMS

4.12.1 GENERAL
Water treatment system produce the required water of the plant by reducing the
level of total dissolved solids in seawater. Water treatment system is provided for
the following purposes;
▪ Supply of demineralized water (HRSG make-up, GT wet compression, De-NOx

water and etc.)
▪ Supply of service water (Evaporative cooler make-up, firefighting and etc.)
▪ Supply of potable water
4.12.2 WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM
The desalination plant is a common system for all Two (2) blocks. All kinds of water
for plant use including the ESF and the fuel connection facilities will be produced
from seawater by water treatment system.
Seawater is desalinated by reverse osmosis process, and pre-treatment system

of DAF and DMF is applied to meet the feed water condition of SWRO.
Demineralized water is produced by polishing of desalinated water through Mixed
bed exchanger. Service water is produced by re-mineralization of desalinated
water and potable water is produced by disinfection of service water.
Filter backwash water from DMF and SWRO brine is discharged to the outfall
without further treatment. Sludge from DAF is collected in sludge holding pond and
dewatered through a dehydrator and then disposed by third party. The
regeneration wastewater is discharged to the outfall or wastewater treatment
system after neutralization.
The chemical dosing tank will have one day holding and chemical storage tank will
have seven days holding. The type of chemical might be changed according to
process requirement.

FUJAIRAH3
The system will have one (1) standby train of desalination (DMF, SWRO, BWRO)
and demineralization process(MBE) except DAF, and the maximized water
production will be performed by the operation of the standby train to supply the
required water for abnormal case such as oil firing and etc.
Water treatment system is package item will be applied.
Water treatment system will be designed according to the table below.
Parameter Unit Analysis

Turbidity NTU 0.54
Conductivity ㎲/㎝ 56400
pH - 8.05
Total dissolved solids ppm 40,500 (*)
Total hardness as CaCO3 ppm 9,200
Total alkalinity as CaCO3 ppm 120
Calcium ppm 640
Magnesium ppm 1,846
Iron ppm 0.23
Sodium ppm 11,650 (**)
Potassium ppm 510
Chlorides ppm 22,900 (**)
Sulphate ppm 2,830
Silica ppm 0.32
Strontium ppm 8.50
Barium ppm 0.007
Nitrate ppm 1.70
Boron ppm 5 (*)
Silt density index (SDI) ppm 14.40
TPHC ppm 4
Free Chlorine ppm 0.00
*: The concentrations of TDS and Boron are adjusted according to design
seawater conditions of 4.1.1.1 Ambient Conditions.
**: The concentrations of Sodium and Chloride are adjusted to match with the TDS
40,500ppm.
Water treatment system consists of following unit process;
For Desalination
▪ 2x50% DAF (Dissolved Air Floatation)
▪ 3x50% DMF (Dual media filter)
▪ 3x50% SWRO

FUJAIRAH3
▪ 3x50% BWRO
▪ Chemical dosing unit for coagulation, flocculation, scale inhibitor and reducing
agent. It is composed of one (1) x100% solution tank, dosing pumps including
one (1) standby. Caustic dosing might be provided according to process
requirement. Caustic will be provided from the caustic dosing tank of MBE, if
required.
▪ Chemical cleaning unit for RO membrane. It is composed of one (1) tank, one
(1) cartridge filter and two (2) pumps including one (1) standby.
For Demineralization
▪ 3x50% Mixed Bed Exchanger
▪ Regeneration unit composed of regeneration pumps and chemical dosing unit

for acid and caustic. It is composed of one (1) solution tank and dosing pumps
including one (1) standby. The dosing unit is used in common for neutralization.
▪ Neutralization unit composed of neutralization pumps.
▪ Chemical storage unit for acid and caustic. It is composed of one bulk storage
tank and transfer pumps including one (1) standby.
▪ Mixed bed mixing and neutralization mixing will be performed by DMF backwash
blower in common.
For Re-mineralization
▪ Lime dosing unit. It is composed of two (2) solution tanks and dosing pumps
including one (1) standby.
▪ CO2 dosing unit. It is composed of CO2 gas bottle and rack.
▪ NaOCl dosing unit for potable water. It is composed of one (1) solution tank and
dosing pumps including one (1) standby.
For Sludge treatment
▪ 1x100% Dehydrator
▪ Chemical dosing unit for dehydrator polymer. It is composed of one (1) dosing
tank and dosing pumps including one (1) standby
4.12.3 SERVICE WATER SYSTEM
The service water system is a common system for all Two (2) blocks.
One (1) desalinated water tanks and two (2) service/fire water storage tank shall
be provided to supply buffer storage capacity in the event of a temporary loss of
raw water supply. The potable water is from the remineralization system. The tanks
shall be vertical cylindrical type with conical fixed roof, designed in accordance
with API and shall be installed on a concrete foundation.

FUJAIRAH3
4.12.4 PORTABLE WATER SYSTEM
The potable water system is a common system for all two (2) blocks.
The potable water plant shall produce potable water for the normal operation of
the F3 Plant and in addition supply potable water to external consumers (e.g. ESF).
All necessary civil works, pipes, pumping stations and separate tanks as well as
all required equipment for tie-in shall be provided.
The water quality shall be in accordance with the drinking water quality of the latest
revisions of all relevant local laws and regulations as well as with the relevant
WHO guidelines.
The potable water treatment (remineralization) system capacity shall be sufficient

to serve all operational and operation personnel requirements under all normal
operation circumstances with 20% safety margin The net capacity of the tank shall
be potable water demand during 7 days of normal operation circumstances.
Any material used for the potable water plant and storage tanks shall meet the
requirement of the World Health Organization in regard to harmful effects on the
drinking water.
The water qualities shall be monitored in accordance with the relevant regulations.
The pH-Value and the conductivity shall be controlled on a continuous basis.
4.13 WASTE WATER TREATMENT SYSTEM

Waste water treatment system will be provided to meet the required discharge limit
of the plant. After treatment the effluent will be discharged to the seal pit. Waste
water treatment system is designed to treat the chemical waste water, oily waste
water and sanitary water.
[Waste Water Limit]

pH - 6.5 ~
8.5
TDS(Total Dissolved Solid) above receiving < 5%
water at the edge of the mixing zone
(100 m from point of discharge point)
Oil and grease mg/l 10
Free available chlorine or total mg/l 0.15
residual chlorine1)
Chromium – total (Cr) mg/l 0.5
Copper – total (Cu) mg/l 0.5
Iron – total (Fe) mg/l 1.0
Zinc (Zn) mg/l 0.5
Lead (Pb) mg/l 0.1

FUJAIRAH3
Cadmium (Cd) mg/l 0.1

Mercury (Hg) mg/l 0.001
Arsenic (As) mg/l 0.05
Phosphate (total as P) mg/l 2.0
Ammoniacal nitrogen mg/l 0.5
Bio-chemical oxygen demand mg/l 30
(BOD)
COD mg/l 100
Cyanide (CN) mg/l 0.1
Manganese (Mn) mg/l 1.0
Nickel (Ni) mg/l 0.5
Phenols mg/l 0.1
Selenium (Se) mg/l 0.05
Silver (Ag) mg/l 0.1
Sulphide mg/l 0.2
Suspended solids mg/l 30
Vanadium mg/l 1.0
Notes: 1) The limit refers to continuous chlorination. In case of shock chlorination
(according to WB limit), the maximum value is 2 mg/l for up to 2 hours, not to be
repeated more frequently than once in 24 hours, within a 24 hours average of 0.2
mg/l.
Chemical wastes from the various processes on the power plant site will be
collected and directed to the waste water collection pond. These will include
effluents from building flushing/drains, chemical dosing system drains and etc.
However, the GT wash water will be separately disposed by tank lorry to defined
local vendor. The waste water in the neutralization pond will be neutralized with
acid or caustic soda. The pH value will be monitored.
Oily waste water from the plant drain and rainfall will be collected by pumping or
gravity in the central oily waste water collection pond and treated by an oil
separator. The treated oily wastewater will be discharged with chemical
wastewater to seal pit. The skimmed oil or oil sludge will be stored in oil sludge
holding pond and then disposed to plant outside by local vendor.
The sanitary water from toilet, shower will be treated by modular biological
treatment package complete with all of the necessary equipment.
Waste water treatment system is package item will be applied.
4.14 CHEMICAL DOSING SYSTEM

The chemical dosing system consists of the chemical dosing equipment for boiler
water and condensate water.
The dosing system will utilize ammonia for pH control and oxygen scavenger for

FUJAIRAH3
oxygen removal and phosphate for boiler water conditioning.
The phosphate subsystem consists of One (1) x 100% solution tank with mixer per
each block and three (3) x 50% dosing pumps with manual stroke positioners for
Block 1 and two (2) x 100% dosing pumps with manual stroke positioners for Block
2. A dilute solution of sodium phosphate is manually prepared in the phosphate
solution tank. The injection rate of each pump is manually adjustable.
The ammonia dosing subsystem consists of one (1) x100% solution tank with
mixer and two (2) x 100% dosing pumps with automatic stroke positioners for each
block. A dilute solution is manually prepared in solution tank.
Oxygen scavenger dosing subsystem consists of one (1) x 100% solution tank
with and two (2) x 100% dosing pumps with automatic stroke positioners for each
block. A dilute solution is manually prepared in solution tank.
Chemical dosing system will be supplied as one chemical dosing unit for Block 1
and one chemical dosing unit for Block 2. The chemical solution tank will have
one-day holding.
4.15 CRANES AND HOISTS

The cranes shall be designed, manufactured and tested to an internationally
recognized standard suitable for their intended application.
In the case of plant items weighing 2000 kg or over, the lifting gear to be provided
shall generally comprise a permanently installed electrically operated hoist or
overhead crane. Exceptions may be permitted on a case-by-case basis.
Following cranes and hoists will be provided to perform the maintenance of the
following items:
▪ One (1) EOT crane for workshop/warehouse
▪ Two (2) Gantry crane for Gas Turbine and Generator (one for each block)
5 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
The requirements described in this section are valid for all F3 Plant mechanical
equipment. In the event of conflicts or discrepancies between the below
requirement and Technical Requirement specified in RFQ main body, Technical
Requirement in RFQ takes precedence.
5.1 PUMPS
Pumps should be of the centrifugal type unless otherwise specified and/or
technical or strong economic reasons dictate that a positive displacement pump,
either rotary or reciprocating, is more appropriate.
All pumps shall be designed for continuous operation.

FUJAIRAH3
If several pumps are used for the same pumping work, these shall be of the same
design (i.e. interchangeable). Standard pumps with suitable characteristics shall
be used wherever practical. Only proven makes and models shall be supplied. All
accessories and the overall design of pump sets shall be such that they are
suitable for automation as planned for the relevant systems.
5.1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENT FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

Maintenance time should be minimized by selection of appropriate designs of
pump, preferably those that leave casing to piping joints intact, i.e., horizontal split-
casing types for large centrifugal pumps and horizontal, back pull-out types for
smaller units. Where a significant saving in floor space or improvement of layout
can be shown, a vertical pump may be acceptable.
Generally, fabricated components for pump parts such as casing, diffuser, impeller,
shaft, etc. are not acceptable.
At minimum, the rating of the driver and the pump’s NPSH requirements shall be
such that the pump is capable of a flow rate 10% in excess of the maximum flow
rate required except for condenser cooling water pumps. In addition, pumps shall
be designed to have a reasonable margin on head (normally 5% on head for clean
fluids, 10% for solids-bearing fluids) to compensate for normal wear of pump
components. There shall be an adequate margin on NPSH throughout the
operating range of the pump.
Pump head flow characteristic shall fall continuously from shut off point to duty
point by at least 15% and where any pumps are installed to operate in parallel,
they shall be capable of equal load sharing throughout the operating range.
All pump-motor units shall be installed on substantial base plates, with isolating
valves, a discharge non-return valve, air release valves (for both pump casing and
seal chamber as necessary), drain valves, suction and discharge pressure gauges,
unless otherwise stated. The supplier should review the minimum flow rates and
supply a leak-off system, if necessary, in which case all minimum flow detection
devices, diversion valves and pipework shall be supplied.
Base frame dimensions shall be designed considering that pump accessories and
connections (battery limits) are arranged within the outside appearances.
Two ground wire connecting points shall be provided on each base frame.
Standard pump local instrumentation (e.g., pressure / temperature indicator, etc.)

shall be arranged easy visible on a common local board.
Stainless steel shims only shall be used. No corrodible material for embedded
supports shall be used.
5.1.2 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENT FOR CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS

FUJAIRAH3
In selecting bearing type, account should be taken of possible vibration damage

to the bearing surfaces while the machine is stationary. Where sleeve bearings
are used, bearing shells shall be replaceable without removing pump or motor
shaft. Bearing housings shall be effectively sealed against loss of lubricant and
ingress of fluid or dirt.
All oil lubricated bearings shall have housings fitted with means of drainage, visual
oil level indicator and capped filler or a constant level oiler which is accessible
whilst the unit is operating. Grease lubricated bearings shall be connected to
readily accessible greasing points either singly or at a battery plate.
Where rolling contact bearings are used, they shall be sized to provide a minimum
L-10 life of 20,000 hours (as per ISO Standard 281/1) under conditions of
maximum load on the bearings. In the case of a close-coupled pump, this
requirement applies to the motor bearings.
Replaceable case wear rings shall be fitted where diameters exceed 150mm and
replaceable impeller neck rings where diameters exceed 250mm. All wear rings
shall be a press fit on or in their respective component and positively locked
against rotation.
Casing design pressure shall be at least 1.2 times the pump shut off pressure with
the pump operating at maximum possible inlet pressure. The pump casing and
base plate shall be capable of withstanding all hydraulic forces, together with
externally applied pipe moments and loads and the supplier shall state the pump’s
pipe load limitations.
The pump unit and all removable components greater than 10 kg in weight shall
be fitted with suitable lifting lugs and eyes to facilitate all erection and maintenance
tasks. Any special lifting tackle shall be supplied as necessary.
Suitable means, such as jacking screws, shall be provided to aid the separation of
pump components; these shall be arranged so that no damage can be done to
mating or sealing faces by their use.
The method of fitting the impeller to the shaft shall adequately center the
component but allow its removal without risk of damage to either component.
Torque shall be transmitted to the impeller by keying, other than in the case of a
multistage vertical pump for which a collect drive may be acceptable. The main
impeller nut or screw shall not have its thread exposed to the pumped fluid and
must either be locked or maintained tight by virtue of the normal direction of
rotation.
The pump shafts shall be designed such that the first critical speed of the pump is
at least 20% higher than the maximum speed encountered in service.
Vibration measurements with alarm and trip function shall be provided as required

FUJAIRAH3
and all rotating components shall be dynamically balanced to grade G2.5 of ISO
standard 1940. The complete rotating assembly shall also be balanced to Grade
G6.3, other than (a) on vertical spindle, multistage pumps or (b) where pump
speed is less than 1800 rpm and capacity less than 50 m3/h.
Where two pumps are connected in parallel, the units shall be capable of reverse
rotation under full pump head without sustaining any damage.
5.1.3 SHAFTS, SEALS AND COUPLINGS

Air release valves shall be fitted at suitable points on the pump casing.
Pocked glands, if not otherwise specified, shall be used for pumps handling cold
water and other non-hazardous liquids. Clean water sealing arrangements shall
be provided for gland packing of pumps handling brine, seawater of similar.
Mechanical seals shall be preferably of a pressure-balanced type. The design of

the unit should allow the mechanical seal to be replaced without disturbing the
pump or driver if practicable.
Mechanical seal shall be fitted over a sleeve on shaft. The mechanical seal shall
be of the split type to facilitate quick removal/replacement without any disassembly
of other parts of the pump.
Any leakage at the gland shall be intercepted by a flinger ring and all pump glands
shall be provided with trays and guards to catch leakage.
Other than on small pumps (i.e., with driver less than 50 kW) auxiliary pipework
for seat harnesses, drains, etc. shall be not less than 20mm bore.
Couplings shall be dynamically balanced to G6.3 ISO standard 1940 where speed
exceeds 1800 rpm or shaft diameter exceeds 51mm. Dynamically balanced
couplings shall be match marked. Where a spacer coupling is used, the spacer
shall similarly comply.
All coupling and any intermediate shafts shall be fully guarded.
Pumps handling treated water shall be provided with mechanical seals only. No
gland packing is acceptable.
5.1.4 MATERIALS
Materials of constructions shall be selected with due regard to the corrosive nature
of the pumped fluid and risk of corrosion, cavitation and metal-to-metal galling that
can occur within a pump in all its modes of operation. It is the supplier’s
responsibility to select materials that will provide an adequate service life.
If the pump impeller and impeller shaft are of different material, any portion of the
impeller shaft which could be in contact with the water must be encased in a
protection sleeve of the same material as the impeller. All materials shall be
selected with particular regard for the risk of electrochemical corrosion.

FUJAIRAH3
Cast iron is not acceptable for pump cases where the duty involves shock loads
or where service stresses exceed 10% of the Ultimate Tensile Strength in tension
or 15% in bending. This restriction does not apply to castings of spheroidal
graphite structure with an elongation greater than 10%.
The sleeve bearings of the seawater pumps shall be of fiber reinforced silicon
carbide (ceramic).
5.2 STORAGE TANK

5.2.1 GENERAL
The design of the tanks shall comply in all respects with the requirements of the
latest version of API 650 and as supplemented by this specification.
In case of conflict or in doubt, the Supplier/Erector shall notify the conflict or doubt
to the Owner in writing and shall recommend a suitable solution for acceptance
and approval.
The tank shall be suitably designed for the storage and operation of the particular
liquids under the prevailing ambient conditions.
The minimum required thickness shall exclude mill tolerances, fabrication

allowances and corrosion allowances in accordance with this specification.
The Supplier/Erector shall indicate the orientation, the location, the preparation
and the welding sequence of all welded joints on the shop drawings submitted for
approval. No weld joint is allowed behind any plate or construction, which prevents
thorough inspection of the weld.
The tanks shall be supplied with all internals as required. They shall be adequately
supported and shall be removable in pieces through a manhole. The design of
internal fittings shall ensure that they are proof against loosening by vibration, etc.
Internal shall be such that they are easily dismantled for maintenance of the tank
without the need of any hot work.
The minimum diameter for the bolting shall be 12mm for mild steel and 10mm for
stainless steel. All bolts shall have ISO-metric screw threads; UNC type threads
are also acceptable, if approved by the Owner.
After completing the hydro test, oil storage tanks shall be calibrated for dipping
volume measurement with the approved agency and relevant documents shall be
submitted to the Owner. All gaskets shall be free of asbestos.
Tank shall be protected where applicable by foam injection at top and also by spray
water cooling of roof and shell.
5.2.2 MATERIALS
For all plates, the manufacturer shall obtain mill certificates from the steel maker;
the certificates shall be made available to the Owner. The mill certificates of all

FUJAIRAH3
plates shall indicate conformity with the material specifications. Mill certificates for
all plates with a specified minimum yield strength exceeding 240 N/mm2 shall be
authenticated by an approved authority.
Stainless Steel Tanks Materials
To prevent electrochemical corrosion, parts (e.g., stairs, etc.), which may not be of
stainless steel, shall be connected to the tank in accordance with the relevant
accepted practice upon receiving approval from the Owner. All gaskets, sealing,
etc. shall be free of chlorite. When constructing the tank, the stainless steel
material shall not come into contact with carbon steel. All stainless steel material
shall be protected from carbon steel contamination.
Carbon Steel Tanks Materials
The plates used to form the shells shall be of the grades specified by the API 650.
The use of high tensile steel shall only be considered as an alternative. The
material listed below, may to the discretion of the Owner, be replaced by materials
according to other standards, provided their equivalence is proved. Bottom
surround plates shall be of the same grade as the lower shell sections.
Bottom and roof plates shall be according to ASTM A283 Grade C or equivalent
material.
The angle irons, and top and side reinforcing segments shall be ASTM 47. The
remaining sectional steel shall also be of the grade recommended by this standard.
Rolled and welded plate nozzle necks as well as tube stiffeners shall be made of
steel of the same grade as the plate onto which these fittings are connected.
The pipe studs shall be made of seamless drawn tube as per API 5L, Grade A or
B. Forged steel fitting and tube flanges shall be ASTM A181, Grade I.
Bolts on nozzle flanges, manholes and blind flanges shall be of a grade

corresponding to ASTM A193 B7, A194 2H. Internal bolts shall be of A307 B or
equivalent.
Gaskets used for seals on piping and fillings shall be made of hydrocarbon
resisting compressed fiber sheeting or equivalent type.
5.2.3 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES

The tanks shall be of the vertical straight cylindrical type constructed of stainless
steel plates or carbon steel plates and shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance with AWWA D100 – Welded Steel Tanks for Water Storage and API
650 – Welded Steel Tanks for Oil Storage whereby the minimum requirements of
API 650, latest edition shall be fulfilled. All welding and welding inspection shall be
executed according to API 650, latest edition. The shell joints shall be inspected
by radiographic methods. The bottom shall be tested by the crack detection

FUJAIRAH3
method and by vacuum testing. All work procedures including verification of type
of materials prior to the construction of the tank is subject to the approval by the
Owner.
Each tank shall be equipped with all connecting branches including those for the
following connecting pipes and instrumentation.
▪ Filling pipe
▪ Overflow pipe
▪ Vent pipe
▪ Draining pipe
▪ Suction pipe(s) to all pumps
▪ Return pipes
▪ Two spare nozzle at the bottom of the tank with blind flanges.
▪ The instrumentation and control equipment
▪ Level indication
▪ Sample taking
5.2.4 PROTECTION AGAINST LIGHTNING AND STATIC ELECTRICITY

Special protection against lightning is also required. The earthing system to be
provided for each tank shall have a resistance of 0.5 Ohm at the maximum. The
material shall be galvanized copper, no aluminum shall be supplied. The area of
copper strips shall be 100 mm2 minimum. Earthing poles have to reach down to
the ground water level. The Supplier shall explain in detail in which manner
possible corrosion of the earthing strips will be prevented (See also applicable
NFPA Standard). All parts inside the fuel oil tanks must correspond to the electrical
potential of the shell and all metal parts inside the fuel oil tanks must be spark-
proof.
5.3 PRESSURE VESSEL

The applicable pressure vessel code shall be ASME Section VIII, Division 1,
unless otherwise agreed with the Owner. All vessels shall be self-supporting when
full of water. Corrosion allowance shall be 1.6mm minimum for carbon steel
vessels unless otherwise specified.
Manholes, drains, relief valves and any access stairways and handrails necessary
for safe operation and easy maintenance shall be provided. The vessels shall be
supplied with all internals as required. They shall be adequately supported and
shall be removable in pieces through a manhole. The design of internal fittings
shall ensure that they are proof against loosening by vibration, etc. Internals shall
be such that they are easily dismantled for maintenance of the tank without the

FUJAIRAH3
need of any hot work.
If any degree of vacuum can occur the pressure vessel shall be designed for full
vacuum even if vacuum breakers shall be installed on the vessel.
Atmospheric vessels are containers that have a constantly open connection to the
atmosphere (no valve must be installed in this connection) and which remain under
atmospheric pressure in all operational situations.
The atmospheric vessels shall be designed and manufactured as pressure

vessels according to the design condition of the connected pipe systems.
In addition to the nozzles necessary for the process technology additional items
as quoted below shall be provided in minimum:
▪ One or two manholes depending on the standard requirements and vessel size
▪ Two spare nozzles of nominal bore to be approved by the Owner
▪ One drain nozzle
▪ One temperature nozzle
▪ One level indicator local
All nozzles shall be provided with flanges and shall be so arranged that a sensible
pipe arrangement is possible. The stub length for all stub pipes shall be at least
200mm, measured from the tank wall to the flange sealing surface. In the case of
insulated vessels, the length shall be chosen so that there will be a clear space of
at least 100mm between the cover of the insulation and the underside of the flange.
Where atmospheric vents are provided, they shall be dust and vermin proof and
furnished with bird screen.
Manhole covers of nominal diameter shall be minimum 600mm.
Vessels standing vertically shall have legs made of steel tubing. In order to check
for leaks, and for ventilation purposes, each foot shall have a hole at least 6mm
diameter, drilled approximately 100mm above the ground plate. Bearer plates shall
be made of the same material as that from which the vessel is manufactured.
Horizontal vessels shall be supported by welded steel saddles. Longitudinal

expansion of the vessel because of the effect of heat shall be taken into account.
Therefore, one saddle shall be fixed and the other designed as a sliding support.
The saddle plates to be welded to the vessel shall be of the same material as the
vessel. Care shall be taken to ensure that the plate is welded on with a continuous
seam.
All measuring and control equipment shall be provided as per the appropriate table
of instruments for each vessel. A minimum requirement is that each vessel shall
be equipped with a local level indicator that can be shut off.

FUJAIRAH3
5.4 HEAT EXCHANGER

The heat exchangers shall be designed, manufactured and erected in accordance
with the latest revision of international or national codes e.g. TEMA, HEI, ASME,
BS.
Unless otherwise specified, all heat exchangers shall be designed for continuous
operation. They must be capable of withstanding conditions resulting from rapidly
changing loads without damage and without reduction of the design service life.
It must be possible to install and remove the heat exchangers without undue
difficulty. Lifting lugs and eyes and other special tackle shall be provided to permit
easy handling of the heat exchangers and their components. Heavy covers shall
as far as possible be provided with opening devices, e.g. hinges or davits.
Fixed tube sheets may be used with approval for non-corrosive streams provided
that any fouling of shell can easily be removed by hot water solvent and chemical
cleaning method. During the design of fixed tube sheet heat exchangers,
consideration must be given to the stresses induced at operating, start up, shut
down and other upset conditions Heat exchanger with expansion bellows should
be avoided.
Heat exchangers with straight tube shall be installed with one end fixed and the
other end with floating along with sliding gaskets to avoid thermal expansion.
The design shall be proof against full vacuum. The test pressure shall be in
accordance with the ASME Code, Section VIII, Division 1, paragraph UG-99. The
test temperature should be established as recommended by the ASME Code.
All parts which come into contact with seawater shall be manufactured in corrosion
resistant material or with equivalent protection, provided that all materials are
acceptable to the Owner.
Where reference is made in the various sections to heat exchanger materials,

these shall be understood as a minimum requirement and do not relieve the
Vendor or the responsibility for selecting the correct material. The use of cast iron
is not permissible. Forged tube end plates shall be formed from a single piece of
material.
Unless otherwise specified, the heat exchanger tubes shall be seamless tubes.
The heat transfer area shall be justified with calculation for the heat load for which
the heat exchanger is designed.
The design of the heat exchangers shall be so laid out that groups of tubes or
individual tubes can be readily removed, or in the case of leaks, tubes can be
easily plugged. The requisite space for removal be provided by suitable design.
Considerable importance shall be paid to the ease of cleaning the heat exchangers.

FUJAIRAH3
For cleaning purposes, the cooling water connections shall be provided with side-
mounted blanked flanged stubs with a nominal bore of 50mm. Water vessels must
be provided with flanged covers. Connecting stub-pipes and connections for
drains shall not be less than 15mm bore.
Minimum spot radiography shall be carried out for welds.
Where tubes are welded to tube plates the whole shall be stress relieved. Tubes
shall be stress relieved after bending.
Bolting and gasket materials shall be of high quality appropriate to the duty
concerned.
All heat exchangers shall be equipped at their highest and lowest points with an
adequate number of air vents, water drains and emptying ports along with isolation
valves. Where heat exchangers operate at sub-atmospheric pressure, the design
and the arrangement of air suction ports shall be so coordinated that the formation
of air pockets is not possible.
Where any heat exchanger parts in contact with liquid can be isolated and there
is a possibility of a pressure rise within the exchanger for whatever reason, safety
valves shall be provided for pressure relief.
Pipes from water drains, air vents and safety valves shall be grouped together
where possible, and routed to easily observable points equipped with covered
funnels or flash tanks. The corresponding valves and fittings must be clearly
designated and easy to operate.
The overall design conception of the heat exchangers and accessories shall be
such that they are suitable for the degree of automation envisaged for the
individual system.
6 PIPING
The requirements described in this section are valid for all F3 Plant piping
materials. In the event of conflicts or discrepancies between the below requirement
and Piping Material Classes (PMC), PMC takes precedence.
6.1 DEFINITION
Piping includes all fittings, flanges, bolts, nuts, washers, gaskets, caps,
miscellaneous specialties, temporary strainers, and pipe hangers and supports.
▪ Large Bore Piping – piping or tubing DN 65 and larger.
▪ Small Bore Piping – piping or tubing DN 50 and smaller.
6.2 GENERAL
All piping will conform to requirements of ASME B31.1 for Power Piping as well as

FUJAIRAH3
ASME Section I code piping, except where specified in design specification,

drawings, or other data sheets.
All fiber glass pipe will conform to the requirements of ASME / AWWA C950 AWWA
standard for Fiber Glass Pressure Pipe.
Fabrication, assembly, erection, inspection, examination, and testing of carbon

steel, stainless steel, alloy steel and copper alloy piping will be in accordance with
the requirements of ASME B31.1 unless otherwise specified.
Heat treatment will be performed in accordance with the requirements of ASME

B31.1.
The welding requirement for welded branch connections will be in accordance with
ASME B31.1. Butt welding ends will be in accordance with ASME B16.25 Butt
welding Ends.
The thickness of butt weld fittings and components will be equal to or greater than
that of the attached scheduled or special wall pipe.
Socket weld end fitting and valve may be used for the size of DN 50 and below,
and welding preparation will conform to ASME B16.11. Butt weld end fitting and
valve may be used for the size of DN65 and larger.
A pipe bend may be substituted for an elbow where the piping layout requires. A
miter bend may be substituted for a formed elbow at the piping engineer's option.
A reducing tee may be substituted for a straight tee and reducer where the piping
layout requires.
A short radius elbow may be used in case of space limitation otherwise long radius
elbow will be used.
Miter bend may be applied for steel water piping size DN 650 and above, if
necessary.
Non-metallic piping (GRP, GRE, HDPE, PVC, etc.) material will be selected from
manufacture’s standard products.
The standards for piping flanges will be in accordance with the following:
Size Code
DN600 and Smaller ASME B16.5
DN650 – DN1500 ASME B16.47
Circulating Water Pipe
DN600 and Smaller ASME B16.5
DN650 – and Larger AWWA C207 class D
For the size not specified in the above standard, the flanges will be designed
individually based on the line design condition.

FUJAIRAH3
Stud bolts will be continuous threaded in full length conforming to ISO.
Pipe threads will be in accordance with ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Treads, General
Purpose. (NPT)
Bolting materials of alloy and carbon steel will be as specified in each piping
material class.
Process piping less than 19 mm diameter typically is not used.
An asbestos joint sheet gasket will not be used.
6.3 MATERIALS
All items will be marked with manufacturer's name and identification in accordance
with project marking specification.
Piping material will be per the following:
Applicable Service Basic Pipe Material

Main Steam and Reheat Steam Low Alloy Steel
Low Pressure Steam Carbon Steel
Auxiliary Steam Carbon Steel
Feed Water System Carbon Steel
Condensate System Carbon Steel
Fuel Gas System Carbon Steel
Demi. Water System Stainless Steel
Service Air Carbon Steel + Galvanizing
Instrument Air Stainless Steel
Service Gas Carbon Steel
Potable Water System Stainless Steel
Service Water System Stainless Steel
Oily Waste Water System Carbon Steel
Chemical Waste Water System Stainless Steel
Desalinated Feedwater (Seawater) Fiberglass Pipe or Equivalent Material
Underground Piping System for HDPE or Equivalent Material
- Potable Water
- Service Water
- Waste Water
- Demi.Water
6.4 PIPING SYSTEM VELOCITY

Unless stated elsewhere within this specification fluid velocity shall not exceed the
values stated.
Service Maximum Velocity(m/s)

FUJAIRAH3
Saturated steam 45
HP steam ( > 64bar) 80
IP steam ( 17 ~ 64bar) 70
LP steam ( < 17bar) 70
Hot reheat steam 70
Cold reheat steam 70
Intermittent Steam(ex. ST Bypass) 100
Pump suction:
Feedwater pump suction 3
Condensate pump suction 1
Oil pump suction 1
Pump discharge:
Feedwater 5
Condensate 3
General service 3
Circulating water 3
Fuel gas (with insulation to reduce noise 25
level)
Service air 20
Instrument air 20
6.5 INSULATION
Provide heat conservation insulation on piping and equipment with surface
temperatures exceeding 60 °C during normal operation. Piping will be insulated
with mineral wool.
Provide personnel protection insulation in accessible areas for piping and

equipment with surface temperatures exceeding 60 °C during transient conditions
or when heat conservation is not important. Insulation will be mineral wool
Provide acoustic insulation for piping and equipment to reduce noise levels, if
necessary.
Design insulation system to ensure insulation or lagging surface does not exceed
60 °C.
6.6 PAINTING
Process piping and fire protection piping will be color coded as per the project
painting specifications.
Galleries, handrails, stairs, ladders and other miscellaneous steelwork shall be

hot-dipped galvanized and shall be in addition adequately painted according to

FUJAIRAH3
safety requirements.
Structural indoor steelwork shall be coated with minimum three (3) workshop coats
(prime coat, intermediate coat and final coat) and a touch-up/repair on site after
erection where necessary; minimum thickness of each layer shall not be less than
80µm.
Structural steelwork exposed to outdoor condition shall be hot-dipped galvanized

if no higher requirement (e.g. due to marine condition) is required.
The embedded items (anchor bolts and plates, fixing elements, etc.) for outside
and inside conditions with severe exposure condition, chemical attack, etc. shall
be of stainless steel (type 316Ti according to AISI-Standard).
The embedded items for outside conditions without severe exposure condition,
chemical attack, etc. shall be minimum hot-dipped galvanized and the surface
exposed to atmosphere shall be epoxy coated in addition
The embedded items for inside conditions (no corrosive climate) shall be hot-
dipped galvanized and shall be adequately painted in addition.
6.7 PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS

Piping stress analysis will be performed to determine the pipe stresses and
terminal reactions at supports and equipment interfaces. The stresses will comply
with limits allowable by ASME B31.1, as well as limitations imposed by the
equipment manufacturers at the interface points. Pipe supports will be designed
in accordance with the requirements of ANSI B31.1 and MSS SP-58. Expansion
joints will be designed as necessary during detailed design. The piping design will
not utilize cold pull technique (cold spring).
The combination of operating loads in determining the pipe stresses will follow
paragraph 104.8 of ASME B31.1. The allowable pipe stress limits will be compared
with the resultant stresses caused by the combination of pressure, dead weight,
sustained, seismic, and vibration loads.
The loads acting on the equipment will be combined or calculated on the basis of
respective load conditions to insure that the calculated loads are less than the
allowable loads provided by equipment manufacturer.
6.8 TRENCHES FOR PIPES AND OTHER SERVICES

In case of floor trenching, pipe work shall be supported above the trench bottom.
The trench width and pipe spacing shall be adequate to do pipe replacement,
brushing and painting of pipes and supports for maintenance.
All trenches shall be sloped and self-draining with no stagnation of water. The
pipes shall be separated from supports preferably with Rubber/Teflon pads to
prevent galvanic or crevice corrosion. This applies to pipes in trenches as well as

FUJAIRAH3
pipe racks.
6.9 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING WORK INCLUDED

The piping system scope of work will include the following, unless otherwise
specified:
Provide all necessary miscellaneous piping, vents, drains and piping accessories
and appurtenances, fittings, pipe hanging/supporting elements, bypasses for
piping and specialties, insulation supports, pipe saddles for insulation protection,
unions, couplings, pipe flanges, gaskets, bolting, nozzles, sample piping.
Pipe supports will be designed in accordance with the operating conditions of the
pipeline being supported. Pipe hangers and supports will be designed and
fabricated with appurtenances and accessories in accordance with the
requirements of ANSI B31.1, MSS SP-58 and MSS SP-69.
All support parts, which shall remain outside insulation, shall be delivered painted
in accordance with project painting specification.
Provide such other miscellaneous piping, vents and drains, pump gland and
packing connections and appurtenances required to complete the work and to
make the piping system and equipment function properly.
All traps, float cages and similar appurtenances will be installed with suitable
unions or flanged couplings to permit their removal for maintenance purposes,
unless otherwise specified.
6.10 FITTINGS
Fittings will be constructed of materials equivalent to the pipe with which they are
used:
▪ Steel Fittings: Steel fittings 65 mm and larger will be of the butt welded type and
steel fittings 50 mm and smaller will be of the socket welded type except special
requirements especially turbine OEM
▪ Butt Welding Fittings: The wall thicknesses of butt welding fittings will be equal
to the pipe wall thickness with which they are used. The fittings will be
manufactured in accordance with ASME B16.9.
▪ Forged Steel Fittings: Forged steel fittings will be used for socket welded
connections and will conform to ASME B16.11. The metal thicknesses in the
fittings will be adequate to provide actual bursting strengths equal to or greater
than those of the pipe with which they are connected.
The minimum thickness of pipe for ND50 and smaller will be of Sch. 80 for carbon
steel and alloy steel and Sch. 40S for stainless steel where socket welded
connections are use. However, for HDPE and GRP pipe the minimum thickness
will be as per the manufacturer’s standards.

FUJAIRAH3
The minimum class rating of socket weld and threaded fittings used with various
pipe schedules will be as follows:
Class Designation of Fitting

Schedule No. Wall Designation Socket Welding
80 XS 3,000
160 --- 6,000
Double Extra Strong XXS 9,000
6.11 VALVES
6.11.1 GENERAL
The spindle will be provided with a suitable back seal for gate and globe valve.
The tapped lug type joint will be based on available manufactures standards and
it may be substituted by a flanged Joint.
The valves will be closed in a clockwise direction.
The valves operated under sub-atmospheric condition will have proper gland
sealing, or water sealed or VOC packing.
Painting will be in accordance with project painting specification.
Inspection and testing for valves will be in accordance with ASME B16.34 and
API598.
Gate valves are normally used for isolation service in either the full open or full
closed positions.
Globe valves may be used in either isolation or throttling service.
Check valves located on pump discharges will be placed between the pump and
the system block valve so the check valve may be serviced.
Butterfly valves may be used for isolation or throttling in lower pressure and
temperature systems.
The butterfly valves will have concentric disc or eccentric disc and shaft.
Control valves are used to regulate the flow, pressure, or temperature of fluid in a
piping system. Control valves use an operator and accessories to automatically
regulate flow or pressure within the fluid system.
Isolation Valves on High Pressure / High Temperature Systems
Instrument sensing lines, pressure taps, vents, drains and similar branch
connections on high pressure, high temperature systems will be provided with two
manually operated isolation valves (i.e.; double block valves). This arrangement
will be provided on systems which are above 40bar(g) of design pressure.

FUJAIRAH3
Hand wheels or lever actuators may be used for smaller valves that do not require
excessive force to open.
The maximum force required at the hand-wheel or wrench to apply the breakaway
torque or thrust shall not exceed 250 N.
Hand-wheel diameter(s) shall not exceed the face-to-face or end-to-end length of

the valve or 750 mm, whichever is smaller, unless otherwise agreed. Except for
valve sizes DN 40 (NPS 1 %) and smaller, spokes shall not extend beyond the
perimeter of the hand-wheel unless otherwise agreed.
If specified by the purchaser, the hand-wheel of the gearbox input shaft shall be
provided with a torque-limiting device, such as a shear pin, to prevent damage to
the drive train.
Direction of closing shall be clockwise, unless otherwise specified
All ball and butterfly valves shall be equipped with gear and hand wheel, if size is
DN 150 or greater
6.11.2 VENT AND DRAIN PIPING/VALVES

Vent connections are provided at all high points in water and oil piping, equipment,
and all high points in other piping, including steam lines.
Drain connections are provided at all non-drainable points in steam, water, and oil
piping, equipment. The drain is an accessible point for hydrostatically tested.
.Vent and drain connections are provided with isolation valves. Vents will use globe
valves or ball valves. Drains will use gate valves, globe valves, or ball valves to
reduce potential pluggage, if possible.
Vent or drain connections that will require operation at a time when hot fluids are
discharged will be piped to a safe termination point (drain funnel or floor area
discharge, etc.).
Vents and drains are provided with a nipple on the discharge side of the valve. The
outlet of the nipple will have a threaded end or other end connection type suitable
for the service

FOR CONSTRUCTION
0 Issue For Construction 07.Jul.20 JH.BAK K.M.LIM S.W.CHOI
B Issue For Approval 17.Jun.20 JH.BAK K.M.LIM S.W.CHOI
A Issue For Approval 08.May.20 JH.BAK K.M.LIM S.W.CHOI
Rev Description Date Prepd Rvwd Apprd

Owner:
Owner’s Engineer:
Contractor:
Project Title:
General Technical Requirement – I&C

Drawing/Document No. Page no. Rev
19CN-00GEN00-J02-0001 49 0
FUJAIRAH F3 INDEPENDENT
POWER PLANT
REVISION LOG
Rev. No. Date Description

A 08.May.2020 First issue
Second issue for approval
B 17.Jun.2020 - Comments are rectified

- Typo are corrected
First issue for Construction
- Comments are rectified

0 07.Jul.2020 - Typo are corrected
- As per Owner’s the comments, colour indications and
scheme are modified to have unified indication colour
Doc. Title : GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT-I&C Rev : 0

Doc. No : 19CN-00GEN00-J02-0001 Page 2 of 49
POWER PLANT
List of Contents
1. DESIGN REQUIREMENT ............................................................................... 6

1.1. GENERAL ...................................................................................................................... 6
1.2. CODE & STANDARD ..................................................................................................... 6
1.3. CONDITION OF SERVICE ............................................................................................ 7
1.4. MEASURING UNIT ........................................................................................................ 8
1.5. NAME PLATE AND TAGGING ...................................................................................... 8
1.6. REQUIREMENT FOR EXPLOSION AND HAZARDOUS AREA.................................. 10
1.7. EQUIPMENT PROTECTION CLASS........................................................................... 10
1.8. CLIMATIC CONDITION ............................................................................................... 10
1.9. SYMBOL AND LEGEND .............................................................................................. 11
1.10. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT.................................................................................... 11
2. INSTRUMENTATION.................................................................................... 12
2.1. GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 12
2.2. REQUIREMENTS FOR THE ELECTRONIC DEVICE ................................................. 12
2.3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS ........................................................................................ 13
2.4. PRESSURE MEASUREMENT..................................................................................... 14
2.4.1. General Requirement ...................................................................................................... 14
2.4.2. Pressure/Differential Pressure Transmitter/Level Transmitter/Flow Transmitter ............ 14
2.4.3. Pressure / Differential Pressure Gauge .......................................................................... 15
2.4.4. Pressure Switch............................................................................................................... 15
2.5. TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT ............................................................................. 16
2.5.1. General Requirement ...................................................................................................... 16
2.5.2. Temperature Transmitter................................................................................................. 16
2.5.3. Thermocouples and Resistance Temperature Detectors ............................................... 16
2.5.4. Temperature Gauges ...................................................................................................... 17
2.5.5. Temperature Switch ........................................................................................................ 17
2.5.6. Thermo-well ..................................................................................................................... 17
2.6. FLOW MEASUREMENT .............................................................................................. 18
2.6.1. General Requirements .................................................................................................... 18
2.6.2. Primary Flow Elements ................................................................................................... 18
2.6.3. Flow Transmitters ............................................................................................................ 19
2.6.4. Flow Indicators ................................................................................................................ 19
2.6.5. Flow Switches.................................................................................................................. 19

POWER PLANT
2.6.6. Minimum Requirements of Magnetic Flowmeter ............................................................... 20

2.7. LEVEL MEASUREMENT ............................................................................................. 20
2.7.1. General Requirements .................................................................................................... 20
2.7.2. Level Transmitters ........................................................................................................... 20
2.7.3. Level Indicators and conductivity type level sensor ........................................................ 20
2.7.4. Level Switches................................................................................................................. 21
2.7.5. Radar / Ultra Sonic Level Transmitter .............................................................................. 21
2.8. VIBRATION MEASUREMENT ..................................................................................... 22
2.9. INSTALLATION OF FIELD EQUIPMENT, PANELS AND BOXES .............................. 22
2.9.1. Instrumentation ................................................................................................................ 22
2.9.2. Installation of Impulse Lines ............................................................................................ 22
2.9.3. Instrument Air Supply and Signal Lines .......................................................................... 24
2.9.4. Local Boxes/Enclosure/Racks ......................................................................................... 25
2.9.5. Junction Boxes ................................................................................................................ 25
3. VALVE .......................................................................................................... 26
3.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENT......................................................................................... 26
3.1.1. Valve Body ...................................................................................................................... 26
3.1.2. Valve Bonnet ................................................................................................................... 27
3.1.3. Trim ................................................................................................................................. 27
3.1.4. Accessories ..................................................................................................................... 28
3.1.5. Identification .................................................................................................................... 29
3.2. ACTUATOR ................................................................................................................. 29
3.2.1. General Design Requirements ........................................................................................ 29
3.2.2. Electrical Actuator ........................................................................................................... 29
3.2.3. Pneumatic Actuator ......................................................................................................... 30
3.2.4. Solenoid Actuator ............................................................................................................ 30
3.2.5. Hydraulic Supply Unit (Hydraulic Power Unit) ................................................................. 31
3.3. SELF ACTING SPRING LOADED REGULATOR ........................................................ 32
3.4. SAFETY AND RELIEF VALVE..................................................................................... 32
4. INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL CABLE ...................................................... 33

4.1. GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 33
4.2. STANDARDS AND REGULATION FOR CABLE ......................................................... 33
4.3. DETAILED DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT FOR CABLE.............. 34

POWER PLANT
5. CONTROL CUBICBLES, LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND JUNCTION

BOXES.......................................................................................................... 35
5.1. GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 35
5.2. CONSTRUCTION ........................................................................................................ 36
5.3. WIRING ........................................................................................................................ 37
5.4. TERMINAL BLOCK ...................................................................................................... 37
5.5. GROUND BUS ............................................................................................................. 38
5.6. LIGHTING .................................................................................................................... 38
5.7. PANEL EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................... 38
5.8. FABRICATION ............................................................................................................. 38
6. PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC) ...................................... 39

6.1. GENERAL .................................................................................................................... 39
6.2. MINIMUM FUNCTIONS ON THE DCS AND COMMUNICATION ............................... 40
6.3. HARDWARE REQUIREMENT ..................................................................................... 41
6.4. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENT ..................................................................................... 42
6.5. PERIPHERAL............................................................................................................... 43
6.6. DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENT TO BE INTEGRATED WITH DCS ................... 43
7. MANUFACTURER PROPRIETARY CONTROL SYSTEM (MPCS) ............. 44
8. COLOR CODING OF INDICATION .............................................................. 44

8.1. GENERAL FORM......................................................................................................... 44
8.2. MEANING OF COLOUR OF INDICATING DEVICES ON THE SCREEN ................... 45
8.3. COLOR CODING FOR PUSH BUTTON & LAMPS ON THE SCREEN ....................... 47
8.4. COLOR SCHEME ........................................................................................................ 48
8.5. FINAL COLOUR SCHEDULE FOR I&C EQUIPMENT ................................................ 48

POWER PLANT
1. DESIGN REQUIREMENT
1.1. GENERAL
This general technical requirement is applicable to design, manufacturing and
construction under the specification to which this document is attached, and in
accordance with this specification. Any applicable stipulation in any part of the
specification or appendices are being considered for the general I&C requirements.
Instruments & control system shall be designed for safe, reliable and efficient operation
for the subjected equipment and system. In order to meet such requirements, the
arrangement and equipment layout allow a safe and easy access for all entering,
inspection and cleaning, and the sections requiring a regular operation or maintenance.
Adequate accessibility without using stepper, ladder and temporary structure shall be
arranged for the operation/maintenance and servicing, maintaining, removing and
replacing components.
All instruments, equipment, control devices and systems shall be the proven design
and suitable for continuous operation under expected process conditions. The details
of all instruments, equipment, control devices and systems shall comply with the latest
edition of internationally recognized codes & standards and local practice as far as
possible.
The black box system, skid assembly and equipment shall be pre-assembled to the
highest extent to avoid further works at site. However, in case of loose items are
envisaged, required installation details, materials, and a list of items shall be
documented.
As far as applicable, the highest extent of uniformity and interchangeability shall be
given to facilitate the operation, maintenance, and repair as well as rationalizing spare
stock holding management. Sub-contractor shall follow the project guidelines while
choosing his equipment.
1.2. CODE & STANDARD

The power plant including all auxiliary facilities and systems shall be designed,
manufactured, constructed and tested in compliance with recognized International
Codes and Standards and shall comply with all applicable national codes, local
regulations and practices.
All applicable requirements of the national and local regulations, e.g. the design of the
Power Units shall meet all requirements of the latest version of the Electricity
Transmission Code (Electricity), and the Metering and Data Exchange Code (MDEC)
of Abu Dhabi.
For the details of utilized codes and standards for this F3 project, please refer to 19CN-
00GEN00-M02-0001 Mechanical Design Criteria.

POWER PLANT
In case of any conflict between the project codes & standards, the specification to
which this document is attached and manufacturer standards and practice, the most
stringent requirements shall prevail.
If standards do not exist, such instrument, equipment or system shall comply with the
applicable recommended practices of the professional institutes, national standards,
local regulation and established good engineering practices.
1.3. CONDITION OF SERVICE

Dry, oil-free instrument and service air will be supplied through 6.0 to 8.8 barg with
maximum 55 Degree C. For other site climatic and service conditions, please refer to
the 19CN-00GEN00-M02-0001 Mechanical Design Criteria.
Power source will be provided as follows;
• 400VAC(±10%), 3 phase + N + PE, 50Hz, solidly earthed
• 230VAC(±10%), 1 phase, 50Hz for panel lighting, space heaters and receptacles,
solidly earthed
• UPS 230VAC(±10%), 1 phase, 50Hz, solidly grounded
• DC 220V(±10%), 2 wire, ungrounded
The sound levels adopted for equipment that creates a significantly high noise level
are summarized as below.
Noise Level
Data Remark
dB(A)
at a distance of 1 meter at open

Equipment < 85
air installations
Safety valve, Startup vent < 115
Gas, Air and steam vent < 115
The noise level in buildings

where there is permanent
Within the Central Control personnel presence shall be
< 55
Room (CCR): below 55dB(A) in continuous
working rooms, 50dB(A) in
office.

POWER PLANT
1.4. MEASURING UNIT

The international system (SI) of unit for measures and weights in accordance with
ISO/IEC 8000-1 shall be applied to all measuring unit. All drawings, document,
identification, labels, operating and maintenance manuals, and information indication
unit within the control system that shown on the operator interface shall be in SI units,
The following measuring units shall be used for the measured variables;
• Weight kg, ton
• Temperature K, degrees Celsius (℃)
• Pressure Gauge Pressure: Bar(g), mBar(g)
Absolute Pressure: Bar(a)
Differential Pressure: Bar, mbar, mmH2O
• Flow Liquids: m3/h, ton/h
Steam and Vapor: ton/h
Gases: Nm3/h, Sm3/h
• Level Meter, mm, mmH2O (mmHg), % (if required)
• Analyzer Conductivity: μS/cm
pH: pH
Oxygen: % or ppb
Particle: mg/Nm3
NOx, CO, SOx: ppm, ppb
1.5. NAME PLATE AND TAGGING

All equipment shall have a unique identification made up from combinations of letters
and numbers based on a project numbering procedure. Every pieces of instruments,
equipment and control system shall have the name plates, tag and identification to
allow correct operation, testing, replacement and efficient maintenance. Name plates,
tag and identification shall be fitted on all apparatus requiring indication for
operation/maintenance and shall be sized as legible at operational levels.
Control cubicle, local control panel, junction box, rack, stanchion and operational
switches, etc. shall have the identification in accordance with the Plant Identification
System.
Each valve and equipment also shall have the project specific nameplate, secured by
a fitting on the equipment itself, or an adjacent pipe or structure. The nameplate shall
contain the equipment tag number, identification, capacity, service descriptions,
unless otherwise specified, as minimum.

POWER PLANT
The materials for above identification will be stainless steel (min. SS 304), engraved
and filled with black enamel. Identification shall be designed that no peeling-off or
discoloration will take place with age and outdoor climatic condition. However, other
materials, traffolyte or engraved plastic, may be used inside panels and equipment.
All name plates, tag, and identification shall be in English, but all safety instruction,
warning sign and the name of main equipment in name plate shall be in English with
local language.
Name plate, tag, and identification shall be designed and provided as per the below
requirements, as minimum.
Equipment Information Remarks
Shelter (Container), Rack KKS Tag, Equipment Name SS 316/316L
Cubicle, Local Panel, KKS Tag, Equipment Name Outdoor: SS

Instrument Rack (Front and rear side, if there is
316/316L
rear access.) (White traffolyte with
black lettering for indoor
use.)
Junction Box KKS Tag SS 316/316L
Valve KKS Tag, Service Description SS 316/316L

(In addition to the OEM standard
nameplate on the body or
actuator, a separate tag plate with
service description shall be
supplied with sus. wires)
Instrument KKS Tag, Service Description SS 316/316L

(In addition to the OEM standard (Tag and material shall
nameplate on the body, a be engraved on thermos-
separate tag plate with service well.)
description shall be supplied with
sus. wires)
Control Station, HMI, KKS Tag White traffolyte with

Printers, etc. black lettering
Push buttons, Lamp and Operating Function White traffolyte with

other operating elements (On, Off, Stop,etc,. Warning and
black lettering.
(ex. FF ceiling and wall box, emergency elements shall be
detector, selector switch) white traffolyte with red lettering.)

POWER PLANT
1.6. REQUIREMENT FOR EXPLOSION AND HAZARDOUS AREA

According to the hazardous area classification, Intrinsically safe (Exi), Increased safety
(Exe) and Flameproof (Exd) will be applied to ensure that all electrical equipment
installed in the safe manner at the hazardous area.
If the instruments and equipment are expected to operate in the presence of flammable
gas, explosive or toxic materials either explosion proof construction or using of barriers
obtaining intrinsic safety shall be implemented. All equipment supplied for use in such
hazardous areas shall have the certificates issuing by the internationally recognized
association such as ATEX.
Electrical equipment in the hazardous area shall comply the requirements of IEC
60079 and local regulation, as far as applicable.
1.7. EQUIPMENT PROTECTION CLASS

The minimum protection classes for the instruments and equipment are specified in
the below.
• Instruments(Enclosed Building) : IP65(54)

• Submerged condition : IP68
• Indoor installation(Non Air Conditioned); : IP32(54)
Local cabinets / Control panels / Junction Box / Terminal Box
• Outdoor Installation; : IP54W
Local cabinets / Control panels / Junction Box / Terminal Box
• Analyzer : Min IP31
(in case for Installation inside building with protection guard,
local panels and house shelter)
The additional measure (e.g. “W”), if required, shall consist of sunshade or protection
shed against direct sun radiation, splashing water, and rain. Seawater and acid
resistive coating or additional sealing, etc. depending upon the particular site
installation conditions shall be considered for the additional measure even it does not
have ‘W’ indication.
Avoiding direct sun radiation, the adequate sized sunshades shall be considered for
the instrument, control cubicles and local control panels located at outdoor except
valve positioner with accessories and electric motor actuator.
1.8. CLIMATIC CONDITION

POWER PLANT
All instrument, equipment, control devices and systems shall be designed according
to the prevailing local climatic conditions as specified in the 19CN-00GEN00-M02-
0001 Mechanical Design Criteria.
While design the ventilation and air conditioning, or select the internal electrical
components of the control cubicle, local control panel and equipment, additional
encapsulated temperature increase inside of the building and equipment internal shall
be considered.
Casing, outer sheet metals and exposed components of all instruments, equipment,
and control devices shall withstand, durable and resistive to the corrosion at specified
climatic conditions or installation location.
For continuous operation under site climatic condition, the following measures shall
be applied.
• Indicators, nameplates, tags and labels shall be durable and solid material.
• Copper pipes shall be protected by an external plastic sheath.
• Panels, which is subject to the internal moisture condensation, shall be provided with
temperature compensation device in case of panel accommodates sensitive electric
components.
• All equipment except valve positioner with accessories and electric motor actuator
shall be protected against direct sun radiation via secondary enclosure or sun sheds,
if required.
1.9. SYMBOL AND LEGEND

All symbols used on the drawing, diagram, document, layout and chart shall use the
applicable ISO/IEC standards and recommendations.
The form of function diagrams including logic and analogue control diagrams, control
narrative, description of sequence, etc. shall be generated using the relevant ISO/IEC
or ISA 5.1 & 5.2 standards.
For the consolidated 3D model build-up, 3D models of overall system and every
components in his supply shall be provided as per the project specific 3D software format
without access and modification limit.
1.10. ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENT

The instruments and control equipment shall be resistive to the electro-magnetic and
radio frequency interference and not be affected by portable radio transmitters
operated in the vicinity of the equipment.
• Electrical transient protection

POWER PLANT
The instruments, control device and equipment shall be protected against system
errors and hardware damage resulting from electrical transients on power or signal
wiring. These transients include those generated by switching large electrical loads,
by power line faults, and from the lightning strokes which induces surge on power
or signal cables.
RFI/EMI protection against hardware damage and system errors shall be provided
as per the IEC 61000-1~6, RFI/EMI protection radiated radio frequency field test.
• Signal and AC ground

The metal case of instruments, electronic devices, cubicles and local boxes, racks
shall be grounded effectively to the each ground point for personnel safety and
obtaining the maximum possible rejection of electrical interference.
Control cubicles, local control panel, control desks etc. shall be equipped with a
"clean" instrument earth comprising a clearly labelled insulated copper earth bar
for the connection of cable screens. The instrument earth to the plant main mesh
earth by means of separate conductor shall be provided and connected.
For the ground of any devices on the equipment, skid assembly, and in the
container or under the shelter appropriate earth bar shall be installed and pre-wired
to the highest extent at workshop.
2. INSTRUMENTATION
2.1. GENERAL
This section describes the general requirements for the design, manufacturing,
construction and installation of instruments. However, OEM to major components such
as GT, ST, Generators and its dedicated auxiliary equipment may apply OEM standard
design and practices, since it is the most optimized idea and suitable for the purpose.
All materials of manufacturing, construction and installation shall be suitable for the
intended application. And protecting the corrosion occurred from dissimilar material
contacts, all contacts to be isolated by rubbers, alumina tapes, insulation kit or
appropriate similar materials.
Instruments are provided with HART compliance enabling communication with the
plant asset management system. Interfacing to the central and/or remote IO
equipment of the control system shall be based on usage of conventional hard-wiring,
2.2. REQUIREMENTS FOR THE ELECTRONIC DEVICE

Transmitters, analyzers and other electronic devices shall be SMART type with
integral indicating display.

POWER PLANT
Transmitters that have no integral display will be supplemented by local gauges to

show the measured value close to the original measuring point. If the installation
location is not suitable for daily and easy routine maintenance, remote display devices
will be arranged near original devices.
The following features will be provided with the electronic devices as a minimum, but
not limited to;
• SMART type with the HART compliance
• Easy configurable and re-ranging
• Self-diagnostics, zero elevation or suppression
• Protection against RFI, voltage surges and reverse polarity
• Integral output indicator
Measured value shall appear at approximately 75% of the calibration range. And
protecting the electronic device from lightning or electrical surge, the surge protective
device shall be installed where necessary as per the IEC 61643-21.
Generally, transmitters shall have the accuracy of ±0.25% at calibration range or better
with a repeatability of 0.1% and the linearity of 0.1% as conforming to the IEC
publication 688-1.
Electrical connections will be prepared as per the above table and spare holes will be
blocked using stainless plug for future use.
• Instruments : M20
• Positioner / Limit Switch : M20
• MOV Actuator : M40, M25 and 2 x M20
• T/C and RTD : M20
2.3. PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

The measuring points and measuring equipment for interlocking/ protection purposes
will be separated and not combined with the monitoring or automatic control equipment.
However, in addition to the primary flow element, interlocking/ protection purposes
measurements are additionally used by control system for the operational reasons but,
signals to be processed in the control system shall be suitably repeated and mutually
decoupled to avoid interaction.
Basically, measurements serving for interlocking and protection in the protection
system are configured as dual or triple redundant with 2 out of 2 or 2 out of 3 voting
selections. In case of redundant measurements with analogue transmitters the
protection signal may also be taken from the analogue signals as a result of 2 out of 2
or 2 out of 3 voting selections of the limit-monitoring functions. For the most critical

POWER PLANT
measurements which may cause the total plant trip, a triple independent measurement
scheme shall be applied.
Determining the appropriate Independent Protection Layers (IPL) to the control
hazards, the evaluation process for the Safety Instrumented Systems which are
intended to provide protection for people, property and the environment against
deviations shall be provided according to the IEC 61508 and IEC 61511 to determine,
design, and build IPL´s and especially the Safety Instrumented Systems for the power
plant.
Safety and protection related loop has to be verified and documented according to the
standard IEC 61508 and IEC 61511 that are requested and necessary for the Safety
Integrity Level (SIL) fulfilment.
The stand-alone BMS (Burner Management System) for the HRSG supplemental firing
system, as a certified fail-safe system, shall be designed based on the NFPA85 and
control system for burner management system shall follow the IEC61508 requirements.
2.4. PRESSURE MEASUREMENT

2.4.1. General Requirement
All pressure instruments shall be capable for the continuous operation at maximum
pressure indicated on the calibration range and have the suitable over-range
protection withstanding pressure equal to 130% of the maximum operating pressure
with no subsequent loss of function, deterioration or change in measurement accuracy.
All static and differential pressure devices shall be furnished with tapping point
isolation valves as well as two- or five-way manifolds that include isolation,
equalization, drain and vent/test valves. For the differential pressure devices, the high-
and low-pressure connections shall be embossed on the ports at the diaphragm
assembly.
Diaphragm seals with flushing connection on the process side shall be provided to
permit safe removal and serve as a barrier for thick process fluids, sea water, slurries
or highly corrosive or viscous oils. Wrapping or coated capillary tube shall be installed
and clamped on the tube tray properly to avoid any damages and tube break.
Suitably preformed coil or siphons shall be furnished for gauges where required and
hot condensable vapors or steam are present. Where pressure oscillations are
expected, a pulsation dampener shall be furnished on each indicator to protect against
process fluid oscillations.
In general, package system and skid assembly, instruments will be grouped together
and terminated at the field junction box.
2.4.2. Pressure/Differential Pressure Transmitter/Level Transmitter/Flow Transmitter

POWER PLANT
Generally, transmitter shall generate the standard 4-20mA signal where two wires
engaged with 24V DC power supply. Transmitter will have a minimum ratio of 10:1 for
maximum to minimum span settings and incorporate means of zero suppression or
elevation allowing zero shifts equivalent to 100% of transmitter calibration range.
Transmitter potentially subjected to the vacuum condition shall be capable to withstand
such operating condition without damage. And the differential pressure transmitter
shall withstand to the full rated line pressure as a differential input without damage or
calibration change.
Static and differential pressure transmitter shall be dedicated device and slave device
driven from gauges, etc. are not acceptable.
2.4.3. Pressure / Differential Pressure Gauge
Pressure indicator shall be designed as per the ASME B40.1, Class 1A from lower
scale to upper scale.
The sensing element will be the bellows or bourdon tube type and equipped with a
pressure relief device to protect from high pressure blowout. Additionally, the provision
of overpressure stopper is required to protect against pressure surges outside the
scale range limits.
Pressure gauges shall be filled with glycerin or other non-toxic adequate liquids. For
the level of filling liquids and selection of chemical ingredients, consideration shall be
given to the external conditions (e.g. temperature) and chosen no harm contamination
to personnel or environment in the event of a possible breach of the sensing element.
The housing, minimum 100mm dial size, shall be dust- and moisture-resistant and
furnished with laminated safety glass. Scales with black letters and white background
shall be used for easy reading and indicator will be positioned roughly in the middle of
the scale or ¾ point.
2.4.4. Pressure Switch
The error for pressure switches shall be limited within ±1.0% of the calibration range
and set point can be adjustable within permissible range.
The switch rating shall be 5A at 230Vac or 1A at 30Vdc and contact type of switches
will be 2xSPDT or DPDT snap-action type golden plated. Where multiple pole switches
are furnished for one actuation point, actuation and reset of all poles shall occur
simultaneously.
Pressure switches shall have, but not limited to, the following features;
• Repeatability: ±1.0% of calibration range
• Dead-band (less than ±2.5% of calibration range) or reset point adjustable
• Overpressure protection devices

POWER PLANT
2.5. TEMPERATURE MEASUREMENT

2.5.1. General Requirement
Temperature element will be a thermocouple or resistance temperature detector

equipped with a thermo-well and integral transmitter.
Temperature element and thermo-well will be spring-loaded and furnished as a
complete assembly, including well, nipple-union-nipple, and weatherproof connecting
head.
In general, package system and skid assembly, both elements of duplex
thermocouple/ RTD/ gauge and switch contacts shall be grouped together then
terminated at the field junction box.
Under the normal operating conditions, the radiation heat with ambient temperature rising
may affect the transmitter, hence the devices shall be arranged in a such way that
connection head and transmitter do not become warmer.
2.5.2. Temperature Transmitter
Generally, the temperature transmitter will be assembled with thermocouple/RTD

temperature sensing element and generate the standard 4-20mA signal where two
wires engaged with 24V DC power supply.
If temperature transmitter or temperature measuring devices are exposed to high
temperature considering together with ambient temperature, separated temperature
transmitter from the sensor shall be provided with extension wires up to the
transmitters. For the large motor and pump application, DIN rail type temperature
transmitter without an integral display can be allowed.
If temperature transmitter is located on the rack or inside the local boxes, the
compensating cable or extension lead shall be provided up to the transmitter with
proper terminal blocks in termination box.
2.5.3. Thermocouples and Resistance Temperature Detectors
Thermocouples shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of IEC 60584-

2, Class 2 and be preferable to the type K or E (Ni Cr / Ni alloy). However, type of
temperature element can be selected as per the operational condition and design
practices.
Thermocouple shall be duplex type and furnished in a stainless-steel sheath pack with
magnesium oxide insulation as well as ungrounded measuring junction unless
otherwise specified. One thermocouple cannot be connected to more than one
receiving instrument or control system.

POWER PLANT
Where extension leads are provided these shall have the same conductor materials
as those of the thermocouple. Thermocouple compensating cable shall be appropriate
to the thermocouple, right up to the point of cold junction compensation.
RTD shall be duplex type with stainless steel sheath, packed in magnesium oxide
insulation. The RTD shall be of Pt100 at 0 °C three wire and applied for measuring
values less than 350°C unless otherwise specified. The RTD shall be designed in
accordance with IEC 60751 Grade II and meet the standard limits of error.
2.5.4. Temperature Gauges
Temperature gauges shall be designed as per the ASME B40.3, grade A or better and
insensitive to the ambient temperature variations, shocks and vibrations.
Each indicator shall have a 100mm dial size as general and the scale shall be chosen
for easy reading so that the indication is roughly in the middle of the scale or ¾ scales.
The use of mercury or alcohol as a fill material is prohibited and filling fluid will not be
subject to vaporization during any operational conditions. Fill fluid viscosity will be
suitable for the application and not cause any sluggishness.
For the capillary type thermometer, the capillary shall be protected and material shall
be the stainless steel 316/316L as minimum including other fittings. Wrapping or
coated capillary tubes shall be laid and clamped on the tube tray properly to avoid any
damages and tube break.
The bulbs and other internal elements shall be of stainless steel as minimum unless
otherwise specified and have minimum 5m capillary length.
2.5.5. Temperature Switch
Temperature switches shall be the liquid and gas expansion type. The error for the
switches shall be limited within ± 2 % of the calibration range.
The switch rating shall be 5A at 230Vac or 1A at 30Vdc and contact type of switches
will be of the 2xSPDT or DPDT snap-action type golden plated. Where multiple pole
switches are furnished for one actuation point, actuation and reset of all poles shall
occur simultaneously.
2.5.6. Thermo-well
Thermo-well and material shall be designed and selected as per the ASME PTC19.3,
ASME B31.1 and ASME Section VIII, Div. 1 as well as project specific piping
requirements. Material for thermo-well used in alloy pipe, e.g. ASTM A335 GR P11, P22,
P91, or P92, shall match the corresponding pipe materials.
Thermo-well shall be designed as thread, weld or flange mounted as per ASME B16.11
and B16.5. Wells, solid drilled bar stock shall be stepless (except for air and flue gas

POWER PLANT
applications) tapered or straight construction but welded thermos-well tips are not
acceptable.
While thermo-well design, allowable insert length and velocity calculation via wake
frequency analysis for main steam service and high velocity gas or liquid shall be
conducted.
Thermo-well serial number, material or other identification shall be securely marked on
the thermos-well body. Test wells without permanently installed temperature element
shall have lagging extensions as needed to clear insulation with a stainless-steel plug or
cap for closure with non-welding chain.
2.6. FLOW MEASUREMENT

2.6.1. General Requirements
Flow measurement based on differential pressure shall be designed in accordance with

the BS EN ISO 5167.
Permanent pressure loss across the flow device shall be kept as minimum as possible.
The location for the primary flow element and straighteners shall take into account the
relative location of valves, bends, tees, reducers, etc. to ensure sufficiently long straight
sections both upstream and downstream and maximize the accuracy of the
measurement by minimizing turbulent flow.
The radial location of the tapping point shall take into account the nature of the fluid being
measured and be in accordance with BS EN 6739 as far as applicable. Where density,
temperature or pressure corrections are required, then such measurements shall be
made close to the flow meter within permissible distance.
2.6.2. Primary Flow Elements
To determine the rate of fluid flowing, BS EN ISO5167 for geometry and method of use
(installation and flowing condition) shall be utilized for orifice plate, nozzle, and venture
tube when they are inserted in a pipe works. DP flow devices for condensing level or
steam services shall be furnished with condensing reservoirs suitably rated for the
process conditions.
DP flow type meter in conjunction with orifice plates (or flow nozzles, etc,.) shall generally
be used except in the following cases;
• Where wide ranges of flow rate exist;
• Where limitations of system pressure drop;
• Where high viscosity liquids and slurries;
• Where piping configurations are restrictive;

POWER PLANT
The materials for the orifice flange, nozzles, venture tubes, etc. shall be identical to the
piping material in which primary element to be mounted. The material stiffness, and
strength of the meter and associated parts shall not be deteriorated by the working fluid.
Tags on orifice plates, and other design information (i.e. flow rate and direction, etc.) shall
be stamped or properly attached on element body.
Where DP device is not applicable, other flow meter such as magnetic flow, ultrasonic,
coriolis, turbine, positive displacement and vortex shedding type meter may be
considered as alternatives, depending on required accuracy of each application.
Pitot tubes shall be averaging and reverse/impact style including any required
straightening vanes, shrouds, etc. to ensure reliable/accurate flow measurement as
required.
2.6.3. Flow Transmitters
Requirements of the flow transmitter used in conjunction with flow element are described
under this specification in section of pressure measurement.
The root extraction of the measurements will be realized within DCS, however, indication
on local display shall show the corresponding flow measured value.
Except for the special flow measuring transmitters which may require a separate AC
power supply, all other transmitters shall generate the standard 4-20mA where two wires
engaged with 24V DC power supply.
2.6.4. Flow Indicators
Local flow indicators shall be selected properly as differential pressure type, propeller
type, lever type or floating body type in accordance with process condition.
Sight flow glass shall be of the through vision type, with an appropriate flapper and a
glass window. Flow direction shall be marked on flow indicator and/or element body.
2.6.5. Flow Switches
The switch rating and type shall be of 5A at 230Vac or 1A at 30Vdc and contact type of
switches will be the 2xSPDT or DPDT snap-action type golden plated. Where multiple
pole switches are furnished for one actuation point, actuation and reset of all poles shall
occur simultaneously.
The flow switch shall be chosen either below two types and piston type with integral
indicator.
• Differential pressure type
Important flows like pump recirculation, air flow, etc. shall employ differential pressure
actuating flow switches having high accuracy and repeatability, suitable for easy
switch adjustments between 20 % and 80 % of the flow scale.

POWER PLANT
The switch and instrument settings shall not get altered and/or the switch shall not
malfunction under excessive or severe vibrations or shocks.
• Float type switch with magnet
Flow switch where less accuracy is permissible like cooling water flow may employ
rota-metric flow meters with magnet operated switch where line size less than 50 mm
only.
2.6.6. Minimum Requirements of Magnetic Flowmeter
Electromagnetic flow meter will use electromagnetic induction to produce a dc voltage

proportional to the liquid flow velocity. Overall accuracy shall be better than ±0.5% of the
calibration range with repeatability within ±0.2%.
Electro-Magnetic flow meters, to protect equipment from damages from electrical surges
and measure correctly, the ground ring (ground gasket) with adequate accessories shall
be provided.
Electrodes shall be stainless steel 316/316L or better for the continuous operation with
operating process fluids. The sensor shall be protected as selected material itself or
additional lining that most suitable for the process fluid. If flange material is different to
the pipeline to be mounted, insulation kit for connection shall be provided.
2.7. LEVEL MEASUREMENT

2.7.1. General Requirements
Level measuring devices shall be capable of being removed without the drum, vessel,
tank or other equipment being taken out of service. It shall be possible to isolate the
measurement from the process by means of suitable tight shut-off valves conforming to
the pressure rating of the vessel.
2.7.2. Level Transmitters
The remote measurement for the liquid level shall be done generally by means of
differential pressure transmitters unless otherwise specified. Requirements of the level
transmitter in conjunction with level measurement shall be a differential pressure type
and its relevant requirement are specified within this specification.
For the corrosive, dirty liquids or foaming conditions, the ultrasonic/radar non-contact
devices are selected. And for the better accuracy and avoiding error from the foams on
the surface, the stilling well or protection tube may be used, if required according to the
installation condition.
2.7.3. Level Indicators and conductivity type level sensor
Transparent or reflex type gauge glasses shall be used where service conditions allow
but all tubular glass type gauges shall be furnished with safety protective shields. For the

POWER PLANT
local measurement at pressurized vessels (e.g. drum) the bicolor water indicator type is
preferred. If, glass gauges used at high temperature it shall be provided with mica coating.
Conductivity type level device shall include prefabricated water columns along with
plugged vent and drain connections. The probe and water column shall be factory
assembled and include a wiring junction box with pre-terminated high temperature
extension wire for connection to an externally mounted signal conditioning relay.
Electrode sensitivity shall be user adjustable to allow for variations in water purity.
However, no adjustment will be required over the normal operating range of pressure.
Electrodes shall be field replaceable and installed into the column with a gasket-less leak-
proof seal.
The electrodes shall be equipped with built in lightning or electrical surge protection.
Where conductivity type level devices are used, spare, minimum quantity of 5%, sensing
elements shall be furnished with the equipment.
2.7.4. Level Switches
The external float chamber type shall be used unless otherwise specified. The
construction, materials and connection shall comply with the ASME B31.1 as well as
project specific piping requirement. The level switches with float chamber shall be
provided with isolating, venting and drain valves.
Floats as well as internal mechanisms shall be made of stainless steel as minimum and
properly selected as per the process fluids including operating/ transient condition. These
internal mechanisms will include an adjustment of the working point and must be
insensitive to effects of vibrations and shocks.
The switch rating and type shall be of 5A at 230Vac or 1A at 30Vdc and contact type of
level switch shall be the 2xSPDT or DPDT snap-action type golden plated. Where
multiple pole switches are furnished for one actuation point, actuation and reset of all
poles shall occur simultaneously.
2.7.5. Radar / Ultra Sonic Level Transmitter
Radar type level transmitters shall be either guided wave or non-contacting technology
depending on the application. Non-contacting style shall be used for solids or liquids
where direct contact cannot be tolerated.
Wetted parts shall be 316/316L stainless steel as minimum but it shall be selected based
on process fluid and installation environment. Heat insulators shall be furnished between
the sensor and the transmitter where required by high process temperature.
Externally mounted guided wave radar probes shall be furnished with cages suitably
designed for the process conditions. Cages shall include flanged upper and lower
connections along with plugged drain and vent connections.

POWER PLANT
Guided wave sensors shall be coaxial, single rod-style, or cable guided as required for
the application. And the guided wave radar transmitters shall be furnished with on-board
dynamic compensation for temperature based changes in steam vapor.
Unless otherwise specified, ultrasonic level measurement shall comprise of a separate
transducer and a transmitter. Overall accuracy shall be better than ±1% of the calibration
range with a repeatability of ±0.5%. Ultra-sonic level measurement is accomplished by
the use of non-contact, echo-time measuring equipment operating at ultra-sonic
frequency. The equipment is transmitting pulses, which are reflected back to the sensor
from the surface of the liquid whose level is being measured.
2.8. VIBRATION MEASUREMENT

Vibration sensor shall be the non-contacting type and selected for protection in their
particular intended operation environment.
Vibration transducers shall be located at or adjacent to each machine bearing mounted
at tapped holes in the bearing housing or rigid bracket. In general, package equipment
and skid assembly, vibration measurement including reverse rotation switch shall be
grouped and terminated at the field junction box.
All cables and cable installation from sensor up to transducer local boxes shall be
supplied as pre-wired and terminated in a terminal block at shop and local box
arrangement near equipment shall take into account the platform and maintenance
access.
2.9. INSTALLATION OF FIELD EQUIPMENT, PANELS AND BOXES

2.9.1. Instrumentation
All process indicators, transmitters and electronic devices shall be mounted in a position
that readable at front and accessible without requiring the use of a ladder, a stepper or
the building of permanent or temporary platform.
Each device shall be mounted and piped so that removal, repair and replacement
accomplished without interruption of service of adjacent devices. Instrument shall be
arranged so that any instrument, equipment or device may be removed without
disturbing the service and operation or associated other instruments.
Transmitters and electronic devices shall be provided with stanchion, rack or secondary
enclosure including all necessary isolating, brackets, vent and blowdown valves with
interconnecting pipe works.
Electronic devices shall not be located close to hot lines, vessels or other hot
equipment or area where equipment is liable to experience the vibrations. In such cases,
the remote type of instruments, actuators and devices shall be arranged.
2.9.2. Installation of Impulse Lines

POWER PLANT
Instrument primary tubing shall be matched with the process operating pressure and
temperature to which the instrument impulse line is connected. The lines shall be neatly
installed, straight vertically and horizontally as far as applicable.
Unless otherwise specified, area where impulse line is liable to experience the vibrations,
or thermal shrink and expansion, all inter-connections of tubes shall be made by welding.
Impulse lines can be selected as per the following table, however, heavier wall tubing will
be used where required.
Out-Diameter of
Wall Thickness Condition Application
Tubing
Inch(mm), Material Inch (mm) Press. and Temp.
>=40 bar or 425 Steam/Water

½ (15), Preferred Size 0.083 (2.108)
degree C
316L
< 40 bar and 425 Steam/Water
0.065 (1.651)
degree C
0.038(0.9652) < 40 bar and 425 Instrument/

degree C Control Valve,
etc.
The impulse line shall be supported to allow thermal expansion, minimize vibration and
protect it from mechanical damage. Tube runs shall be supported both horizontally and
vertically. Where continuous support is required, support using tube tray is preferred.
The lines shall not be supported from structures directly or piping surface which subject
to the vibrations or corrosion due to dissimilar material. Sufficient clearance shall be kept
from all steel and concrete surfaces and the lines shall not run in direct contact with
painted or unpainted concrete surfaces.
Instrument piping and tubing shall not run across the face or rear of any device in a way
that will prevent the opening of covers or obstruct access to leads, terminals, or
instruments for servicing.
Material for line clamps, bolting, line raceways, and other supports shall be compatible
with material used for the impulse lines. In case of dissimilar materials are used, all
contact parts shall be properly segregated.
Sensing instruments and their associated valve manifolds will be located relative to the
process connection so that gas pockets in a fluid-sensing line or liquid pockets in a gas
or vapor sensing line can be avoided. Blow-down exhausts shall not exhaust onto
equipment or in areas which will create an unsafe condition and be routed group together
to the safe location or nearest pit.

POWER PLANT
The location of take-off points for pressure and flow measuring instrument shall normally
be decided as follows.
Take-off orientation Instrument

L i
Liquids Horizontal centerline Side take-off
Gases Vertical centerline Above take-off
Steam Horizontal centerline Side take-off
The primary isolating valve shall be located at the tapping point and be of the ball or globe
type and capable of being subjected to the pressure and temperature of the main line.
These tapping points shall be equipped with one root valve except for high pressure and
temperature installations. Double isolating valves shall be provided for high pressure and
temperature, if necessary or a pressure higher than 40 bar or 425 degree C. And devices
using for fuel and/or other toxic gases, double isolation with bleed function shall be
mandatorily provided.
At least two valves must be installed between the tapping point and any connections on
receiving units to enable the safe instrument disconnection. One valve must be located
at the tapping point on the plant and a second as an instrument isolation valve.
No stress shall be imposed through the connections between the pipe and the
instruments. Instrument installation materials, tube, tube fittings and manifolds shall be
standardized throughout the project to reduce spare supply inventories and minimize
rework time for replacement.
In saline or corrosive atmospheres or locations with high humidity all tubing and fittings
shall be SS 316L as minimum and painted, if required.
2.9.3. Instrument Air Supply and Signal Lines
All instrument and pneumatic equipment air piping shall be sloped so drainage toward
drip legs or moisture traps will be facilitated. An individual shut-off valve shall be installed
at each take-off from the branch of air supply lines to the equipment requiring instrument
air. In case of using distribution rack for instrument air, the common filter and regulator
with auxiliaries shall be installed.

POWER PLANT
The materials for pneumatic signal lines used in fabrication or installation shall be SS
316/316L unless otherwise specified. Where in saline or corrosive atmospheres or
locations with high humidity whenever corrosion can be expected, additional protection
measure shall be considered, if required.
2.9.4. Local Boxes/Enclosure/Racks
All instrument, equipment and control devices mounted in local boxes/ secondary
enclosures/ racks as well as themselves shall be identified with nameplates.
Local boxes/ secondary enclosures/ racks shall be completed with cable termination box
including internal wiring from devices to the terminal box for incoming and outgoing field
cables. It shall have the bonding jumper, cable bushings or glands and removable gland
plates for cable wiring with earth connection. These items shall be located for easy
accessible position so that the terminal face to the access direction for convenience
during installation and maintenance.
All wiring within panels, cubicles or racks shall be identified at both ends with a unique
number using permanently fixed and indelibly marked ferrules. Cross-ferruling technique
shall be adopted to ensure complete identification of individual wires. Termination of
cables in terminal blocks shall be carried out using appropriate lugs.
Multiple measurements shall be collected on open racks as far as possible and indicating
instruments shall be located and sized so that their dials are easily readable from the
operating levels.
Mounting of instruments on pump bases, foundations, where equipment is liable to
experience shocks and vibrations is strictly forbidden. Instruments shall not be mounted
close to locations where vibrations or shocks may occur.
Instrument tubing within enclosures or racks shall be arranged to allow any device to be
serviced, disconnected, or removed from the enclosure or rack without disconnecting
tubing to other devices. Tubing for external connections shall be terminated on a
bulkhead plate, utilizing bulkhead fittings for enclosures, or unions for open racks. Each
bulkhead termination shall be identified with a nameplate.
Special care is to be taken to avoid water and dust ingress through cable transitions/
process piping and tubing entrances. Draining leaked fluids or flushing, drain valves or
vent plug at the bottom shall be provided.
2.9.5. Junction Boxes
Junction boxes will be used to connect the instrument and control devices to the multi
cables laid to the control cubicles/local control panels. Junction boxes shall be
segregated as digital and analog and mounted wherever accessible from floor or
platforms without temporary platform, ladder, etc.

POWER PLANT
The junction box shall be made of stainless steel with painting in case of junction boxes
are installed in saline or corrosive atmospheres or locations with high humidity where
corrosion can be occurred, otherwise stainless steel shall be used. Alternatively, painted
carbon steel or GRP junction boxes can be provided. Thickness for removable bottom
plate of junction boxed for the cable gland connection or other accessories shall be
minimum 2 mm. But, internationally reputed OEM may apply their standard design,
provided that it is the most optimized idea and suitable for the purpose.
All junction boxes shall be identified with nameplates and have 20% spare terminals.
Junction box shall have the terminal blocks as well as identification numbering, drawing
pocket, bonding jumper and earth bar with earthing connection. Terminal size will be
suitable for 0.75 mm² to 2.5 mm² wire.
Cable gland hole diameter shall be designed suitably and all spare gland hole shall be
plugged with plug.
3. VALVE
3.1. GENERAL REQUIREMENT
Valves used for the control and isolation of the process fluids shall be designed,
manufactured and tested in accordance with the requirements of the IEC 60534, or
ANSI / ISA 75.01 or specified to which this document is attached, and in accordance
recognized international codes and standards.
Control valves shall be designed to give positive control, and free from cavitation over
the entire load range. Capacity of valve sizing shall be based on handling of the maximum
operation flow at 70% to 85% and it shall be sized to have an opening of 15% at minimum
controllable flow opening to 90% at maximum controllable flow.
Valve specification shall have the characteristic curve for opening versus flow rate with
minimum and maximum controllable flow including other information such as flow
characteristic, materials, noise aspect, applied code, positioner details, etc. Valve
arrangement drawing requires to include all minor components of valve internal assembly
with material construction.
The valves shall not create a sound pressure level, as defined by OSHA standards,
greater than 85 dB without using insulation and noise attenuation devices such as baffle,
silencer, and diffuser under specified operating conditions. Predicted sound levels shall
be estimated and described on the valve specification. If the sound level is exceeded
during normal operation, OEM’s recommendation shall be indicated how to reduce the
noise level and reduction method statement.
3.1.1. Valve Body

POWER PLANT
• Valves shall be compliant with ASME B16.34 requirements and the project specific
piping requirements.
• The minimum ASME class of all socket weld end shall be ASME Class 600. This
class shall be used for minimum limits of body/bonnet design.
• Field weld end preparation shall be compliant with ASME B16.25.
• Face-to-face dimensions shall be compliant with ASME B16.10.
• Mechanical indicator which can be checked the status of operation and valve
position shall be provided.
• Valves smaller than two (2) steps under the inlet pipe size are unacceptable.
• Where valve body requires a dissimilar metal field weld and end extensions, stress
shall be relieved and withstand such conditions.
3.1.2. Valve Bonnet
• The valve bonnet shall be same basic material as to the body and bolting shall
meet the requirement of ASME B16.5.
• Packing and gaskets shall be the most suitable for the service conditions. But,
asbestos materials are not acceptable.
• Proper packing design for pressure-vacuum service as specified on the
specification shall be provided and tested. Packing test at a shop shall be done at
FAT and test result report shall be submitted. If, packing is not suitable to the
proposed valve, water connection may can be used to pressure-vacuum service
alternatively.
• Body gaskets shall be spiral wound metal gasket or most suitable type and
selected meeting the manufacturer design requirement.
• If a lubricator is not specified, the stuffing box shall be drilled, tapped, and plugged
so that a lubricator may be used later, if required.
• If any accessories to be required for valves, it should be installed in enclosure box
attached to valve bonnet or yoke.
• Tubing and accessories shall be attached to the body or yoke with proper plate for
easy installation and maintenance.
• Protecting stem and hydraulic actuator mover which exposed at outdoor
environment from corrosion and sand, dust, additional protection measure shall be
provided.
3.1.3. Trim
• Reliable and well proven trim design to meet the specified service conditions shall
be considered by manufacturer and to be provided.

POWER PLANT
• Multi-stage valves shall be used on services having very high pressure drops
which would result in supersonic velocity inside a body or shock waves in the piping
system or unacceptable noise levels.
• Trims shall be designed to give positive control and free from cavitation over the
entire load range.
• The maximum seat leakage shall meet the requirements of ANSI/FCI 70.2 or MSS-
SP- 61 as applicable for the intended use but minimum requirement shall be the
Class V.
• Trim parts must be the quick change type and no trim component including the
seat ring shall be welded or screwed into the valve body or bonnet.
• Trim shall be sized to maintain the control when modulating between maximum
and minimum flow rates. The valve shall have sufficient capacity to pass 110
percent of maximum stated flow.
• Where reduced trim is required, it shall be reduced diameter design only, and not
reduced stroke or port within full-size cage.
3.1.4. Accessories
• Accessories, such as position indicator, limit switch, solenoid valve, position

transmitter (HART enabled), air set and others as necessary shall be supplied
where required.
• Pneumatic accessories shall be suitable for outdoor service, with 1/4" NPT (F)
connections, unless otherwise specified. All pneumatic field instruments, control
valves and devices shall be equipped with individual air filter-regulator sets and
gauges.
• Pressure gages for input, output and supply shall be provided with the positioner.
Two pressure gages for single acting type and three pressure gauges for double
acting type as minimum.
• The supplied air set shall be capable of filtering and reducing pressure, and it shall
provide the integral relief function with pressure gauge for indication.
• For valve position feedback the position feedback transmitter shall be integral to
the valve positioner. Positioner shall be field adjustable for stroke and reversible.
Output signal shall be 4-20mA with a two-wire, 24V DC supply.
• If volume tank and other sub local panels are envisaged, any accessories required
for the operation and installation shall be provided with detail installation drawings.
• In case of actuator has its own or separate control panels, interconnection cables,
pneumatic wirings, volume tanks, all required installation materials shall be provided
with valve assembly.
• Limit switches shall actuate at open or closed or intermediate position as required.
Contact interrupting shall be 1A 30VDC. Field cables shall be connected to valve

POWER PLANT
accessories without additional terminals and its boxes. Pig tail ends as rolled outer
of limit switch boxes are not acceptable. The terminal boxes attached to the
actuator body or yoke with all cable connection accessories shall be provided.
3.1.5. Identification
The followings shall appear on the valve body as minimum information either in cast form,
stamping, a stainless plate or any combination marked in accordance with ASME B16.34.
• Manufacturer's name or trademark
• Body material, ASME class and size
• Flow direction
3.2. ACTUATOR
3.2.1. General Design Requirements
Actuator shall be either of the pneumatic, electrical or hydraulic type for the specified
service condition and operable through entire working range. Actuator shall give the
smooth function without sticking, rubbing, vibration or scouring on opening and closing
and shall not be objectionably noisy when throttling.
The actuator shall be sized to control the valve action from fully modulating to shut-off
condition without excessive oscillation or hunting caused by fluid produced disturbances.
All actuators shall be sized to shutoff against at least 130% of the maximum shut-off
pressure differential and achieve a stable fluid control over the entire flow range.
All actuators shall have the protection class IP 65 or better and designed for continuous
operation in local climatic condition specified elsewhere.
Actuators shall be provided with a local control facility, which in general will be used for
test and local operation where the requirement is specified. But an auxiliary hand wheel
shall be supplied as mandatory. Hand wheels shall be disengaged in a neutral position
when the valve is in normal operation. The face of each hand wheel shall be clearly
marked with the words “Open” and “Closed” in English with adjacent arrows to indicate
the direction of rotation to which each refers.
The failure response of all actuators in the event of loss of prime mover (air pressure, oil
pressure, electrical power) shall be indicated on the valve specification.
3.2.2. Electrical Actuator
Electrical actuator shall be equipped with limit and torque switches designed to operate
at the fully open or the fully closed position and at the intermediate position of the valve
providing contacts for control, position indication, interlocking, and operation of
auxiliary equipment.

POWER PLANT
The gear reducer shall be in a weatherproof housing and conform to the standards of
the AGMA. Motor operated valve linkages shall be simple, rugged and reliable in
design with provisions for lubrication.
Mechanical stops which are a part of the motor driven assembly shall be included to
prevent equipment damage due to over-travel of the driven member by manual or
automatic operation, with manual operation electrically interlocked.
The power unit for the electric motor actuators for isolating and/or control and/or dampers
shall be an integral part of the actuator, i.e. the starter function by means of contactors
for open/close drives or by means of thyristor for control drives shall be integrated directly
onto the drive module.
A separate external control power is not envisaged so control power shall be derived and
internally distributed to the actuator. And jumper codes or pre-wired cables, in case of
using common terminal in the schematic, shall be pre-wired at shop.
Under the normal operating conditions, the radiation heat with ambient temperature rising
may affect the actuator or vibrations envisaged near the actuator then the power control
unit shall be separated and installed in the vicinity of the actuator.
3.2.3. Pneumatic Actuator
Pneumatically driven control valve, equipment assemblies shall be provided with electro-
pneumatic positioner, limit switches, position transmitter, pressure gauges, air filter
regulator set, air lock relay and hand wheel at least.
On failure of instrument air, electronic signal and/or power supply it shall be possible to
design the valve to open, to close or to remain in the last position. Where "lock up"
devices are provided on those services requiring the actuator to remain in the position
prevailing immediately before an operating medium failure.
All pneumatic tubing shall use the SS 316L double ferrule type tube fittings. All pneumatic
connections shall be ¼” NPT (F) unless otherwise specified. Air tubing, fitting or
connection nipple sizes shall not be less than ¼” NPT. However, if OEM requires bigger
size tubing due to the actuator force, it is possible to use.
3.2.4. Solenoid Actuator
Solenoid valves may be used in small bore piping systems where operation of the valve
is limited to intermittent operation.
Solenoids shall have sufficient thermal capacity for continuous energization. Solenoids
designated as "DC" shall be suitable for continuously energized operation from a 24V DC
power source.
For the electrical connection of solenoid valve, the terminal box shall be provided and pig
tail cable end without cable connection terminal is not acceptable.

POWER PLANT
• The solenoid valves shall be of standard weather - and water-proof type. The
insulation of the coils shall be of class "F" but, in case of solenoid valves installed
in process line directly, class shall be “H”.
• The solenoid valves shall have a manual testing facility with a tool or special key
for testing purposes, if required and normal status indication to avoid misuse/mis-
operation.
• Solenoid valves shall be operated by an electromagnet and single coil(solenoid)
unless specified. With dual coils, the valve will not change position unless one (1)
of the coils becomes energized.
• The valve body portion of the solenoid valve used for process shall be suitable
material and rating for the fluid, temperature and pressure involved.
• Solenoid valves shall have sufficient capacity as expressed in Cv to handle the
flows of applicable process fluid and also to operate with sufficient speed when
acting as a pilot for opening or closing control valves or operating any type of
actuator.
• Material of valve parts in contact with the process fluid shall be suitable for the
process fluid and its operation condition.
Solenoid valves shall be the adequate size to insure proper operation and have soft seats
to insure tight shut off.
3.2.5. Hydraulic Supply Unit (Hydraulic Power Unit)
Hydraulic actuator and supply unit shall be compact, heavy duty design and meet the
force, stroke and travelling time requirements of the valves. The hydraulic supply unit
shall be self-contained and capable of operating at an outdoor ambient temperature.
Actuator stroke and torque shall ensure that valves fully close or open against the
maximum differential pressure and stems shall be designed for maximum unbalanced
forces considering both specified flow conditions at all operating conditions and specified
maximum differential pressure.
Two (2x 100%) full capacity electric motor driven main oil pumps with one operating and
the other as stand-by shall be sized. Switch over from main to standby pump and running/
stop should be automatic based on hydraulic oil pressure setting and HPU conditions.
The pumps shall be vertically mounted positive displacement type complete with suction
strainer, suction check valve, mounted on the oil tank.
The hydraulic power unit shall have main charging and filtration circuit. Main charging
circuit shall ensure supply of clean oil to the valve actuators at the required pressure and
temperature. Filtration for charging/ filling the oil tank circuit shall have a separate filter
pump, which runs to keep the oil in the tank always clean. Oil cooler, if required, shall be
located in the filtration circuit, and oil temperature shall be kept within acceptable limits.

POWER PLANT
Hydraulic accumulator shall be provided in the system to ensure positive supply of

adequate pressure to the hydraulic actuators even when the main and stand by oil pumps
are not available. Reserve volume in accumulator shall be adequately sized to ensure
supplying minimum two (2) complete stroking operations of all connected actuators after
trip of main pumps at the similar actual load condition. Necessary safety valves shall be
supplied to avoid over pressure of the hydraulic oil system.
All piping/ tubing between hydraulic oil supply unit and each actuator, complete with
flexible hose connections near actuators, stop valves, high pressure filters, flow control
devices, couplings and fittings shall be assembled at shop to the highest extent.
All components in contact with hydraulic fluid shall be stainless steel and fire resistant
fluids shall be used to the hydraulic oil system. All items of hydraulic unit shall be self-
draining to the oil tank. A drip tray shall be supplied together with hydraulic supply unit &
actuator and sized sufficiently to allow all the pipe drains and actuators in to the tank.
Hydraulic actuator shall have IP65 protection degree and all exposed components on
the HPU shall be properly protected from the sun radiation, sand and dust. HPU itself
shall be provided with top and three side covers so that protected against direct sun
radiation and particular site climatic conditions. The name plates, tag, indicator, and
identification are to be of such material that no peeling-off or discoloration will take
place with age and outdoor climatic condition.
Hydraulic power unit controller, completely wired with HPU instrumentation, operational
and display units necessary for commissioning, shall be located in a local control panel
and interfaced with DCS for the remote operation of HPU.
3.3. SELF ACTING SPRING LOADED REGULATOR

Self-acting pressure regulators may be spring loaded unless otherwise specified. Each
valve shall be designed to pass the fluid, as specified, at the required capacities, pressure,
and temperatures, and shall be operated satisfactory under all operating conditions.
The design of body, trim, spring, accessories, etc. for each self-acting pressure regulators
shall be suitable for the specified conditions and shall be best suited for the purpose
intended.
Set point or set pressure shall be adjustable by hex nut and be factory set as per the
process condition as specified on data sheet, however, the pressure regulator shall be
field adjustable over the entire range.
All materials used in diaphragm assemblies shall withstand the temperature and fluid
characteristics.
3.4. SAFETY AND RELIEF VALVE

POWER PLANT
Safety and relief valves shall be designed in accordance with international code such as
API, ASME. The safety valves shall have ASME test certificates including stamped with
V, UV mark except water service.
The pressure relief valve must open at a predetermined set pressure, flow a rated
capacity at a specified overpressure, and close when the system pressure has returned
to a safe level.
Pressure relief valves must be designed with materials compatible with all process fluids
from simple air and water to the most corrosive media, with means to derive maximum
fluid capacity for a given pipe size, and with consistently smooth stable operation on all
fluids and fluid phases.
Pressure relief valves on clean non-toxic, non-corrosive systems may be vented directly
to safe atmosphere area or silencer. Pressure relief valves on corrosive, toxic or valuable
recoverable fluids are vented into close system. Valves that vent to the atmosphere,
either directly or through short vent stacks, are not subjected to elevated back pressure
conditions.
All valves shall be suitable for outdoor installation under consideration of the special
climatic and environmental condition. Wedge or disc and seat ring materials shall be
better than the body and bonnet material.
Tight shut off of pressure relief valves shall be achieved to remain on systems for long
periods of time under widely varying conditions of pressure and temperature.
The valves shall be furnished with a gagging device for using during system hydrostatic
testing. The test gag shall be suitable for easy installation and removal without
disassembly of the valve. The set pressure shall be adjustable without causing damage
to the seating surface and valves shall be equipped with lifting lever.
4. INSTRUMENT AND CONTROL CABLE

4.1. GENERAL
The instrument and control cables will be designed to have a long service in the
working condition and installation at prevailing site environment. Cables are suitable
for under and above-ground installation, in indoor or outdoor locations, and in wet or
dry locations, in underground ducts, exposed conduits, and trays, direct buried
(armored cable only) and for exposure to direct sunlight.
Splice and/or rework of insulation and jacket shall not be accepted in any cases.
4.2. STANDARDS AND REGULATION FOR CABLE

The instrumentation and control cables shall comply with the latest edition of the
appropriate standards of the followings as minimum;

POWER PLANT
IEC 60228 : Conductor of insulated cables
IEC 60502-1 : Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories
for rated voltages from 1kV(Um=1.2kV) up to
30kV(Um=36kV) Part 1. Cables for rated voltages of
1kV(Um=1.2kV) and 3kV(Um=3.6kV)
IEC 60811 : Common test methods for insulated and sheathing materials
of electric cables
IEC 60331 : Test for electric cables under fire conditions
IEC 60332-1,3 : Test for vertical flame propagation for a single insulated wire
or cable
IEC 60754-1,2 : Test on gases evolved during combustion of materials from

cables
IEC 61034 : Measurement of smoke density of cables burning under

defined conditions
EN 50228-7 : Multi-element metallic cables used in analogue and digital

communication and control
IEC 60189-2 : The cores of multi-pair cables shall be color coded.
4.3. DETAILED DESIGN AND CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENT FOR CABLE

Basically, cable will be protected by galvanized mechanical protection, or laid on the
cable and perforated tray without cover for short distance. But the following area may
apply different type of cable installation.
• On the Skid (Manufacturer and OEM standard)
• On the Equipment (Manufacturer and OEM standard)
• End of cable/ perforated tray to the instrumentation, junction box, cubicles, and
entrances for the cable termination
• Under the cable access floor
• In case of using armored cable
For the sealing of cable penetration to the local control panel, junction box and control
cubicle in the electrical building, cable gland, conduit bushing or fire resistance
sealant/form will be utilized as per the allowable site condition.
All multi-pair and multicore cables are having a minimum cross-sectional area of
1.0mm2 but multicore for control cables which has control power will have a minimum
cross-sectional area of 1.5 mm2.

POWER PLANT
Outer jacket of jacketed cable shall be permanently marked so as to identify the

manufacturer, voltage, type of insulation and jacket material, number and size of
conductors, year of manufacture and sequential footage.
The individual conductors of multi-conductor cables shall be identified by printing
numbers (1, 2, 3, etc.) on single color insulation or jacket. Identification markings shall
be at intervals not to exceed 625 mm (24 inches).
• Conductor
The conductor shall be solid or stranded annealed Tinned copper conductor.
The pitch will be under 16times of the conductor diameter.
• Tape
As binder, polyester tape shall be applied between conductor and insulation.
• Insulation
The insulation shall consist of an extruded layer of cross-linked polyethylene
(XLPE). The thickness at any point, however, shall be less than the nominal value
provided that the difference does not exceed 0.1 ㎜ + 10% of the nominal value.
• Binder & Drain Wire

PET or appropriate material binder and drain wire shall be applied.
• Shield
The Al/Mylar or Cu/Mylar tape (Approx. 0.05mm) with 100% coverage shall be
applied with the metallic side down in electrical contact with a tinned copper drain
wire. The drain wire shall have the cross-sectional area as follows; 0.5 mm2.
Individual shield shall be applied for each pair conductors.
• Outer sheath
The outer sheath shall be an extruded layer of black flame retardant, Low Smoke
Zero Halogen (LSZH), UV Protection.
Cables used for intrinsically safe circuits shall have a blue outer sheath in
accordance with IEC 60079-14.
Multi pair and core cables including fibers between local control panel, junction box
and DCS I/O cabinet will preserve maximum 20% spare cores, if applicable. And then
it will be well-dressed using heat shrinkable tube in the panel cable duct and junction
box with marking as spare for future extensions. However, avoiding any short on the
terminal block, spare cables will not be terminated.
5. CONTROL CUBICBLES, LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND

JUNCTION BOXES
5.1. GENERAL

POWER PLANT
At least 10% free-space shall be available in control cubicles, local control panels and
junction boxes for easy installation and future extension.
Cubicles, local panels, marshalling and boxes, hereinafter referred to as ‘panel’, shall
be furnished with necessary provision for convenience outlets, internal lighting,
grounding, ventilation, space heating, drawing pocket, anti-vibration pads, shock
absorber, internal piping and accessories as required. In case of space heater
installation in the panel, its location shall be properly allocated to avoid internal heat
affect to the components.
Modular design, 10% reserved free space for additional components in the panel and
20% spare of each type I/O modules with terminal block for future use.
Panels shall be equipped with adjustable temperature supervision, ventilation fans
with initiating an alarm to the control system in the event of failure. IP rating, certificate
and panel fabrication information details should be documented and provided. Suitable
size of drawing pocket shall be provided.
The auxiliary EPB should be pushed to lock and key to release type, individual push
button provided with protection shroud.
5.2. CONSTRUCTION
Using steel plate and metal sheet, minimum thickness 2.0 mm, necessary internal
brackets and structural steel framework, exterior shall be furnished to support cable
ways, incoming/outgoing cables, wiring, tubing, terminals, and other appurtenances.
Each panel section shall be built and reinforced so that no discernible deflection will
occur because of internal appurtenances and interconnecting wire way weights.
Adequate ducts, trays or supports shall be provided for the field cabling within the
enclosures.
Nameplate shall be clearly visible in front and rear of the panel and identification of
each component, equipment also shall be allocated the adjacent to their location.
Trafollyte permanent label shall be provided on device or near the device for easy
identification, however, such permanent attachment shall not be on an ordinarily
replaceable part. Sticker type of ID/ label are not allowed.
Doors of panels shall be supported by hinges to permit around 120 degree swing and
furnished with a handle and locking latch sufficiently strong to hold them in alignment
when closed. The doors shall be the lift-off type secured with 3-point locking system
including door stopper and doors shall be structurally stiff and braced to withstand
twisting without distortion.
For ventilation purposes, panel doors and other areas shall be louvered and screened
with filter. Wherever louvers for ventilation are foreseen, they shall be equipped with
washable filters for specified protection classes.

POWER PLANT
Except wall mount type of panel, each panel section shall be provided with two door
front and rear access unless otherwise specified. And each panel shall be a maximum
of 2200mm high, 800mm wide and 800mm deep unless otherwise specified in the
project specification.
Inside the panel, for the power terminal block, transparent protection covers with
warning sign shall be provided.
However, if Supplier uses different methods as per the internationally reputed vendors
like Rittal, the same shall be subjected to approval.
5.3. WIRING
All control and auxiliary panel shall be manufactured and assembled with all internal
wiring connected to terminals blocks, requiring only connection to external cable
wirings. All wiring shall be arranged to permit future changes or additions with
minimum relocation of existing wiring.
Wires shall not be spliced or tapped between terminal points. Each wire installed in
the panel shall be identified by a plastic sleeve or similar permanent marker. But,
instrumentation and control cables including individual wire and conductor which are
foreseen for incoming/outgoing shall be labeled in both ends as per the typical
interface diagram as per the 19CN-00GEN00-J11-0001.
Wiring identification required position shall identify the wiring with permanent indelible,
identifying markings, either numbered or colored, heat shrinkable tube or ferrules, on
both ends of cable cores. Ferrule tube with “Spare” indication at shrinkable sleeve
shall be provided to the spare cable.
Wiring shall be run in wire ways or shall be neatly grouped in packs by using
nonmetallic wiring tie or bands. Wiring groups shall be substantially supported.
5.4. TERMINAL BLOCK

Separate terminal blocks shall be provided for incoming and outgoing analogue and
digital signals and power supply connections. Each terminal block shall be clearly
identified and labelled. Layout shall permit convenient access to terminals and enable
ferrule numbers to be easily read. Terminals shall be at appropriate height from the
cable incoming to facilitate easy routing of wires.
Terminal block shall include 20 percent spare terminals after all external cables have
been terminated except consideration of spare cores. Terminal blocks shall be
mounted with sufficient clearance from wire ducts (50 mm minimum on each side).
Top of terminal blocks shall not be recessed more than 10 mm from the top of the
adjacent wire ducts.

POWER PLANT
Complete and permanent identification of terminal blocks and terminal points shall be
alphanumeric, with each terminal block having unique identifying letter(s). Terminal
block covers shall be marked and provided.
5.5. GROUND BUS

Each free standing panel shall contain labelled, at least 6.0mm by 25mm (minimum),
two copper ground buses. One isolated ground bus shall be used for all cable shields
and instrumentation ground applications, the other shall be used for power ground
application.
Each ground buses shall be installed inside, near the bottom entry; and shall be bolted
to the freestanding panel structure.
5.6. LIGHTING
The interior of each free standing panel shall be lighted by fluorescent fixtures or LED
suitably located. Lighting shall be automatic turn on and off by a door switch.
Panel lighting shall be provided to ensure adequate illumination for carrying out
delicate adjustments, maintenance or repairs on small items of equipment.
5.7. PANEL EQUIPMENT

Surface mounted push button and switches shall be complete with protection cover to
avoid the mal-operation. The lamp on the front surface shall be properly allocated to
visible even the day time and fit with the service description.
Located outdoor or otherwise prone to suffer from internal condensation of moisture
are to be fitted with electrical heating devices of such capacity as to raise the internal
temperature slightly against the external ambient temperature.
A temperature monitoring device (such as an adjustable set point temperature switch
including contact for alarm) shall be installed in the control cubicle in case of none air
conditioned outdoor installation.
All instruments, fittings, valves, wetted component, etc. as parts of system component
shall have the tag plate without service description however, main equipment even
those are small and the tag plate with service description shall be attached.
Panels shall be equipped with an earth leakage protected double socket for portable
laptops/ commissioning equipment. Receptacle type shall be in conformance with local
standards.
5.8. FABRICATION
Free standing panels shall be completely enclosed (with rear doors) and self-
supporting using an all welded angle iron frame to ensure rigid construction.

POWER PLANT
Panel bases shall be fabricated from steel channels that shall be detachable from the
structure to allow for shimming between the base and the structure. Panel bases shall
be suitable for mounting on structural steel foundations, prefabricated floor modules
or concrete block out as appropriate site condition.
From the bottom of control cubicles, and local control panels, the cable duct and wiring
terminal blocks shall have minimum 400mm gap for easy cable installation. Skirt for
the PLC and local panel shall have minimum 300mm height.
All openings, penetrations and cut-outs for walls, floors and roofs, required for piping
work, miscellaneous supports, cabling and bus ducts, etc., shall be protected and
covered. Special attention shall be paid to the proper sealing/closing of cable entries
etc.
All panels shall be furnished with lifting lugs to support the entire panel weight during
site installation.
6. PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER (PLC)

6.1. GENERAL
The PLC system shall comprise of a central processing unit, input/output modules,
serial interface modules and programming units, etc. for complete functioning of the
system. The PLC shall include 20% spare capacity in hardware and memory for future
modification purpose.
Each system element shall be designed such that the failure of any one element shall
not affect the operation of any other element nor require the outage of any running
element to replace or repair the faulty element.
• PLC diagnostic indications shall, but not limited to, include the following;
- Power supply
- Low battery
- CPU fault
- I/O status
• The CPU (Central Processing Unit) shall, but not limited to, perform the following
function;
- Scan all inputs, execute relay ladder logic programs and generate outputs for
the final control elements
- Monitor status of system hardware and provide diagnostic information
- Random Access Memory (RAM) for real time program execution with battery
backup for data retention and EEPROM flash backup for permanent storage
PLCs shall be supplied complete with a laptop programming and diagnostic device
plus all necessary leads and programming software & manuals. When a local

POWER PLANT
computer is installed and connected to the PLC locally, the PLC programming software
shall be installed in the same computer and provided the necessary cables/adaptors
required for programming.
Panel mounted display (local HMI), minimum 17” size, unit shall be provided for man
machine interface, as a permanently connected means of accessing set points, timer
settings, control and monitoring locally.
The HMI shall be pre-programmed to provide a basic graphical display of the process.
Real-time numeric display of process variables and alarm messages shall be available.
All process control functions shall be accessible for the operator from the HMI.
The signals coming from double or triple redundant measuring devices have to be
connected to different data acquisition modules in different frames of the process
station or of the plant protection system, so that the sensor redundancy is truly
reflected in the structure of these stations.
Basically, measurements serving for interlocking and protection in the protection
system shall be configured as dual or triple redundant with 2 out of 2 or 2 out of 3
voting selections. In case of redundant measurements with analogue transmitters the
protection signal may also can be taken from the analogue signals as a result of 2 out
of 2 or 2 out of 3 voting selections of the limit-monitoring functions. For the most critical
measurements which may cause the total plant trip, a triple independent measurement
scheme will be applied.
The measurements where necessary for control and monitoring will be provided in an
adequate amount in accordance with the process and safety requirements of the
relevant system.
The PLC used as Safety Instrumented Systems intended to provide protection for
people, property and the environment against deviations in the processes then IEC
61508, IEC 61511 shall be followed to determine, design, and build IPL´s and
especially the Safety Instrumented Systems. The devices used shall meet the Safety
Integrity Level (SIL) categories according to the applicable standards.
Every safety related loop has to be verified according to the standard IEC 61508, IEC
61511 that the requested and necessary Safety Integrity Level (SIL) is fulfilled for the
individual loop.
6.2. MINIMUM FUNCTIONS ON THE DCS AND COMMUNICATION

The signal exchange with the DCS is limited as per the 19CN-00GEN00-J07-0002
Black Box Systems (Self-Controlled Systems) and shall comprise mainly the following
for control and monitoring on the DCS.
• Overall group On/Off commands and individual drive or sub function group On/Off
command

POWER PLANT
• Group alarm annunciation for process, control and electrical faults

• Important individual alarms, if important for the generation
• Diagnostic alarms of PLC, and component
• Input/output data of the process system, such important and control aspect to BOP
DCS for the operation
PLC control system shall employ open protocols to allow maximum compatible with
other control equipment. PLC should not have any restriction on data exchange with
DCS over open protocol.
Redundant communication network between package control system and DCS shall
be highly reliable, high speed protocol and fully bidirectional designed for real-time
process control and monitoring. It shall be redundant communication link for remote
monitoring, operation and supervision.
Communication link to the programmable logic controller (PLC) from the DCS is
allowed for monitoring purposes and very limited operation in case of hardwired
signals are not available. The communication protocol between DCS and package
control shall be the MODBUS TCP/IP unless otherwise specified.
PLC shall have the media converters and fiber distribution frame for data
communication interfaces as pre-wired in the panel between packaged control system
and DCS with enough spare port.
6.3. HARDWARE REQUIREMENT

PLC systems shall be a single fault-tolerant, microprocessor-based design that
protects the controlled process from intermittent, transient, and permanent system
faults.
PLC shall be standardized throughout the power plant in order to rationalize operation,
maintenance and reduce spare parts. Sub-contractor shall follow the project guidelines
while choosing his equipment.
For monitoring and control of the BOP package system, the PLC shall be applied with
the following features;
• Modular design, 20% reserve space with terminal blocks available for additional
modules and 20% spare of each type I/O cards and modules for future use. All the
spares shall be installed and wired.
• Number of modules shall be in accordance with the redundancy of the plant
components.
• All signal of input/output subsystem shall be equipped with interposing relay or
isolator to shield from external electrical noises. Where the input from an external
source is not volt-free then suitable isolation devices shall be provided in order to

POWER PLANT
prevent cross-connection of different supplies. This device may be e.g. interposing

relay or optical-isolator. Appropriate provisions shall be provided so that all I/O
signals shall be able to protect electrical surge.
• Redundant CPU's with power supply, power supplies (working power for input and
output cards) and networks with hot back-up function.
• The standby processor shall automatically take over the function of the primary
processor without any upset to the process, or other functions in case of the
primary processor failure. Failure of any of these components should not affect the
operation of the system; however failure of any of these components shall cause
an alarm.
• Maximum CPU loading for the PLC shall not exceed 70 percent under the worst
operating condition. The PLC memory shall be adequate for all designated tasks
plus a reserve of 20% and shall be capable of future expansion.
• Self-diagnostic function and display operating status (normal and abnormal
conditions) on LCD station or front HMI. Each module shall have LED indicators at
the front side of each module for fault status.
• Signals used for protection, interlock and critical operation shall be strictly
segregated in racks, modules and terminal boards. Inputs signals from 'DUTY'
equipment shall not be allocated to the same input module as signals from
'STANDBY' equipment performing the same function.
• The PLC panel shall be furnished as free-standing panel to contain all system
instrumentation and controls (excluding local instruments). The panel shall contain
all PLC modules, relays, contactors, signal lamps, disconnecting and control
switches, alarm devices and contacts, fuses and terminals. It shall also be
equipped with socket outlet and lighting. The panel shall be equipped with the
facility, such as space heater, cooling fan, etc. to be appropriately prevented from
the environment of site.
In the case of power supply failure to the PLC any volatile memory shall be maintained
by back-up battery under normal service conditions. There shall be a warning made
when the battery volts are low. No loss or corruption of memory shall occur when the
batteries are changed. All PLC shall provide the memory card inserted in PLC CPU
for back up.
6.4. SOFTWARE REQUIREMENT

Latest software including operating system (OS) and application that are provided for
PLC system shall be supplied with proper permanent licenses. All necessary tools for
system configuration, programming, diagnostic and system maintenance shall be
included along with all necessary software packages. Any modifications to an existing
program shall be protected by password or key-switch security to prevent
unauthorized on line programming capability.

POWER PLANT
The engineering work shall be possible with the LCD station. Programming,
configuration and diagnostic by using LCD station shall be designed to be connected
and disconnected whilst the system is running.
If separate engineering station is not considered, then a note book (Laptop) of same
configuration shall be provided as a portable workstation for the engineering functions.
So that laptop shall have required PLC engineering software, diagnostic software and
final PLC programming back-up image.
On-line and off-line, CPU and I/O configuration and application program development
shall be achieved with a PLC compatible computer.
The programming devices shall have access to the application program, the CPU and
I/O system configurations, all registers, CPU and I/O status, system diagnostic relays,
and I/O over-ride capabilities.
6.5. PERIPHERAL
All peripherals to the PLC, such as man-machine interfaces, programming,
configuration and diagnostic equipment shall be provided. All necessary
communications and power supply cables shall be supplied complete with connectors.
The control consoles provided in the LCR shall be of robust, functional and suitable
for continuously manned operation. Workstation computers shall be housed in the
base of the console and protected against mechanical stress, dust and water ingress.
6.6. DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENT TO BE INTEGRATED WITH DCS

The following documentation, specific for the packaged control systems, shall be
prepared and submitted as minimum.
• Block diagram showing all cubicles/panels assigned including power supply and
internal/external signal exchange
• Signal exchange list with the DCS showing their assignment
• Description of the applied logic control system, explaining the basic system
configuration of the PLC
• Description of task by means of system description or functional diagrams
• LCD graphics with communication signal list with mapping address.
• Input/Output list via data link and hardwire
• Description of remote control and monitoring through DCS
All equipment supplied with his own control system, document, drawing and manual
shall be provided in accordance with project specific minimum document submission
schedule.

POWER PLANT
7. MANUFACTURER PROPRIETARY CONTROL SYSTEM (MPCS)

Manufacturer’s proprietary control systems, which mean a self-controlled packaged
system but not a kind of PLC, may be employed for the control and monitoring of a
component or a small auxiliary system. However, MPCS shall be being designed
dedicatedly for control purpose and integrated successfully with proven record at least
2 years operation.
The redundancy requirements same as stand for the control system shall apply to the
MPCS such as power supply, central processing unit and communication as minimum.
At least the status of the MPCS and its subsidiary component/ equipment, important
process alarms and overall system operation status shall be forwarded to the DCS. In
any case, protection and control/ monitoring related signals shall be made as hardwire
interconnection.
The overall system shall be monitored at the DCS so the MPCS shall be compatible
with the DCS interface and provide the industrial standard communication protocol.
Panels which housed the MPCS shall be equipped with lighting and anti-condensation
heater with automatic thermostat control. Panels shall be equipped with an earth
leakage protected double socket to power portable laptops/ commissioning equipment.
Appropriate local displays for the operation, maintenance, diagnostic and engineering
shall be provided as well as programming tools complete with licensed software for
site modification.
8. COLOR CODING OF INDICATION

8.1. GENERAL FORM
Decimal Point Display
Item Color Item
In Process Parameter
Range Max Format
<= 2 X.XXX
Background Light Grey
2 < Value
Process XX.XX
<=20
Value
Black
Equip. Service 20 < Value
XXX.X
Name <=200
Black

POWER PLANT
Tag. No for
Black 200 < Value XXX
Drive(Equip.)
8.2. MEANING OF COLOUR OF INDICATING DEVICES ON THE SCREEN

This section covers the typical graphic symbol form and color scheme of indication on
the screen of operator workstation and/or push button & lamps. Each control system
HMI shall strictly be followed the color scheme applied in the below table but form of
equipment and indication of status i.e normal, local/remote or test position, etc. may
differ based on the intended purpose or depending on the specification of interface to
the equipment.
Equipment Color Meaning Explanation Representation in HMI
Control Red Open Valve Open

Valve
Green Close Valve Close
Red & Middle Normal

Green Position Conditions
Amber Abnormal Fault Condition

*(Flickering)
On/ Off Red Open Valve Open

Valve /
MOV
Green Close Valve Close

POWER PLANT
Red & Middle Normal

Green Position conditions
Red & Opening Normal

Green conditions
Green Closing Normal

Red conditions

*(Flickering)
Pump/ Fan Red Start Motor Start
Green Stop Motor Stop

POWER PLANT

*(Flickering)
8.3. COLOR CODING FOR PUSH BUTTON & LAMPS ON THE SCREEN
Representation in HMI
Equipment Color Meaning Explanation Push
Lamp
Button
Push Red Start-up Open, Auto,

Button/ completion Run, On, Start,
Lamp of group Normal Raise,
Indication sequence Enable, Test,
or each Request,
sub-loop Remote
Green Start-up Close, Manual,

completion Off, Stop,
of group Release, Lower,
sequence Disable, Out,
or each Local
sub-loop
Amber Abnormal in
group sequence
Grey Default
Abnormal (Not working,
Not Activating),
Networks
abnormal
Above colour scheme can be used for the local control panel, local operation station
or panel front lamp indications. And action in case of checking the indication lamps,
black colour will be used.
All relevant single fault signals which are part of the group signal “Fault” shall be
indicated at the local control panel or push button station and latched until operator

POWER PLANT
reset. A facility to reset the indicated fault signals on the local panel or station and the
colour of the indication devices shall be as described above.
8.4. COLOR SCHEME
The color schemes used in the project will be followed below table to select color
based on RGB setting.
Process
CCPP Designation Color R G B
medium
ACID CHEMICAL 255 128 255
AIR AIR 255 255 255
AMMONIA SCR 165 130 215
GAS FUEL/FLUE GAS & H2 255 128 0
LIQUID FUEL OIL, DIESEL & LUBE OIL 128 64 0
OXYGEN O2 64 173 255
STEAM STEAM 255 0 0
STEAM HP HP STEAM 179 54 54
STEAM IP IP STEAM 255 90 95
STEAM LP LP / AUX STEAM 255 172 89
WATER_1 WATER 0 0 255
WATER_2 FEED WTR COND, DEMIN 135 205 122
WATER_3 COOLING WATER 0 205 155
WATER_4 RAW WATER 90 140 105
WATER_5 POTABLE WATER 46 139 87
8.5. FINAL COLOUR SCHEDULE FOR I&C EQUIPMENT

Choosing an appropriate coating or lining for the external or internal surfaces of I&C
equipment depends on the specific application, operating conditions, process fluid,

POWER PLANT
and other considerations. Coating, surface preparation or lining systems shall suitable
performance for the expected conditions.
Colour
Designation RAL- No. Remarks
Shade
DCS Cabinets including network, RAL 7035 Light Grey

PDB and server racks
SWAS & QMS, CEMS, AQMS, RAL 7035 Light Grey

VMS, PLC
Instrument Junction Box, Terminal RAL 7035 Light Grey If stainless steel used,
Box, Boxes painting is not
required.
Valve Actuator with handle(Motor, - - Manufacturer
Pneumatic, Hydraulic), HPU Standard
Field Instrument - - Manufacturer

Standard
Container, Sampling Rack, RAL 7035 Light Grey
Cubicle, Shelter, LCP and Local
Panel
In saline or corrosive atmospheres or locations with high humidity, adequate further

protection has to be considered.
The coating, paint materials, surface preparation and coating application as well as
other requirements of the system which are not fully described above shall be followed
as per the project painting specification.

FOR INFORMATION
B For Information 2020.04.22 Y.S.SOON H.B.BAE S.W.CHOI
A For Information 2020.04.21 Y.S.SOON H.B.BAE S.W.CHOI

Owner:
Owner’s Engineer:
Contractor:
Project Title:
General Technical Requirement for Electrical

Page
Drawing/Document No. Rev
no.
19CN-00GEN00-E02-0001 51 B
Power Plant
REVISION LOG
Rev.
Date Description
No.
First issue : Revision marked yellow box from the
A 2020.04.21
internal version issued 29-Jan-2020.
B 2020.04.22
Doc. Title : General Technical Requirement for Electrical Rev. B

Doc. No : 19CN-00GEN00-E02-0001 Page 2 of 51
Power Plant
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 DESIGN CONDITION.............................................................................04
2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CONFIGURATION ................................................. 12
3 400V SWITCHGEAR, MCCs, AC & DC DB & SUB-DBs ............................... 18
4 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE............................................................... 23
5 POWER, CONTROL, INSTRUMENTATION AND FO CABLES....................... 24
6 CABLE ROUTING .................................................................................. 29
7 LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER SYSTEM ................................................ 33
8 EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION ............................................ 39
9 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM ......................................................... 43
10 ELECTRICAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM(ECMS) .................... 44
11 EXPLOSION PROTECTION IN HAZARDOUS AREA ................................... 47
12 TEST AND INSPECTION ........................................................................ 47
13 NAMEPLATE FOR ELEC. PANEL, CABINET & BOX .................................... 49
14 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENT .......................................................... 50
Appendix
: Minimum Requirement for Motor

Power Plant
1 DESIGN CONDITION
1.1 General
The purpose of this Design Criteria is to describe the general requirements for the
design and installation of the electrical system for satisfactory operation of F3 Plant,
a green field power generation plant with a net power capacity of 2,000 to 2,400 MW
to be located at Qidfa in the Emirate of Fujairah on the Gulf of Oman coast.
1.2 Codes and Standards
As a minimum, all design, fabrication, and construction shall be based upon

applicable portions of the codes, standards, and regulations of the following
organizations including revisions and addenda in effect at the time of execution of
the Contract.
International Standards (shall prevail)
- IEC International Electro Technical Commission
- IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
- ISO International Standardization Organization
- IPCEA Insulated Power Cables Engineers Association
- ISA Instrument Society of America
- ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association
National Standards
- NFPA National Fire Protection Association
- OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration
- NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
- Applicable Rules and Regulations and standards of Transco Abu Dhabi

Transmission and Dispatch Company.

Power Plant
- The Electricity Transmission Code (The Abu Dhabi Transmission and Dispatch
Company)
- The Metering and Data Exchange Code (The Abu Dhabi Transmission and
Dispatch Company)
- Safety Rules for the Control, Operation and Maintenance of the State Electricity
Departments High Voltage System (First Edition 1978) as applicable.
- Standards & Specifications of local Government bodies/agencies as applicable.
The work must be performed in accordance with the latest revision of standards,
accident prevention regulations and legal regulations.
In the event that a conflict arises between codes and standards of practice
nominated, it shall be discussed and mutually agreed upon.
1.3 General Utility Source
1.3.1 Electrical System Nominal Voltage and Frequency
The nominal AC system frequency is 50 Hz, and the nominal voltage ratings and
system earthing employed shall be as follows:
System Operating Rated Voltage & Other

S.No System Earthing
Description range Parameters
400kV, 50Hz , 3Ph,
1 EHV System ± 5% Solidly Earthed.
63kA for 1 sec
2 Generator Voltage
As per OEM
recommendation
- with Neutal
2.1 GTG ± 5% 20 kV, 3 phase 50 Hz
Grounding
Transformer with
resistor in circuit
As per OEM
21/18 kV, 3 phase 50
2.2. STG ± 5% recommendation
Hz,
- with NGTR
Medium 11 kV, 50Hz, 3Ph, 40 Resistance
3 ± 5%
Voltage kA for 3 sec. earthed o limit

Power Plant
System Operating Rated Voltage & Other

S.No System Earthing
Description range Parameters
(6.9kV for FF pump) fault current to
400A.
Low 400/230 V, 50Hz, 3
4 ± 10% Solidly Earthed
Voltage ph, + N + PE
400/230 V, 50Hz,3 ph,

5 AC UPS ± 10% Solidly Earthed.
+ N + PE
6 DC ± 10% 220V, 2 wire for plant Ungrounded
Lighting
and Small 400/230 V 50 Hz, 3
7 ± 10% Solidly Earthed.
Power phase, + N + PE
Distribution
1.3.2 Short Circuit Level for Electrical System:
System Design Short Circuit

MV switchgear (11 kV) 40 kA, 3 Sec
LV switchgear and MCC (400 V) 50kA , 1Sec
Main Lighting Board (400/230 V) 12.5kA, 1Sec
Including Isolation Transformer
Sub-Lighting Board (400/230 V) 12.5kA, 1Sec
DC Switchboard (220 VDC) 25kA, 1Sec
Vital AC (UPS) Switchboard (400/230 V) 25kA, 1Sec
1.4 Site conditions
Electrical equipment and materials will be designed to give the specified rating at
the maximum ambient design temperatures given below:
Minimum Design Temperature : 0°C
Indoor equipment in air-conditioned room : 40C
Indoor equipment in room without air conditioning : 55C
Outdoor equipment : 55C

Power Plant
All outdoor structures shall be designed considering wind speed of 160 Km/h.
1.4.1 Basic Site Parameters
Reference Site Condition
Ambient Air Temperature °C 46
Relative Humidity % 40
Ambient Air Pressure mbar 1013
Sea water temperature °C 33
Transmission System frequency Hz 50
Ambient Air Temperature (Min) °C 1
Design Climatic Conditions
Minimum Design Temperature °C 0
Maximum ambient humidity % 100
Annual mean humidity % 61
Average annual rainfall mm 135
Maximum recorded rainfall in one day mm 100
Design Code UBC 97
Seismic Zone Factor 2A
Importance Factor I 1.25
Seismic coefficient 0.075
Seismic Reduction Factor R 4.5
Grid Frequency Hz 50

Power Plant
Design Wind Speed: Km/h 160
Solar Radiation: W/m2 973
Elevation above mean sea level + 5.75 m ACD.
1.4.2 Motor Voltages:
Voltage Specification
Motor
(Voltages at consumer terminals)
AC Motor Voltage
50Hz; 11kV, 3ph
Rated Power > 250kW
AC Motor Voltage
50Hz; 400V, 3ph
Rated Power ≤250kW
1.5 Voltage Regulation and total harmonic distortion at Transmission

system
1.5.1 Frequency Variation
The system frequency of the Transmission System shall be nominally 50 Hz with

system frequency set points between 49.950 Hz and 50.050 Hz and shall be
controlled within the limits 49.9 - 50.1 Hz unless exceptional circumstances prevail.
Under transient disturbed conditions, system frequency could rise to 53 Hz or fall

to 47 Hz. However, under disturbed steady state conditions, system frequency will
not exceed 51.5 Hz or fall below 48.5 Hz. Sustained operation outside the range of
48 - 53 Hz need not be taken into account in the design of plant and apparatus.

Power Plant
Below Nominal Above Nominal Operation

Frequency (Hz) Frequency (Hz) Requirement
49.9 – 49.95 50.05 - 50.1 Continuous
1.5.2 Voltage Variations
The voltage on the 400 kV parts of the Transmission System at each connection
site shall normally remain within ± 5% of the nominal value. The minimum voltage
is -10 % and the maximum voltage is +10% but voltages between +5% and +10%
will not last longer than 15 minutes unless abnormal conditions prevail.
1.5.3 Earth Fault Factor and Insulation
The Transmission Systems are designed to be earthed with an Earth Fault Factor
below 1.4. Under fault conditions, the fundamental frequency phase-to-earth
voltage of one or more phases could vary between 0 - 140 %.
1.5.4 Voltage Fluctuations
Repetitive step changes in the voltage at the Connection Point shall not exceed 1%.
Any large voltage excursion of up to 3% may be acceptable in case of non-step
changes.
Flicker severity (short term) of 0.8 Unit or a Flicker Severity (long term) of 0.6 Unit
as set in IEC 61000-3-7 shall not be exceeded.
1.5.5 Harmonic Distortion
The Electromagnetic Compatibility Levels for harmonic distortions on the

transmission system from all sources under both, planned outage and fault outage
conditions (unless abnormal conditions prevail).
1.6 Electrical Equipment Installation conditions
All equipment and materials provided for outdoor installation shall be resistant
against the prevailing climatic conditions, sand, sand storms and strong solar
radiation.

Power Plant
Equipment enclosures for electrical equipment shall comply with IEC 60034, IEC
60079, IEC61439, IEC 60529, IEC 60947, and IEC 62271 as applicable. Unless
otherwise specified equipment enclosure classes shall be as follows:
Indoor
Equipment Outdoor
Air Non air
Conditioned(1) Conditioned (2)
Motors and terminal
IP 54 IP 54 IP 54W
boxes
MV SWGR IP 41 - -
LV SWGR, MCC IP 41 - -
Local control panels,

IP 41 IP 54 IP 65
Distribution boards
DC rectifiers,
IP 31 - -
Inverters (UPS)
GCB IP 54W
- -
- Control Cubicle IP 54W
IPBD - IP 54 IP 54W
SPBD - IP 54 IP 54W
NSPBD - IP 54 IP 54W
BSEDG Package - IP 54W

as Container House
-
Generator (located
in Container House)
IP 23
Dry type
IP 23 - -
transformers
Oil-immersed
- - IP54 W
Transformer
* Note 1-Air-conditioned area will be equipped with air conditioning equipment.

Power Plant
* Note 2- Non-Air-conditioned area will be equipped with ventilation fans.
1.6.1 The additional measures (e.g. “W”) shall consist of sunshades, protection covers
against splashing water, rain water and sand, additional sealing, special seawater
or acid resistive coating etc., depending upon the site conditions.
1.6.2 Bushings, surge arresters and cable sealing ends utilized for outdoor connections
shall have a minimum creep age distance of 50mm/kV.
1.6.3 In case or the type of Gland for Hazardous Area, the supplier shall provide the
proper type of gland considered the temperature class mentioned IEC. At least, EX
d IIC Type shall be considered.
1.7 Paint Specification
1.7.1 According to “19CN-00GEN00-P04-0004_Painting Specification, it shall be applied

for elec. equipment.
1.7.2 C3 based on ISO 12944 shall be applied for all elec. SWGR, MCC, Panels, Enclosure,
Box, Transformer, and etc located in indoor.
1.7.3 C4(High durability) based on ISO 12944 shall be applied for all elec. SWGR, MCC,
Panels, Enclosure, Box, Transformer, and etc located in outdoor.
1.7.3.1 C5(High durability) based on ISO 12944 shall be applied for all elec. SWGR, MCC,
Panels, Enclosure, Box, Transformer, and etc located in seawater intake pump area.

Power Plant
2 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1 General:
2.1.1 The Fujairah F3 plant will be configured as gas fired Gas Turbine Generator (GTG)
Units, each coupled with a Heat Recovery Steam Generator and Steam Turbine
Generators (STG).
2.1.2 The configuration is divided into two blocks as described below:
- One block consisting of Two nos. of GTG each coupled with a Heat Recovery
Steam Generator and one Steam Turbine Generators (STG)
- The second block comprises of One no. of GTG coupled with a Heat Recovery
Steam Generator and one Steam Turbine Generator (STG)
2.1.3 The total Plant capacity is rated to export a minimum net 2000MW and maximum
capacity of 2400 MW of electrical power.
2.1.4 The auxiliary power system for the plant will consist of equipment and connections
to provide auxiliary power for the operation of the power plant. An auxiliary power
distribution for each unit will be as shown on Dwg. No. 19CN-00GEN00-E07-0001-
Key Single Line Diagram for Plant.
2.1.5 Each Unit Auxiliary Transformers (UAT) high voltage side winding will be connected
to the corresponding Isolated phase bus duct, between the generator circuit
breaker and the GSUT. The secondary of each UAT will be rated for 11 kV voltage.
The secondary of each UAT will be connected to a line-up of 11 kV switchgears.
2.1.6 The auxiliary power for plant will be distributed from the 11kV switchgears.
2.1.7 The UAT will supply the auxiliary loads of the units and common loads.
2.2 Codes and Standards
The equipment and materials shall conform to the latest edition of IEC
Recommendations and International and European standards mentioned below and
Transco standards. In case of conflict between the applicable standards and this
specification, this specification shall govern the specific requirement of the equipment.

Power Plant
The major standards are listed below, any other standards as required shall be
followed:
IEC 60034 Rotating Electrical Machines
IEC 61892-1 Instrument Transformers, Part 1 General requirements
IEC 61869-2 Instrument Transformers, Part 2: Additional Requirements

for Current Transformers
IEC 61869-3 Instrument Transformers, Part 3: Additional requirements

for Inductive Voltage Transformers
IEC 60044-6 Instrument transformers Part 6: Requirements for

Protective Current Transformers for Transient Performance
IEC 60099-4 Surge arresters- Part 4: Metal-oxide surge arresters without

gaps for a.c. Systems
IEC 60099-5 Surge Arresters-Part 5: Selection and application

recommendations
IEC 60255 Electrical Relays (Applicable Parts)
IEC 60376 Specification of technical grade sulfur hexafluoride (SF6) for

use in electrical equipment
IEC 60502-1 Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories
for rated voltages from 1 kV (Um =1.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Um
= 36 kV) Part 1: Cables for rated voltages of 1 kV (Um =
1.2 kV) and 3 kV (Um = 3.6)
IEC 60529 Degrees of Protection Provided by Enclosures (IP code)
IEC 60947 Low-voltage switchgear and Controlgear (All Parts)
IEC 61439 Low-voltage switchgear and Controlgear assemblies-Part-2:

Power Switchgear and Controlgear assemblies.
IEC 61850 Communication networks and systems in substations
IEC 62271-1 High-voltage switchgear and Controlgear-Part 1: Common

specifications
IEC 62271-100 High-voltage switchgear and Controlgear Part-100:

Alternating current circuit-breakers
IEC 62271-101 High –voltage switchgear and Controlgear-Synthetic testing

Power Plant
IEC 62271-102 High-voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Part-102:

Alternating current disconnectors and earthing switches
IEC 62271-104 High-Voltage Switches and control gear Part-104:

Alternating current switches for rated voltage of 52kV and
above
IEC 62271-110 High voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Part-110:

Inductive load switching
IEC 62271-203 High-voltage switchgear and Controlgear Part-

203:Gasinsulated metal-enclosed switchgear for rated
voltages above 52 kV
IEC 62271-209 High voltage Switchgear and Controlgear Part-209: Cable

connections for gas-insulated metal-enclosed switchgear for
rated voltage above 52 kV-Fluid filled and extruded
insulation cables-Fluid filled and dry-type cable –
terminations
IEEE C37.1 IEEE Standard Definition, Specification and analysis of

System Used for Supervisory Control, Data Acquisition and
Automatic Control
IEEE C37.12 Guide for Specification of High Voltage Circuit Breakers

(over 1000 Volts)
IEEE C37.122 High Voltage Gas Insulated Substations Rated Above 52 kV
IEEE C 37.06 AC High-Voltage Circuit Breaker Rated on a Symmetrical

Current Basis-Preferred Ratings and Related Required
Capabilities for voltages above 1000V
ANSI/IEEE C37.123 Guide to Specifications for Gas Insulated, Electric Power

Substation Equipment
IEEE C57.13 IEEE Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers
IEEE 1291 IEEE Guide for Partial Discharge Measurements in Power

Switchgear
IEEE 1300 Guide for Cable Connections for Gas-Insulated Substations
NEMA CC 1 Electric Power Connectors for Substations
ASTM B-8 Specification for Concentric-Lay Stranded Copper

Power Plant
Conductors, Hard, Medium Hard or soft
2.3 Component
2.3.1 Circuit Breakers
Loads Rating Voltage Circuit Breaker
MCCB + Contactor
≤ 110kW 400V
(for Remote Control)
Motor 110kW < M≤

400V ACB
250kW
M > 250kW 11KV VCB
2.3.2 Internal Wiring of SWGR, MCC and DB
- Instrumentation wiring : Min. 1.5sqmm
- Electric control wiring : Min. 1.5sqmm
- Power wiring : Min. 2.5sqmm
- CT Circuit : Min. 4.0sqmm
- Numbering :By Ferrule with clear

lettering engraved
And Color code shall be applied for the internal wirings of panels as follows;
- DC Circuits : Grey
- PT Circuits : Red
- PT Circuits : Yellow
- Alarm circuits : Blue
- AC power circuits : Black
- Connection to earth : Green/Yellow
2.3.3 Push Button/Lamp Color

Power Plant
Push button color shall be complied with 19CN-00GEN00-J01-0001 : Design criteria

for I&C.
2.3.4 Anti-condensation heaters
All enclosures containing electrical equipment which can cause rise in temperature
shall be provided with humid statically controlled anti-condensation heaters
operating at 230V or less.
2.4 MOTOR
Motors shall comply with the requirements of IEC-60034, 60072 and 60085
standards.
The maximum starting current (without tolerance) shall not exceed the following
values:
a) 550% of rated current for MV motors > 2000 kW
b) 600% of rated current for 250kW < MV motors ≤ 2000 kW
c) 720% of full load current without tolerance for motors above 10kW to 250
kW
d) As per manufacturer standard for motors below 10kW
Motors above 2,000 kW shall be additionally protected by a low impedance s.
Motor nameplate data shall conform to the requirements of IEC standards.
The motor shall be self-ventilated type or totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC).
For large capacity motors, totally enclosed tube ventilation (TETV) shall be
considered. In case water-cooling is required for very large motors, prior approval
of Purchaser is to be obtained before proceeding ahead with design and
manufacture.
In case of sea water intake pump and circulating water pump, a large motor shall
be used. When a decision is made at detail design stage, TEFC or TEAAC shall be
taken into account according to the selected manufacture’s recommendation.

Power Plant
Motor winding insulation shall meet class F requirements. However, the allowable
temperature rise shall be in accordance with class B.
Anti-condensation heaters shall be required at least;
- Above 30 kW Motor installed in indoor
- Above 5 kW Motors installed outdoor
- Any other critical motor
- Motors in the damp area
When selecting motor sizes, the following shall be considered :
- Ambient temperature
- Moment of inertia and starting frequency of the driven machine.
- Service Factor shall be considered in accordance with operation philosophy and

characteristics of each motor/package under manufacture responsibility.
Motors when started with the driven equipment coupled shall be capable of
withstanding at least three successive starts from cold conditions & two start from
hot condition without injurious heating of windings.
In case of Fire Fighting Pump, 6.6kV Motor will be supplied due to fire fighting’s
regulation, exceptionally.
Vendor have to exactly informed Local Control Station or Emergency Push Button
Station shall be required due to the operation philosophy of motor. These facilities
shall be supplied as per Vendor’s standard. And further detail, please refer to
“GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT-I&C (BOP)_19CN-00GEN00-J02-0001”.
Further detail, please refer to attached Minimum Requirement for Motor.

Power Plant
3 400V SWITCHGEAR, MCCs, AC & DC DB & SUB-DBs
3.1 General
3.1.1 The low voltage power will be obtained from the plant medium voltage system and
LV transformers. Each transformer will feed a line-up of 400V main switchgear and
will be sized to carry the entire load of the line-up.
3.1.2 The 400 V main switchgear will supply power to motors rated up to and including
250 kW, LV auxiliaries and also supplies the incoming feeders to the LV sub-
distribution/motor control centers.
3.2 Design Description
3.2.1 The switchgear shall be indoor, metal enclosed, floor mounted type, made up of
the requisite vertical sections.
3.2.2 LV Switchgear shall be provided with Air insulated circuit breakers, Molded case
circuit breakers and contacts as necessary. 400V switchgear cubicles shall be free-
standing, self-supporting construction made of steel.
3.2.3 The free standing switchgear shall be with bottom opening for Cable entry and
shall have both front and rear access for maintenance.
3.2.4 All Components of LV Switchgear, Motor Control Center and Distribution Board shall
be considered 10% design margin.
3.2.5 To provide maximum reliability, LV switchgears and motor control centers are
double ended, equipped with two main breakers and one tie breaker i.e The LV
Switchgear and MCC system shall be designed, in general to with a redundancy of
2 x 100% with an auto changeover facility. The bus tie circuit breaker shall be in
normally open position. Automatic bus transfer scheme shall be provided between
the busbars, A and B by ACO(Automatic Changeover) or Elec. Schematic Function
caused by Under-voltage. DB’s (AC & DC) shall have two (2) incomers with manual
changeover.
3.2.6 The LV switchgears shall be designed for a nominal voltage of 400/230 V (according

Power Plant
IEC 60038) and to withstand a short - circuit current of minimum 50 kA for a

duration of 1 second.
3.2.7 All LV main switchgears shall be of the withdrawal type Form 3b for outgoing
feeders and form 4a for incomers (according IEC 60439). DC and safe AC
distributions may be of fixed installed type Form 2b according IEC 60439.
3.2.8 The LV network shall be either of TN-S (separate PE and N conductors) or of the
TN-C-S type with combined PE&N conductor (TN-C) from transformer to the main
distribution, but separate PE and N conductors in the distribution and all connected
consumers (TN-S).
3.2.9 Operating devices shall be incorporated only in the front of the switchgear.
3.2.10 Motor rating up to and including 110kW shall be MCCB operated connected to LV
MCC and Motor rating more than 110kW shall be ACB controlled fed from LV
switchgear.
3.2.11 Feeders rated above 800A shall be ACB controlled and others shall be MCCB
controlled.
3.2.12 Each bus section of all Switchgear/MCC shall be provided with one bus VT module
and one control transformer (400V/110V)
3.2.13 A copper ground bus shall be provided near the bottom of switchboard/panel. The
ground bus shall extend throughout the switchboard/panel and shall be bolted or
brazed to the frame work of each panel.
3.2.14 Each cubicle shall be provided with an interior lamp and space heater.
3.2.15 Switchgears/MCC’s shall be of single/or double front execution depending on the

service and switchgear room dimensions.
3.2.16 In general, building service facilities, such as lighting fixture, socket/receptacle,

ventilation fan, etc shall be fed from local sub-distribution board.
3.2.16 Distribution of outgoing feeders shall be such as to ensure uniform loading on each
bus section of the switchgears, PDBs and DBs.
3.2.17 All protective relays shall be numerical relays with metering, protection and built in

Power Plant
controller functions. Numerical relay shall have communication interface compliant

to IEC-61850 protocol. The numerical relays offered for each feeder shall be
suitable for performing the specified functions as appropriate to that feeder.
3.2.18 All 400 Volt switchgears, motor control centers, etc. shall have at least 10% or
minimum one fully equipped set of each rating as spares uniformly distributed over
different vertical sections.
3.2.19 In PDB/DBs, 10% of the allocated feeders shall be provided as spare subjected to
minimum of one feeder per each type.
3.2.20 Power feeding system of LV switchgear, motor control center (MCC) and sub-
distribution boards is followed as below.
 LV Switchgear : Will be provided with two infeed

 LV Switchgear for Outgoing Feeders : as second tier type (2 ACB / 1 Panels)
 LV MCC : Will be provided with two infeed
 LV MCC for Outgoing Feeders : as back to back type
 Distribution panel (process related) : Will be provided with two infeed
 Distribution panel (Non-process, such as HVAC, Lighting & small power) :
Will be provided with one infeed
3.2.21 The incomer feeder rating of switchgear/MCC shall be calculated based on
continuous & intermittent loads being fed by the switchgear/MCC.
3.2.22 Redundant Ethernet switch (for taking signals from individual numerical relays)
shall be provided in all the switchgears for interface with electrical control and
monitoring system at remote.
3.2.23 Black Box Systems are designated systems or subsystems that include their own
process-, control-, and electrical equipment. The electrical and control equipment will
be designed and supplied by the mechanical equipment supplier.
3.2.24 All components of black box systems equipped with motor starter and control
equipment will be designed in accordance with manufacturer’s standard in compliance
with IEC codes.
3.2.25 Accuracy class of the Current Transformers used shall be:
Current transformers shall be of cast resin type. External ferrous parts shall be hot

Power Plant
dip galvanized at least.
 Class 5P10 for elec. protection.

 Class 0.5 for metering
 In case of MPR(Motor Protection Relay) integrated CT, its accuracy class will
be complied with manufacture’s standard.
3.2.26 Accuracy class of the Voltage Transformers used shall be: -
 Class 3P for protection relays

 Class 0.5 for other metering
3.2.27 Minimum Protection Function (based on ANSI Function)
 For AC Incoming : OCR (50/51), OCGR(50/51N), UVR(27), Lockout(86), and

other functions as deemed as required.
 For AC Bus Coupler : OCR (50/51), OCGR(50/51N), UVR(27), Lockout(86),
and other functions as deemed as required.
 For AC Motor : by EOCR/MPR, Balance Current Protection(46), OCR(50/51)
Thermal overload(49), Locked Rotor(51LR, 51S), and other functions as
deemed as required.
For AC Non-Motor : OCR (50/51), and other functions as deemed as required.
* According to operation philosophy of each system, Synchro check (25)
function will be needed for Bus coupler if required to uninterrupted transfer
action.
3.2.28 Minimum Instrument Function
 For AC Incoming : Voltage with Selector Switch, Ampere(L2), Watt(W), at

least
 For AC Bus Coupler : Ampere(L2), at least
 For AC Motor : Ampere(L2), at least
 For AC Non-Motor : Ampere(L2), at least
3.2.29 Measurements
Instruments, transducers and meters shall be suitable for use on CTs and VTs
specified over the normal range of system operating conditions and so as not to

Power Plant
be damaged by the designated system short time fault rating or associated system
transients. Ammeters shall be provided with a maximum value indicator.
Each instrument shall be provided with a zero-adjustment device so that zero

positioning of the pointer can be adjusted without removing the cover.
Alarm, measurement and control signals shall be transferred to the appropriate

DCS by hardwired so that the switchgear can be monitored and controlled from
the appropriate control room. For the signal interface with DCS/PLC, interposing
relay shall be integrated in switchgears and panels.
Discrepancy type of controls shall be provided for all CBs. All discrepancy lamps
shall be arranged to flashing light when the position of the CB is at variance with
that of the indicator.
3.2.30 Indication lamp test facilities shall be provided in a way that all lamps on one panel
can be tested simultaneously from a common push button.
3.2.31 Alarms shall be sub-divided into trip and non-trip functions and each arranged to
operate a common buzzer.
3.2.32 The rated output shall cope with the connected burden plus 20% future increase.
3.2.33 In case there is a need for extension panels for CT's (incomers, sectionalizers), no
CT boxes shall be installed below the incomers switchgears.

Power Plant
4 Variable Frequency Drive
4.1 General
4.1.1 Each VFD system shall consist of all systems components required to meet the
performance, protection, safety, testing and certification criteria of this specification.
These components may include incoming harmonic filter/power factor correction unit,
input isolation transformer, VFD converter/DC-link/inverter, output filter, and bypass
contactor.
4.1.2 The complete converter system (including transformers dc link reactors etc) shall be
suitable for installation in an enclosed room for connection to the appropriate services,
e.g. cooling water, air ducting and power supplies. DC link reactors shall be provided
complete with suitable enclosures, electrical screening and integration into the overall
cooling system. Each converter drive shall have its own dedicated cooling and control
systems, the cooling systems shall have 100% redundancy.
4.1.3 The control system shall interface with the pump unit supervisory and protection
equipment as well as local control and main unit control systems which shall enable
pump control to be based on various selected parameters. The system shall provide
outputs to provide status and fault diagnostic information. Failure of any component
shall not result in unsafe operation or secondary damage to the drive system.
4.1.4 The harmonic content of the power supply is in accordance with IEC 61000-2-4, Class
2. The harmonic content caused by the equipment may not exceed the requirements
of IEC 61000-2-2, for LV Variable Speed Drives and IEC 61000-2-12, for MV Variable
Speed Drives.
4.2 Test Requirement
4.2.1 As well as testing of individual drive system components, combined testing of the
complete drive system shall be carried out on the first drive in the drive manufacturer's
works. Combined testing shall include multiple start-ups, speed cycling and extended
running at rated output.
4.2.2 Temperature rise tests shall demonstrate compliance with the specified acceptance
levels with water cooling and additionally with loss of coolant.
4.2.3 Basic tests shall demonstrate compliance with the specified acceptance levels for
vibration for the specified duty range with the motors supplied from the converter
with due allowance for the effects of site coupling and other effects.

Power Plant
5 POWER, CONTROL, INSTRUMENTATION AND FO CABLES
5.1 General
All cables will comply with IEC standards. All MV cables will be XLPE type insulated,
unarmored, FR PVC sheathed. LV and Control cables will be under insulated,
unarmored cables.
MV cables insulation will be rated for 8.7/15kV at 11kV level and 6/10kV at 6.6kV
level. LV cables will be rated for 0.6/1kV, Instrumentation cables shall be 0.3/0.5
kV.
5.2 Sizing criteria for Power cables
5.2.1 The ratings of the Power cables will be calculated based on the following conditions
& relevant IEC regulations:
- Cables shall carry the full load current of the circuit continuously under site
conditions considering the various de-rating factors like ambient air / ground
temperature, thermal resistivity of soil, grouping, method of laying, depth of
laying etc.
- Short circuit current withstand capability:
a) For Outgoing feeders : As per Actual Fault Clearing Time
b) For Incomers : 1 sec
c) For tie feeders : 0.5 sec
- Cables shall withstand the fault current of the circuit for the duration not less
than the maximum time taken by the primary protective system to isolate
the fault.
- Voltage drop limits under steady state and voltage dip during motor starting.
- Voltage drop in feeder cables shall be limited to about 5% during full load
running condition.

Power Plant
- Voltage drop from transformer secondary to motor terminals during full load
running of motors shall be limited to 5% of rated voltage.
- Voltage drop during starting of motors shall be limited to 20% of rated

voltage.
5.3 Design of Power Cable and Lighting wire
5.3.1 MV and LV Power Cables shall be designed ;
- MV Cable : 8.7/15kV, XLPE, Copper Conductor, PVC Outer sheath with Flame
Retardant (IEC 60332-3-24 CAT.C), Metallic Screen-Copper wire or Tape, Un
armored
- LV Cable : 0.6/1kV, XLPE, Copper Conductor, PVC Outer sheath with Flame
Retardant (IEC 60332.3 Category C), Un armored
5.3.2 Lighting Wire shall be designed :
- Lighting Wire : 450/750V, Copper Conductor, PVC Insulation
5.3.3 The connections between batteries or rectifiers respectively and the DC distribution
board will generally consist of single core power cables. Multi-core cables will be
used up to 240 sq.mm & single core cables will be used from 120 sq.mm.
5.3.4 In principle, the following requirements shall be complied at least;
- Outer Sheath Color
 MV : Red
 LV, Lighting : Black
- Rated Design temperature (in Air) : 52℃
- Rated Design temperature (in Ground) : 20℃
- Core Identification (according to IEC)
 Single Phase Line(L) : Brown
 Three Phase Line(L1) : Brown
 Three Phase Line(L2) : Black

Power Plant
 Three Phase Line(L3) : Grey
 Neutral(N) : Blue
 Protective Earth(PE) : Green - Yellow
5.3.5 Cables will be segregated as per voltage level and separated on a function basis.
- J(L1) : Analogue Signals and Communication Signals
- C(L2) : Instrumentation, Control Cable, CT & PT Cables (for AC/DC)
- L(L3) : Low Voltage AC/DC Power Cables below 1000V
- M(L4) : Medium Voltage AC Power Cables above 1000V
5.3.6 Permissible voltage drop for different types of feeders shall be below:
Feeder Type Running Starting
Motor feeder – from switchgear to motor terminal 5% 20%

Power feeder – from switchgear to load terminal 5% NA
Transformer feeder – from switchgear to
3% NA
transformer terminal
Incomer feeder – from transformer secondary
2% NA
terminal to switchgear
Tie feeder – between two switchgears

1% NA
5.3.7 However, distribution of voltage drop shall be varied based on the location of the
equipment and the no. of levels of distribution to maintain the voltage drop less
than 5% between the source and load terminal.
5.3.8 The low voltage power cables shall consist of single, two, three and four core-
cables. The minimum cross-section of standard conductors shall be 2.5mm².
5.3.9 The connections between batteries or rectifiers respectively and the DC distribution
board shall generally consist of single core power cables.

Power Plant
5.4 Control cables
5.4.1 Multicore control cables shall be 600/1000V grade copper conductors, XLPE-
insulated, unarmored cable.
5.5 Instrumentation cables
5.5.1 Instrumentation cable shall be 300/500V grade copper conductors, PVC insulated,
unarmored cable.
5.5.1.1 Further detail information, it shall be specified on 19CN-00GEN00-J01-0001 : Design

criteria for I&C.
5.6 FO cables
5.6.1 The FO Cable shall be of single mode / multi-mode type and shall conform to IEC
60793-1, 2 IEC 60794-1, 2 and ITU-T recommendation G.652 with transmission of
information at ITU-T recommended rates for PDH and SDH systems up to STM-64
level.
5.6.2 Further detail information, it shall be specified on 19CN-00GEN00-J01-0001 :

Design criteria for I&C.
5.7 Optical fibre joints
5.7.1 Each cable joint shall include termination box, mounting hardware, optical fibre
splice kits, cable entry seals and all accessories required to produce a permanent
optical joint.
5.7.2 Each termination box shall be capable of being hermetically sealed after jointing,
and hermetically sealed after re-opening.
5.8 Termination
5.8.1 Type of connectors shall be of same type all over the plant.

Power Plant
5.8.2 Optical fiber splices shall be of the fusion type and the optical attenuation of each
splice shall be less than 0.1 dB.
5.8.3 All optical terminations between fibres and equipment or other fibres shall be made
using Standard Connector (called SC Type).
5.8.4 All spare fibres shall be terminated with appropriate optical connectors and
attached to a coupler. Caps shall be provided for each coupler to prevent dust
ingress to the couplers of unused fibres.
5.8.5 All connectors shall be so positioned to facilitate easy cleaning and inspection.
5.8.6 All fibres in each optical cable shall be terminated using a terminal block or end
sheath.
5.8.7 The ODFs shall have the following characteristics:
- The ODF shall be suitably sized for the number of cables to be initially
accommodated, including space to manage and retain surplus lengths of
optical fibre tails, plus 10% spare capacity.
- The optical fibre cables shall enter the ODF through appropriately sized cable
glands.
- The ODFs shall incorporate fixed de-mountable couplers with dust caps of
sufficient number to retain all the optical fibres entering the box plus space
to fit 10% additional couplers.
5.9 Termination of cables and wires
All cables shall be terminated in accordance with the manufacturer’s

recommendations and the cable cores shall be long enough to be terminated to
any terminal in an enclosure without extension.
AC terminals shall be clearly color coded and shrouded.

Power Plant
6 CABLE ROUTING
6.1.1 Cable trays shall be made of hot dip galvanized steel. When installed and loaded
with cables the trays shall sag not more than 50 mm at midpoint between supports;
Ladder type cable trays shall be used for power and control cables and perforated
type cable tray for instrumentation cable.
6.1.2 Cable trays arranged one above the other shall have a minimum separation from
bottom to bottom of cable tray as per cable classification is as below:
- J(L1) : Analogue Signals and Communication Signals
- C(L2) : Instrumentation, Control Cable, CT & PT Cables (for AC/DC)
- L(L3) : Low Voltage AC/DC Power Cables below 1000V
- M(L4) : Medium Voltage AC Power Cables above 1000V
* Bottom layer of Cable Tray Group is M(L4). And the others cable tray layer
shall be installed upside of M(L4) in sequential.
Based on the above mentioned category, the cables shall be separated as follows ;
Voltage Level Separation (Bottom to Bottom)

(J, C) and (L) 300 mm
(L) and (M) 300 mm
(M) and (J,C) 600 mm
6.1.3 All cable tray T-junctions, crossovers, incoming and outgoing branches, etc. shall
consist of the elements of cable tray to ensure proper laying of the cables at the
transition points and to avoid congestion.
GV copper(Yellow/Green) shall be continuously installed alongside the outside of

the tray located on the bottom of tray-stack. The ground cable shall be connected
to all trays at least every 30 meters (100 ft.) intervals.
6.1.4 Cable routing materials also shall comply with the following codes;

Power Plant
 Guide for design and installation of cable systems in power generating

station (Cable trays, support systems, conduits) - IEEE Std. 422, 1977,
NEMA VE-1 1979, NFPA 70-1984.
 Test Standards. NEMA VE-1-1979.
 Zinc coating "hot dip" on assembled products for galvanizing of carbon

steel cable trays - ASTMA - 386-78.
6.2 Cable Installation
6.2.1 Different voltage grade cables shall be laid in separate trays when trays are
arranged in tiers. M.V. cables shall be laid in bottom trays and cables of subsequent
voltage grade in lower tier of trays.
6.2.2 The MV power cables and above shall be laid in trays/on racks as follows:
- In single layer only without exception
- 3 core cables shall be laid in touching formation
- Single core cables shall be laid in tre-foil groups with a minimum spacing
equal to diameter of the cable between edges of the trefoils
6.2.3 For LV power cables will be laid as multi- layer if the filling factor of cable route is
complied.
6.2.4 For MV/LV Single core power cables for 3 phase AC circuits laid in
trays/racks/trenches in tre-foil groups shall be held by cable tie (Indoor Area : PVC
Tie, Outdoor Arae : SUS 304 with PVC coated).
6.2.5 The bending radius various types of cables shall not be less than those specified in
the relevant standard.
6.2.6 Control and instrumentation cables can be laid as multi- layer if the filling factor of
cable route is complied.
6.2.7 Fibre optic cable shall be routed and installed such that they are protected from
deformation or damage by auxiliary power or control cables throughout their
installed length.

Power Plant
6.2.8 Sufficient space shall be allowed to run in each duct or compartment the necessary
draw wires, being of non-corrosive metal and having devices for securing the
conductors.
6.2.9 Cable ladders, trays and conduits shall be designed with spare capacity, both in
space and weight carrying. Maximum tray fill allowed is 70% of Tray capacity while
maximum duct fill allowed is 70% of duct area. All duct banks shall be in
rectangular/square arrangement of ducts.
6.2.10 Openings in floors and foundation pads shall be large enough to permit free
movement of cables during installation.
6.2.11 Channels and ducts shall be sealed where they enter a building to prevent the
ingress of moisture, gases and vermin.
6.2.12 Openings in walls and floors shall be sealed after the cable installation with a
fireproof materials such as sealant.
6.2.13 Cables above ground shall be run on galvanized cable racks, trays or supports,
suitably clipped to prevent movement. Care shall be taken to provide for differential
movement between the structures.
6.2.14 The only top most tray of outdoor cable trays exposed to sunrays shall be covered
for sun shading.
6.2.15 Rigid galvanized steel (RGS) conduit above ground properly shall be supported on
pipe racks, walkway supports, foundation surfaces, unistrut or channel.
6.2.16 Cable installed in area where traffic load is expected will be encased with concrete
The cable identifications are specified on the outer sheath as following, at least;
- Number of cores and size(sqmm)
- Cable Type
- Voltage levels Uo/U(Um)
- Relevant Code
- Manufacturer’s name, Year
- Others deemed as required

Power Plant
6.2.17 Cable trays, tray covers, exposed conduits, support and associated equipment shall
be hot dip galvanized. Conduit thread shall be PF type.
6.2.18 Cables shall generally be installed cable trays except for some short runs in conduit
for protection or crossings.
6.2.19 According to 19CN-00GEN00-P04-0004_Painting Specification, the related all

materials for cable tray and conduit shall be provided.
6.2.20 Supporting distance of cable trays shall not exceed 2.4m.
6.2.21 Tray marker shall be provided to show the cable tray identification plate every 5m.
Marker specification and the gap between markers shall be approved by purchaser.
6.2.22 Cables laid on trays and risers shall be neatly dressed & tied at an proper interval
for horizontal run and vertical run respectively.
6.2.23 Conduit shall comply with following specifications.
- Exposed surface mounting: Hot dip Galvanized Rigid steel
- Embedded in soil / concrete : Hi-PVC / Corrugated HDPE pipe

(Galvanized Rigid Steel conduit will be applied to Stud-up conduit.)
6.2.24 Conduit shall be fixed on steel structures or brickwork
6.2.25 Conduit ends shall be sealed against ingress of water, oil or others.
6.2.26 Cables between junction boxes and sensors, transmitters, detectors and etc. shall
be protected by either rigid steel conduits, otherwise the flexible conduit can be
accepted for this connection from steel conduit to equipment.

Power Plant
7 LIGHTING AND SMALL POWER SYSTEM
7.1 General
7.1.1 The lighting system will be designed to provide sufficient illumination for the
structures and areas inside of power plant. The small power system will comprise
power supplies to maintenance consumers and power outlets for the contracted
plant area. The design and installation of lighting and small power shall be based
on IES as applicable.
7.1.2 The code shall comprise letters and figures so compiled that the following
information can be readily identified:
- The lighting distribution board to which the fitting or socket outlet is

connected
- Connection to the normal supplies or to the emergency supplies
- The circuit number and phase of distribution board to which the fitting is
connected
- The sequence of the fitting in a particular circuit
7.2.1 The lighting and small power system are broadly divided into the following
categories:
- Lighting systems indoor and outdoor
- Small power socket outlet system
- Power socket outlet system
7.2.2 The lighting systems are to be classified as follows:
7.2.3 Adequate lighting arrangement will be made for the entire power plant employing
lighting distribution boards, panels, HPSV, fluorescent and incandescent lighting
fixtures, lighting masts etc.
7.2.4 All lightings of the plant will operate with the common bus of AC supply connected

Power Plant
to BSEDG’s back-up bus. To ensure the reliability and safety for plant, the following
lightings will be additionally equipped with 1 hour battery pack at least, and the
following lightings are designated to emergency lighting ;
- 10% of Lighting Fixtures in CCR
7.2.5 Lighting systems shall be designed such that failure of the auxiliary supply system
will not prevent safe escape from Plant areas in darkness. Levels of illumination
during normal operation and under emergency lighting conditions shall be
appropriate to the area function. Low voltage power supplies shall be 400/230V
three(3) phase, 50 Hz, four wire (with neutral).
7.2.6 The aircraft warning lights and the emission monitoring equipment shall be
considered for stacks at the optimal locations and as agreed with the relevant
authorities.
7.2.7 The following (see Table) minimum direct illuminated illumination levels (at working
areas) shall be maintained in extensions and in new installations.
Average Illumination
Location
Level (LUX)
 Control rooms and offices 400
 Laboratories, Conference rooms 300
 Switchgear, Relay rooms, workshop 200
 Storage Rooms, Kitchen 150
 Turbine and Boiler plant Area 150
 Building Corridors and Stairways 100
 Toilets 100
 Transformer Bay 50
 Battery and air conditioning rooms 150

Power Plant
Average Illumination
Location
Level (LUX)
 Plant walkways, galleries, platforms and ladders 50
 Cableways and cable basements 50
 Fuel unloading plant areas 50
 Roads, vehicle yards and car parks 10
 Outdoor areas not specifically listed 50
 Indoor areas not specifically listed 100
* The above lighting levels will be as measured at the height of 850mm above the
floor except walkways and corridors which shall be measured at ground level.
7.2.8 Where equipment is located in hazardous area, equipment of explosion proof type
of protection (according IEC 60079) shall be used.
7.2.9 The installation heights of center line of wiring accessories and other items of
equipment shall generally be as follows:
Accessories Mounting Height
Lighting switches 1.4 m AFFL
Socket outlets in general 0.4 m AFFL
0.45 m AFFL or 0.3 m above working

Socket outlets in kitchen
table top
Socket outlet for supply to fan coil
0.3 m below ceiling level
units of A/C split units
MCB Distribution Boards 1.8 m AFFL
Telephone outlet jacks 0.40m AFFL
Fire Alarm sounders 2.3 m AFFL

Power Plant
7.2.10 External Road Lighting
The Luminaire and shall be selected to consider site condition. The lighting pole
also selected in single and double arms to consider its installation condition
- Outdoor Type and Weather Proof Type
- IP 55 at least
- Octagonal tapered steel pole or equivalent steel pole with H.D.G
- Height of Pole : 7m at least
7.2.11 Exit Lighting
"Exit" signs to be provided throughout the buildings, at appropriate places. These

shall be self-contained battery backed units with three-hours minimum emergency
duration. Exit light shall be combined maintained and sustained type.
7.3 Distribution philosophy
7.3.1 In all control rooms and buildings, separate lighting circuits supplied from different
phases shall be provided. The lighting of these rooms shall be arranged such, that
with the loss of any phase, the lighting will remain evenly distributed throughout
the area.
7.3.2 All lighting systems are fed by final sub-circuits from distribution boards located
principally within the areas they control
7.3.3 Socket outlets throughout the project are fed by final sub-circuits mainly from sub-
distribution boards located in their respective areas.
7.3.4 All lighting circuits operate from a 230 volts - 50 Hz supply from molded case circuit
breakers within their respective distribution boards.
7.3.5 Each outgoing circuit serves a varying number of luminaries and is controlled by
either local room light switches or by remote control through relays which are
operated by a step-by-step sequential controller.
7.3.6 External lighting is controlled automatically by photocells which switch a number

Power Plant
of relays or contactors in these circuits.
7.3.7 A system of switch socket outlets shall be installed throughout all buildings and
shelters, main equipment as Inverter Stations, etc. to provide power for office
equipment and portable tools.
7.3.8 At specific locations power outlets with conduit, trunking and accessories shall be
provided to form a complete power installation.
7.3.9 These outlets shall be:
- 63 A, 400 V AC 3-phase, neutral and earth socket outlets in all plant areas
for connection to portable welding equipment.
- 16 A, 230 V AV single-phase, neutral and earth socket outlets for general use
as in offices, control rooms, maintenance areas, etc.
- All sockets installed in the plant areas and workshops shall be complied with
local practice.
7.3.10 The cables for indoor lighting and socket systems installed between distribution
boards and final connections shall be:
- Single core - Copper conductor (wire type) - 450/750 V
7.3.11 The cables for outdoor lighting and socket systems installed between distribution
boards and final connections and all cables up to distribution boards shall be PVC
or XLPE insulated 1, 3 or 4 cores with earth conductor separate, steel wire armored,
copper conductor, PVC sheathed and 0.6/1 kV.
7.3.12 The cables shall be suitably protected if laid directly in the ground.
7.3.13 All cables used for lighting and small power shall have copper conductors.
7.3.14 The Supplier shall select conductor sizes for the respective final circuits to meet
the following conditions:
- The size is adequate for the current to be carried as set out in the cable
manufacturers specification taking account of the site ambient temperature
- The size is sufficient to keep the voltage drop in the phase and neutral
conductor to the farthest lighting or power point under normal full load

Power Plant
conditions to the final circuit limit specified in the IEE Wiring Regulations.
Diversity will not be allowed
7.3.15 Outer sheath for all cables shall be flame retardant type to IEC 60332 standards.
7.3.16 Conductor sizes for the respective final circuits to meet the following conditions:
- The minimum conductor size for lighting circuits is 1.5 mm2
- The minimum conductor size for socket outlets circuits is 4.0 mm2.

Power Plant
8 EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
8.1 General
8.1.1 Earthing and lightning protection shall be provided for the entire plant and
equipment according to IEC or IEEE standards
8.1.2 Buried earthing mats employing suitable diameter MS rods, shall be provided in
main plant area, etc, for keeping the step and touch potential within safe limits.
8.1.3 Earthing System will compose of copper-cladded steel electrodes, bare stranded
copper conductors/copper tapes, PVC covered stranded copper conductors, etc .
Adequate lightning protection would be provided for transformers yards, all
buildings and chimneys etc.
8.2.1 All equipment design shall meet IEC 61000-4 or an equally recognized international
standard.
8.2.2 Grid Resistance of power plant area shall be designed to less than 5 ohm.
8.2.3 A station earthing grid consisting of bare copper wire buried beneath grade shall
be furnished to limit step and touch potentials to safe values under all fault
conditions. Bare copper risers shall be furnished for all electrical underground ducts
and equipment, and for connections to the earthing systems within buildings.
8.2.4 Each building shall be provided with earthing system connected to the station
earthing grid. Connections are to be made to metallic tanks, equipment, cable trays,
and exposed metal structures.
8.2.5 All switchgears, MCC and distribution boards shall be furnished with internal ground
copper bus without any coating. Their ground bus shall be connected to the
grounding system with adequate size of copper ground cable at each end, tied to
the earth bus set in the floor. The earth bus in control cabinets shall be connected
to the earthing system.
8.2.6 Motor (Above 25kW) shall be directly connected at the shortest distance either with

Power Plant
the subgrade earthing system or with the main earthing bus at two points. And
other Motor (equal and below 25kW) shall be earthed by PE conductor of power
cable. Tanks/vessels shall be earthed twice with the earthing conductors taking
from two different points of the earthing grid.
8.2.7 The following table shall be applied for selection of earthing as the minimum
requirement. The size of earthing wire can be changed at later stage. Hence, these
connections will be approved by Owner at execution stage.
Equipment Earthing wire
MV Motors 70 SQ.MM
LV Motors above 110kW 50 SQ.MM
LV Motors Between 110kW and 25kW 35 SQ.MM
PE Only
LV Motors Below 25kW
*Note 1
Power Distribution Board / Local Control Panel
35 SQ.MM
In outdoor
Push button station / Junction box 16 SQ.MM
Cable Tray (along with cable tray) 70 SQ.MM
Instrument terminal boxes
16 SQ.MM
(LIP, LPB, ESP Junction Box for Inst.)
Steel Structure (H beam) 35 SQ.MM
Steel Structure (Aux. beam) 35 SQ.MM
Steel Tanks 35 SQ.MM
Crane Rail 35 SQ.MM
Cable Pit 70 SQ.MM
Door, Fences or other metal parts(if required) 16 SQ.MM
Motor Operated Valve PE Only
Lightning Arrester for Transformer 70 SQ.MM.
Light Pole 35 SQ.MM.
Control/Protection Panels, Marshalling Cubicles,
35 SQ.MM.
Transformer Control Panels

Power Plant
Equipment Earthing wire
Battery Chargers and DC Distribution Panels 70 SQ.MM.

Depends on the related
Switchgear, MCC, DB
sizing calculation.
* Note 1 : When power cable for equipment bigger or equal to 50sqmm, earthing
riser conductor from main grid will be applied.
8.2.8 The design and analysis of the grounding system shall be in accordance with IEEE
Standard 665. A soil resistivity test shall be carried out by the Contractor, followed
by earthing calculation and design study which is to be approved by the Owner.
8.2.9 Bare stranded copper cables shall be buried directly in the soil under all foundations
and metal structures in the steam turbine generator areas, transformer yard areas
and the switchgear and transition facility. The conductors shall be arranged as a
rectangular grid with all intersections connected by exothermic weld material
consisting of copper and aluminum.
8.2.10 The location, number, and depth of ground rods welded exothermically to the
ground grid shall be consistent with soil resistivity and subsurface properties of the
site.
8.2.11 Buried ground conductors and the tops of driven ground rods shall be installed at
a depth of at approximately 500 mm below final grade in earth fill.
8.2.12 Minimum one earthing/grounding rod will be installed, one at each corner of a
building.
8.2.13 All site fencing including that for the transformers and transition facilities shall be
bonded to the ground grid. Flexible braid ground straps shall be installed across all
hinge points and gates in the site fencing.
8.2.14 Fences around transformer compounds, switchyards and other electrical areas
within the site boundary shall be galvanized steel palisade type fencing of 2.4 m
minimum height, complete with a lockable personnel access gate. These fences
shall be tied to the earthing system.
8.2.15 Bare stranded copper conductor shall be exothermically welded to the buried

Power Plant
ground grid and connected to above ground metallic structures and equipment.
Structure connections and equipment connections shall be made by mechanical
connections.
8.2.16 Splices in the ground conductor shall be exothermic weld.
8.2.17 The lightning protection system for the plant shall be in accordance with IEC
62305/NFPA 780.
8.2.18 An isolated clean earth grounding system shall be installed to commonly support
the plant control and instrumentation systems such as the DCS is appropriate.
8.2.19 Minimum one earthing/grounding rod will be installed, one at each corner of a
building.
8.2.20 The following drawing shall be applied for earthing piece.

Power Plant
9 CATHODIC PROTECTION SYSTEM
9.1 General
9.1.1 In case of an impressed current system, the direct current is taken from the
network via a rectifier. It enters the electrolyte through suitable anodes connected
to the positive pole of the rectifier. The negative pole of the rectifier is connected
to all parts of the metal structure which have to be protected.
9.1.2 Cathodic Protection (CP) is based on a direct-current which is directed against the
corrosion currents and thereby reduces considerably or stops the corrosion.
9.1.3 According to each mechanical and pipe vendor’s requests, some buried metallic
pipework, tanks, vessels and any other metallic equipment in contact with the soil
can be provided by the impressed current cathodic protection system.
9.1.4 For impressed current cathodic protection, the system shall be complete with all
necessary transformer rectifiers, control system, ground beds, anodes, permanent
test stations, permanent reference electrodes etc.
9.1.5 Unless each package Supplier can ensure design life 25 years without corrosion
protection measures, Supplier shall provide own system with cathodic protection
system, e.g. impressed or sacrificial type cathodic protection system.

Power Plant
10 ELECTRICAL CONTROL AND MONITORING SYSTEM (ECMS)
10.1 General
The following electrical system will be controlled and monitored through the plant
ECMS except process feeder such as motor and Turbine control system.
System Description
MV switchgear incomer and - Status/alarm monitoring (via communication)

bus-coupler - Breaker control (via communication)***
MV switchgear non-motor - Status/alarm monitoring (via communication)

feeder - Breaker control (via communication)
LV main switchgear incomer - Status/alarm monitoring (via communication)

and bus-coupler - Breaker control (via communication)***
LV main switchgear - non

- Status/alarm monitoring (via communication)**
motor outgoing
LV MCC incomer and Bus-
- Status/alarm monitoring (via communication)
coupler
- Control and Status/alarm monitoring (via
BSEDG
communication)
DC System - Status/alarm monitoring (via communication)
UPS System - Status/alarm monitoring (via communication)
**) LV main switchgear non motor outgoings to be locally controlled.

***) Analog values such as voltage, current, MW etc. to be monitored via
communication
Except above mentioned description, other electrical systems will be controlled and
monitored locally. And the local control function (such as On/Off) for the motor shall
be operated by their respective Switchgear or MCC.

Power Plant
For MV / LV switchgears and MCC feeders, the protective relays will be provided in
their respective switchgear cubicles.
Based on these relay, the ECMS shall be designed and included additionally the
function of Electrical Fault monitoring. Using of the fault memory (before and after
the event) of the digital protection relays with a common evaluation/engineering
workstation in the central control building with adequate evaluation software will
be provided.
10.3 Elec. Protection Function (as minimum)
10.3.1 MV Switchgears
10.3.1.1 INCOMERS
a) Over current protection.
b) Earth fault protection.
c) Under-voltage protection.
10.3.1.2 BUS COUPLER
10.3.1.3 TIE FEEDERS
c) Under Voltage protection with time delay.
10.3.1.4 OUTGOING OIL TYPE TRANSFORMER FEEDER
a) Instantaneous over current protection.
b) Winding temperature protection (alarm and trip).
c) Buchholz relay alarm and trip.
d) Thermal Overload
e) Oil temperature alarm & trip
10.3.1.5 OUTGOING MOTOR FEEDER
a) Thermal overload protection.
b) Instantaneous over current protection.
c) Negative phase sequence protection.

Power Plant
d) Locked rotor protection.

e) Differential protection for motor of rating above 2000 kW.
10.3.1.6 BUS PT FEEDER
a) Under Voltage relay – Part of Incomer / Bus Coupler Relay.
b) No Voltage relay – Part of Incomer / Bus Coupler Relay.
c) Synchronizing check relay.
10.3.2 LV Switchgears
10.3.2.1 INCOMERS
c) Under-voltage protection.
10.3.2.2 BUS COUPLER
10.3.2.3 BUT PT FEEDERS
a) Under voltage protection – Part of Incomer / Bus Coupler Relay.
b) No Voltage protection – Part of Incomer / Bus Coupler Relay.
10.3.2.4 OUTGOING FEEDERS (ACB CONTROLLED)
10.3.2.5 OUTGOING MOTOR FEEDER (ACB CONTROLLED)
b) Instantaneous earth fault protection.
10.3.2.6 OUTOING MOTOR FEEDER (CONTACTOR CONTROLLED)

Power Plant
11 EXPLOSION PROTECTION IN HAZARDOUS AREA
11.1 Apparatus, Enclosures and Installation In Hazardous Area
All areas of the Plant where concentrations of gas may occur due to normal leakage
or process fault or ventilation system failure shall be classed as hazardous locations.
The design of all electrical installations in such areas shall be explosion proof in
compliance with the requirements of IEC 60079 or relevant standard
12 TEST AND INSPECTION
12.1 Shop test and inspection
12.1.1 Electrical equipment will be tested at the manufacturer’s shop. Routine test will be
performed according to the applied standard and manufacturer’s standard practice.
12.1.2 Type test will be performed on major electrical equipment namely MV switchgear
and LV switchgear according to applied standard if type test certificates of the
same or similar type of the equipment are not available.
12.1.3 The following shop inspection for electrical equipment will be carried out as least.
All inspection and test procedure shall be comply with the IEC and the related
standard. And then these
a) Electric Motor
- Visual inspection
- Measurement of winding resistance
- Measurement of insulation resistance
- Dielectric test
- No-load test
- Other tests deemed as required in accordance with IEC and the related
standard
b) MV SWGR, LV SWGR and MCCs
- Visual inspection

Power Plant
- Power frequency voltage test on the main circuit

- Dielectric test for control and auxiliary circuit
- Functional test of the control circuit
- Mechanical operation test
standard
c) LV DBs
- Visual inspection
- Dielectric test
- Functional test of the control circuit
standard
d) 11 / 0.4 kV Auxiliary transformers
- Visual inspection
- Measurement of winding resistance
- Voltage ratio and vector group check
- Measurement of load loss and impedance voltage
- Measurement of no load loss and no load current
- Dielectric test
standard

Power Plant
13 NAMEPLATE FOR ELEC. PANEL, CABINET & BOX
Each main and auxiliary item of plant shall have permanently attached to it, in a
conspicuous position, a rating plate of non-corrosive material upon which shall be
engraved manufacturer’s name, equipment, type or serial number together with
details of the ratings, service conditions under which the item of plant in question
has been designed to operate.
All tag shall be in English language. Name and item number shall be displayed on
labels. The thickness of metallic name plates shall be not less than 1.5 mm.
- Name Plate installed indoor area : Laminated PVC Plate as white color
background with black color letter.
- Name Plate installed outdoor area (Inc. Local Cabinets, Junction Box,
Terminal boxes etc.) : These shall be marked by means of stainless steel
(SUS 304) labels carefully displayed.
All segregated phases of conductors or bus ducts, indoor or outdoor, shall be

provided with color phase tape or plate to clearly identify the phase of the system.

Power Plant
14 MISCELLANEOUS REQUIREMENT
14.1 Arrangement of CB Rating for PDB Package
The rating of downstream circuit breaker (Incoming CB in Package System) shall be
same or smaller than the rating of upstream circuit breaker. The circuit breaker ampere
rating of power distribution board shall not exceed 120% of the incoming total current.
The short circuit capacity shall be coordinated with upstream Switchgear fault level
and be submitted to get approval at the execution stage.
14.2 Panel Lighting and Receptacle

In general, the small lighting and receptacle shall be equipped inside the panel for
easy maintenance and operation. So, their specification shall be complied the
followings, at least ;
1) Panel Lighting
- Rating : 230V AC
- Type : LED
- Control switch : Automatically ON by Door open-close
- Lux : Min 150 lux at the farthest spot from the lamp
- Receptacle
- Rating : 230V AC

Power Plant
- Gang Q’ty : 2 Gang
- Indication : Control switch with indicating lamp shall be provided
- Capacity : Min 16A
- Hole type : As per project country practice
14.3 Cable Termination Materials

In general, all power cables shall be connected through the proper cable termination
materials as follows ;
No. Item Picture Requirement

Bolt connection with barrier, Transp
arent protection cover.
1 Terminal block
Tinned Electrolytic copper, compre

ssion type, Ring type
Cable lug with
2 terminal bolt set If size of power cable is 95mm2 an
s d above, NEMA 2 hole lug shall be
used. And if below 95 mm2, 1 hole
lug shall be used.
Material: Brass with nickel plate
The type of cable gland shall be
A2F for unarmored cable for
outdoor panel/equipment.(If
Cable gland & B required to provide cable gland)
3 ox connector w/
Lock nut
-E.O.D

FOR APPROVAL
C Revised as marked 28.Aug.20 S.H.Lee I.G.Seong S.W.Choi
B Revised as marked 08.Jul.20 S.H.Lee I.G.Seong S.W.Choi
A For Approval 15.May.20 S.H.Lee I.G.Seong S.W.Choi

Owner:
Owner’s Engineer:
Contractor:
Project Title:
Piping Material Specification

19CN-00GEN00-P04-0001 34 C
Power Plant
REVISION LOG
A 15 May 20 First issue
1. Updated incorporating comments on TCS-F3IPP-SCT-
B 08 Jul 20 F3H-TR-00082_PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
2. Revised as marked
1. Updated incorporating comments on TCS-F3IPP-SCT-
C 28.Aug.20 F3H-TR-00201_PIPING MATERIAL SPECIFICATION
2. Revised as marked
Doc. Title : Piping Material Specification Rev.C

Doc. No : 19CN-00GEN00-P04-0001 Page 2 of 33
Power Plant
List of Contents
1.0 SCOPE .................................................................................................................. 4

2.0 CODE AND STANDARD ....................................................................................... 4
3.0 REFERENCE ........................................................................................................ 6
4.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................... 9
5.0 BRANCH CONNECTION .................................................................................... 17
6.0 VENT & DRAIN INSTALLATION ........................................................................ 20
7.0 INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS.......................................................................... 22
8.0 MATERIAL CLASSES ........................................................................................ 28
9.0 INDEX OF PIPING MATERIAL CLASSES ......................................................... 29
10.0 PIPING MATERIAL CLASSES SHEETS ............................................................ 33

Power Plant
1.0 SCOPE
1.1 This specification covers the basic requirements for the design, materials and
Installation of the piping system in Fujairah F3 Independent Power Plant Project.
1.2 Work Included

The purpose of this specification is to provide guidelines for selection and purchase of
materials for power plant piping systems. The design, fabrication, testing and inspection
of piping shall be in accordance with:
ASME B31.1 Power Piping. * This shall be the main design code.
1.3 Work Not Included

This specification does NOT cover following items;
(1) Instruments and instrument piping beyond root valves
(2) Part of a proprietary piece of equipment or skid, such as OEM, Gas conditioning
facility, water treatment facility, chemical dosing system, electrical chlorination
system, unless the purchase specification or that equipment incorporates this
specification by reference
(3) Specially designed counter flanges, gaskets, bolts and nuts at the equipment
nozzles unless otherwise specified
(4) Plumbing, Square ducts and other special piping
2.0 CODE AND STANDARD

2.1 Design, fabrication, testing and inspection of piping materials shall be accomplished in
accordance with the following listed Codes and Standards including revision and
addendum in effect at the time of execution of the contract :
Code & Standard Version, i.e. Description

ASME B31.1 2018 Power Piping
ASME B31.3 2018 Process Piping
ASME B31.8 2018 Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems
ASME B1.1 2019 Unified Inch Screw Threads
ASME B1.20.1 2013 Pipe Threads, General Purpose, Inch
ASME B16.5 2017 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings: NPS 1/2 through NPS
24 Metric/Inch Standard
ASME B16.9 2018 Factory Made Wrought Butt welding Fittings

Power Plant
ASME B16.10 2017 Face-to-Face and End-to-End Dimensions of Valves

ASME B16.11 2016 Forged Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
ASME B16.20 2017 Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges: Ring-Joint, Spiral-
Wound, and Jacketed
ASME B16.21 2016 Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
ASME B16.25 2017 Buttwelding Ends
ASME B16.34 2017 Valves Flanged, Threaded and Welding End
ASME B16.47 2017 Large Diameter Steel Flanges: NPS 26 through NPS 60
Metric/Inch Standard
ASME B18.2.1 2012 Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Askew Head Bolts and Hex,
Heavy Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, and Lag Screws
(Inch Series)
ASME B18.2.2 2015 Nuts for General Applications: Machine Screw Nuts, Hex,
Square, Hex Flange, and Coupling Nuts (Inch Series)
ASME B36.10M 2018 Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe
ASME B36.19M 2018 Stainless Steel Pipe
ASME B&PV 2019 Section I. Rules for Construction Power Boilers
ASME B&PV 2019 Section II Materials
API 594 2018 Check Valves: Wafer, Wafer-Lug, and Double Flanged Type
API 598 2016 Valve Inspection and Test
API 600 2015 Bolted Bonnet Steel Gate Valves for Petroleum and Natural
Gas Industries
API 602 2016 Steel Gate, Globe and check valves for size DN100 and
smaller for the Petroleum and Natural Gas Industries
API 603 2019 Corrosion-Resistant, Bolted Bonnet Gate Valves-Flanged
and Buttwelding Ends
API 607 2016 Fire Test for Soft-seated Quarter-turn Valves
API 608 2012 Metal Ball Valves – Threaded, and Welding Ends
API 609 2016 Butterfly Valves: Double Flanged, Lug- and Wafer-Type
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
AWWA - American Water Works Association
NACE - National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
MSS - Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve &
Fittings Industry Inc.
ISO - International Standardization Organization
BSI - British Standards Institution
DIN - DeuchesInstitut fur Normung
EN - EuropeenNormalisation

Power Plant
2.2 Unless otherwise indicated, all piping design is in accordance with the requirements of
ASME B31.1 for Power Plant as a main design code.
3.0 REFERENCE
3.1 ABBREVIATION
ASME : American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ANSI : American National Standard Institute
ASTM : American Society for Testing and Materials
API : American Petroleum Institute
AWWA : American Water Works Association
BFP : Boiler Feed Pump
BOP : Balance of Plant
BSI : British Standards Institution
CEP : Condensate Extraction Pump,
CPL : Coupling
DIN : Deutsches Institut für Normung
DN : Diameter Nominal
ECO : Economizer
EN : European Standards
ESDV : Emergency Shut Down Valve
E90 : 90 Elbow
E45 : 45 Elbow
FGH : Fuel Gas Heater
FF : Flat Face(Flange)
FLGD : Flanged
GRE : Glass Reinforced Epoxy
GRP : Glass Reinforced Plastic/Polyester
GRV : Glass Reinforced Vinylester
GR OPR : Gear Operation
GSK : Gasket
HDPE : High Density Polyethylene
H/E : Heat Exchanger
HRSG : Heat Recovery Steam Generator
HW OPR : Hand Wheel Operation
HVAC Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning
ISO : International Standardization Organization
NFPA : National Fire Protection Association
NIPL : Pipe Nipple
NPS : Nominal Pipe Size
MSS : Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve & Fittings

Power Plant
Industry Inc.
OS&Y : Outside Stem & Yoke
PIP : Pipe
PLG : Plug
PSB : Pressure Seal Bonnet
PWHT : Post Weld Heat Treatment
P&ID : Piping & Instrument Diagram
PTFE : Polytetrafluoroethylene
REDC : Reducer Concentric
REDE : Reducer Eccentric
RF : Raised Face(Flange)
SI : International system of units
SMLS : Seamless
SOL : Sockolet
SWGC : Swage Concentric
SWGE : Swage Eccentric
TBS : Traveling Band Screen
THRD : Threaded
VBFY : Butterfly Valve
VCHK : Check Valve
VDIA : Diaphragm Valve
VGAT : Gate Valve
VGLB : Globe Valve
WOL : Weldolet
3.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
19CN-00GEN00-M02-0001 Mechanical Design Criteria

19CN-00GEN00-P06-0001 Pipe Line list
19CN-00GEN00-P06-0002 Manual Valve list
19CN-00GEN00-P05-0002 Pipe Wall Thickness Calculation Sheet
19CN-00GEN00-M05-0001 P&ID Drawing List
19CN-00GEN00-M05-0002 P&ID Symbols and Legends (1/3)
19CN-00GEN00-M05-0003 P&ID Symbols and Legends (2/3)
19CN-00GEN00-M05-0004 P&ID for Symbols and Legends (3/3)
19CN-10LBA10-M05-0001 P&ID for HP Steam System_Group1
19CN-10LBC40-M05-0001 P&ID for CRH Steam System_Group1
19CN-10LBB50-M05-0001 P&ID for HRH Steam System_Group1
19CN-10MAN10-M05-0001 P&ID for Bypass Steam System (1/2)_Group1
19CN-10MAN10-M05-0002 P&ID for Bypass Steam System (2/2)_Group1
19CN-10LBA30-M05-0001 P&ID for LP Steam System_Group1
19CN-10LBG10-M05-0001 P&ID for Auxiliary Steam System_Group1
19CN-10LCA10-M05-0001 P&ID for Condensate System (1/2)_Group1
Power Plant

19CN-10MAJ10-M05-0001 P&ID for Condenser Air Removal System_Group1
19CN-10PUE00-M05-0001 P&ID for Condenser Water Box Air Removal
System_Group1
19CN-10LCM10-M05-0001 P&ID for Clean Drains System (1/2)_Group1
19CN-10LAB00-M05-0001 P&ID for Feed water System (1/2)_Group1
19CN-10LAB00-M05-0002 P&ID for Feed water System (2/2)_Group1
19CN-10PAB20-M05-0001 P&ID for Circulating Water System_Group1
19CN-10PCB10-M05-0001 P&ID for Auxiliary Cooling water System_Group1
19CN-10PGB10-M05-0001 P&ID for Closed Cooling Water System (1/7)_Group1
19CN-10QUA10-M05-0001 P&ID for Sampling System_Group1
19CN-10QCA00-M05-0001 P&ID for Chemical Dosing System_Group1
19CN-20LBA10-M05-0001 P&ID for HP Steam System_Group2
19CN-20LBC40-M05-0001 P&ID for CRH Steam System_Group2
19CN-20LBB50-M05-0001 P&ID for HRH Steam System_Group2
19CN-20MAN10-M05-0001 P&ID for Bypass Steam System_Group2
19CN-20LBA30-M05-0001 P&ID for LP Steam System_Group2
19CN-20LBG10-M05-0001 P&ID for Auxiliary Steam System_Group2
19CN-20MAJ10-M05-0001 P&ID for Condenser Air Removal System_Group2
19CN-20PUE00-M05-0001 P&ID for Condenser Water Box Air Removal
System_Group2
19CN-20LAB00-M05-0001 P&ID for Feed water System_Group2
19CN-20PAB20-M05-0001 P&ID for Circulating Water System_Group2
19CN-20PCB10-M05-0001 P&ID for Auxiliary Cooling water System_Group2
19CN-20QCA00-M05-0001 P&ID for Chemical Dosing System_Group2
19CN-20QUA10-M05-0001 P&ID for Sampling System_Group2
19CN-00PAB10-M05-0001 P&ID for Circulating Water System(1/2)

Power Plant
19CN-00PAB10-M05-0002 P&ID for Circulating Water System(2/2)

19CN-00PCB10-M05-0001 P&ID for Auxiliary Cooling water System
19CN-00EKG00-M05-0001 P&ID for Fuel Gas Supply System (1/4)
19CN-00EGD00-M05-0001 P&ID for Fuel Oil Supply System (1/3)
19CN-00QFA10-M05-0001 P&ID for Compressed Air System
19CN-00QFB10-M05-0001 P&ID for Instrument Air Ditribution System
19CN-00SCB10-M05-0001 P&ID for Service Air Distribution System
19CN-00QJA10-M05-0001 P&ID for Service Gas System (1 / 2)
19CN-00QJA10-M05-0002 P&ID for Service Gas System (2 / 2)
19CN-00GHB10-M05-0001 P&ID for Service & Desal. Distribution Water System (1/2)
19CN-00GHB10-M05-0002 P&ID for Service & Desal. Distribution Water System (2/2)
19CN-00GKB10-M05-0001 P&ID for Potable Water Distribution System
19CN-00GHC10-M05-0001 P&ID for Demi. Water Distribution System (1/2)
19CN-00GHC10-M05-0002 P&ID for Demi. Water Distribution System (2/2)
19CN-00GMA10-M05-0001 P&ID for Chemical Waste Water Transfer System
19CN-00GMB10-M05-0001 P&ID for Oily Waste Water Transfer System (1/2)
19CN-00GMB10-M05-0002 P&ID for Oily Waste Water Transfer System (2/2)
19CN-00GQA10-M05-0001 P&ID for Sanitary Sewer Transfer System
19CN-00GEN00-Q01-0001 Project Quality Plan
19CN-00GEN00-P91-0001 Inspection and Test Plan for Piping work
4.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

4.1 Unit
Unless otherwise specified, metric, Celsius, bar and SI units shall be applied as the
measurement system.
4.2 Materials
Material for individual piping components shall be in accordance with the requirements
of the applicable Codes and Standards in paragraph. 2.0.
The pressure and temperature given in each piping class are the design limitation and
shall not be exceeded. All piping components and pipe wall thickness shown in each
piping class are based on these limits.
Material used in the fabrication of piping and piping components shall be new.
Reinforcing pad shall be the same material grade as the pipe. Several common
Power Plant
materials are now produced as “dual certified” or are multiple marked, meaning that
these materials conform to more than one material specification or grade. Any material
so marked may be used interchangeably for any or all of the corresponding materials
called out in the standard. The most common example is “quad-stenciled” seamless
steel pipe, which is marked “A(SA)53-B/A(SA)106-B/API-5L-B/API-5L-X42”. This pipe
may be used anywhere that (S)A53 Gr.B Type S or (S)A106 Gr.B is specified. Another
is “dual-stenciled “304/304L stainless which may be used wherever either 304 or 304L
is specified, or “dual-stenciled” 316/316L stainless which may be used wherever either
316 or 316L is specified. Material that are not multiple or dual-marked may not be used
in this manner.
4.3 Pipe and Fittings

4.3.1 The component thicknesses defined in each piping class are those required for the
components to withstand the specified pressure-temperature conditions.
4.3.2 Pipe and fitting wall thickness shall be calculated in accordance with paragraph 104.1
of ASME B31.1.
- Corrosion allowance for carbon steel : 1.6mm
- Corrosion allowance for alloy and stainless steel : 0mm
4.3.3 Dimensions of pipes shall be in accordance with the following standard.
(1) Welded and seamless wrought steel pipe : ASME B36.10M
(2) Stainless steel pipe : ASME B36.19M
4.3.4 The following nominal pipe size shall not be used except where required to connect to
equipment.
DN6, DN8, DN10, DN90
Piping connected to an equipment connection of a size or type not authorized by this

specification should change via a reducing fitting to accepted standard size and type.
4.3.5 Socket weld and screwed fittings shall be used DN50 and smaller, and butt weld fittings
for DN65 and larger.
4.3.6 Socket weld full coupling shall be used for connection of DN50 and smaller pipes in
straight run.
4.3.7 All screwed connections shall have taper threads in accordance with ASME B1.20.1
Pipe Threads, General Purpose.

Power Plant
4.3.8 Wrought steel fittings can be superseded with forged steel ones.
4.3.9 Regardless of requirements in ASTM A234 allowing a seamless or welded pipe, all
seamless fittings provided under this Specification shall be actually seamless.
4.3.10 Long radius elbows shall be generally used for all piping, unless otherwise noted. Short
radius elbows may only be used for where space limitations do not permit the use of
long radius elbow or bend.
4.3.11 Formed bends and offsets shall be used and be cold formed in a standard pipe bending
machine. They shall have a bend radius of not less than 5 times the nominal diameter
of the pipe unless otherwise specified.
Only in small bore welded piping (DN50 and smaller), hot or cold-formed bends with a
radius of 5D min. may be used.
For Alloy Material >DN50, induction bending should be considered. Cold bending
should be subject to prior approval by the owner.
4.3.12 For pipe diameter size DN1300 & over, miter bend can be substituted for a formed
elbow. The miter bends shall be fabricated according to ASME B31.1.
4.3.13 Fittings shall conform to the requirements of the following standard and any special
requirements noted in individual piping material classes:
(1) Butt Welding Fittings including Stub Ends : ASME B16.9
(2) Threaded and Socket Welding Fittings : ASME B16.11
4.3.14 All non-ferrous fittings shall be fully rated for the same internal pressure as the matching
pipe.
4.3.15 Brass and malleable iron fittings are screwed type.
4.3.16 The HDPE pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free from visible cracks, holes,
foreign inclusions, or other defects.
4.4 Flanges
4.4.1 Flange ratings, facing, face finish and manufacture shall be as per ASME B16.5 unless
otherwise noted. Flanges for DN 650 thru DN900 size shall be manufactured as per
ASME B 16.47 Series A. And flanges for DN 550 size shall be manufactured as per
MSS SP-44. For cooling water service system for DN950 & larger, AWWA C207 CL.D
flange shall be used.
4.4.2 Flange classes are specified in accordance with ASME B16.5, ASME B16.47 or AWWA
Power Plant
C207. Flange classes listed in these Specifications are based upon design pressure
and temperature conditions only, and do not account for other loads.
4.4.3 Flanges outside the scope of ASME B 16.5, B 16.47, AWWA C207 or MSS SP-44 shall
be designed in accordance with Manufacture standard. Bolts and gasket materials for
these flanges are specified in each Piping Class.
4.4.4 The bore of welding neck flanges shall correspond to the inside diameter of the
connecting pipe or fitting.
4.4.5 Polyethylene flange adapters shall be made with sufficient through-bore length to be
clamped in a butt fusion-joining machine without the use of a stub-end holder.
4.4.6 Face Finish
(1) Flat Face shall be finished in 250-500 μin AARH.
(2) Raised Face shall have serrated, concentric or spiral groove, 125-250μin AARH.
(3) Ring Joint shall have 63μin AARH max.
4.4.7 Spectacle blinds, Paddle blanks and spacers
(1) Spectacle blinds shall be provided pipe size up to 12” and smaller,
(2) Paddle blanks and spacers shall be provided in size 14” and larger and where the
weight of a spectacle blind would make its operation impractical.
(3) Flanges with jack-screws shall be provided at blind or spacer locations as per the
following:
150LB and 300LB Flanges 12” and larger
600LB, 900LB and 1500LB flanges 8” and larger
4.5 Gaskets
4.5.1 Limitation dimensions of gaskets other than Ring Joint suitable for ASME flanges shall
be in accordance with ASME B16.5, ANNEX E.
4.5.2 ASME B16.20 and B16.21 shall be considered for selection of gaskets.
4.5.3 Gasket dimensions for flanges larger than DN600 shall be in accordance with the flange
standard specified in the individual specification class.
4.5.4 Asbestos materials shall not be used for gaskets.
4.5.5 Full face gasket shall be used for FF(Flat Face) flanges.

Power Plant
4.5.6 The diameter of the internal ring shall not extend into the cross-section of the pipe.
4.6 Bolts and Nuts for Flange

4.6.1 Bolting materials shall be as specified in each Piping Material Class.
4.6.2 For carbon and alloy piping, the bolts and nuts shall be hot dip galvanized as per ASTM
A153 Class C and applicable standards below 200°C, and shall be chromium chromate
coated as per ASTM B166 and applicable standards over 200°C unless otherwise
indicated in the Piping Material Classes.
4.6.3 The bolts shall have full-length thread and the tips shall be flat finished.
4.6.4 Bolts and nuts shall be free burrs, seams, laps, loose scale, irregular surface and any
defects affecting their service ability.
4.6.5 Dimensional requirements of bolts and nuts for flange connection shall be in
accordance with ASME B16.5 Table 1C.
4.6.6 Flange bolts and nuts shall conform to ASME B18.2.1 and B18.2.2, respectively.
Tolerance shall be Class 2A and 2B for bolts and nuts, respectively. Nuts for bolts and
studs shall be American Heavy Hexagon Series.
4.6.7 To prevent cathodic and galvanic corrosion between dissimilar metals or in connection
with underground piping, the protection measures shall be afforded by insulation
flanges, electroplating, suitable gaskets, or other means.
4.6.8 Steel washers shall be used for connection of GRP and steel nut to protect damage of
GRP material.
4.7 Valves
4.7.1 Valves assemblies shall be designed for the pressure and temperature ratings of the
class specified in the Piping Material Classes and Master Valve List.
4.7.2 The face to face dimensions for valves to the extent covered shall be in accordance
with ASME B16.10, minimum body wall thickness shall conform to ASME B16.34,
without considering addition of corrosion allowance as specified on the each Piping
class, unless otherwise specified in the applicable Codes and Standards
4.7.3 Testing for valves shall be in accordance with ASME B16.34
4.7.4 Unless otherwise specified, socket weld & screw bores shall conform to ASME B 16.11.
4.7.5 Details of valve bonnet, trim, packing, ends and stem shall be applied with the following
requirement unless otherwise specified in the applicable Codes and Standards;
Power Plant
(1) Valve Bonnets
All valves shall have bolted covers and bolted gland stuffing boxes. Screwed gland and
bonnets will not be accepted.
As a rule, type of valve bonnets for gate, globe and check valves up to 600# shall be
that of bolted-bonnet and outside screw and yoke.
900# and above gate valves shall be pressure seal type.
Bonnet bolts and gaskets for valves shall be equal to, or better than the connecting line
material.
(2) Valve Trim Materials
All valves ASME class 150 and higher shall have satellite hard-faced for seats, discs
and backseats. About hard-facing materials, refer to AWS A5.13. The detail trim material
shall be shown on each piping classes. If threaded seat rings are offered, seal welding
is acceptable.
(3) Valve Packing Material
Packing material for Gate and Globe valve shall have corrosion-inhibited deformed
flexible graphite packing with braided anti-extrusion rings, unless otherwise specified in
each class. Materials used for valve packing and seals shall be suitable for the
maximum and minimum fluid temperatures to which these components will be exposed.
Valve operating under sub-atmospheric conditions shall be with glands and seating ring
water sealed. VOC(Volatile Organic Compounds) Packing, Double o-ring seal valves
without water seal are also available.
(4) Valve Ends
In general, valve ends should be matched with connection pipe dimension & material.
Steel valves of DN50 and smaller shall have socket weld, screwed and flanged end for
all services unless otherwise specified. Valves for DN65 and larger shall have butt weld,
flanged end for all services. For high pressure service, butt weld ended valve may be
used for tight sealing.
(6) Valve Stem (Spindle)
All valves shall be fitted with outside screw stem unless otherwise specified or approved.
All valves shall be fitted with indicators to identify open or shut position of the valves. In
case of valves being fitted with extended stems, indicators shall be fitted to the extended
stems and to the valve stem.

Power Plant
(7) Gear Operation
Gear operator shall be totally enclosed, permanently lubricated and weatherproof with
integrally mounted position indicators. Gear shall be bevel operating type but other type
of gear operation may be acceptable under evaluation of lead engineer in case
manufacture’s deviation is submitted.
Rim pull force for gear operators shall not exceed 250N. The maximum allowable
diameter of gear operator hand-wheel is 750 ㎜. Gear operation shall be required for
the following valve size and rating.
ASME Class Gate Globe Plug & Ball Butterfly
150 DN300 DN300 DN200 DN200
300 DN300 DN250 DN200 DN200
600 & Above DN200 DN200 DN200 DN200
4.7.6 Double isolating valves for drain, vent and I&C shall be applied for the piping system of
pressure higher than 40 bars.
4.7.7 Tag plate shall be attached with stainless steel wire 22 gauge or heavier.
4.7.8 Isolation valves for natural gas system shall be ball type with double block and bleed
function.
4.7.9 DN 65 and above size ball valves for natural gas system shall be top entry/trunnion type
valve.
4.7.10 For natural gas system, valves (Ball, Plug, Butterfly) with soft seat are to be of fire safety
design and shall be certified as per API 607.
4.7.11 Piping connections for welded type ball valve to be referred as below.
A A A A
Butt Welded Type Ball Valve Socket Welded Type Ball Valve

Power Plant
A B A
Double Block Welded Type Ball Valve
※ Pup-Piece to be provided and welded by ball valve supplier.

※ Pup-Piece length, A and B, to be fixed by ball valve supplier.
4.8 Ends
4.8.1 Butt-welding ends shall be in accordance with ASME B16.25.
4.8.2 Socket weld connection to be used for DN50 and smaller unless otherwise specified.
4.8.3 Threads for threaded pipe, fittings, flanges and valves shall be in accordance with
ASME B1.20.1 taper threads.
4.8.4 PTFE jointing tape is only permitted on utility fluids (air, water, etc.) in threaded
connection
4.8.5 Threaded joints in process and steam lines should not be used without prior release by
the Owner. If threaded joints are used in process and steam lines, those should be seal
welded.

Power Plant
5.0 BRANCH CONNECTION

The type of branch connections of the branches shall be selected in accordance with
this paragraph.
When the pipe to pipe connection is defined, the branch connection shall be calculated
in accordance with ASME B31.1. The branch connection should not intersect the
longitudinal weld of the run, so coefficient 1 shall be used for calculation.
5.1 Branch Piping DN 65 and Larger

5.1.1 Pipe Group Criteria
(1) Group 'A' piping
ASME B31.1 Boiler external piping.
ASME B31.1 Non-boiler external piping with design temperature over 400℃.
ASME B31.1 Non-boiler external piping with design temperatures between 175℃ and
400℃ inclusive, with design pressure over 72kg/cm2 and branch wall thickness over
19.05mm.
(2) Group 'B' piping
ASME B31.1 Critical piping not covered in Group A.
(3) Group 'C' piping
ASME B31.1 Non-critical piping with design temperature over 149℃ and not covered
in Group A.
(4) Group 'D' piping
ASME B31.1 Non-critical piping with design temperature less than 149℃.

Power Plant
ZONE 1 ZONE 2 ZONE 3

Group A Tee Tee Weldolet
Group B Tee Tee Weldolet
Group C Tee Weldolet or Tee Weldolet
Weldolet or Tee
Group D Tee Weldolet or Tee
or Stub-in*
* Stub-in : Reinforcement should be considered as code requirement
1200
1150
1100
1050
1000
950
BRANCH PIPE DIAMETER (DN)

900
850
800
750
700
ZONE 1 650
600
550
ZONE 2 500
450
400
350
300
250
ZONE 3 200
150
100
80
65
65
80
100
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
500
550
600
650
700
750
800
850
900
950
1000
1050
1100
1150
1200
MAIN NOMINAL PIPE DIAMETER (DN)
5.1.2 Follow the rules below for Zone 2 of Group C and Zone 2, 3 of Group D.
(1) Use weldolets up to and including DN 200.

(2) Use stub-in other cases

Power Plant
5.2 Branch Piping DN 50 and Smaller
3000 # 6000 # 9000 #

50 50 ZONE 5 50
ZONE 5 ZONE 5
40 40 40
BRANCH
SIZE (DN)
ZONE 6 25 ZONE 6 25 ZONE 6 25
20 20 20
15 15 15
65 80 100 150 200 65 80 100 150 200 65 80 100 150 200
RUN SIZE (DN)
5.2.1 Criteria
(1) Zone 5 : Butt-welding tee with swage
(2) Zone 6 : Sockolet, Threadolet (See Note 3 in Para. 4.2.3.) or Half coupling(150#
only)
5.2.2 Application
(1) Determine pressure rating from piping class sheet.

(2) Locate branch size and run size for given pressure rating.
(3) Find requirements where vertical line from run size meets horizontal line from
branch size.
5.2.3 Notes
(1) For run size DN 50 and smaller, use socket welding tees with reducer or reducing
tees.
(2) For run sizes greater than DN 200, use half coupling, sockolet or threadolet.
(3) Threadolet to be used only in systems in which threaded connections are permitted
by the piping class sheet.

Power Plant
6.0 VENT & DRAIN INSTALLATION

Valve’s specifications shall be according to the applicable piping material classes.
Each high pressure (above 40 bar) drain and vent shall be fitted with two valves in
series.
Ball valve shall be used for natural gas supply system, unless otherwise specified on
the design drawings.
Valves to be located at accessible point
Drain pipe to be extended to drain pit.(or soak away pit to be provided where drain pit
is not available)
6.1 Typical Installation

Typical installation of valves for vent & drain purpose shall be in accordance with
following instruction.
6.1.1 Single Block
For general application, single block valve is applicable.
6.1.2 Double Block
Double block valves shall be used for High Pressure(above 40 bar).
THRD CAP
75mm MIN. 75mm MIN.1)
Note 1) Minimun distance between welds for materials where PWHT is required should be 100mm

Power Plant
6.2 Vent & Drain for Non-metal Piping
Vent Drain

Power Plant
7.0 INSTRUMENT CONNECTIONS

7.1 General
(1) Half coupling or sockolet material shall be in accordance with piping class sheet.
(2) Threaded connection may be used only where permitted by piping class sheet.
(3) Calculations showing adequate reinforcement are required when half coupling
nominal size exceeds one-fourth times the nominal size of the run for ASME B 31.1.
(4) Pressure class of fitting and the detail connection type shall be in accordance with
applicable piping class sheet
7.2 Pressure Instrument Connections

7.2.1 Pressure instrument connection for high pressure(above 40 bar) : Double valve
7.2.2 Pressure instrument connection for low pressure(40 bar & below) : Single valve

Power Plant
7.2.3 Pressure instrument connection for Non-metal or Lined Piping
7.3 Level Instrument Connections

7.3.1 Level instrument connection for high pressure(above 40 bar) : Double valve
7.3.2 Level instrument connection for low pressure(40 bar & below) : Single valve

Power Plant
7.4 Temperature Instrument Connections

7.4.1 Thermowell Assembly for nominal pipe wall thickness greater than 19.05mm(Type A)
Pipe Size(DN) “U” Length(mm) * Notes

100 40 1. The table as shown above is for reference.
150 60 2. “U” & “L” length shall be determined finally as per
200 80 Thermowell strength calculation.
250 100 3. All around shall be welded and stress relieved
300 120 in accordance with the applicable codes and standards.
Smaller than pipe
350 & Larger
diameter x 1/3

Power Plant
7.4.2 Thermowell Assembly for nominal pipe wall thickness less than 19.05mm(Type B)
* Notes
1. To Grind After Welding
2. “U” Length of thermowell shall be refer to the table on Type A

Power Plant
7.4.3 Thermowell installation in DN80 and smaller line(Type C)
A. Standard Thermowell according to instrument drawing

B. Boss
C. Eccentric or concentric reducer : DN100 to main pipe
size, butt-welded, material according to piping class
* Reference arrangement
- Vertical line : Concentric Reducer
- Horizontal Line : Concentric or Eccentric Reducer
D. Pipe - DN100, material according to piping class,
minimum length = 150㎜.
E. Line pipe, butt-welded.
F. Fillet/socket weld
G. Full penetration weld
7.4.4 Thermowell installation in Non-metal & Lined Piping
* DN80 and smaller lines refer to Para. 6.4.3.

Power Plant
7.4.5 Thermowell Material Selection Chart
Pipe Material Thermowell (Note.2 ~ 4)

Specification Fitting
Bar Forging
ASTM (Note.1)
Carbon Steel
A106 Gr. B A105 A479 Gr.316L A182 Gr.316L
A106 Gr. C
A53 Gr. B
Low Alloy Steel
A335 Gr.P11 A182 Gr. F11 - A182 Gr. F11
A335 Gr.P91 A182 Gr. F91 - A182 Gr. F91
Stainless Steel
A312 Gr.TP304 / 304L A182 Gr. F304L A479 Gr.316L A182 Gr. 316L
A358 Gr.304L CI.1 or F316L
A312 Gr.TP316 / 316L
* Notes
1. Use SA material for ASME section I and III application
2. If not mentioned above table, the material of thermowells has to be applied to 316 stainless steel.
3. For corrosive fluid system, monel or 316L with Teflon lining to be applied.

Power Plant
8.0 MATERIAL CLASSES

C A 1
(1) (2) (3)
(1) Class / Rating : See para. 7.1

(2) Material : See para.7.2
(3) Sequence Number : See pare. 7.3
8.1 First Letter : Class / Rating

A : 2500# SPL B16.5
B : 2500# B16.5
C : 1500# SPL B16.5
D : 1500# B16.5
E : 900# B16.5
F : 600# B16.5
G : 300# B16.5
H : 150# B16.5
X Special as Designated
8.2 Second Letter : Material

A : Alloy Steel (Cr-Mo)
B : Carbon Steel (CS)
C : Stainless Steel (304 or 304L)
D : Stainless Steel (316 or 316L), Duplex Stainless Steel
E : Cast Iron or Ductile Iron(CI or DI)
F : Carbon Steel – Galvanized
G : Copper
H : Polyvinyl Chloride(PVC) or Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC)
J : Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene (ABS)
K : Carbon Steel - PE Coated
L : High Density Polyethylene(HDPE)
M Polypropylene(PP)
R Fiberglass (Reinforced Plastic (FRP) - GRP, GRE, GRV, etc.)
S Concrete
8.3 Third Letter : Sequence Number

This is a sequential number for the piping material classification.

Power Plant
9.0 INDEX OF PIPING MATERIAL CLASSES

Design Design
PDC ASME Basic C.A.1)
Class Service(System) Pr. Temp. PWHT Remarks
No. Rating Material (mm)
(barg) (℃)
HP Steam (Group #10)

182.0 608.0
HP Steam Drain 2500#
AA1 Later A335-P92 0
HP Steam (Group #20) SPL
186.0 608.0
HP Steam Drain
HP Steam (Group #10)

182.0 608.0
HP Steam Drain 2500#
AA2 Later SA335-P92 0 ASME Sec. I
HP Steam (Group #20) SPL
186.0 608.0
HP Steam Drain
Feed water pump HP

275.0 200.0
discharge(#10)
Feed water pump HP

BB1 Later 2500# A106-C 264.0 190.0 1.6
discharge(#20)
HP Feed Water Pump to GT

283.0 200.0
TCA Cooler
HP ECO Outlet to Fuel Gas

191.0 375.0
Heater
BB2 Later 2500# A106-C 1.6
GT TCA Cooler to HRSG HP
283.0 375.0
ECO
BD1 Chemical Dosing to HP Drum Later 2500# A312-TP316 194.0 362.0 0 N/A
HP Bypass Valve
DA1 downstream Later 1500# A335-P22 47.0 560.0 0
(Transition section)
Hot Reheat Steam
EA1 Later 900# A335-P92 43.0 627.0 0
HRH to IP Bypass Valve Inlet
Feed Water from FGH to IP
EB1 Heater Later 900# A106-C 92.0 305.0 1.6
IP ECO Outlet to FGH
Fuel Gas Performance
EC1 Later 900# A312-TP304 64 335 0 N/A
Heater to Last Chance Filter
Feed water pump IP

79.0 200.0
discharge
Spray water for #10 HP

FB1 Later 600# A106-C 70.0 190.0 1.6
Bypass Valve
Spray water for #20 HP

65.0 190.0
Bypass Valve
A106-B
FB2 From IP1(Fuel Gas) to ESDV Later 600# 64.0 65.0 1.6
API 5L-B

Power Plant
Design Design
(barg) (℃)
Fuel Gas Compressor to

64 140
FGH
Cold Reheat Steam A106-C

Later 47.0 380.0
Cold Reheat Steam Drain A672-B70
FB3 600# 1.6
HP BPV Downstream To
Later A106-C 47.0 380.0
CRH Piping
FD1 Chemical Dosing to IP Drum Later 600# A312-TP316 46.0 259.0 0 N/A
IP Bypass Valve
GA1 Later 300# A691-Gr.91 10.5 617.0 0
Downstream(Transition)
Clean Drain Tank HP Drain

Later 300# A335-P22 28.0 460.0 0
Header
GA2
Clean Drain Tank HRH Drain
Later 300# A335-P22 5.0 510.0 0
Header
LP Steam
13.0 326.0
LP Steam Drain
GB1 Later 300# A106-B 1.6
Aux Steam
20.0 330.0
Aux Steam Drain
LP Steam
GB2 Later 300# SA106-B 13.0 326.0 1.6 ASME Sec. I
LP Steam Drain
CEP Discharge 31.0 50.0

GB3 Later 300# A106-B 1.6
Condensate System – Spray
29.0 60.0
water
#10 Sampling 31.0 60.0
GD1 #20 Sampling Later 300# A312-TP316 31.0 50.0 0 N/A
Chemical Dosing to CEP

33.0 50.0
Discharge
BFP Suction 13.5 190.0
IP Bypass Valve A106-B

HB1 Later 150# 10.5 220.0 1.6
Downstream to Condenser A672 B60
LP Bypass Valve
4.0 180.0
Downstream to Condenser
A106-B
HB2 CEP Suction Later 150# 3.5 50 1.6
A53-B ERW

Power Plant
Design Design
(barg) (℃)
Condenser Vacuum System (0.9) 42.0
Closed Cooling Water

10.0 55.0
Supply
Closed Cooling Water Return 10.0 55.0
Fuel Oil Transfer Pump

6.5 60.0
Suction
Fuel Oil Transfer Pump

6.5 60.0
Discharge
Fuel Oil Forwarding Pump

6.5 60.0
Suction
Fuel Oil Forwarding Pump

6.5 60.0
Discharge
CO2 Gas System 9.0 50.0
N2 Gas System 2.5 50.0
Oily Waste Water(AG) 4.0 60.0

HB3 Later 150# A53-B 1.6
Sanitary Waste Water(AG) 4.0 60.0
Service Water System Later 11.0 60.0
Compressed Air System Later 11.0 70.0
Demi water Later 11.0 60.0

HC1 150# A312-TP304 0 N/A
Desalinated Water Supply
Later 11.0 60.0
from SWRO System
Potable Water System Later 11.0 60.0
Chemical Waste Water(AG) Later 4.0 60.0
H2 Gas System 9.0 50.0

HD1 Later 150# A312-TP316 0 N/A
Chemical Dosing to LP Drum 12.0 188.0

Power Plant
Design Design
(barg) (℃)
Back-up Fuel Oil

HK1 Later 150# A106-B 6.5 60.0 0 N/A PE Coated
Transfer(UG)
Oily Waste Water(UG) 4.0 30.0
150#
Operating
HL1 Chemical Waste Water(UG) Later / HDPE 4.0 30.0 N/A N/A
Condition
SDR11
Sanitary Waste Water(UG) 4.0 30.0
150#
Operating
HL2 Fire Fighting Ring main(UG) Later / HDPE 13.8 30.0 N/A N/A
Condition
SDR9
Fire Fighting – Fire
GF1 Later 300# A53-B Galv. 50.0 35.0 1.6 N/A
Protection Gas System
Fire Fighting – Fire A106-B

HF1 Later 150# 13.8 35.0 1.6 N/A
Protection Water Galv.
Main Cooling Water Supply 4.0 &

50.0
to Condenser F.V2)
Main Cooling Water Return

4.0 & F.V 50.0
to Seal Pit
Condenser Vacuum Pump
Cooling Water Supply & 4.0 & F.V 50.0
Return
HR1 TBS Wash Water Pump Later 150# GRP N/A N/A
4.0 & F.V 50.0
Suction
ACW Supply from ACWP to

4.5 & F.V 50.0
CCW H/E
ACW Return from CCW H/E 4.5 50.0
Desal & E.C Pump

5.0 50.0
Discharge
Hypochlorite Solution
HR2 Later 150# GRV Later Later N/A N/A
Injection
Clean drain tank to CW

HR3 Later 150# GRE Later Later N/A N/A
discharge
Note.
1) Corrosion allowance
2) Full Vacuum

Power Plant
10.0 PIPING MATERIAL CLASSES SHEETS

Each piping material class indicates the maximum design pressures and temperatures for
which the piping material classes may be used. For each piping system, or portion thereof,
a piping material class shall be selected which provides material appropriate for the service
conditions and which has a maximum allowable design pressure and temperature which
equal or exceeds the design pressure and temperature of the line for which it is to be used.

[F3] UAE Fujairah3 IPP P19CN
[F3] UAE Fujairah3 IPP
Rev No. Date Status Prep By. Checked By. Approved By. P/M
Index of Piping Material Specification
Class Material Service Rating Temp Limit CA Rev. No.
AA1 ALLOY STEEL (9 CR - 2 W) CL.2500 SPL 0.0 MM 2
AA2 ALLOY STEEL (9 CR - 2 W) CL.2500 SPL 0.0 MM 2
BB1 CARBON STEEL CL.2500 1.6 MM 0
BB2 CARBON STEEL CL.2500 1.6 MM 0
BD1 STAINLESS STEEL (SS316) CL.2500 0.0 MM 0
DA1 Alloy Steel ( A335-P22) CL.1500 0.0 MM 0
EA1 ALLOY STEEL (9 CR - 2 W) CL.900 0.0 MM 2
EB1 CARBON STEEL CL.900 1.6 MM 0
EC1 STAINLESS STEEL (SS304) CL.900 0.0 MM 1
FA1 Alloy Steel ( A335-P11 ) CL.600 0.0 MM 2
FB1 CARBON STEEL CL.600 1.6 MM 0
FD1 STAINLESS STEEL (SS316) CL.600 0.0 MM 0
GA1 ALLOY STEEL (9 CR - 1 MO) CL.300 0.0 MM 2
GA2 Alloy Steel ( A335-P22) CL.300 0.0 MM 1
GB1 CARBON STEEL CL.300 1.6 MM 0
GD1 STAINLESS STEEL (SS316) CL.300 0.0 MM 0
GF1 CARBON STEEL CL.300 1.6 MM 0
HB1 CARBON STEEL CL.150 1.6 MM 1
HC1 STAINLESS STEEL (SS304) CL.150 0.0 MM 2
HD1 STAINLESS STEEL (SS316L) CL.150 0.0 MM 0
HF1 CARBON STEEL CL.150 1.6 MM 0
PLMMS2207XR
Date : 20-08-2020
Class Material Service Rating Temp Limit CA Rev. No.
HK1 CARBON STEEL CL.150 1.6 MM 0
HL1 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) CL.150 0
HL2 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE (HDPE) CL.150 0
HR1 GLASSFIBER REINFORCED POLYESTER (GRP) CL.150 0.0 MM 2
HR2 GLASSFIBER REINFORCED VINYLESTER (GRV) CL.150 0
HR3 GLASSFIBER REINFORCED EPOXY (GRE) CL.150 0
PLMMS2207XR
Date : 20-08-2020
CLASS FB2
PJT No. P19CN
Rev. No. 1
Page 31 of 90
Service Design Code ASME B31.1

Material CARBON STEEL Facing
Rating CL.600 PWHT
Temp. Limit / Press. Inspection
Corr. Allow. 1.6 MM
NPS .5 .75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24

SCH S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80 S-40 S-40 S-40 S-60 S-60 S-XS S-XS S-60 S-60 S-60 S-60 S-60
SHORT SIZE RANGE(NPS)

OPT COMMIDITY CODE DESCRIPTION NOTE Rev
CODE SIZE1 SIZE2
Pipe
PIP PPPPBCRSPEZZBQZZZ 0.5 2 PIPE, ASTM A106 GR.B, SMLS, PE, ASME B36.10M 0
PIP PPPPBCRSBEZZBQZZZ 3 20 PIPE, ASTM A106 GR.B, SMLS, BE, ASME B36.10M 0
PIP PPPPBEEFBEZZAAZZZ 22 24 PIPE, API 5L GR.B, EFW, BE, API 5L 0
90 Elbow
E90 POE90BCGBSSWZZB2ZZZ 0.5 2 90 ELBOW, ASTM A105, CL.3000, SWE, ASME B16.11 0
E90 PWE9LBCKSBWZZBMZZZ 3 20 90 ELBOW, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, SMLS, BW, ASME B16.9 0
E90 PWE9LBCKWBWZZBMZZZ 22 24 90 ELBOW, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, WELDED, BW, ASME B16.9 0
45 Elbow
E45 PWE4LBCKSBWZZBMZZZ 3 20 45 ELBOW, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, SMLS, BW, ASME B16.9 0
Reducer
REDC PWRECBCKSBWZZBMZZZ 3 20 CON. REDUCER, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, SMLS, BW, ASME B16.9 0
REDC PWRECBCKWBWZZBMZZZ 22 24 CON. REDUCER, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, WELDED, BW, ASME B16.9 0
REDE PWREEBCKSBWZZBMZZZ 3 20 ECC. REDUCER, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, SMLS, BW, ASME B16.9 0
REDE PWREEBCKWBWZZBMZZZ 22 24 ECC. REDUCER, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, WELDED, BW, ASME B16.9 0
Tee
TEE POETEBCGBSSWZZB2ZZZ 0.5 2 TEE, ASTM A105, CL.3000, SWE, ASME B16.11 0
TEE PWTEEBCKSBWZZBMZZZ 3 20 TEE, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, SMLS, BW, ASME B16.9 0
TEE PWTEEBCKWBWZZBMZZZ 22 24 TEE, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, WELDED, BW, ASME B16.9 0
TRE PORTEBCGBSSWZZB2ZZZ 0.5 2 RED. TEE, ASTM A105, CL.3000, SWE, ASME B16.11 0
TRE PWTERBCKSBWZZBMZZZ 3 20 RED. TEE, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, SMLS, BW, ASME B16.9 0
TRE PWTERBCKWBWZZBMZZZ 22 24 RED. TEE, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, WELDED, BW, ASME B16.9 0
CAP
CAP POCAPBCGBSSWZZB2ZZZ 0.5 2 CAP, ASTM A105, CL.3000, SWE, ASME B16.11 0
CAP PWCAPBCKSBWZZBMZZZ 3 20 CAP, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, SMLS, BW, ASME B16.9 0
CAP PWCAPBCKWBWZZBMZZZ 22 24 CAP, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, WELDED, BW, ASME B16.9 0
Branch Connection
SOL POSOCBCGBSSWZZM9ZZZ 0.5 24 SOCKOLET, ASTM A105, CL.3000, SWE, MSS SP-97 0
WOL POWOLBCGBWZZM9ZZZ 0.5 24 WELDOLET, ASTM A105, BW, MSS SP-97 0
Flange Blind
FBL PFBLBCGBLRFZZBLZZZ 0.5 24 FLG BLIND, ASTM A105, CL.600, RF, ASME B16.5 0
Flange
FLG PFSDBCGBLRFZZBLZZZ 0.5 2 FLG SW, ASTM A105, CL.600, RF, ASME B16.5 0
PLMMS2207XR
Date : 20-08-2020
CLASS FB2
PJT No. P19CN
Rev. No. 1
Page 32 of 90

Rating CL.600 PWHT
Corr. Allow. 1.6 MM

CODE SIZE1 SIZE2
FLG PFWNBCGBLRFZZBLZZZ 3 24 FLG WN, ASTM A105, CL.600, RF, ASME B16.5 0
Gasket
GSK PGSWBBBBLRFHB9ZZZ 0.5 24 GASKET SPIRAL WOUND, 304SS+FG, OR: C/S, CL.600, RF, THK 4.5MM, ASME B16.20, 0
FOR ASME B16.5
Bolting
BLT PBSBBENBHGBSZZZ 0.5 1.875 85 340 S.BLT/2 H. HEX NUT, ASTM A193 GR.B7/ A194 GR.2H, HOT DIP GALV, ASME 0
B18.2.1/B18.2.2
Ball Valve
VBAL PVBLBCG2FFACRZCBLSWZZZZA9 0.5 2 BALL VALVE, ASTM A105, 2 PCS SIDE ENTRY, FULL BORE, FLOATING TYPE, 304SS 0
AHD BALL, RTFE SEAT, LV OPR, CL.600, SWE, API 6D, FIRE SAFE/ ANTI-STATIC
VBAL PVBLBCD6FTACRZCBLRFZZZZA9 3 6 BALL VALVE, ASTM A216 GR.WCB, 1 PC TOP ENTRY, FULL BORE, TRUNNION 0
AHD MOUNTED TYPE, 304SS BALL, RTFE SEAT, LV OPR, CL.600, FLGD RF, API 6D, FIRE
SAFE/ ANTI-STATIC
VBAL PVBLBCD6FTACRZGBLRFZZZZA9 8 24 BALL VALVE, ASTM A216 GR.WCB, 1 PC TOP ENTRY, FULL BORE, TRUNNION 0
AHD MOUNTED TYPE, 304SS BALL, RTFE SEAT, GR OPR, CL.600, FLGD RF, API 6D, FIRE
SAFE/ ANTI-STATIC
VBAL 11 PVBLBCG2FFACKZCBLSWZZZZA9 0.5 2 BALL VALVE, ASTM A105, 2 PCS SIDE ENTRY, FULL BORE, FLOATING TYPE, 304SS 0
AHD BALL, PEEK SEAT, LV OPR, CL.600, SWE, API 6D, FIRE SAFE/ ANTI-STATIC
VBAL 11 PVBLBCD6FTACKZCBLRFZZZZA9 3 6 BALL VALVE, ASTM A216 GR.WCB, 1 PC TOP ENTRY, FULL BORE, TRUNNION 0
AHD MOUNTED TYPE, 304SS BALL, PEEK SEAT, LV OPR, CL.600, FLGD RF, API 6D, FIRE
SAFE/ ANTI-STATIC
VBAL 11 PVBLBCD6FTACKZGBLRFZZZZA9 8 24 BALL VALVE, ASTM A216 GR.WCB, 1 PC TOP ENTRY, FULL BORE, TRUNNION 0
AHD MOUNTED TYPE, 304SS BALL, PEEK SEAT, GR OPR, CL.600, FLGD RF, API 6D, FIRE
SAFE/ ANTI-STATIC
PLMMS2207XR
Date : 20-08-2020
CLASS FB2
PJT No. P19CN
Rev. No. 1
Page 33 of 90

Rating CL.600 PWHT
Corr. Allow. 1.6 MM
General Class Notes

11 PEEK seat for ball valve shall be reflected at 150℃ to 220℃
Item Specific Notes
No data.
PLMMS2207XR
Date : 20-08-2020
CLASS HB2
PJT No. P19CN
Rev. No. 1
Page 62 of 90

Rating CL.150 PWHT
Corr. Allow. 1.6 MM
NPS .5 .75 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

SCH S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80 S-80 S-40 S-40 S-40 S-40 S-20 S-20 S-20 S-20 S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD S-STD

CODE SIZE1 SIZE2
Pipe
PIP PPPPBCRSPEZZBQZZZ 0.5 2 PIPE, ASTM A106 GR.B, SMLS, PE, ASME B36.10M 0
PIP PPPPBCRSBEZZBQZZZ 2.5 20 PIPE, ASTM A106 GR.B, SMLS, BE, ASME B36.10M 0
PIP PPPPBDLWBEZZBQZZZ 22 28 PIPE, ASTM A53 GR.B, WELDED, BE, ASME B36.10M 0
90 Elbow
E90 PWE9LBCKSBWZZBMZZZ 2.5 20 90 ELBOW, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, SMLS, BW, ASME B16.9 0
45 Elbow
E45 PWE4LBCKSBWZZBMZZZ 2.5 20 45 ELBOW, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, SMLS, BW, ASME B16.9 0
Swage
SWGC POSGCBCGSPGZZM8ZZZ 0.5 4 CON. SWAGE, ASTM A105, SMLS, PBE, MSS SP-95 0
SWGC 706 POSGCBCGSBPZZM8ZZZ 2 4 CON. SWAGE, ASTM A105, SMLS, BLE X PSE, MSS SP-95 0
SWGE POSGEBCGSPGZZB2ZZZ 0.5 4 ECC. SWAGE, ASTM A105, SMLS, PBE, ASME B16.11 0
SWGE 706 POSGEBCGSBPZZB2ZZZ 2 4 ECC. SWAGE, ASTM A105, SMLS, BLE X PSE, ASME B16.11 0
Reducer
REDC PWRECBCKSBWZZBMZZZ 2 20 CON. REDUCER, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, SMLS, BW, ASME B16.9 0
REDC PWRECBCKWBWZZBMZZZ 22 28 CON. REDUCER, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, WELDED, BW, ASME B16.9 0
REDE PWREEBCKSBWZZBMZZZ 2 20 ECC. REDUCER, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, SMLS, BW, ASME B16.9 0
REDE PWREEBCKWBWZZBMZZZ 22 28 ECC. REDUCER, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, WELDED, BW, ASME B16.9 0
Tee
TEE POETEBCGBSSWZZB2ZZZ 0.5 2 TEE, ASTM A105, CL.3000, SWE, ASME B16.11 0
TEE PWTEEBCKSBWZZBMZZZ 2.5 20 TEE, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, SMLS, BW, ASME B16.9 0
TEE PWTEEBCKWBWZZBMZZZ 22 28 TEE, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, WELDED, BW, ASME B16.9 0
TRE PORTEBCGBSSWZZB2ZZZ 0.5 2 RED. TEE, ASTM A105, CL.3000, SWE, ASME B16.11 0
TRE PWTERBCKSBWZZBMZZZ 2.5 20 RED. TEE, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, SMLS, BW, ASME B16.9 0
TRE PWTERBCKWBWZZBMZZZ 22 28 RED. TEE, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, WELDED, BW, ASME B16.9 0
CAP
CAP POCAPBCGBSSWZZB2ZZZ 0.5 2 CAP, ASTM A105, CL.3000, SWE, ASME B16.11 0
CAP PWCAPBCKSBWZZBMZZZ 2.5 20 CAP, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, SMLS, BW, ASME B16.9 0
CAP PWCAPBCKWBWZZBMZZZ 22 28 CAP, ASTM A234 GR.WPB, WELDED, BW, ASME B16.9 0
Coupling
CPL POCPLBCGBSSWZZB2ZZZ 0.5 2 FULL COUPLING, ASTM A105, CL.3000, SWE, ASME B16.11 0
PLMMS2207XR
Date : 20-08-2020
CLASS HB2
PJT No. P19CN
Rev. No. 1
Page 63 of 90

Rating CL.150 PWHT
Corr. Allow. 1.6 MM

CODE SIZE1 SIZE2
Plug
PLG POPLHBCGTFZZB2ZZZ 0.5 2 PLUG HEX HEAD, ASTM A105, FTE, ASME B16.11 0
Branch Connection
SOL POSOCBCGBSSWZZM9ZZZ 0.5 28 SOCKOLET, ASTM A105, CL.3000, SWE, MSS SP-97 0
WOL POWOLBCGBWZZM9ZZZ 0.5 28 WELDOLET, ASTM A105, BW, MSS SP-97 0
CPLH POCPHBCGBSSWZZM9ZZZ 0.5 2 HALF COUPLING, ASTM A105, CL.3000, SWE, MSS SP-97 0
LOL POL45BCGBSSWZZM9ZZZ 0.5 2 45 LATROLET OBSOLETE, ASTM A105, CL.3000, SWE, MSS SP-97 0
Flange Blind
FBL PFBLBCGBDRFZZBLZZZ 0.5 24 FLG BLIND, ASTM A105, CL.150, RF, ASME B16.5 0
FBL PFBLBCGBDRFZZBHZZZ 26 28 FLG BLIND, ASTM A105, CL.150, RF, ASME B16.47 SERIES A 0
Flange
FLG PFSDBCGBDRFZZBLZZZ 0.5 2 FLG SW, ASTM A105, CL.150, RF, ASME B16.5 0
FLG PFWNBCGBDRFZZBLZZZ 2.5 24 FLG WN, ASTM A105, CL.150, RF, ASME B16.5 0
FLG PFWNBCGBDRFZZBHZZZ 26 28 FLG WN, ASTM A105, CL.150, RF, ASME B16.47 SERIES A 0
Gasket
GSK PGSWBBBBDRFHB9ZZZ 0.5 24 GASKET SPIRAL WOUND, 304SS+FG, OR: C/S, CL.150, RF, THK 4.5MM, ASME B16.20, 0
FOR ASME B16.5
GSK PGSWBBBBDRFHBKZZZ 26 28 GASKET SPIRAL WOUND, 304SS+FG, OR: C/S, CL.150, RF, THK 4.5MM, ASME B16.20, 0
FOR ASME B16.47 SERIES A
Bolting
BLT PBSBBENBHGBSZZZ 0.5 1.25 65 185 S.BLT/2 H. HEX NUT, ASTM A193 GR.B7/ A194 GR.2H, HOT DIP GALV, ASME 0
B18.2.1/B18.2.2
Gate Valve
VGAT PVGTBCGJZSAPZFBLSWZZZZAC 0.5 2 GATE VALVE, ASTM A105, BB OS&Y, SOLID WDG, 13CR+STELLITE TRIM, HW OPR, 0
ZZZ CL.600, SWE, ASME B16.34
VGAT PVGTBCDJZFAPZFBDRFZZZZACZ 2.5 10 GATE VALVE, ASTM A216 GR.WCB, BB OS&Y, FLEXIBLE WDG, 13CR+STELLITE TRIM, 0
ZZ HW OPR, CL.150, FLGD RF, ASME B16.34
VGAT PVGTBCDJZFAPZGBDRFZZZZACZ 12 28 GATE VALVE, ASTM A216 GR.WCB, BB OS&Y, FLEXIBLE WDG, 13CR+STELLITE TRIM, 0
ZZ GR OPR, CL.150, FLGD RF, ASME B16.34
Globe Valve
VGLB PVGLBCGJZCAPZFBLSWZZZZAC 0.5 2 GLOBE VALVE, ASTM A105, BB OS&Y, CONE TYPE, 13CR+STELLITE TRIM, HW OPR, 0
ZZZ CL.600, SWE, ASME B16.34
VGLB PVGLBCDJZCAPZFBDRFZZZZACZ 2.5 10 GLOBE VALVE, ASTM A216 GR.WCB, BB OS&Y, CONE TYPE, 13CR+STELLITE TRIM, 0
ZZ HW OPR, CL.150, FLGD RF, ASME B16.34
VGLB PVGLBCDJZCAPZABDRFZZZZACZ 12 28 GLOBE VALVE, ASTM A216 GR.WCB, BB OS&Y, CONE TYPE, 13CR+STELLITE TRIM, 0
ZZ BGR OPR, CL.150, FLGD RF, ASME B16.34
Check Valve
VCHK PVCHBCGZZSAPBLSWZZZZACZZ 0.5 2 CHECK VALVE, ASTM A105, SWING DISC, 13CR+STELLITE TRIM, CL.600, SWE, ASME 0
Z B16.34
VCHK PVCHBCDZZSAPBDRFZZZZACZZ 2.5 28 CHECK VALVE, ASTM A216 GR.WCB, SWING DISC, 13CR+STELLITE TRIM, CL.150, 0
Z FLGD RF, ASME B16.34
VCHK 11 PVCHBCGZZRAPBLSWZZZZACZZ 0.5 2 CHECK VALVE, ASTM A105, PISTON LIFT SPRING, 13CR+STELLITE TRIM, CL.600, 0
Z SWE, ASME B16.34
Butterfly Valve
PLMMS2207XR
Date : 20-08-2020
CLASS HB2
PJT No. P19CN
Rev. No. 1
Page 64 of 90

Rating CL.150 PWHT
Corr. Allow. 1.6 MM

CODE SIZE1 SIZE2
VBFY PVBFBCDDCEPEZGBDFFZZZZZZ 8 28 BUTTERFLY VALVE, ASTM A216 GR.WCB, DOUBLE FLGD, CONCENTRIC TYPE, 0
Z 304SS DISC, EPDM SEAT, GR OPR, CL.150, FLGD FF
PLMMS2207XR
Date : 20-08-2020
CLASS HB2
PJT No. P19CN
Rev. No. 1
Page 65 of 90

Rating CL.150 PWHT
Corr. Allow. 1.6 MM
General Class Notes
No data.
Item Specific Notes
No data.
PLMMS2207XR
Date : 20-08-2020
For Construction
0 For Construction 19.Aug.20 G.M.Noh I.G.Seong S.W.Choi
B For Approva 21.Jul.20 G.M.Noh I.G.Seong S.W.Choi
A For Approval 28.Apr.20 G.M.Noh I.G.Seong S.W.Choi
Rev Description Date Prepd Rvwd Apprd

Owner:
Owner’s Engineer:
Contractor:
Project Title:
Painting Specification
19CN-00GEN00-P04-0004 35 0
Power Plant
REVISION LOG
A 28.Apr.20 First issue
B 21.Jul.20 Second issue
0 19.Aug.20 IFC first issue
Doc. Title : Painting Specification Rev. : 0 19.AUG.20

Power Plant
List of Contents
1. GENERAL ................................................................................................................................ 4
2. CODE AND STANDARDS ........................................................................................................ 5
3. REQUIREMENT FOR COATING AND PAINTING .................................................................... 7
4. INSPECTION .......................................................................................................................... 13
5. SAFETY .................................................................................................................................. 13
6. QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM .......................................................................................... 14
7. COATING SYSTEMS .............................................................................................................. 16
8. SAFETY COLOR SYSTEM..................................................................................................... 24
9. FINAL COLOR SYSTEM ........................................................................................................ 25
10. PIPING COLOR SYSTEM .................................................................................................... 29
11. APPLICATION OF PAINTING WORK ................................................................................... 34

Power Plant
1. GENERAL
This specification defines the technical requirements to Samsung C&T scope for surface preparation,
selection and application of paints on external surface of equipment, vessels, machinery, etc. for
Fujairah3 Project.
`
The surface preparation and paint to be applied depend upon the service conditions and the protection
required. Temperature and exposure are the most important variables in a given plant and are the prime
consideration in the selection of a particular paint system. The minimum requirements for painted furnished
equipment are specified herein.
Protective coatings shall have a design life of years. And coatings shall meet the design life of the minimum
protective coating.
During transportation and on site, uncoated surfaces shall be protected againist corrosion and dirt.
Wherever necessary a rust inhibitor shall be used.
Following terms not otherwise defined in this specification, have same meanings as below ;
• Purchaser : EPC Contractor for Fujairah3 project.
• Contractor : Subcontractor or Equipment manufacturer/supplier.
• Manufacturer : Paint Manufacturer.
1.1 Major Site Conditions
Table 1 below lists the major site environmental conditions.
Parameter
Wind
The prevailing winds, known as "shamals", are from the North or the West for most of the year.
Generally, the winds are light to moderate, but winds of over 100 km/h, gusting to 130 km/h, occur in
winter, with just under 5% reaching gale force. Near the coast, wind conditions are more variable being
modified by winds blowing from the land, mainly between October and March.
Rainfall
Rainfall data were recorded at Fujairah International Airport during the period of 1991 to 2003 with the
key figures:
· annual average 135 mm
· maximum recorded in one day 100 mm
Temperature
Air temperatures, taken for reference are those that have been recorded at Fujairah International Airport
meteorological station over a period of 16 years (1988 - 2003).
The determining air temperatures are as follows:
· maximum recorded (July) 48.7°C
· mean daily maximum (July) over 16 years 44.0°C
· annual mean over 16 years 28.2°C
· mean daily minimum (January) over 16 years 15.3°C
· minimum recorded 10.8°C.
Relative humidity
Relative humidity data recorded at Fujairah International Airport during a period of 16 years (1988 -
2003) are as follows:
· maximum ambient humidity 100%
Power Plant
· annual mean over 16 years 61%

Barometric pressure, site elevation
Maximum / Minimum barometric pressure: 1,030mbar / 970mbar
GL EL 0.0 = ACD + 5.75M (ACD : Admiralty Chart Datum)
2. CODE AND STANDARDS
2.1 Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC);
2.1.1 SSPC-SP 1 Solvent Cleaning

2.1.2 SSPC-SP 2 Hand Tool Cleaning
2.1.3 SSPC-SP 3 Power Tool Cleaning
2.1.4 SSPC-SP 5 White Metal Blast Cleaning
2.1.5 SSPC-SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning
2.1.6 SSPC-SP 7 Brush-off Blast Cleaning
2.1.7 SSPC-SP 8 Pickling
2.1.8 SSPC-SP 10 Near White Blast Cleaning
2.1.9 SSPC-SP 11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal
2.1.10 SSPC-SP 12 Surface Preparation and Cleaning of Metals by Waterjetting Prior to
Recoating
2.1.11 SSPC-VIS 1 Visual Standard For Abrasive Blast Cleaned Steel
(Standard Reference Photographs)
2.1.12 SSPC-VIS 2 Standard Methods of Evaluating Degree of Rusting on Painted Steel
Surface
2.1.13 SSPC-PA 1 Shop, Field & Maintenance Painting
2.1.14 SSPC-PA 2 Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages
2.2 British Standard / International Standard Organization (BS / ISO)
2.2.1 BS EN ISO 12944 Paints and Varnishes - Corrosion Protection of Steel Structures by
Protective Paint Systems
2.2.2 BS EN ISO 1461 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron and steel articles.
Specifications and test methods
2.2.4 BS 5493 Code of practice for protective coating of iron and steel structures
against corrosion
2.2.5 BS 4921 Specification for sherardized coatings on iron or steel
2.2.6 BS EN 12329 Corrosion protection of metals. Electrodeposited coatings of zinc with
supplementary treatment on iron or steel
2.2.7 BS EN 12330 Corrosion protection of metals. Electrodeposited coatings of cadmium
on iron or steel
Power Plant
2.3 American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM)
2.3.1 ASTM A90 Standard Test Method for Weight [Mass] of Coating on Iron and Steel
Articles with Zinc or Zinc Alloy Coatings
2.3.2 ASTM A123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coating on Iron and Steel Product
2.3.3 ASTM A143 Standard Practice for Safeguarding Against Embrittlement of Hot-Dip
Galvanized Structural Steel Products and Procedure for Detecting
Embrittlement
2.3.4 ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
2.3.5 ASTM A239 Test Method for Locating the Thinne t Spot in a Zinc (Galvanized)
Coating on Iron or Steel Articles by the Preece Test (Copper Sulfate
Dip)
2.3.6 ASTM A384 Practice for Safeguarding Against Warpage and Distortion During
Hot-Dip Galvanizing of Steel Assemblies
2.3.7 ASTM A385 Practice for Providing High-Quality Zinc Coatings (Hot-Dip)
2.3.8 ASTM A780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of
Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings
2.3.9 ASTM B6 Standard Specification for Zinc
2.3.10 ASTM B633 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron
and Steel
2.3.11 ASTM D16 Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and
Applications
2.3.12 ASTM D520 Standard Specification for Zinc Dust Pigment
2.3.13 ASTM D1212 Standard Test Methods for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness of
Organic Coatings
2.3.14 ASTM D4417 Standard Test Methods for Field Measurement of Surface Profile of
Blast Cleaned Steel
2.3.15 ASTM D7091 Standard Practice for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film
Thickness of Nonmagnetic Coatings Applied to Ferrous Metals and
Nonmagnetic, Nonconductive Coatings Applied to Non-Ferrous
Metals
2.3.16 ASTM E376 Standard Practice for Measuring Coating Thickness by Magnetic –
Field or Eddy – Current (Electromagnetic) Examination Methods
2.3.17 DIN 30670 Polyethylene Coatings for steel pipes and fittings

Power Plant
3. REQUIREMENT FOR COATING AND PAINTING
3.1 General
The intent of this specification is to define surface preparation, protective coatings and paint systems to be
applied on vessels, equipment, piping and structures.
This specification covers the general requirements for painting work of the Project. This specification also
outlines the type of paint, surface preparation, touch-up for prime coat(s), number of prime and finish coats,
and dry film thicknesses for any item requiring painting on the Project.
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment including paints and thinners of the best
quality. The proposed methods shall be in accordance with the best engineering practice and to the
approval of the Owner.
3.2 Surface Preparation
3.2.1 Surface preparation should remove sufficient foreign matter to allow the type of prime
paint used to wet the surface thoroughly and develop adequate adhesion.
3.2.2 Before any painting is carried out, all NDT and hydrostatic test to be completed and all
surfaces must be prepared properly, removing rust, scale, sharp edges, burrs, welding
slugs and spatters, grease etc. Steel surfaces shall be white blasted in accordance with
Steel Structures Painting Council Specification SP 5-10. The various paints to be used shall
be of approved quality and type.
3.2.3 All machined surfaces including flange faces shall be suitably covered to prevent damage
during surface preparation.
Protection for faying bolted surface, machined surfaces

- Zinc primer will be treated before the main coating is applied.
3.2.4 Application of the prime coat painting shall normally be made over a blast cleaned area
within 8 hours after completion of blast cleaning. This time restriction may be modified to
more or less than 8 hours, depending on the temperature and humidity control exercised.
The main criteria shall be that no rust bloom forms on the surface prior to application of
the prime coat. If any rust bloom does form, the surface shall be blast cleaned again,
before application of the prime coat.
3.2.5 Coating shall not be applied under the following conditions or when such conditions are
likely to prevail before the coating is cured.

Power Plant
a) At temperatures below 5°C (or according to Coating Manufacturer recommendation)

or when the temperature is likely to fall below this figure before the surface film is dry,
or on surfaces registering low temperatures.
b) When the relative humidity of the atmosphere exceeds 85 % and/or according to
Coating Manufacturer recommendation for each specific painting product.
c) The steel temperature is less than 3°C above the dew point.
3.2.6 Paint shall not be applied to steel which is at a temperature of over 500 degC unless the
paint is specifically formulated for application at that temperature. When steel is painted in
hot weather, precautions shall be taken to ensure that the specified dry film thickness of
paint is achieved.
3.2.7 Paint shall not be applied where exposed to rain, snow, fog, or mist, or when the relative
humidity is such as to cause condensation of paint on metal surfaces due to variation in
metal temperatures and surrounding air temperatures.
3.2.8 All surfaces shall be perfectly dry before and while being painted and for 24 hours after
painting.
3.2.9 After blast cleaning all accumulated grit, sand, dust etc. must be removed leaving the
surface clean, dry and free of mill scale, rust, grease and other foreign matter.
3.2.10 In the event of rusting after completion of the surface preparation, the surface must be
cleaned again in the manner specified.
3.2.11 Oil, grease, soil, cement, salts, acids or other corrosive chemicals shall be cleaned from
steel surfaces, by the use of solvents, emulsions or cleaning compounds. The final wiping
shall be with clean rags or brushes. There shall be no detrimental residue left on the
surface.
3.2.12 For the touch up painting work at Site, damaged surface shall be cleaned of all rust,
lubricants, moisture and other substance between application of paint.
3.2.13 Protective coating must be applied as quickly as possible after the completion of surface
preparation, no matter what cleaning method has been used.
3.2.14 Protection during blasting process on site

Power Plant
Prior to start any blast cleaning process all equipment (material and equipment)
surrounded the surface to be treated must be protected from damages for blast cleaning
material (ricochet), and from blasting dust and other contamination. An adequate
protection must be provided. It can be canvas, plastic foils, wood plank, masking tape, etc.
The protection should be maintained in good order during the all process and until the
completion.
Blasting abrasives shall be dry, clean and free from contaminants that will be detrimental to
the performance of the coating. Abrasives selected shall be suitable for producing the
required profile and surface roughness and have a minimal health impact.
Minimum PPE (Personnel Protective Environment) requirements for site blasting cleaning:
• Hearing protection
• Eye and face protection
• Helmet
• Leather gloves that protect to full forearm and aprons (or coveralls)
• Safety shoes or boots
3.2.15 No blast-cleaned surfaces shall be allowed to remain uncoated overnight.
3.2.16 Relative humidity must be checked to prevent condensation on the surface. The optimum
humidity for painting will be the range of 40 ~ 85%. (No paint in rain, high humidity and
freezing temperature near to dew point.)
3.2.17 All machined surfaces including flange faces shall be suitably covered to prevent damage
during surface preparation.
3.3 Application of Coating
3.3.1 All prime coatings shall be applied by brush, roller, airless spray or a combination of these
methods.
3.3.2 Spray guns shall not be used outside in windy weather or near surfaces of a contrasting
color unless the latter are properly protected from the spray.
3.3.3 All cold-spray painting shall be done using standard equipment in accordance with
Power Plant
accepted industry standards and methods.

The reason is that field erected tanks, critical steel structures and piping shall be used with
airless spray to achieve the optimum anti-corrosive performance with high-build dry film
thickness.
3.3.4 Dry Film Thickness (DFT)

To the maximum extent practical, the coats shall be applied as a continuous film of uniform
thickness and free of pores. Overspray, skips, runs, sags and drips should be removed
before the next coat is applied. The different coats shall not be of the same color.
3.3.5 Paint shall not be applied on the interior surface of pressure parts such as steam drum,
tanks, wall, tube and pipe, unless otherwise specified.
3.3.6 Paint shall not be applied on the following surfaces, unless otherwise specified.
1) Non-metallic materials such as concrete bare walls, floors, side walks, concrete paving,
interlock paving, curbs, slate, glass, and plastics
2) Non-ferrous materials such as stainless steel, brass, copper, and aluminum
3) Nameplate and other identification plates or label
4) Machined surfaces
5) Hot-dip galvanized steel, electrogalvanized steel and plated surfaces
6) Buried pipes (Wrapping applied at site)
7) Galvanized high strength bolts, anchor bolts, grating & treads, checkered plate and cold
formed purlin & girth, embedded materials
8) Factory finished doors, frames, folding doors, partitions, ceilings and similar materials.
9) Metal roof and wall panels, flashings
3.3.7 Controls for Mixing and Thinning
For mixing process, right equipment (type of mixer) to be use, order of components,
induction time, etc. to be followed accordingly. For thinning, only a correct thinner to be
used, and the specified percentage (%) of thinner to be addict to be strictly respected, as
well as to ensure that the addition of thinner to not exceed the maximum percentage (%)
allowed.
Note: Extra thinning may be necessary to avoid dry spray when applied at high
temperature, refer to paint manufacturer’s data sheet and application instruction.

Power Plant
3.3.8 Area which is inaccessible shall be painted before assembly.
3.3.9 Coatings and their overspray shall not be applied to the faying surfaces of bolted
connections for structuaral steel.
3.3.10 For a multi-layer coating system, it is recommended that each layer has a different color
shade in order to clearly identify number of coats applied. The last finish coat should be
applied in the specified colour shade.
3.3.11 Coating material should only be supplied by manufacturers with international experience
and their products can be obtained internationally such as ‘International’, ‘Hempel’, ‘Jotun’,
and other international brands.
3.4 Galvanizing
3.4.1 All galvanizing shall be carried out by the hot dip process or electro-galvanized to conform
in all respects with the ASTM A123/A153.
3.4.2 Cable trays, tray covers, exposed conduits, instrument stanchion and associated
equipment/accessories such as fixing materials (bolt, nuts, and etc) shall be hot dip
galvanized.
3.4.3 The post, struts and stretched bars shall be hot dip galvanized.
3.4.4 All surface defects, such as cracks, surface laminations, laps and folds shall be removed. All
drilling, cutting, welding, forming and final fabrications of unit members and assemblies
shall be completed before the structures are galvanized. The surface of the steel work to
be galvanized shall be free from welding slag, paint, oil, grease and similar contaminants.
3.4.5 The minimum average coating weight shall be as per the requirements specified in the
approved standards.
3.4.6 On removal from the galvanizing bath the resultant coating shall be smooth, continuous,
free from gloss, surface imperfections such as bare spots, lumps, blisters and inclusions of
flux, ash or dross.
3.4.7 Galvanized contact surface to be jointed by high strength friction grip bolts shall be

Power Plant
roughened before assembly so that the required slip factor to approved standards, is
achieved. Care shall be taken to ensure that the roughening is confined to the net area of
the mating faces.
3.4.8 Bolts, nuts and washers to fit the galvanized equipment except for high strength friction
grip bolts shall be hot dip galvanized and subsequently centrifuged. Nuts shall be tapped
up to 0.4 mm oversize after galvanized and the threads oiled to permit the nuts to be
finger turned on the bolt for the full depth of the nut.
3.4.9 During off-loading and erection, nylon slings shall be used. Galvanized work, which is to be
stored on Site, shall be stacked so as to provide adequate ventilation to all surface to avoid
wet storage staining (white rust).
3.4.10 Small areas of the galvanized coating damaged in any way shall restored by:
1) Cleaning the damaged areas of thoroughly wire brushing to give a clean surface
2) One (1) coat of zinc rich epoxy paint or zinc rich spray paint shall be applied on the
damaged area.
3.4.11 After fixing, bolt heads, washers and nut shall receive one (1) coats of zinc rich paint.
3.4.12 Connections between galvanized surfaces and copper, copper alloy or aluminium surfaces
shall be protected by suitable insert tape wrapping or protective coating.
3.4.13 Except the items applied to safety color, hot-dip galvanized and electro-galvanized surfaces
will not require painting except where the shop galvanized coating is damaged during
shipment, field handling, or welding.
Welding or flame cutting of galvanized surfaces is not permitted. The only location where
the paint application will be permitted is the cut ends of cable trays, pipes, handrails and
steel plates. Cutting shall be done by mechanical means.
3.4.14 Hot work (cutting and welding) of the galvanized steelwork is not allowed. Any cold cut ends
of galvanized material must be immediately protected with an approved cold galvanizing
paint.
3.4.15 High strength bolts, anchor bolts, handrails, grating & accessaries and checkered plates
shall be hot dip galvanized.

Power Plant
4. INSPECTION
4.1 The Contractor shall maintain necessary instruments to test and inspect the surface preparation, the
coating application and the fully cured coating at the place of work for his quality control and the
instruments shall be available to the Customer.
5.2 All inspection instruments shall be in good working order and calibrated on a regular basis in
accordance with the instrument manufacturer’s recommendations.
5. SAFETY
5.1 Contractor shall comply with all safety instructions outlined by the Material Safety Data Sheets(MSDS)
supplied by the paint and coatings manufacturer for every different compound, material, and/or
solvent supplied.
5.2 Supplied paints, hardeners, catalysts, solvents, and any other flammable material shall be stored in a
safe place at an area. Ignition sources, sparks, flame, and welding operations shall be prohibited in
both the flammable storage area and in the working areas.
5.3 The material and equipment to be painted will be place (put) in a temporarily enclose shelter, in order
to control the un-friendly environmental phenomena which occurred during the spray supplication as
for example, dry & over spray, etc.
5.4 A temporary shelter will be built to ensure that all painting equipment as spray pump, mixer, paint can
in use, etc., will be protected from weather condition and local atmospheric environment.
5.5 The paint material (cans drums) will be store in a designated areas, which will be an enclose space
where the control of the ambient and atmospheric condition, is possible. The paint material stored, will
be moved from this designated storage area only for transportation purpose and prior to be applied in
shop or/and on a field.
5.6 The disposal of the waste material (used cans & drums, any material contaminated by paint etc.) will
be done under a specific procedure and as follow:
1) All empty cans/drums, contaminated material, etc. after each application will be collected and
send by truck to a designated and enclose area.
2) A certified transportation company will pick up the waste material and deliver it on a certified
environmental factory for further treatment.
5.7 When indoor coating is required, ventilation shall be provided to prevent workers from inhaling vapors
of solvent, dust and paints. Fan(s) shall be set up at lower section of work area and ventilator shall be
set up at upper section of work area. Worker shall wear safety mask and face protector.
5.8 When handling painting materials for a long time, worker shall wear gloves, protection cloth, face
protector, food mask and goggles to prevent toxic effects. Protective creams and lotions are often
used on hands, arms and face. If worker's skin is stained with paint, clean the skin with adequate
solvent and soap.
5.9 In confine spaces, adequate ventilation will be applied during application and drying period in order to
ensure properly curing process and eliminate rick of fire or explosion if any. Special work permits are
required for confined spaces. Work permits must be obtained from the safety department prior to

Power Plant
commencement of work. Contractor prepares a written safety plan, with details of all specific safety
requirements, including identification of safety equipment and safe havens to be used in the event of
emergencies.
6. QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM
6.1 General
All work shall be done with proper equipment in good repair and by skilled workmen, according to
recognized good painting practice.
All coats of paint shall be applied in a uniform film thickness so as to prevent runs, drips, or sagging. The
subcontractor shall correct all work found faulty under inspection.
Instruments used for the measurement of thickness should be calibrated prior to the start of testing and
according to manufacturer’s instructions.
Should inclement weather conditions occur or the ambient air conditions become detrimental to the
cleanliness of the prepared surface and the quality of the applied coating, all surface preparation operations
and coating applications shall cease. When the conditions become proper, the surfaces shall be inspected
and approved before coating application can be resumed.
Areas damaged by such weather conditions must be repaired. Prime coats shall be applied in the same day
the surface is prepared. Each coat of paint shall be in proper state of cure and dryness before the
application of the succeeding coat. Drying time shall be recommended by the manufacturer of paints.
Coatings and coating layers that do not meet the minimum thicknesses as set out in this document or by
the manufacturer shall be repaired according to instruction and retested.
The painting inspection shall be carried out in accordance with an approved inspection and test plan(ITP),
which will be prepared by quality management team. The testing frequency of inspection shall be agreed
upon between Company and Contractor.
Personnel carrying out inspection or verification shall be qualified in accordance with NS 476, Inspector level
III, NACE coating inspector level II.
Inspectors according to NS 476, Inspector level II, may carry out the inspection work under the supervision
of an inspector level III.
6.2 Activity for Inspection and Testing
It would be modified with Owner`s Requirement.
Acceptance
Test type Method Frequency Consequences
Criteria
Environmental -Ambient and steel before start of -Relative No blasting or
conditions temperature each shift + humidity: coating on the
Power Plant
-Relative humidity every 4 hours more than 85% condition of

-Dew point -Steel exceeding the
temperature is acceptance criteria
less than 3℃
above dew point
Visual examination 100% of all Defects to be

ISO 8501-3 No steel defects
of steel preparation surfaces repaired
Specified surface
100% of visual of
Cleanliness ISO 8501-1 all surfaces
preparation in Re-blasting
painting spec.
Visual to curing,
According to the
contamination,
Visual examination 100% of all paint
pinholes, popping, Repair of defects
of coating surfaces manufacturer’s
sagging and other
guidance
defects
ASTM D 3359 spot checks

Adhesion (minimum 1 for 4A Repair of defects
Type A/X cut each item)
Product data Repair,

Film thickness*note1 SSPC-PA2 SSPC-PA2
sheet additional coats
spot checks re-cleaning and

Soluble Salt
ISO 8502-6 (minimum 1 for 50 mg/m2 resting until
Contamination
each item) acceptable
[Notes]
1. Dry and wet film thickness may be determined by the use of gauses.
2. To Check the amount of thinner added, viscosity of paints in the can may be determined by
viscosity cups and compared to the value quoted by the manufacturer.
3. Moisture content of non-metallic surfaces may be determined with moisture meter.

(if required only, basically, non-metallic surfaces shall not be painted and needed)
The Contractor & manufacturer will conduct painting test process and prepare the required test equipment
6.3 Repair Procedure
6.3.1 General
a) Damaged coating exposed to bare steel shall be prepared in accordance with 6.3.2
b) However, damaged coating exposed to coated layer can be prepared to sand papering in accordance
Power Plant
with 6.3.3 or equivalent methods.
c) Edges of sound coating around the repair area shall be feathered back approximately for a smooth
transition.
d) The subsequent coating system shall be applied in accordance with the painting specification until
meeting the required dry film thickness.
e) With regard to operating temperature up to 93°C, damaged coating shall be applied with two coats of
epoxy mastic(surface tolerant) coating and subsequent coating to be applied based on approved
painting systems.
f) With regard to operating temperature above 93°C, heat resistant coatings shall be used for touch up.
g) The damaged galvanized steel surface shall be repaired with zinc rich epoxy primer and specified
coating systems to be applied if required.
6.3.2 Coating damage exposed to bare steel (Substrate Surface)
I. Remove all dirt and salt contamination by way of solvent cleaning referring to SSPC SP1.
II. Power tool cleaning shall be carried out in accordance with SSPC-SP3.
III. Edges of sound coating around the repair area shall be feathered back approximately 25 mm for a
smooth transition.
IV. The full coating system shall then be re-applied strictly in accordance with the Specification.
6.3.3 Coating damage exposed to coated layer
I. Remove all dirt and salt contamination by way of solvent cleaning referring to SSPC SP1.
Sand papering shall be carried out on the damaged parts. (It shall be checked visually)
II. Recommendable sand papering size & Required surface
: Grain size: 100 ~ 150 Mesh
III. Edges of sound coating around the repair area shall be feathered back approximately 25mm for a
smooth transition.
IV. The subsequent coating system shall then be re-applied strictly in accordance with the
specification.
7. COATING SYSTEMS
7.1 Coating Material
7.1.1 All containers shall remain unopened until required for use. Primers and paints which have livered,
gelled or otherwise deteriorated shall not be used.
7.1.2 All ingredients in any container shall be thoroughly mixed before use, and shall be agitated
frequently during application to keep the primer in suspension.

Power Plant
7.1.3 Primer or paint mixed in the original container shall not be transferred until all settled pigment is
incorporated into the body of liquid.
7.1.4 Mixing in open containers shall be done in a well-ventilated area.
7.1.5 Primer or paint shall be mixed in a manner ensuring the breakdown of all lumps, complete
dispersion of pigment and uniform composition.
7.1.6 Two-component primers shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
7.1.7 Thinners shall not be added to primers or paints unless necessary for proper application
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
7.1.8 The type of thinners used must comply with the manufacturer’s instructions.
When use of thinners is permitted, it must be added to the primer or paint during mixing.
7.1.9 Where the surfaces to be painted are subject to heat or attack by chemicals, oil, acid, fumes, etc.
special paint having the appropriate corrosion resistant qualities shall be used.
7.1.10 Any paint has exceeded its shelf life shall not be used.
7.1.11 Weldable zinc shop primer to be used with no coating areas having welded connections within
50mm.

Power Plant
7.2. Outdoor
Min
System
Item SSPC Layer DFT Coating System
Code
(㎛)
1st coat 80 Inorganic Zinc rich primer
2rd coat 80 Epoxy Polyamide
SP-10
1.Structural Steel and Components PSO 1 Top coat 80 Aliphatic Polyurethane
Total 240 -
- Touch up - See Para 6.3
2. Miscellaneous Steel - Galvanizing *Note 4 Per ASTM A123, A153
: Grating, Stair Treads,Handrails,
PSO 2
Ladders, SP-1&SP-3 Touch up *Note 4 Epoxy Zinc rich primer
Checkered Plate, etc.
3. Embedded Steel - Galvanizing *Note 4 Per ASTM A123, A153
PSO 3
: Anchor rods, fixing elements, etc. SP-1&SP-3 Touch up *Note 4 Epoxy Zinc rich primer
1st coat 25 1-Pack Silicone Aluminum
Operating
T ≥ 401℃ PSO 4.1 SP-10 Top coat 25 1-Pack Silicone Aluminum
Insulated
Total 50 -
st
1 coat 60 Inorganic Zinc rich primer
Operating SP-10
201 ~ 400℃ PSO 4.2 Total 60 -
4. Ferrous Metallic Insulated
Exterior Surfaces - Touch up - See Para 6.3
Exposed to st
Insulated part of the 1 coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy
Mechanical Operating SP-10 Top coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy
Equipment 94 - 200℃ PSO 4.3
& Insulated Total 200 -
Steel Piping
1st coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy
Operating SP-10 Top coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy
T≤93℃ PSO 4.4
Insulated Total 200 -
st
Operating SP-10 Top coat 30 1-Pack Silicone Aluminum
261 ~ 400℃ PSO 5.1
5. Ferrous Metallic Not Insulated Total 90 -
Exposed to
not insulated part of 1st coat 60 Inorganic Zinc rich primer
the 1-Pack Modified Silicone
Mechanical Operating SP-10 Top coat 30
94 ~ 260℃ PSO 5.2 Acrylic
Equipment
& Not Insulated Total 90 -
Steel Piping - Touch up - See Para 6.3
Operating 1st coat 60 Inorganic Zinc rich primer

PSO 5.3 SP-10
T≤93℃ 2nd coat 90 Epoxy Polyamide
Power Plant
Not Insulated Top coat 50 Aliphatic Polyurethane

Total 200 -
st
Exterior 2nd coat 90 Epoxy Polyamide
Surface SP-10
Operating PSO 6.1 Top coat 50 Aliphatic Polyurethane
(T≤93℃) Total 200 -
Exterior SP-10 Top coat 250 High Build Epoxy
Surface
Field Erected - Total 250 -
Tanks
Bottom (Most PSO 6.2
lower) plate
6. Steel Tanks Operating
(T≤93℃)
Interior
Surface 2nd coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy
Operating SP-10
PSO 6.3 Top coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy
(T≤93℃)
*Note2 Total 300 -
*Note8
Interior 1st coat 75 Zinc ethyl silicate primer
Surface for SP-10
Fuel Oil Tank PSO 6.4 Total 75
roof
*Note9 Touch up -
- Galvanizing *Note 4 Per ASTM A123, A153
7.1 Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel PSO 7.1
SP-1&SP-3 Touch up *Note 4 Epoxy Zinc rich primer
1st coat 75 Epoxy Primer
7.2 After Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel with
PSO 7.2 SP-2 Top coat 50 Aliphatic Polyurethane
Safety color coating
Total 125 -
8. Non-Ferrous Metallic Surfaces These Materials Should
-GRP, GRE and GRV Not Be Coated Unless
-PVC PSO 8 - - -
Required for Special
-HDPE Circumstances
Transformers,
IPB,GCB,
Container and
Fuel Tank of Contractor/Manufacturer
9. Electical Standard
BSEDG, PSO 9.1 - - -
equipment *Note5
NSPB, CCTV
and other
electrical
equipment.

Power Plant
Switchgear,
MCC, Contractor/Manufacturer
Rectifier, Standard
PSO 9.2 - - -
Inverter, *Note5
Panels & other
board
2nd coat 150 Epoxy Polyamide
SP-10
10. Seawater Intake, Seal pit area PSO 10 Top coat 50 Aliphatic Polyurethane
Total 260 -
Touch up - See Para 6.3
Contractor/Manufacturer
11. HVAC Equipment PSO 11 - - - Standard
*Note5
12. GT, ST OEM PSO 12 - - - Standard
*Note5
1st coat 270 Anti-abrasion pure epoxy

13. Steel submerged in seawater PSO 13 SP-10 Top coat 270 Anti-abrasion pure epoxy
Total 540 -
[Notes]
1. The following coating systems are approved recommendations for the components and materials
identified. The Contractor may submit alternative coating systems that meet or exceed the minimum
requirements of ISO 12944 and this Specification. All alternative coating systems are subject to approval
by the Purchaser prior to application.
2. Choosing an appropriate coating or lining system for the internal surfaces of pipes or tanks depends on
the specific application, operating conditions, process fluid, chemistry, pH, total dissolved solids, and
many other considerations. Many coating or lining systems may offer suitable performance for the
expected conditions. Therefore, coating and lining systems for specialty applications will be reviewed on
an individual basis for suitability. Furthermore, most severe corrosion or other specialty conditions
require coating and lining systems that have significantly high builds (dry film thicknesses). ISO 12944
does not cover coating systems exceeding 2000 microns dry film thickness
3. In case of PSO 10, it is applied within 5-meter of each mentioned structures.
4. Min. thickness shall be applied as per ASTM A123, A153.
5. Painting specification shall comply with ISO 12944, category C4H. In case of powder coating,
recommended thickness by supplier will be applied based on manufacturer standard.
6. Inorganic Zinc rich primer shall be of the self-curing, two components type, and containing minimum
80% zinc by weight in the dry film/
7. In case of piping for PSO 4.3/4,4., below coating system can be applicable for the smooth progress of
coating application at shop:
- 1st Coating: Inorganic zinc (60 ㎛)
- 2nd Coating: Heat Resistant Epoxy (140 ㎛)

Power Plant
8. Inside of Fuel Oil tank shall be painted bottom and most lower(1m from bottom) part only.
9. Interior Surface for Fuel Oil Tank roof shall be painted entire vapour space of the tank and extending 4m
down below tank top.

Power Plant
7.2.3 Indoor
Min
System
Item SSPC Layer DFT Coating System
Code
(㎛)
SP-10 Top coat 80 Epoxy Polyamide
1.Structural Steel and Components PSI 1
Total 160 -
2. Miscellaneous Steel - Galvanizing *Note 4 Per ASTM A123, A153
: Grating, Stair Treads,Handrails,
PSI 2
Ladders, SP-1&SP-3 Touch up *Note 4 Epoxy Zinc rich primer
Checkered Plate, etc.
3. Embedded Steel - Galvanizing *Note 4 Per ASTM A123, A153
PSI 3
: Anchor rods, fixing elements, etc. SP-1&SP-3 Touch up *Note 4 Epoxy Zinc rich primer
Operating 1st coat 25 1-Pack Silicone Aluminum

T ≥ 401℃ PSI 4.1 SP-10 Top coat 25 1-Pack Silicone Aluminum
Insulated
Total 50 -
Operating SP-10
201 ~ 400℃ PSI 4.2 Total 60 -
4. Ferrous Metallic Insulated
Exposed to
Insulated part of the 1st coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy
Mechanical Operating SP-10 Top coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy
Equipment 94 - 200℃ PSI 4.3
& Insulated Total 200 -
Steel Piping
Operating SP-10 Top coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy
T≤93℃ PSI 4.4
Insulated Total 200 -
Operating SP-10 Top coat 30 1-Pack Silicone Aluminum
261 ~ 400℃ PSI 5.1
Not Insulated Total 90 -
5. Ferrous Metallic
Exposed to
not insulated part of 1st coat 60 Inorganic Zinc rich primer
the 1-Pack Modified Silicone
Mechanical Operating SP-10 Top coat 30
Acrylic
Equipment 94 ~ 260℃ PSI 5.2
&
Steel Piping - Touch up - See Para 6.3
Operating 1st coat 60 Inorganic Zinc rich primer

PSI 5.3 SP-10
T≤93℃ Top coat 100 Epoxy Polyamide

Power Plant

Exterior
Surface SP-10 Top coat 100 Epoxy Polyamide
Operating PSI 6.1
Total 160 -
(T≤93℃)
st
6. Steel Tanks 1 coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy
Interior
Surface 2nd coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy
Operating SP-10
PSI 6.2 Top coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy
(T≤93℃)
*Note2 Total 300 -
- Galvanizing *Note 4 Per ASTM A123, A153
7.1 Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel PSI 7.1
SP-1&SP-3 Touch up *Note 4 Epoxy Zinc rich primer
1st coat 75 Epoxy Primer
7.2 Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel Aliphatic Polyurethane
PSI 7.2 SP-2 Top coat 50
with Safety color coating Glossy
Total 125 -
8. Non-Ferrous Metallic Surfaces
These Materials Should Not
-GRP, GRE and GRV
PSI 8 - - - Be Coated Unless Required
-PVC
for Special Circumstances
-HDPE
Transformers,
IPB,GCB,
Generator and Contractor/Manufacturer
Engine of PSI 9.1 - - - Standard
BSEDG and *Note5
other electrical
9. Electical
equipment.
equipment
Switchgear,
MCC, Contractor/Manufacturer
Rectifier, Standard
PSI 9.2 - - -
Inverter, *Note5
Panels & other
board
10. HVAC Equipment PSI 10 - - - Standard
*Note5
11. GT, ST OEM PSI 11 - - - Standard
*Note5
[Notes]
1. The following coating systems are approved recommendations for the components and materials
identified. The Contractor may submit alternative coating systems that meet or exceed the minimum
requirements of ISO 12944 and this Specification. All alternative coating systems are subject to
approval by the Purchaser prior to application.

Power Plant
2. Choosing an appropriate coating or lining system for the internal surfaces of pipes or tanks depends
on the specific application, operating conditions, process fluid, chemistry, pH, total dissolved solids,
and many other considerations. Many coating or lining systems may offer suitable performance for the
expected conditions. Therefore, coating and lining systems for specialty applications will be reviewed
on an individual basis for suitability. Furthermore, most severe corrosion or other specialty conditions
require coating and lining systems that have significantly high builds (dry film thicknesses). ISO 12944
does not cover coating systems exceeding 2000 microns dry film thickness
3. Zinc rich primer shall be of the self-curing, two components type, and containing minimum 80% zinc by
weight in the dry film.
4. Min. thickness shall be applied as per ASTM A123, A153
5. Painting specification shall comply with ISO 12944, category C3H. In case of powder coating,
recommended thickness by supplier will be applied based on manufacturer standard.
6. In case of piping for PSI 4.3/4,4., below coating system can be applicable for the smooth progress of
coating application at shop:
- 1st Coating: Inorganic zinc (60 ㎛)
- 2nd Coating: Heat Resistant Epoxy (140 ㎛)
8. SAFETY COLOR SYSTEM
This safety color code is based on RAL Code and shall be as follows :
Safety Color Application
Fire protection and emergency; shall be used for hydrants and

Red, (RAL 3000)
associated piping, fire-fighting equipment and facilities, including
: Flame Red
emergency shutdown controls.
Safety : shall be used for first aid and protective equipment and
Green, (RAL 6032)
facilities, sealing services, valves, including safety bulletin boards, gas
: Signal Green
mask boxes, and first aid kits.
Yellow, (RAL 1003) Caution : shall be used to designate location of physical hazards which
: Signal Yellow might cause stumbling, falling, tripping.
Alert : shall be used inside of removable guards for pull -up, shafts,
Orange, (RAL 2010) chains, etc., inside enclosed doors for electrical equipment, etc. Stop
: Signal Orange valves associated with relief valves, any valves which for safety
reasons are locked open.

Power Plant
Danger : shall be used for dangerous curbs, bottom risers, lap

Black and Yellow Stripe landings of stairways, exposed and unguarded edges of platforms and
(RAL 9005, RAL1003) walks, Lower pulley blocks of cranes, bumpers of fork lift trucks and
: Jet Black, Signal Yellow cranes, pillar posts and columns in areas hazardous to personnel
(painted up to 2 meters above deck), and dead end passage ways.
Blue (RAL 5005)

Information : shall be used for informational signs and bulletin boards.
: Signal Blue
9. FINAL COLOR SYSTEM
Final colors for all major categories of plant structure, equipment and accessories shall be in accordance
with the following schedule.
Color Code.
No. Description Color Color Shade
(RAL No.)
1. Mechanical Equipment & Structure (Supplied by Turbine, HRSG Vendor)
1.1 GTG,STG and Auxiliaries - -

Contractor /
1.2 HRSG Manufacturer - -
Standard
- -
2. Mechanical Equipment & Structure (BOP)
2.1 Vessel White Aluminum RAL 9006
2.2 Pump, Compressor Pale Green RAL 6021
2.3 Seawater Intake Facility Light Grey RAL 7035

Heat Exchanger, Heater,
2.4 White Aluminum RAL 9006
Dryer, Cooling Tower
2.5 N2 Gas Cylinder Gentian Blue RAL 5010
Crane, Hoist and lifting
2.6 Zinc Yellow RAL 1018
Equipment
Trafic Green (Outside) RAL 6024
2.7 Water Storage Tank
Light Grey (Inside) RAL 7035
2.8 Chemical Storage Tank Zinc Yellow RAL 1018
2.9 Air Reciver Tank Light Blue RAL 5012

Fire Protection Equipment
2.10 (Fire Water Pump, Fire Flame Red RAL 3000
Hydrants, Fire Hose)
2.11 Ventilators White Aluminum RAL 9006

Power Plant
2.12 HVAC Equipment Manufacturer Standard - -
2.13 Mobile Equipment Manufacturer Standard - -
3. Electrical Equipment
Oil Filled Transformer
3.1 Light Grey RAL 7035
(incl. cubicle)
Gas Insulated Busduct
(incl. cubicle)
Generator Circuit Breaker
(Enclosure)
Generator Circuit Breaker
(Cover)
Isolated Phase Bus Duct
(External)
Isolated Phase Bus Duct
3.6 Manufacturer Standard - -
(Internal)
Switchgear & Non-
3.7 segregated Phase Bus Light Grey RAL 7035
Way (External)
Switchgear & Non-
3.8 segregated Phase Bus Manufacturer Standard - -
Way (Internal)
MCC, Panel and Cubicle,
3.9 Rectifier, Iverter, PDB and Light Grey RAL 7035
J/B
Same color with main
3.10 LV,MV and HV Motor - -
equipment
Cable Tray and R.G.S
3.11 Galvanized - -
Conduit
Electrical Equipment
3.12 Galvanized - -
Support Structure
3.13 Lighting Pole Galvanized - -
Lighting Fixture, Socket
3.14 Manufacturer Standard - -
outlet etc.
3.15 Communication Equipment Manufacturer Standard - -
Container House of
3.16 Manufacturer Standard -
BSEDG
Engine and Generator of
3.17 Manufacturer Standard -
BSEDG
3.18 Fuel Tank of BSEDG Zinc Yellow RAL 1018
4. I&C
DCS Caninets including
4.1 network, PDB and server Light Grey RAL 7035
racks
SWAS & QMS, CEMS,
AQMS, VMS
Power Plant
Instrument Junction Box,

Terminal Box, Boxes
Valve Actuator with
4.4 handle(Motor, Manufacturer Standard - -
Pneumatic,Hydraulic)
4.5 Field Instrument Manufacturer Standard - -
Container, Sampling Rack,
4.6 Cubicle, Shelter, LCP and Light Grey RAL 7035
Local Panel,HPU
5. Civil & Architectural
5.1 General
Concrete Surface
5.1.1 (non-building)
Grey White*Note3 RAL 9002
5.1.2 Supporting Steel Structure Agate Grey*Note3 RAL 7038
5.1.3 Grating incl. stair tread Galvanized - -

Ladder (safety painting on
5.1.4 Signal Yellow RAL 1003
galvanized surface)
Handrail (safety painting on
5.1.5 galvanized surface)
Signal Yellow RAL 1003
Stair stinger, Other
5.1.6 Miscellaneous Steelwork
Agate Grey*Note3 RAL 7038
5.1.7 Steel Platform Agate Grey*Note3 RAL 7038
5.1.8 Checkered Plate Galvanized - -

Kick Plate (safety painting
5.1.9 on galvanized surface)
Signal Yellow RAL 1003
5.1.10 Gutter Agate Grey*Note3 RAL 7038
5.1.11 Louver Manufacturer Standard -

Hoist beam (Safety
5.1.12 painting on steel coating Signal Yellow RAL 1003
system)
5.2 Reinforced Concrete Building
5.2.1 Concrete Superstructure Brown Beige*Note3 RAL 1011
5.2.2 CMU Wall Oyster White*Note3 RAL 1013
5.2.3 Window Frames with Sill Ivory*Note3 RAL 1014

External Doors (Including
5.2.4 Frame)
Ivory*Note3 RAL 1014
5.2.5 Door Aluminum Frame Ivory*Note3 RAL 1014

Power Plant
Roller Shutter, Sliding Door

5.2.6 (Including Frame)
5.2.7 Internal Glazing - Clear Glass
5.2.8 External Glazing Light Blue*Note3 RAL 5012
5.2.9 Internal Aluminum Door Ivory*Note3 RAL 1014

Aluminum Elements at
5.2.10 Main Entrance
5.2.11 Rainwater Down Pipe Not to be painted
5.3 Steel Framed Building and Shelter
5.3.1 Structural Steel Agate Grey*Note3 RAL 7038
5.3.2 Wall Cladding Oyster White*Note3 RAL 1013

Roof Cladding (External
5.3.3 and Internal)
Silk Grey*Note3 RAL 7044
5.3.4 Dado Block Wall Ivory*Note3 RAL 1014
5.3.5 Sun Shades Agate Grey*Note3 RAL 7038
5.3.6 Louvers in wall cladding Oyster White*Note3 RAL 1013
5.3.7 Louvers in dado wall Oyster White*Note3 RAL 1013
5.3.8 Rainwater Down Pipe Not to be painted
5.3.9 External Doors / frames Stone Grey *Note3 RAL 7030
5.3.10 Window Frames Oyster White*Note3 RAL 1013

Staircase supporting
5.3.11 structure strings
Agate Grey*Note3 RAL 7038
5.3.12 Stair treads & Gratings Galvanized - -

Steel Structure(Piperack,
5.4 GT Crane Support, Agate Grey*Note3 RAL 7038
Platform)
[Notes]
1. All plant structure, equipment and accessories which are not indicated above table will be painted by
Manufacturer Standard.
2. In the case that the final color in above table is different from the Turbine maker’s standard, the maker’s
standard has priority over the final color system table.
3. Specified color or nearest color in appointed manufacturer’s standard range can be applied.

Power Plant
10. PIPING COLOR SYSTEM
10.1 Piping materials shall be identified and color coded in accordance with ASME A13.1.
The product color code system shall consist of the following;
a) A colored band around pipe to indicate classification of product.
b) Black or White lettering and directional arrow to indicate flow direction between colored bands
to identify the specific product within the general classification.
10.2 Directional Arrow
The flow direction shall be indicated by black paint. The white painted flow direction can be used
at black colored surface.
The arrow thickness at its widest point shall be equal to the letter height.
10.3 Legend
Legend shall be brief, informative, pointed, and simple in full or abbreviated form. Language shall
be used in English.
Letter height shall be in accordance with the following:
Pipe Size (DN) Letter Height (mm)
Up to 25 15
40 to 50 20
65 to 80 25
90 to 150 50
200 to 225 65
250 to 400 80
Over 400 100
10.4 Location of Color Bands
10.4.1 Pipes
Color bands shall be applied to pipe immediately inside and outside of buildings,
adjacent to and on both sides of walls or partitions, and in other location as necessary
to further identify systems and maintain uniformity.
Information shall also be given regarding the nature of the contents of the pipe by an

Power Plant
informational label giving the name of the service, either in full or as an abbreviation
(e.g HP steam, condensate, IP feedwater, CCW etc). The distance between
information labels shall be max 10m inside buildings and max 100m for external pipe
runs. Where pipes are color banded, the information label shall be next to the color
band.
10.5 Color Code Sketch for Piping System (Example)
10.5.1 Identification band, legend and directional arrow
10.5.2 As indicated on each pipe at suitable position as following figure :
10.5.3 Identification Band
D ≤ 100 mm W = 50 mm
100 mm < D < 400 mm W = D/2
D ≥ 400 mm W = 200 mm
10.5.4 Directional arrow
The arrow shall be painted in white or black in order to contrast clearly with the
primery identification color. The arrow shall be adequately sized to the size of the pipe:
Pipe diameter (mm) Arrow length (mm)
D ≤ 50 75
50 < D ≤ 100 100
100 < D ≤ 150 150

Power Plant
150 < D ≤ 200 200
D ≥ 250 mm 300
10.6 Piping Color Code
Colors shall be as given below. The color band shall be painted around pipe. The banding color
code shall be in accordance with the following:
Letter
No. Designation Color RAL No. Color Shade Legend Remark
Color
General
1 Pipe Support, - Agate Grey RAL 7038 - - -

Pipe Hanger(Body)
2 Pipe Hanger(Rod) - Galvanized - - - - -
Valves - Silver Gray RAL 7001
Piping
Base Signal Green RAL 6032

Closed Cooling
1 White CCW
Water
Band Pastel Green RAL 6019
Base N/A N/A N/A
Main and Aux.

2 Band1 Signal Green RAL 6032 Black Sea Water GRP
Cooling water
Band2 Signal Orange RAL 2010
Base N/A N/A N/A
Demineralized
3 Band1 Signal Green RAL 6032 White Demi water Stainless Steel
water
Band2 1-Stone Grey RAL 7030
Base N/A N/A N/A
HP feedWater
4 Feed Water Band1 Signal Green RAL 6032 White Insulated
IP feedWater
Band2 Signal Red RAL 3001
Base Signal Green RAL 6032

5 Condensate White Condensate
Band Signal Yellow RAL 1003
Base N/A N/A N/A

Stainless Steel
6 Service Water White Service Water
& HDPE
Band1 Signal Green RAL 6032

Power Plant
Band2 Signal Brown RAL 8002
Base N/A N/A N/A
Stainless Steel
7 Potable Water Band1 Signal Green RAL 6032 White Potable Water
& HDPE
Band2 Signal Blue RAL 5005
Base Pastel Green RAL 6019

8 Sewage Water White Sewage Water
Base N/A N/A N/A
Waste Water Stainless Steel

9 Band1 Pastel Green RAL 6019 White Chem.W.water
(Chemical) & HDPE
Band2 Zinc Yellow RAL 1018
Base Pastel Green RAL 6019

Waste Water
10 White Oily W.water
(Oily)
Band Signal Brown RAL 8002
Base Flame Red RAL 3000

11 Fire Water White Fire Water
Band N/A N/A N/A
Base N/A N/A N/A Chemical

(Acid/Caustic
Chemical shall be Stainless Steel
12 Band1 Zinc Yellow RAL 1018 White
Dosing indentified as & GRV
Acid or Caustic
Band2 Traffic Purple RAL 4006 on the piping)
Base N/A N/A N/A
13 Instrument Air Band1 Signal Blue RAL 5005 White Air Stainless Steel
Band2 1-Traffic Black RAL 9017
Base N/A N/A N/A
14 Service Air Band1 Signal Blue RAL 5005 White Air Stainless Steel
Band2 1-Stone Grey RAL 7030
Lube & Base Signal Brown RAL 8002

15 Hydraulic Oil White Oil
(Supply) Band Signal White RAL 9003
Lube & Base Signal Brown RAL 8002

16 Hydraulic Oil White Oil
(Return) Band Signal Red RAL 3001

Power Plant
Base Zinc Yellow RAL 1018

17 Fuel Gas Black Natural Gas
Band 1-Traffic Black RAL 9017
Base N/A N/A N/A

Fuel Gas
18 (Stainless Steel Band1 Zinc Yellow RAL 1018 Black Natural Gas Stainless Steel
Part)
Band2 1-Traffic Black RAL 9017
Base Jet Black RAL 9005

19 Nitrogen White Nitrogen
Base Signal Yellow RAL 1003

20 Hydrogen Black Hydrogen
Band Flame Red RAL 3000
Base Dusty Grey RAL 7037

Carbon
21 Carbon dioxide White
dioxide
Base N/A N/A N/A

22 Sampling White Sampling Stainless Steel
Band Zinc Yellow RAL 1018
Base N/A N/A N/A

High Pressure
23 Band1 Signal White RAL 9003 White HP Steam Insulated
Steam
Band2 Zinc Yellow RAL 1018
Base N/A N/A N/A

Cold Reheat
24 Band1 Signal White RAL 9003 White CR Steam Insulated
Steam
Band2 Signal Yellow RAL 1003
Base N/A N/A N/A

Hot Reheat
25 Band1 Signal White RAL 9003 White HR Steam Insulated
Steam
Band2 Signal Red RAL 3001
Base N/A N/A N/A

Low Pressure
26 Band1 Signal White RAL 9003 White LP Steam Insulated
Steam
Band2 Signal Green RAL 6032
Base N/A N/A N/A

Aux & Grand
27 Band1 Signal White RAL 9003 White Aux Steam Insulated
Steam Piping
Band2 Signal Blue RAL 5005
28 Fuel Oil Base Signal Brown RAL 8002 White Oil

Power Plant
Band 1-Traffic Black RAL 9017
Base N/A N/A N/A

Condenser Air Emerald
29 Band1 RAL 6001 Black Air Stainless steel
Removal Piping Green
Band1 Brown Red RAL 3011
Base N/A N/A

Chemical
30 Black Chemical Stainless steel
Dosing Bright Red
Band1 RAL 2008
Orange
[Notes]
1. Piping which is not indicated above table will be painted by Manufacturer`s Standard.
2. The basic color of valve exposed up to 93℃ shall be same as above piping base color.
3. In the case of package system, valve color can be applied as per Manufacturer`s Standard.
11. APPLICATION OF PAINTING WORK
Application of painting work is as below:
Primer Middle Finish

Ser
Material Remarks
No
Shop Site Shop Site Shop Site
- The shop fabricator
1 Column O O O O shall furnish the
materials specified
2 Vessel O O O O herein and shall be
wholly responsible or
3 Heat Exchanger O O O O surface preparation and
primer application in
4 Reactor O O O O accordance with this
specification.
5 Tank O O O O
- The painting will be
touched-up in field after
6 Pump O O O erection at painting
contractor care to
7 Compressor O O O restore damages
happened during
8 Conveyor O O O O O transportation and
erection.
9 Motor O O O
- The application of
painting works can be
10 Agitator O O O changeable depending
on working condition.
11 E&I O O O

Power Plant
12 Other machine O O O
13 Piping O O O O O O
Valve & special
14 O O O
piping material
15 Structural steel O O O
16 Others O O O

FOR CONSTRUCTION
0 For Construction 17 Jul 2020 I.G. Seong I.G. Seong S.W. Choi
A For Approval 29 Apr 2020 I.G. Seong I.G. Seong S.W. Choi

Owner:
Owner’s Engineer:
Contractor:
Project Title:
Piping Insulation Specification
19CN-00GEN00-P04-0101 25 0
POWER PLANT
REVISION LOG
A 29 Apr 2020 First issue
0 17 Jul 2020 For Construction
Doc. Title : Piping Insulation Specification Rev: 0

POWER PLANT
List of Contents
1 GENERAL ................................................................................................................ 4
2 CODES AND STANDARDS ..................................................................................... 5
3 DESIGN AND CONTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS .................................................. 6
4 TECHNICAL DATA FOR THE INSULATION ........................................................... 7
5 APPLICATION OF INSULATION MATERIAL ......................................................... 9
6 INSULATION JACKET .......................................................................................... 10
7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ........................................................................... 10
8 FABRICATION, SHIPMENT AND ERECTION GUIDE .......................................... 11
9 TESTS AND INSPECTION .................................................................................... 13
10 COMMISSIONING AND TRIAL OPERATION ....................................................... 13
11 INSULATION THICKNESS FOR PIPING .............................................................. 14

POWER PLANT
1 GENERAL
1.1 This specification informs the design conditions and technical requirements for
insulation applied on the Piping.
1.2 The specifications for apparatus are descriptive of the requirements but do not attempt
to enumerate all details of accessories and appurtenances.
1.3 All data, specification, drawings and documents are written in English. All
documentation which is specifically produced for the project are to be supplied in SI
(System International) units except that temperatures shall be given in degrees Celsius
and pressures in bar(g).
1.4 The scope of supply shall also include all insulation (where necessary as touch guard
insulation) for hot small-bore piping such as drains, vents, sampling lines and
measurement points.
The terminal points of supply shall relate to the connecting plant items, inclusive of
necessary end discs, or the associated terminating, sealing and expansion elements,
inclusive of their installation.

POWER PLANT
2 CODES AND STANDARDS

2.1 The insulation shall be designed, fabricated, inspected and tested in accordance with,
but not limited to, the following listed codes, standards and specifications, including all
addenda, in effect at the time of execution of the EPC Contract.
ASME – American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM C 547 – Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation
ASTM C 553 – Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal

Insulation for Commercial and Industrial Applications.
ASTM C 585 – Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameter of Rigid Thermal
Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System)
ASTM C 592 – Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Insulation and
Blanket-Type Pipe Insulation (Metal-Mesh Covered) (Industrial
Type)
ASTM C 612 – Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board
Thermal Insulation
ASTM C 680 – Standard Practice for Determination of Heat Gain or Loss and the
Surface Temperature of Insulated Pipe and Equipment Systems
by the Use of a Computer Programs.
ASTM C 764 – Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Loose-Fill Thermal

Insulation
ASTM C 795 – Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact
with Austenitic Stainless Steel
ASTM C 1729 – Standard Specification for Aluminum Jacketing for Insulation
DIN – German Standardization Institute
KS – Korean Industrial Standards
EN – European Normalisation
BSI – British Standards Institution
2.2 These standards and codes set forth minimum requirements which may be exceeded
by the insulation supplier, if superior designs or materials are required for successful
and continuous operation of the insulation as required by this specification.

POWER PLANT
3 DESIGN AND CONTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

3.1 General
The design and fabrication of insulation shall be in accordance with the code and this
specification. Piping requiring insulation shall be as shown on the Piping Line list.
The insulation shall be firmly attached to the plant item to be insulated and shall not sag
on horizontal parts or bunch on vertical parts. Telescopic steel courses in the jacketing
and suitably tensioned mineral fiber blankets shall accommodate any thermal
expansion in the insulated part. The purpose of this tensioning shall be to prevent gaps
between the insulating blankets at maximum expansion.
Miscellaneous piping such as sample piping, valve by-pass, etc. which flow
intermittently shall be insulated for the same design and insulation class as required for
the main header, regardless of whether or not the miscellaneous piping is shown on the
Piping Line list.
The insulated pipe should be protected from any damage during construction.
3.2 Thermal insulation criteria

3.2.1 To reduce the heat loss to atmosphere and to afford operational safety to the personnel,
the thermal insulation of piping is provided.
3.2.2 The decisive feature for thermal insulation is constituted by the maximum operating
temperature of the piping to be insulated.
3.2.3 Plant components not carrying fluid permanently, if required, must be provided with the
insulation for protection from contact.
3.2.4 Where applicable, the thermal insulation shall be made of prefabricated formed lagging.
Otherwise, insulation mats stitched on a mesh of galvanized wire shall be used.
3.2.5 Unless otherwise specified, all insulated parts shall be covered by properly formed
sheet metal jacket whatever the kind of component to be insulated thermally.
3.2.6 Traps are not allowed to be insulated.
3.2.7 Wire shall be avoided wherever possible as a fixing material for insulation as it tends to
cut into the insulation. Bands shall be the preferred method.
3.2.8 Valves shall be insulated with suitable valve boxes that can be removed/replaced
for/following maintenance or preferably insulated with valve blankets that are held in
position with Velcro straps or similar.
3.3 Heat conservation insulation

POWER PLANT
3.3.1 The thermal insulation for heat conservation will be applied on parts and lines when the
fluid to be handled must not suffer any thermal losses or may suffer only slight thermal
losses.
3.3.2 The insulation for heat conservation will be applied to the piping systems having the
fluid operating temperature above 60°C except the system non necessary.
3.4 Personnel Protection Insulation

3.4.1 For protection of operating personnel from contact with hot parts, the parts and lines
having the fluid operating temperature above 60°C will be insulated not to exceed 60°C
at insulated surface.
3.4.2 Insulation for personnel protection shall be applied to uninsulated piping operating at
above 60°C within the area shown below, where operators, while working, can
inadvertently come to contact with them.
(1) Within 2500 mm height from ground or floor level

(2) Within 1200 mm distance beyond the edge of platform or walkway
4 TECHNICAL DATA FOR THE INSULATION

4.1 Insulation Thickness
All insulation shall be of proper thickness.
4.1.1 Insulation Calculation Conditions
The climate conditions are as below based on data measured (2017) at Fujairah
International Airport, United Arab Emirates.
- Yearly Mean Wind Speed: 3.2 m/s (2017)
- Yearly Mean Temperature: 28.8 °C (2017)
Insulation thickness is governed by normal operating temperatures that are indicated for
the system unless clearly specified otherwise.
Functional design is based on the following criteria.
- Insulated surface temperature does not exceed 60°C at ambient temperature 30°C
and 0.5m/sec wind speed for personnel protection.
- The maximum heat loss shall not exceed 200 W/m2 for heat conservation.
- Thermal conductivity of insulation materials shall be in accordance with ASTM or

applicable codes.
- Insulation classes or thicknesses of pipes are shown in the Piping Line list.

POWER PLANT
4.1.2 The smallest thickness of the thermal insulation is 25 mm.
4.1.3 The largest thickness is 120 mm when applying the insulation in one layer. For larger
insulation thickness, it is necessary to use two or three layers in accordance with
required total insulation thickness.
4.2 Pre-formed Material

4.2.1 Pre-formed materials are preferred for the insulation of pipe work, but where the size is
too large for this to be practicable, mineral wool mats lagging sections shall be used.
4.3 Mineral-Wool Mats

4.3.1 The mineral-wool mats shall be stitched on one side to a galvanized wire mesh with a
mesh size of 10 to 20 mm and a wire thickness of 0.7 to 0.8 mm.
4.3.2 Mineral fiber material unilaterally stitched to galvanized wire fabric will invariably be used
for thermal insulation; the thickness will range from 25 to 120 mm.
4.3.3 All insulating materials shall be stable in shape, chemically inert, free of sulfur and alkali,
resistant to water and steam, non-flammable and capable of withstanding continuous
exposure to the pipe operating temperature.
4.3.4 Materials containing asbestos shall not be used under any circumstances.
4.3.5 The insulating materials used for insulation of stainless steel piping shall have a chloride
content of less than 0.15 % to protect chloride stress corrosion, and will avoid a direct
contact with surface of stainless steel piping.
4.3.6 The material will have the following physical/chemical properties (±10% allowance):
Weight by volume in kg/m3 100 to 120
Water adsorption 0.5% weight
Specific heat capacity 0.84 kJ/kg℃
Compressive strength 20kPa
The following data are minimum values:
Limit temperature of application: 650 ℃

Thermal conductivity(W/m K) at a mean temperature of
(As per ASTM C592 Type II):
38℃ 0.039

POWER PLANT
93℃ 0.049
149℃ 0.060
204℃ 0.076
260℃ 0.092
316℃ 0.108
371℃ 0.124
5 APPLICATION OF INSULATION MATERIAL

The materials to be supplied shall conform to the latest issues of the designated
ASTM or equivalent as follows :
Mineral fiber preformed pipe section ASTM C-547 or equivalent

Mineral fiber wired blanket ASTM C-592 or equivalent
Mineral fiber block and board ASTM C-612 or equivalent

Mineral fiber loose-fill ASTM C-764 or equivalent
5.1 Insulation materials for pipes up to DN 150:

Mineral fiber pre-formed materials shall be used throughout.
ASTM materials are preferred.
Chemical composition:
Alkaline oxide content 3% max
Sulphur in soluble salt <0.5%
5.2 Insulation materials for pipes over DN 150:

Pre-formed materials shall be preferred for the insulation of pipe work but where the
size is too large for this to be practicable, mineral fiber wired blankets may be used.
The insulating blankets are non-deformable, chemically indifferent, free from sulphur
and alkali, non-putrescible, resistant to water and water vapour, non-inflammable as
well as capable of withstanding a permanent stress of 650℃.

POWER PLANT
ASTM materials are preferred.
6 INSULATION JACKET
6.1 Material
Aluminum Sheet: Material group Al-Mn-Cu, Type 3003 or 5005, according to ASTM
B209 or equivalent.
6.2 Thickness (for Non-Rigid Insulation)

The minimum thickness of the sheets shall be;
 0.4 mm for pipes up to a jacket diameter of 200 mm
 0.5 mm for pipes with a jacket diameter greater than 200 mm up to 280 mm
 1.0 mm for pipes with a jacket diameter greater than 915 mm
7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
7.1 Steel Band with Seals

 To be used for attaching insulation jacket and fixing insulation
 Stainless Steel 304
 19mm width x 0.4mm thickness with seals
 Bands shall be equipped with expansion elements when necessary due to piping
expansion.
7.2 Self-tapping Screw

 To be used for attaching insulation jacket of valves, etc.
 Stainless Steel 304 with neoprene washer under head
 M4 x 16mm length
 Screws should be equipped every 150mm.
7.3 Steel Wire

 To be used for attaching insulation pipe cover.

POWER PLANT
 Stainless Steel 304
 1.6mm (#16) wire for above 90mm thickness, 1.0mm (#20) wire for below 80 mm
thickness
7.4 Insulation Support Ring

 To be used for supporting insulation material of vertical pipe run
 3.0mm to 6.0mm thickness flat bar
 The width is to be 15mm smaller than piping insulation thickness.
 Tack welded type or bolted collar type for carbon steel pipe, bolted collar type for
alloy steel pipe
8 FABRICATION, SHIPMENT AND ERECTION GUIDE

8.1 Pipes
Sectional, tri-segmental, quad-segmental pipe insulation or bevelled lags shall be
applied on straight pipe using staggered joint construction for single layer applications
and staggered and broken joint construction for multiple layer applications. Multiple
layers shall be applied so that the butt joints of one layer do not coincide with those of
another, except where they cross at right angles.
8.2 Bends
Insulation of pipe bends shall be fabricated from pipe insulation using miter-type
construction. Where multiple layer construction is required, each layer shall be
fabricated and installed separately. Layers of insulation shall be secured in places with
wire or bands in accordance with standard drawings.
8.3 Fabricated Covers

Insulation covers for fittings and valves shall be fabricated in accordance with Figure 4
and 5. For valves, manholes, handholes and strainers, a removable type heat insulation
should be provided. Covers shall be secured in places with a sufficient quantity of wire
or bands in accordance with standard drawings.
8.4 Expansion Joints

For the piping having vertical height of more than 2.4m, support rings should be installed
at pitch of about 3.6m, for offsetting expansion and contraction, underneath them, an

POWER PLANT
expansion joint of 25mm be provided. For the horizontal piping, expansion joints each
being 25mm should be provided at pitch of about 3m.
Insulation expansion joints shall also be installed below all insulation support rings,
except when rings are located either near the bottom of a pipe run or above valves or
line flange pairs.
8.5 Traps
Bucket and thermostatic steam traps shall not be insulated. Piping upstream and
downstream from the traps, except the thermostatic, shall be insulated for personnel
protection unless otherwise specified on the piping drawing. In the case of thermostatic
traps, a minimum of 3ft (914mm) of piping upstream from the trap shall be left un-
insulated.
8.6 Application of Metallic Jacketing

All joints for metallic jacketing have to ensure perfect weatherproof effect. And the joints
should be overlapped 50mm wide in longitudinal joints and overlapped 50mm wide in
circumferential direction.
The joints of horizontal piping in longitudinal direction should be provided usually at a

position of about 45º from the top, and for the vertical piping, the overlapped parts in
circumferential direction should all be turned down-ward for water shed.
For the metallic jacketing on the vertical piping, the joints should be folded partially to
prevent the metallic jacket from sliding down from above.
8.7 STANDARD DRAWINGS

FIGURE – 1: SINGLE LAYER INSULATION FOR HORIZONTAL PIPE
FIGURE – 2: MULTIPLE LAYER INSULATION FOR HORIZONTAL PIPE
FIGURE – 3: INSULATION SUPPORT FOR VERTICAL PIPE
FIGURE – 4: INSULATED REMOVABLE COVERS FOR FLANGED JOINTS
FIGURE – 5: TYPICAL INSULATION FOR VALVES
FIGURE – 6: INSULATION DETAILS FOR PIPE SUPPORTS & SHOES
FIGURE – 7: INSULATION DETAILS FOR PIPE BENDS AND ELBOWS
FIGURE – 8: INSULATION DETAILS FOR REDUCERS
FIGURE – 9: INSULATION DETAIL FOR BRANCHES

POWER PLANT
FIGURE - 10: SUPPORT RING FOR THERMAL INSULATION OF VERTICAL ALLOY

PIPING
FIGURE - 11: SUPPORT RING FOR THERMAL INSULATION OF VERTICAL CARBON

/ STAINLESS STEEL PIPING
9 TESTS AND INSPECTION

9.1 All inspection, examinations, test and workmanship of individual insulation material
shall comply with the requirements of the applicable codes and standards.
9.2 All materials shall be subjected to inspection before shipment. Any materials found to
be defective, or do not meet the requirements of this specification, shall be replaced
with suitable materials by supplier.
9.3 Packing : Material shall be packaged to afford protection against deterioration and
damage during shipment from the manufacturer to the initial destination. Unless
otherwise agreed upon or specified between the purchaser and manufacturer or
supplier, material shall be packaged in containers supplied by the manufacturer and
commonly used for this purpose. Shipping containers shall comply with the regulations
applicable to the mode of transportation.
9.4 Marking : Unless otherwise specified, each container shall be plainly marked with the
manufacturer’s name, product name, type or class, quantity of insulation, nominal
dimension, and jacket type and accessories, if any, of the material in the container.
10 COMMISSIONING AND TRIAL OPERATION

Completion of installation shall be notified in writing. A joint tour of inspection of
insulation work shall then be undertaken.
Commissioning of insulation work shall take place at the same time as overall plant
commissioning.

POWER PLANT
11 INSULATION THICKNESS FOR PIPING

Temp 61 – 101- 151- 201- 251- 301- 351- 401- 451- 501- 551- 601-
(0C) 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 621
Pipe Size
(DN)
15 25 25 25 40 50 65 65 80 90 100 115 125
20 25 25 40 40 50 65 65 80 90 115 125 140
25 25 25 40 40 50 65 80 90 100 115 140 150
40 25 25 40 50 50 65 80 90 115 125 150 150
50 25 25 40 50 65 80 90 100 125 140 165 175
65 25 25 40 50 65 80 90 100 125 140 165 175
80 25 25 40 50 65 80 100 115 140 165 190 200
100 25 25 40 50 65 90 100 125 150 175 200 215
125 25 25 40 50 80 90 115 125 150 190 215 225
150 25 25 40 65 80 90 115 140 165 190 225 240
200 25 25 40 65 80 100 125 150 175 200 240 250
250 25 25 50 65 90 115 140 165 190 225 250 270
300 25 25 50 65 90 115 140 165 200 225 270 285
350 25 40 50 80 90 115 150 175 200 240 270 295
400 25 40 50 80 100 125 150 175 215 250 285 310
450 25 40 50 80 100 125 150 190 215 250 295 310
500 25 40 50 80 100 125 150 190 225 260 295 320
600 25 40 50 80 100 125 165 200 225 270 310 335
650 25 40 50 80 100 140 165 200 240 285 320 345
700 25 40 65 80 100 140 165 200 240 285 320 345
750 25 40 65 80 115 140 165 200 240 285 320 345
800 25 40 65 80 115 140 175 200 250 295 335 360
850 25 40 65 90 115 140 175 215 250 295 335 360
900 25 40 65 90 115 140 175 215 250 295 335 360
950 25 40 65 90 115 140 175 215 250 295 345 365
1000 25 40 65 90 115 140 175 215 250 310 345 370
1200 25 40 65 90 115 150 175 225 260 310 360 380
Note : 1. Insulation thickness values are in millimeters.
2. Insulation thickness shall be based on normal operating temperatures.
※ Design Conditions
Ambient Temperature (°C) : 30
Outer Surface Temperature (°C) : 60 & Below
Wind Velocity (m/sec) : 0.5
Base Metal : Steel
Insulation : ASTM C592 Type II
Jacket Material : 0.1 Aluminum, oxidized, in service

POWER PLANT
50MM OVERLAP

POWER PLANT

POWER PLANT
FOR CS PIPE FOR CS OR ALLOY PIPE

POWER PLANT

POWER PLANT

POWER PLANT

POWER PLANT
FOR NPS 100mm & LARGER PIPE
FOR NPS 80mm & SMALLER PIPE

POWER PLANT

POWER PLANT

POWER PLANT
FIGURE - 10 : SUPPORT RING FOR THERMAL INSULATION OF VERTICAL ALLOY

PIPING
Stainless Steel

POWER PLANT
FIGURE - 11 : SUPPORT RING FOR THERMAL INSULATION OF VERTICAL CARBON

/ STAINLESS STEEL PIPING

Paint Material List
UAE FUJAIRAH 3 IPP PJT Attachment #3
Specification International Paint Hempel Jotun
Outdoor/
Indoor System Surface Min.DFT
Item Layer Coating System Product Name Remark Product Name Remark Product Name Remark
Code Prep (μm)
1st coat 80 Inorganic Zinc rich primer Interzinc 2280 Galvosil 15780 RESIST 78 -
PENGUARD MIDCOAT/
2rd coat 80 Epoxy Polyamide Intergard 475 HS Hempaprime Multi 500 ( 45950 ) -
PENGUARD MIDCOAT M20
SP10
1. Structural Steel and Top coat 80 Aliphatic Polyurethane Interthane 990 / Interthane 990 SG Hempathane 55210 or 55610 HARDTOP XP -
PSO 1
Components
Total 240 - - - - -
1st coat: BARRIER 80

- Touch up - See Note 6.3 2nd, 3rd coat same as main system
(Epoxy Zinc)
2. Miscellaneous Steel Per ASTM A123, Spot blast the galvanized damages to
- Galvanizing Per ASTM A123, A153 - -
-Grating, stair stringers, A153 SSPC SP10
PSO 2
stair treads, handrails,
ladders, bolt / nut, etc. SP1 and Per ASTM A123,
Touch Up Epoxy Zinc Rich Primer Interzinc 52 Hempadur Zinc 17360 BARRIER 80 -
SP3 A153
Per ASTM A123, Spot blast the galvanized damages to
- Galvanizing Per ASTM A123, A153 - - -
3. Embedded Steel A153 SSPC SP10
PSO 3
-Anchor rods, fixing elements, bolt/nut, etc. SP1 and Per ASTM A123, Hempadur Avantguard 750 1736G or Hempadur
Touch Up Epoxy Zinc Rich Primer Interzinc 52 BARRIER 80 -
SP3 A153 17360
1st coat 25 1-Pack Silicone Aluminum Intertherm 50 - Hempel's Silicon Aluminum 56914 Solvalitt
Operating(T≥401℃)
PSO 4.1 SP10 2rd coat 25 1-Pack Silicone Aluminum Intertherm 50 - Hempel's Silicon Aluminum 56914 Solvalitt
Insulated
Total 50 - - - - -
1st coat 60 Inorganic Zinc rich primer Interzinc 2280 Gavosil 15780 RESIST 78
Operating(201 - 400℃) SP10
PSO 4.2
Insulated
Total 60 - - - - -
- Touch Up - See Para 6.3 Interzinc 52 Galvosil 15780 BARRIER 80
1st coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy Intertherm 228 HS Heat resistant Hempadur 85671 Up to 205C EPOXY HR/JOTATEMP 210 Up to 200C
4. Ferrous Metallic Exterior SP10 Top Coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy Intertherm 228 HS Heat resistant Hempadur 85671 Up to 205C EPOXY HR/JOTATEMP 210 Up to 200C
Surfaces Exposed to Elevated
Operating (94 - 200 C), Total 200 - - - - -
Temperatures(T > 93℃) PSO 4.3
Insulated
- Mechanical Equipment
If damages affect to bare steel, Surface
- Steel Piping - Touch up - See Para 6.3 - - Same as above Prep. SSPC SP10 or SP11 is required
depending on damaged area conditions.
1st coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy Intertherm 228 HS Heat resistant Hempadur 85671 Up to 205C EPOXY HR/JOTATEMP 210 Up to 200C
SP10 Top Coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy Intertherm 228 HS Heat resistant Hempadur 85671 Up to 205C EPOXY HR/JOTATEMP 210 Up to 200C
Operating(T≤93℃) Total 200 - - - - -

PSO 4.4
Insulated
If damages affect to bare steel, Surface
- Touch up - See Para 6.3 - - Same as above Prep. SSPC SP10 or SP11 is required
depending on damaged area conditions.
1st coat 60 Inorganic Zinc rich primer Interzinc 2280 Gavosil 15780 RESIST 78 -
Operating SP10 Top Coat 30 1-Pack Silicone Aluminum Intertherm 50 - Hempel's Silicon Aluminum 56914 Solvalitt
261 ~ 400℃ PSO 5.1 Total 90 - - - - -
Not Insulated
- Touch up - See Para 6.3 - - Same as above 2nd, 3rd coat same as main system
5. Ferrous Metallic Exterior 1st coat 60 Inorganic Zinc rich primer Interzinc 2280 Gavosil 15780 RESIST 78
Surfaces Exposed to Operating SP10 Top coat 30 1-Pack Modified Silicone Acrylic Intertherm 875 Hempel's Silicon Acrylic 56940 Solvalitt Midtherm
94 ~ 260℃ PSO 5.2
not insulated part of the Total 90 - - - - -
Not Insulated
Mechanical Equipment - Touch up - See Para 6.3 - - Same as above 2nd, 3rd coat same as main system
&
Steel Piping 1st coat 60 Inorganic Zinc rich primer Interzinc 2280 Galvosil 15780 RESIST 78
Operating SP10 PENGUARD MIDCOAT/

2nd coat 90 Epoxy Polyamide Intergard 475 HS Hempaprime Multi 500 ( 45950 ) -
T≤93℃ PSO 5.3 PENGUARD MIDCOAT M20
Outdoor
Not Insulated Top coat 50 Aliphatic Polyurethane Interthane 990 / Interthane 990 SG Hempathane 55210 or 55610 HARDTOP XP -
Total 200
1st coat 60 Inorganic Zinc rich primer Interzinc 2280 Galvosil 15780 RESIST 78
Exterior SP10 PENGUARD MIDCOAT/

2nd coat 90 Epoxy Polyamide Intergard 475 HS Hempaprime Multi 500 ( 45950 ) -
Surface PENGUARD MIDCOAT M20
PSO 6.1
Operating Top coat 50 Aliphatic Polyurethane Interthane 990 / Interthane 990 SG Hempathane 55210 or 55610 HARDTOP XP -
(T≤93℃) Total 200
Exterior JOTAMASTIC 87 GF/

1st coat 250 High Build Epoxy Interseal 670 HS Hempadur multi strength 45751 -
6. Steel Tanks Surface PENGUARD UNIVERSAL
SP10
*Note5 Field Erected Tanks
PSO 6.2 Total 250
Bottom (Most lower) plate
Operating
- Touch up 100 See Para 6.3
(T≤93℃)
1st coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy Interline 850 1. Alter: Interline 984 - 300 mic as single coat Hempadur 85671 TANKGUARD STORAGE
2nd coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy Interline 850 2. For PW tank, Interline 925 (EWEC approved) is Hempadur 85671 EWEC Approved paint is required. TANKGUARD STORAGE EWEC Approved paint is required.
SP10 required
Interior PSO 6.3 Top coat 100 Phenolic Epoxy Interline 850 Hempadur 85671 TANKGUARD STORAGE
Surface
Total 300
Operating
(T≤93℃) - Touch up
*Note2 1st coat 75 Zinc ethyl silicate primer Interzinc 2280 Galvosil 15700 RESIST 78
SP10
PSO 6.4 Total 75
- Touch up
Per ASTM A123,
- Primer Per ASTM A123, A153 - - -
7.1 Hot-Dip A153
PSO 7.1
Galvanized Steel SP1 and Per ASTM A123, Spot blast the galvanized damages to
Top Coat Epoxy Zinc Rich Primer Interzinc 52 Hempadur Avantguard 750 1736G BARRIER 80
SP3 A153 SSPC SP10
PENGUARD PRIMER/
1st coat 75 Epoxy Primer Interseal 1052 / Interseal 670 HS Hempaprime Multi 500 ( 45950 ) Sweep Blast
7.2 After Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel PENGUARD UNIVERSAL
PSO 7.2 SP-2
with Safety color coating Top coat 50 Aliphatic Polyurethane Interthane 990 / Interthane 990 SG Hempathane 55210 or 55610 HARDTOP XP -
Total 125
8. Non-Ferrous
Metallic Surfaces
These Materials Should Not Be Coated Unless
- GRP, GRE and GRV PSO 8 - - - - - - -
Required for Special Circumstances
- PVC
- HDPE
Transformers,
IPB,GCB & other electrical PSO 9.1 - - - Contractor/Manufacturer Standard - - - -
equipment.
9. Electical equipment
Switchgear,
PSO9.2 - - - Contractor/Manufacturer Standard - - - -
MCC,Panels & other board
Primer 60 Inorganic Zinc rich primer Interzinc 2280 Galvosil 15780 RESIST 78
SP10 PENGUARD MIDCOAT/

Intermediate 150 Epoxy Polyamide Intergard 475 HS Hempaprime Multi 500 ( 45950 )
10. Intake, Seal pit area PSO 10 PENGUARD MIDCOAT M20
Top Coat 50 Aliphatic Polyurethane Interthane 990 / Interthane 990 SG Hempathane 55210 or 55610 HARDTOP XP -
Total 260 - - - - -
- Touch up See Para 6.3 - - 1st coat: BARRIER 80 2nd, 3rd coat same as main system
11. HVAC Equipment PSO 11 - - - Contractor/Manufacturer Standard - - - -
12. GT, ST OEM PSO 12 - - - Contractor/Manufacturer Standard - - - -

1st coat 270 Anti-abrasion pure epoxy Interzone 954 / Interseal 670 HS Hempadur Multi-Strength 45751 PENGUARD UNIVERSAL
13. Steel submerged in seawater PSO 13 SP10 Top coat 270 Anti-abrasion pure epoxy Interzone 954 / Interseal 670 HS Hempadur Multi-Strength 45751 PENGUARD UNIVERSAL
Total 540
NOTE 1 This recommeded paint material list is information only. Paint designation for each category(system code) should be done with paint manufacturer's confirmation.
1/1
Minimum document submission requirements
1 General
All documentation and drawings under the Contract shall be prepared in computer form by a
word processing package or a PDF file or a computer-aided-drafting (CAD) package as far as
practical. Kinds of documentation and drawings submitted in both paper form and computer
form shall be mutually agreed between the Supplier and the Contractor.
2 Manuals
2.1 System Design Manuals
The System Design manuals shall include a system description for each major system stating
the function, required equipment, design basis, process data and design interface
requirements with other systems of the Plant.
2.2 Equipment Design Manuals
The Equipment Design manuals shall include the specific equipment requirement for each of
the major items of the Plant. It shall state the function, design basis, process data, method of
operation and control and interface requirements with the other systems of the Plant.
2.3 Operation & Maintenance Manuals
The Supplier shall supply operation and maintenance manuals in accordance with Contract.
The manuals shall include a full and comprehensive set of operations and maintenance
instructions and drawings in an agreed format. The documents shall include recommended
maintenance schedules.
3 Drawings and Schedules
Drawings and schedules shall be submitted by the Supplier to illustrate the design intent of the
system. The list of drawings, diagrams, and schedules to be provided by the Supplier shall be
subjected to the review and approval of the Contractor. The submission of drawings and
schedules shall include, but not be limited, to the following:-
• General arrangement drawings
• General layout drawings
• Mechanical flow diagrams
• Piping and instrument diagrams (P&ID)
• Instrument schedules
• Alarm and set-point list
• Control philosophy/logic/sequence diagrams
• Panel wiring diagrams
• C&I piping installation diagrams
4 Computer System Documentation and Testing
The Supplier shall supply adequate documentation for all computer systems to enable the
Contractor to obtain a complete understanding of the operation of the system and of the
individual programs, and to enable modifications to be carried out to the programs, should
these be required during the life of the Operation.
The documentation to be supplied for all computer based systems shall include, but not be
limited to, the following:-
• Input/output schedule
• Overall system description and network
• Computer architecture
• Detailed program descriptions with flow charts and Unit and Group schematics, showing
information flow within and between the programs
• Power supply and earthing arrangement
• Programming handbooks
• Standard software manuals
• Application software manuals
• Diagnostic software manuals
• Computer manufacturer manuals
• Peripheral manufacturer manuals
For all computer based systems and, if applicable, other C&I equipment, detailed test
procedures and results shall be provided. Test procedures shall be submitted in advance of
the testing and shall include information on testing tools, step by step walkthrough of the test
methods, possible sources of errors, accuracy, fault simulation and injection, and check lists
of important parameters. Test results shall also contain individual test data, fault details,
debugging and trouble-shooting details, and final conclusion.
5 Instrumentation and Control Drawing/Document Submittals
The Supplier shall submit the following drawing/document and information during various
stages of the Project:
i. Specifications and data sheets for field instruments, analytical instruments, local panel
mounted instruments, local control panels, control valves, safety valves, instrument
cables (e.g. signal, control, power and serial cables) and fibre optic cables
ii. Sizing calculation for control valves, safety valves and flow instruments
iii. All relevant drawings/documents for the control system which shall include the following
as minimum:
• Hardware specification with bill of materials
• Specification and general arrangement for processor stations, Remote I/O cabinets,
consoles and workstations
• System configuration
• I/O point list
• Software functional specification
• Graphics display specification
• Communication specification
• System inter-connection drawings

• Rack/nest layout for processor stations and remote I/O cabinet
• I/O module loading details
• I/O terminal assignment
• All relevant display functionalities
• Log and MIS report formats
• Plant optimisation functions
iv. Instrument list, instrument loop diagram, tripping matrix, logic and interlock diagram,
power supply distribution scheme and system earthing layout
v. Layout drawings (with dimensions/scale) for central control room, local control rooms and
engineering equipment room.
vi. Local control panels general arrangement and dimensions/scale.
vii. Instrument location drawing, instrument cable routing, instrument air supply routing,
cable tray /trench details and section layout, hook-up drawings, field earthing layout,
cable entry to control rooms, junction box details, cable inter-connection drawing and
cable schedule.
viii. List of final settings:
• Key set-points and control parameters
• Alarm and trip set-points
• Field switches (set and reset values)
• Field instrumentation calibration report
ix. Original software including licensed operating system and back-up software for each
control system
6 Number of Copies Required
The required numbers of documents to be submitted by the Supplier are specified in the
following table, but not limited to:
No. Document Description CD-ROM Hard Copy
1 All kind of documents & lists “AS 2 sets 2 sets

BUILT”
2 O&M Manuals “ FINAL” 2sets 2 sets

Back-up Fuel
Supply F3 Plant Emergency Diesel
Inter- Metering Black start facilities
Metering mediate 1 1 1
From existing Vopak 1 1 1 Fire Fighting Pumps
F1 Back-up Fuel Pipeline Back-up Back-up Fuel 1
1
Fuel Settlement Metering System Back-up Fuel to Process
Storage Settlement Settlement
(GT)*
From existing Metering Metering
Metering (Main) (Check) * individual meters 1
F2 Back-up Fuel Unloading 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1
and Storage Facilities 1 1
1
1 1 1
...
DCS
1
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Gas Delivery Settlement Metering System

1
... 1 1 1
1
1 1 1
1 Gas to Process 1 1 1 1
Main Meter
1 1 1
(GT/HRSG)
1 1 1 1
1
Check 1 1 1 1
B ay N et wo k
r s
Gas Supply 1 1 1
Meter 1
1 Telecom
Pipeline 1 3C om
1 1 1 1 Interface
LV/ MV 1 1 1
Switchgear 1 1 1
1 OLTE / MUX
CT / VT Electricity Meter
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 1
Aux. Power Metering System (Main)
3C om
To LDC
LV/ MV 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (Abu Dhabi)
Switchgear
1 1
CT / VT Electricity Meter 1 1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1
1 1 1 Aux. Power Metering System (Check) 1 1 1
5 5 5
5
... Extension of OLTE/
SCMS MUX
2 2 5
3C om
1 1 1 5
HV Switchgear
2 1 1
CT / VT Electricity Meter
2 2 2 Outstation Qidfa /
1 1 1
(redundant) ...
Electricity Output Metering System (Main)
1 1 1
1 Dhaid
2 2 2
1 1 1
3C om
1 400kV Grid
1 1 1 1 1 2
HV Switchgear
CT / VT 2 1
1
2 2 2 Station
Electricity Meter 2
2 2 2 1
B ay Ne w
t o k
r s
1
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 Telecom 5 5 5
Legend 1 = F3 Plant Electricty Output Metering System (Check)
Interface
2 2 *) 5
2 = F3 400kV Switching Station 2 2 2
1 1 1 1 1 1 OLTE / MUX *) OPGW Termination Box
3 = Gas Supplier F3 400kV Switching Station 2 2 2
4 = not used
Component C 5 = OHL supplier (Transco) ANNEX IIA-4.6
6 = others IIB-10
Supply C
Cable Connection
Installation C
Ownership C Ownership Cable Fujairah F3 Plant
Installation Cable Principle Scheme for Supply and 6354A32
Drschticka
Supply Cable 17.05.2019
Responsibility of Data Exchange Rev.1
EWEC Part IVof RFP
Fujairah F3 Project Drawings and Diagrams
F3 Project
GAS AND BACK-UP FUE L M E T E R DE T AI L S
Gas and Back-up Fuel Custody transfer Metering Details Remark
Kind of Supplied Received Metering Local / Make Type Unit Accuracy Settlement
Fuel From By Located DCS class Meter
Gas Gas Supplier F3 Plant F3 Plant Site Local & DCS Sm3/hr yes Settlement Meter (main/ check) to be
provided, installed, operated,
maintained and owned by F3 Project
Company.
Main and check meter in Z-
Configuration. MDEC accuracy
requirements apply.
Make and Type to be defined
Gas Gas Delivery GT # 1-n GT#1-n, Local & DCS Kg/s £ 0.5 no Meter to be provided, installed,
Plant operated, maintained and owned by
F3 Project Company.
Single meter arrangement
Gas Gas Delivery HRSG # 1-n HRSG gas skid Local & DCS Sm3/hr £ 0.5 no Required if Bidder decides to
Plant implement supplementary firing
Make and Type not yet defined
Back-up Fuel F1 Back-up F3 Plant F3 Plant Back-up Local & DCS m3/hr Settlement no Meter to be provided and installed by
Fuel pipeline Fuel supply meter Bidder
(upstream accuracy Parallel meter arrangement. MDEC
intermediate back- accuracy requirements apply
up fuel tank)
Make and Type to be defined.
Back-up Fuel F2 Back-up F3 Plant F3 Plant Back-up Local & DCS m3/hr Settlement no Meter to be provided and installed by
Fuel Unloading Fuel supply meter Bidder
and Storage (upstream accuracy Parallel meter arrangement. MDEC
Facility intermediate back- accuracy requirements apply
up fuel tank)
Back-up Fuel Back-up Fuel GT # 1-n GT oil skid Local & DCS I/hr-local yes Settlement Meter to be provided,
forwarding m3/hr-DCS installed, operated, maintained and
pumps owned by F3 Project Company.
Single meter arrangement. MDEC
accuracy requirements apply
Page 1 of 2 Annex IIA-4.9

EWEC Part IVof RFP
Fujairah F3 Project Drawings and Diagrams
Gas and Back-up Fuel Custody transfer Metering Details Remark
Kind of Supplied Received Metering Local / Make Type Unit Accuracy Settlement
Fuel From By Located DCS class Meter

Back-up Fuel Back-up Fuel Emergency diesel Forwarding pumps Local & DCS I/hr-local £ 0.5 no Meter to be provided, installed,
forwarding Black start facilities area m3/hr-DCS operated, maintained and owned by
pumps Fire fighting pumps F3 Project Company.
Page 2 of 2 Annex IIA-4.9

DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J34-
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION 0001
REV. NO. : A
ISSUED : 08.MAY.2020 FUEL METERING SYSTEM PAGE 1 OF 12
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

DOCUMENT NO : 19CN-00EZU00-J34-0001
A 08.MAY.2020 Issue For Quotation J.H.BAK K.M.LIM S.W.CHOI
REV DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED BY CHECKED BY APPROVED BY
1 / 12
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J34-
REV. NO. : A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. MAIN DESIGN CRITERIA ........................................................................................................................... 3
2. GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................ 4
3. FUEL GAS METERING AND METERING PANEL FOR SETTLEMENT ............................................. 5
4. BACKUP FUEL OIL METERING AND METERING PANEL FOR SETTLEMENT AND
OPERATION ............................................................................................................................................................ 7
5. FLOW COMPUTER ....................................................................................................................................... 9
6. GAS CHROMATOGRAPH .......................................................................................................................... 10
7. METERING SKID ......................................................................................................................................... 11
2 / 12
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J34-
REV. NO. : A
1. MAIN DESIGN CRITERIA
This specification does not relieve the Supplier of his responsibility for the basic design
and execution of the instrumentation and control system. The rules of good engineering
practice and the relevant approved standards and regulations shall be observed.
No single I&C failure shall:
• Cause any danger to personnel and plant;
• Invalidate protection by inhibiting a trip;
• Shut down more than one major plant item;
• Simultaneously trip a plant item and invalidate its auto-change-over; and
• Affect more than one control area.
It is not the intent to specify completely herein, all details of design and construction of
the equipment. However, the equipment shall conform in all respects to high standards
of engineering, design & workmanship and be capable of performing continuous
commercial operation up to the SUPPLIER's guarantee in a manner acceptable to the
OWNER, who will interpret the meaning of drawings and specifications and shall be
entitled to reject any work or material which in his judgment is not in full accordance
therewith.
It is not the intent or purpose of the specification to completely specify all details of
design and construction herein or to specify each and every component of equipment
under technical specification for Fuel Metering System, since the SUPPLIER has full
responsibility for engineering and supplying the complete equipment. However, any
additional equipment, material, services which are not specifically mentioned herein, but
required to make the equipment complete in every aspect in accordance with the
technical specification and for safe operation and guaranteed performance, shall be
covered under the scope of the SUPPLIER.
Nevertheless. The Fuel Metering System and its installation shall conform to high
standards of engineering design and workmanship in all respects and shall be capable
of performing continuous operation in a manner acceptable to the PURCHASER.
PURCHASER is relying upon SUPPLIER`s skill, judgment and ability to supply suitable
equipment fit for the purposes and uses specified in this specification.
All necessary co-ordination with regards to sub-contracted equipment shall be carried

out by the SUPPLIER. The PURCHASER will communicate only with the SUPPLIER for
all matters pertaining to this contract.
3 / 12
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J34-
REV. NO. : A
It is proposed to adopt KKS coding procedure for the Project. SUPPLIER shall adopt
KKS coding for all system/equipment, valves, fittings, instruments, cabling etc. covering
the complete scope of this project.
Any conflict between this specification and its references shall be brought to the
attention of the PURCHASER for resolution prior to any further action by the SUPPLIER.
The instrumentation and control equipment shall have high electro-magnetic and radio
frequency interference immunity and shall not be affected by portable radio transmitters
operated in the vicinity of the equipment. Any limitations shall be stated.
2. GENERAL
Reference is made to “Attached Configuration for Fuel Metering System” of this

specification.
Settlement metering systems and Operational metering system for Gas and Back-up
Fuel shall be provided by Supplier in line with the latest version of the Metering and
Data Exchange Code (MDEC). The requirements of the latest revision of the Metering
Data Exchange Code (MDEC) issue have to be fulfilled for all settlement metering
equipment. MDEC is available via the Web-address: http://www.rsb.gov.ae/English/.
For the design and operation of the fuel Gas metering, the following main constraints
• The fuel Gas system shall comply with the applicable standards like EN and API,
as far as applicable.
• All the equipment shall be fitted with isolating valves to permit repair and
• All isolating valves shall be ball type with double block and bleed function.
• Sufficient permanent installed valve connections and vents shall be provided to

permit the gas system to be purged with inert gas.
• All butt welds shall be subject to 100% radiography test and all other welds shall
• The maximum flow velocity for piping and valve dimensioning shall not be higher
than 25 m/s.
A detection and alarm shall be provided, with detection devices selected to suit
particular risks, and designed to provide operating and operation staff with sufficient
information to identify and respond correctly to any detection.
All required cable glands shall be provided by Supplier shall be double compression
type of nickel-plated brass material. All cable glands at field shall be provided with PVC
hood.
4 / 12
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J34-
REV. NO. : A
The Supplier may, in addition to the based bid in quoting, submit alternate proposals for
the equipment on systems which he feels shall fulfill the specified requirements more
efficiently and/or more economically than those set in the specification.
3. FUEL GAS METERING AND METERING PANEL FOR SETTLEMENT
The measuring instrument with auxiliaries selected for the Flow Metering System shall
be rugged in design and must be well proven in the Custody Transfer applications for
natural gas. Supplier must ensure that all the measuring instrument with auxiliaries
being supplied must be operating continuously for a period of at least three (3) years in
a similar application.
Supplier shall note that the required upstream and downstream straight pipe lengths
with meter runs, flow conditioners / straighteners, isolation and bypass valves, etc. to
make the system complete will be provided along with ultrasonic flowmeter as per AGA-
9 recommendations and the Metering and Data Exchange Code (MDEC). The
recommended upstream and downstream lengths shall be clearly indicated to meet the
required accuracy & performance of ultrasonic meters. In case, the upstream and
downstream straight lengths are not meeting the accuracy and performance
requirement, Supplier shall also include the flow conditioner along with meter runs with
other necessary.
Ultrasonic Flow Meter and Metering Panel
Ultrasonic flow meter shall be multi path type (Minimum 4 Path) for Custody Transfer
flow metering application and the design, construction and operation shall conform to
AGA Report No.9 (latest version) for multipath. Supplier shall provide the comparison
table between Supplier’s model and AGA Report for compliance at proposal.
Technique of measurement used shall be interference free. It shall be immune to other

impurities in the fluid stream. Operating principle shall be transit-time differential method
with multi path (minimum 4 paths).
The transducers/probes must be of robust construction for uninterrupted long life and
accurate performance. The transducer/probe shall be hermetically sealed type. The
transducer/probe shall be electroplated with suitable material so as to perform
accurately even under dirty gas conditions.
The Flow Meter shall comprise of multi-path (Minimum 4 Path) ultrasonic transducers.
The transducers shall be energized by the integral electronics to transmit and receive
ultrasonic waves. Supplier shall size all the ultrasonic Flow Meters for the given process
conditions as per AGA-9 and shall furnish the sizing calculations along with the proposal.
Sizing shall be done including the minimum inlet operating pressure & gas composition
and other process conditions.
Supplier is to provide documentary evidence from Certify Agency to substantiate the

same. Failure of any path shall generate an alarm identifying the affected path. The
repeatability of the flow meter shall be +/-0.1% of reading or better.
5 / 12
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J34-
REV. NO. : A
The meter body shall be made of same with piping material or better. All flanges shall
be weld neck, raised face and shall meet ASME B16.5 and Purchaser’s Piping Material
Classification. Sensors and holders shall be of Titanium as minimum or better.
The meter design shall have the facility to remove / replace the transducer in-situ under
the online operating condition. Also transducers ports shall be designed in a way to
reduce the possibility of liquid or solid accumulation.
Area classification shall be IEC Zone-2, Gas Gr. IIA & IIB and temperature class T3 or
as per the hazardous area classification as per detailed engineering – whichever is
more stringent.
The transducers shall be intrinsically safe certified suitable for the applicable area
classification and weather proof to IP65 or better and shall supply necessary isolating
barriers between transducers and preamplifier/transmitter. However, the
transducer/sensor housing may be explosion proof (Ex d) certified suitable for the
specified area classification instead of intrinsically safe.
Pressure drop calculation across the meter shall be furnished and be provided at the
proposal.
Ultrasonic Flow Meters and accessories shall be protected from electromagnetic

exposure/interference. The electromagnetic compatibility shall be as per IEC-801.
Ultrasonic Flow Meter spool inside diameter to meet the specified I.D. and internal
surface roughness shall be as per AGA Report No.9.
The Supplier shall take special precautions in the selection and protection of materials
and equipment against deterioration due to the effect of humidity and temperature, dust
and the salt laden atmosphere. Attention must also be paid to selection and protection
of electronic components, protection relays, instrumentation and temperature and
humidity sensitive equipment.
Electronics
The transmitter unit shall be microprocessor-based electronics, suitable for installation

in the field under the ambient conditions specified. Meter electronics shall be weather
proof to IP65 or better and explosion proof certified suitable to install in area
classification IEC Zone-2, Gas Gr. IIA & IIB and temperature class T3 (or as per the
hazardous area classification as per detailed engineering – whichever is more stringent)
and as certified by a statutory body such as ATEX, FM, UL, CENELEC, BASEEFA and
PTB etc.
Supplier shall supply sufficient length of interconnection cable between the meter and
electronics module.
The transmitter shall have extensive diagnostic capability. Self-diagnostic feature should
include monitoring the health of the transducers and signal quality.
6 / 12
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J34-
REV. NO. : A
Meter parameters and factors set into the meter electronics shall be retained in non-
volatile memory and shall be secured with password such that unauthorized changes
are prohibited. Configuration software and firmware shall be provided.
All the signals from the meter electronics shall be terminated in a junction box (JB). JB
shall be weatherproof to IP-65 and explosion proof certified suitable (Ex-d or Ex-e
applicable) for the corresponding area classification. Supplier shall separate cable
entries, along with water proof and explosion proof cable glands, in the meter
electronics for terminating the power supply cable and for signal cables from the field to
safe area mounted flow computers.
To determine accurate gas flow measurement, certain quantities shall be measured

using a device other than a Meter e.g. a transmitter. The following quantities shall be
measured at the most appropriate position in the natural gas flow stream in order to
achieve the most accurate results:
• Flow
• Pressure
• Temperature
Outputs from the transmitters shall typically be 4-20mA signals and as required by the:
• Plant DCS
• Settlement Metering System to ESF Outstation
Transmitters shall be designed for safe operation with hazardous area classification
appropriate to the application.
Dual frequency pulse outputs to flow computers configurable for flow rate signals and
shall be user selectable to be either same outputs or one signal dedicated to each
direction of flow.
Digital discrete outputs for direction of flow, trouble alarm and output data validation.
4. BACKUP FUEL OIL METERING AND METERING PANEL FOR SETTLEMENT AND
OPERATION
The Metering systems for back up fuel metering system shall be consisted of as follows;
• Metering systems (Coriolis Mass Flow meter, Pressure transmitter & temperature
gauge, Density, Flow computer, etc.)
Coriolis flow meter shall have high accuracy and rangeability. Coriolis flow meter shall
be capable of measuring the process fluid density and temperature.
The Coriolis flow meter is consisted of the sensor and the electronics assembly. The
7 / 12
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J34-
REV. NO. : A
4~20 mA & 2(two) pulse outputs for flow rate from a Coriolis flow meter shall be of mass
flow rate, density and volume flow rate. The Coriolis flow meter shall have a built in type
digital indicator.
All the signals from the meter electronics shall be terminated in a junction box (JB). JB
shall be weatherproof to IP-65 or better and explosion proof certified suitable (Ex-d or
Ex-e applicable) for the corresponding area classification. Supplier shall separate cable
entries, along with water proof and explosion proof cable glands, in the meter
electronics for terminating the power supply cable and for signal cables from the field to
safe area mounted flow computers.
The minimum specification and requirements for the Backup Fuel Metering Equipment
to be used for the measurement and recording of liquid fuel oil transfers for settlement.
The overall accuracy of the oil flow measurements shall at all times be within the limits
of error as set out in the Metering and Data Exchange Code (MDEC) Schedule 8.
To achieve the overall accuracy requirements, it may be necessary to compensate

Meters for the errors of the measuring elements. Values of the compensation shall be
recorded and evidence to justify the compensation criteria, including wherever possible
test certificates shall be available.
To determine accurate fuel oil flow measurement, certain quantities shall be measured
using a device other than a Meter e.g. a transmitter. As a minimum the following
quantities shall be measured at the most appropriate position in the fuel oil flow stream
in order to achieve the most accurate results:
• Flow
• Pressure
• Temperature
• Density
Outputs from the transmitters shall typically be 4-20mA signals and as required by the:
• Plant DCS
• Settlement Metering System to ESF Outstation
Transmitters shall be designed for safe operation with hazardous area classification
appropriate to the application.
Operational Metering equipment (Coriolis Mass Flow meter, Pressure transmitter &
temperature gauge, Density, etc.) shall be provided for the F3 Plant according to the
latest issue of MDEC for:
Back-up Fuel Supply System
8 / 12
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J34-
REV. NO. : A
• Operation meter for from existing F2 Back-up Fuel Unloading and Storage
Facilities
• Back-up Fuel forwarding pumps to Process (GT supply and return)
Other requirements are not specified in this section Supplier shall take into account
other section in this specification and MDEC practice.
5. FLOW COMPUTER
The Flow Computer shall acquire inputs from the ultrasonic flowmeter, Coriolis
flowmeter, gas chromatograph and field pressure and temperature transmitters to
perform flow computation. It shall have provision for adequate hardwired and soft
communication links for the purpose of acquiring the required inputs and providing the
required outputs.
The flow computer shall compute and display the instantaneous and totalized flow rate
for the stream, corrected for pressure and temperature variations. The stream flow
computer shall have computational capabilities for computing uncorrected volume flow
rate at normal conditions, corrected volume flow rate at standard or operator specified
base conditions, Integrated corrected volume, mass flow rate and integrated mass,
energy flow rate and integrated energy, etc.
Analog outputs (4-20 mA) shall be provided from flow computer for corrected volume
flow rate, metering temperature, energy flowrate, mass flow rate and metering pressure
as a minimum. Communication link for outputs and diagnostics to the Purchaser’s Plant
DCS and OUTSTATION shall be provided.
The flow computers shall interface with the Settlement Metering System via fiber optic
cabling. The computers shall be supplied with fiber optic connectivity and required
accessories.
Calculation accuracy accounting for linearity, hysteresis, repeatability and resolution

shall be +/- 0.1% of Full Scale or better but followed strictly the Metering and Data
Exchange Code (MDEC).
The flow computer shall be microprocessor based, with digital display, data entry
keyboard. Flow computer electronics shall be protected from industrial interferences,
shall be shock and vibration proof and shall have low power consumption.
Free standing panel complete with all instruments mounted on it including flow
computers, barriers/isolators and accessories etc., if required, shall be provided.
Flow computers shall have elaborate and sufficient on-line diagnostics to ascertain
accurate and proper functioning of the flow computer. Results of diagnostics/checking
shall be displayed. Facility for easy testing of the accuracy shall be provided. Provision
for high and low limit check for each input, sensor break, saturation and. alarms shall be
provided.
9 / 12
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J34-
REV. NO. : A
The flow computer shall calculate the flow rate, volume and energy based on AGA
Report 9 and AGA Report 5. The super compressibility factors shall be calculated as
per AGA Report 8. The speed of sound calculation shall be based on AGA Report 10.
Supplier shall provide all necessary hardware, software etc. such as the media
converter, F.D.F and required accessories. in supplied systems and other details
required for interfacing of their Flow Computers with Purchase’s Plant DCS and
Settlement Metering System.
A Metering Panel shall be supplied along with all accessories for mounting the flow
computers for ultrasonic, barriers/isolators, terminal blocks etc. for flow metering and
other analog/RTD signals of the metering system. The complete wiring for barriers,
isolators, etc. shall be made in the Metering Panel and terminals shall be provided in the
panel to the mounted field instruments.
The Flow Computer terminal shall have minimum 3 Nos. of Modbus TCP/IP or RS-485
communication port for Purchaser’s DCS / Settlement Metering System, and one no.
RS-232 port for Laptop PC.
The Flow Computer shall provide the port for time synchronization. For the time
synchronization, Purchaser will provide the NTP time signal to each metering panel.
6. GAS CHROMATOGRAPH
2 x 100% On line Gas Calorific Value (CV) analyzer to monitor the GCV (Gross Calorific
Value), density, temperature, Cv, analyze constituent gases, concentration, specific
gravity and calculating Wobbe Index etc., shall be supplied.
The analyzer shall be of sampling type with 4-20mA output signal. All the necessary
tubing from the tap points, venting shall be provided.
The gas chromatograph shall be microprocessor based. The system shall be complete
with all equipment required for conditioning the gas, appropriate detectors/analyzer
modules with associated electronics, software for analysis, soft communication link for
communicating to the DCS and flow computer, calibration gas, reference gas, rack
mounting, etc. It shall have LCD display / keypad interface and shall be easy to operate.
Set of calibration and carrier gas cylinders shall be supplied as spare. The same shall
be connected to flow computer along with the flow meter for computing the actual flow.
These Online gas chromatograph systems shall comprise of following components
• Sample conditioning and analyzing system
• Analyzer unit including H2S, total Sulphur, dew point and Programmable
control unit
• Cables, cable glands, junction box, tubing, fitting etc.
10 / 12
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J34-
REV. NO. : A
• Calibration & N2, He carrier gas shall be supplied by SUPPLIER during

commissioning. Also, SUPPLIER shall supply calibration & N2, He carrier gas can
be used for 1 year calibration after commissioning. Gas which specification is
same as Annex#9. Gas Specification shall be supplied from UAE local.
The sampling system, chromatograph etc. shall be supplied pre-mounted on a self-

standing 3 side shelter. The shelter shall have grouting holes to anchor bolt it to the
ground.
Base frame and mounting stands with suitable clamps shall be provided for the carrier
and calibration gas cylinders.
Components of any sub-assembly that requires removal maintenance shall be

removable without having to disassemble any other components. Such components
include items like stream selector valves, sample inject valves, filters, pressure
regulators, plug-in circuit cards and detector cells.
On-stream analyzers shall be installed in accordance with process requirements. They

shall be housed in enclosures under the Electrical Area Classification Zone 2 Gas Gr.
IIA&B Temp T3. All analyzer components located in hazardous areas must meet the
electrical classification of that area (or as per the hazardous area classification as per
detailed engineering – whichever is more stringent).
Analyzer and sample system shall be suitable for outdoor installation in the field.
Minimum of IP65 or better protection shall be provided. A sunshade and a three-side
weather shelter shall be provided to protect the Analyzer and Sample System.
Power supply for the gas chromatograph system shall be 230 Volts AC from the
Purchaser’s electrical supply system. Supplier shall provide the power requirements of
the system. All sampling components should be properly installed, operated, and
maintained.
7. METERING SKID
Metering System shall be skid mounted to the greatest extent possible. Sufficient space
shall be left around equipment for maintenance purposes. Interconnecting piping within
the skid shall be within the Supplier's scope, and shall be designed to the applicable
codes and suitable for the design temperature and pressures specified.
Platforms, ladders and/or stairs shall be provided where necessary for maintenance
and/or filter replacement and shall meet OSHA requirements. Natural gas vent piping
shall be routed in accordance with NFPA 850.
Sun shades shall be provided on the skid for each of the meters, instrumentation, and
any local control panels.
Drains shall be routed to terminal point on edge of skid.
11 / 12
DOCUMENT NO
19CN-00EZU00-J34-
REV. NO. : A
Supplier shall furnish recommended connections and accessories to purge the systems
of gas for maintenance.
12 / 12
NOTE
IT IS NEITHER THE PURCHASER'S INTENT TO SPECIFY ALL REQUIREMENTS HERE IN DIAGRAM.
SUPPLIER SHALL COVER ALL REQUIREMENTS TO COMPLY MDEC AND UAE LOCAL PRACTICE IN THIS PROPOSAL. 1) MDEC : Metering Data Exchange Code
FC : Flow Computer
G.C : Gas Chromatograph
UFM : Ultrasonic Flow Meter
2) Isolation Valve : Ball type w/ Double

Block and Bleed Funtion and Fire Resistant
per API 60
PLANT DCS ESF OUTSTATION 2) On Site Verification Function is required

as per MDEC. It shall be considered on
Metering Design for this requirement.
Note 4) Note 5) Test Point details will be inform in detail
stage. (Verfication Tool excluded)
GAS METERING PANEL 4) DCS Interface method

3-SIDE ANALYZER SHELTER
- Communication protocol : Modbus TCP/IP,
FC #1 TOTAL SULFUR/ redundant
G.C #1
HMI H2 S - Time Sync. : NTP
(TOUCH SCREEN)
5) ESF Outstation Interface method
Power supplied by SCT
(230Vac 1pH 50Hz - Communication protocol : Modbus TCP/IP,
FC #2 G.C #2 MOISTURE Power supplied by SCT
UPS 2, Normal 1) (230Vac 1pH 50Hz redundant
UPS 2, Normal 1)
6) Cables from the field instruments to J/B
within Skid shall be provided by the
SUPPLIER. And also Cables to be pre-wired
up to J/B within the skid by SUPPLIER.
SIGNAL J/B SIGNAL J/B
7) Minimum piping design using a flow
conditioner with a 10D upstream spool
RS485 X 2 pieces, and a 5D downstream spool piece
STATUS
PULSE X 2
N2 PURGE 4~20mA X 1 GAS VENT
8) Thermowell should be located 2-5
CONNECTION (3 Meter) CONNECTION POINT nominal diameters downstream of the
PT TT PI TI
BY SUPPLIER (CALORIE METER ) meter(AGA 9 currently states the RTD
FT
TEST WELL should be at least 3D from the meter)
FLOW INLET UFM

DN600 A105 600# RF
FLOW FLOW OUTLET
CONDITIONER ( MAIN ) DN600 A105 600# RF
RS485 X 2
STATUS
PULSE X 2
N2 PURGE 4~20mA X 1 GAS VENT
(3 Meter)
CONNECTION PT TT PI TI
FOR QUOTATION REV. A
FT
TEST WELL
FUJAIRAH F3 , UAE
UFM
FLOW
CONDITIONER ( CHECK )
CONFIGURATION OF
FUEL GAS COMMON SETTLEMENT METER SKID FUEL GAS METERING
FOR COMMON
(SETTLEMENT)
NOTE
IT IS NEITHER THE PURCHASER'S INTENT TO SPECIFY ALL REQUIREMENT HERE IN DIAGRAM.
SUPPLIER SHALL COVER ALL REQUIREMENT TO COMPLY MDEC AND UAE LOCAL PRACTICE IN THIS PROPOSAL. 1) MDEC : Metering Data Exchange Code
FC : Flow Computer
2) On Site Verification Function is required

Test Point details will be inform in detail
3) Cables from the field instruments to J/B

within Skid shall be provided by the
SUPPLIER. And also Cables to be pre-wired
4) Test Connection point for Site Verification,

if required as following but connection size
will be informed exactly during detail design
stage ;
4~20mA Density
SIGNAL J/B
STATUS 6" 150# RF
PULSE X1
BY SUPPLIER
PT TI
PLANT DCS
CORIOLIS
(incl. Air Eliminator, if required)
SIGNAL J/B
TEST POINT
NOTE 4
FLOW INLET
DN300 A105 150# RF FLOW OUTLET
DN300 A105 150# RF
4~20mA Density
STATUS
PULSE X1
PT TI
CORIOLIS
(incl. Air Eliminator, if required)
BACK UP FUEL OIL FOR UNLOADING OPERATION METER SKID

FUJAIRAH F3 IPP, UAE
CONFIGURATION OF
BACKUP OIL METERING
FOR UNLOADING
(OPERATION)
NOTE
IT IS NEITHER THE PURCHASER'S INTENT TO SPECIFY ALL REQUIREMENT HERE IN DIAGRAM.
SUPPLIER SHALL COVER ALL REQUIREMENT TO COMPLY MDEC AND UAE LOCAL PRACTICE IN THIS PROPOSAL. 1) MDEC : Metering Data Exchange Code
FC : Flow Computer
2) On Site Verification Function is required

Test Point details will be inform in detail
3) DCS Interface method

- Communication protocol : Modbus TCP/IP,
redundant
- Time Sync. : NTP
RS485 X 2 4) ESF Outstation Interface method
SIGNAL J/B
STATUS GT#11 OIL METERING PANEL - Communication protocol : Modbus TCP/IP,
PULSE X 2 PLANT DCS redundant
4~20mA X 1 Note 3)
BY SUPPLIER FC #1
HMI 5) Cables from the field instruments to J/B
TEST POINT (TOUCH SCREEN) within Skid shall be provided by the
PT TI NOTE 7
FC #2 ESF OUTSTATION SUPPLIER. And also Cables to be pre-wired
Note 4)
CORIOLIS
FLOW INLET (incl. Air Eliminator, if required) 6) Fuel Oil Settlement Metering concept of
DN200 A105 150# RF FLOW OUTLET
DN200 A105 150# RF GT#12/#21 are identical with GT#11 in this.
Power supplied by SCT

7) Test Connection point for Site Verification,
(230Vac 1pH 50Hz if required as following but connection size
UPS 2, Normal 1) will be informed exactly during detail design
stage ;
2" 150# RF
BACK UP FUEL OIL FOR PROCESS (GT#11 SUPPLY) SETTLEMENT METER SKID

METER SKID AS SAME AS ABOVE
FUJAIRAH F3 IPP, UAE
BACK UP FUEL OIL FOR PROCESS (GT#11 RETURN) SETTLEMENT METER SKID CONFIGURATION OF
BACKUP FUEL OIL FOR
PROCESS (GT)
(SETTLEMENT)
EWEC Part II.A of RFP
rujairah F3 Projc1:1 General Ti:,hnical Spei.:ifaation~
Special emphasis is placed on a high resistance to corrosion of the equipment. The

feedwater pumps shall be constructed in chromium steel containing at least 13%
chromium.
The pumps shall be equipped with mechanical shaft seals. Seal faces shall provide at
least 8.000 running hours before replacement becomes necessary.
The minimum-flow valves shall be automatically actuated. The minimum flow lines
and relieflines shall run individually to the feedwater storage tank.
It shall be possible to start the pumps safely from cold without prior warming up or
other preparatory measures.
4.2.4.4 Condensate System
The condensate from the condenser of the STs shall be pumped by 2 x I 00 % or 3 x

50% condensate pumps into the condensate supply line. The gland steam condenser
condensate and the minimum flow of the condensate pumps shall be led to the
condenser flash tank and from there to the condenser.
The condensate flow from the STs shall be controlled by means of a condenser
hotwell level control system actuating a control valve (throttle valve) in the
condensate pump discharge line.
4.2.5 Fuel Systems
4.2.5.1 General
The plant shall be designed to fire natural gas ("Gas") as the main fuel and fuel oil as
Back-up Fuel.
The entire firing equipment of the gas turbines of the proposed F3 Plant shall be
designed for I 00% dual-fuel capabi lity. without any duration limitations for Gas or
Back-up Fuel firing.
The capability of the GTs shall be provided for automatic on-load switch-over from
Gas to Back-up Fuel following manual initiation and manual change over from
Back-up Fuel to Gas. During change over the load transient shall be minimized. Fuel
change over shall be possible at all gas turbine loads and HRSG loads. The fuel
change over concept and design shall ensure that power output of F3 Plant is not less
than sixty-five percent (65%) of Contracted Power Capacity at RSC during transient
change over conditions (Bidder to infonn about limitations of plant operation and
fuel change over, if any. in case of sudden interruption of gas supply to F3 Plant at
the Gas Interface Point).
The Bidder shall provide all systems, facilities and equipment required for the plant
from the respective interfaces. The fuel systems shall be suitable for continuous
unattended operation.
63S4A32/FICHT-21691066-v4 JI.A - 86
Fujairah F3 Projec.:1 lieneral Technical Specifications
4.2.5.2 Fuel Gas
The fuel gas composition is defined in chapter 4.1.1 .
The F3 PPA will cover the technical and commercial conditions governing the long-
tenn supply of Gas to the plant during the Tenn of the F3 PPA.
The Bidder shall include in its scope all the systems required for the provision of the
gas pressure required by its firing equipment (e.g. gas heaters, reducing station, gas
compressors) whereby the possible Gas supply pressure range at the inteliacc point is
to be considered.
Bidder's design of the Gas system shall provide redundancy configuration of major
components so that in case of outage of one (I) component of the Gas system the
plant can be operated at full load with the remaining Gas supply facilities. i.e. for gas
reducing station minimum two (2) trains are to be provided.
For the design and operation of the fuel Gas system. the following main constraints
• The fuel Gas system shall comply with the applicable standards like EN and API,
as far as applicable.
• All the equipment shall be fitted with isolating valves to pennit repair and
• All isolating valves shall be ball type with double block and bleed function.
• One Emergency shut-down (ESD) valve shall be used down-stream the Gas
delivery point (IP-2) to allow the entire Gas supply to the plant to be isolated in
the event of an emergency.
• ESD valves shal I be "fire-safe" in accordance with APl-607 or BS-5 146 and of
anti-static design in accordance with BS-5351.
• The fuel gas system shall be designed to suit the fuel change-over requirements of
the GTs specified in Section 4.2.5. l of Part II.A (General Technical
Specifications) of the RFP.
• Sufficient pennanent installed valved connections and vents shall be provided to
pennit the gas system to be purged with inert gas.
• All butt welds shall be subject to I 00% radiography test and all other welds shall
• The maximum flow velocity for piping and valve dimensioning shall not be
higher than 25 mis.
• Buried gas pipes shall be adequately protected and insulated against the
aggressive e nvironment in which they are fou nd.
4.2.5.3 Fuel Oil
Diesel oil shall be used as Back-up Fuel. The Back-up Fuel composition is defi ned in
chapter 4.1.1.
6354A32/FICHT-21691066-,•4 II.A - 87
Fujairah F3 Project General Technical Specifications
It will be the F3 Project Company' s responsibility to fully functional Back-up Fuel

system and to ensure sufficient storage of Back-up Fuel for operation of the F3 Plant
as set forth in the draft F3 PPA of Part V (Draft Agreements) of the RFP. Operation
with Back-up Fuel will be permissible only in the circumstances set forth in
Section 7.2 of the draft F3 PPA of Part V (Draft Agreements) of the RFP.
Back-up Fuel shall be provided from the F2 Back-up Fuel Storage Facility via the F3
Back-up Fuel Transfer Facility being part of the F3 Plant into the F3 Site.
The storage capacity of the F3 intermediate Back-up Fuel tank located at the F3 Site
shall be sufficient to allow a continuous operation of the F3 Plant at full power
generation at RSC for 12 hours. The following pumps shall be connected to the
intermediate Back-up Fuel tank:
• 2 x I 00% forwarding pumps for the gas turbines including inlet filters
• 2 x 100 % forwarding pumps including inlet filters for emergency diesel
generators, black start facility and fire fighting pumps
A slop oil tank shall be provided to enable draining of all piping net\vork.
4.2.6 Compressed Air Systems
Compressed air systems for instrument air and for service air shall be provided and
designed according to the EPC Contractor's standard practice. The redundancy
requirements according to Section 4.1.3 of this Part II.A (General Technical
Specifications) of the RFP shall be considered.
Instrument air systems shall be provided preferably as separate systems for each
Group and for common plant consumers. In case of providing one (I) Group only,
the compressed air system shall be designed with a common ring system with
suitable sectionalizing valves for redundancy purposes to avoid a shutdown of a
Power Unit. Each system shall be equipped with stand-by compressors, receivers,
dryers, coolers, etc.
The service air system can be designed as common system for the entire F3 Plant
however shall include stand-by units, such as for compressors, coolers, receivers, etc.
Piping material shall be galvanized carbon steel.
A detailed description of the systems including flow diagrams shall be provided with
the Bid.
4.2.7 Seawater Supply System
The sea water shall be filtered by bar screens and travelling band screens.
The screening trains shall be designed so that after an outage of one ( 1) train the
maximum sea water demand of the entire F3 Plant can be met even at most
unfavorable conditions regarding sea water level, pollution, clogging of screening
6354A32/FICHT-21691066-v4 II.A-88
Power Plant
5 SUPPLIER’S TECHNICAL PROPOSAL DOCUMENT

- SUPPLIER : SAMIL

Tab Title: Proposal No.:
FUJAIRAH F3 INDEPENDENT POWER PLANT SI-M0399-SCT
COVER SHEET
Client: EWEC & Marubeni Revision: 4 Doc. Class: 1
Doc. Type: PID Package: M Discipline: INS Status: IFP Date: 02 Sep 2020
Customer Job. No.: Page(s) of this section: 1 / 4
Document Title:
TECHNICAL PROPOSAL DOCUMENT FOR

FUJAIRAH F3 INDEPENDENT POWER PLANT PROJECT
Company:
PMC: Superintending Officer:
Customer Comments:
Document Review: Remarks(Comments):
□ Approved without Comments
□ Approved with Comments
□ Disapproved FOR PROPOSAL

Sep.02.2020 Rev. 4
□ For Information Only SAMIL INDUSTRY
Date: Commented by:
Name
Sign
EPC: Proposal By:
Samsung Engineering & Construction (SCT) SAMIL Industry Co., Ltd.
4 IFP 19 Aug 2020 Issued for Proposal H.M LEE J.K SUNG H.J KIM
1 IFP 02 Jul 2020 Issued for Proposal H.M LEE J.K SUNG H.J KIM
0 IFP 09 Jun 2020 Issued for Proposal H.M LEE J.K SUNG H.J KIM
Checked Approved Company
Rev. Status Date Description Issued by
by by Approval
Notes:
This document is the property of SAMIL INDUSTRY, It must not be stored, reproduced or disclosed to others without written authorization from SAMIL INDUSTRY
PROJECT: FUJAIRAH F3 INDEPENDENT POWER PLANT PROJECT Total Pages :
COVER SHEET
REVISION DETAIL TABULATION
Date Page Revision Revision Details
09 Jun. 2020 Rev. 0 Issue for Technical Proposal Document.
02 Jul. 2020 Rev. 1 Issue for Revised Technical Proposal Document.
13 Aug. 2020 Rev. 2 Issue for Revised Technical Proposal Document.
19 Aug. 2020 Rev. 3 Issue for Revised Technical Proposal Document.
02 Sep. 2020 Rev. 4 Issue for Revised Technical Proposal Document.
Notes:
COVER SHEET
COMMENTS-RESPONSE SHEET
Document Company / EPC Contractor / Vendor
No. Initial Remarks
& Page Ref. Comments Response
Notes:
COVER SHEET
VENDER PRINT INDEX

(TABLE OF CONTENTS)
Date Size Cat. Document Title Purpose Status Rev.
1.0.1. Introduction 0
1.0.
09 Jun. 2020 A4 1.0.2. Contact Point IFP 0
Introduction
1.0.3. Project Organization 0
2.0.1. Design Basis 4

2.0.2. Scope of Work 3
2.0. 2.0.3. Sizing Calculation 2
02 Sep. 2020 A4 IFP
Design 2.0.4. System Description 4
2.0.5. Pressure Drop Calculation 3
2.0.6. Sub-Vendor List 2
3.0.1. P&IDs & Sampling Drawing 3

3.0.2. General Arrangement Drawing 1
3.0.3. Panel Layout Drawing 2
3.0.4. Instrument List (BOM) 4
3.0.
02 Sep. 2020 A4 3.0.5. Data Sheet IFP 4
Engineering
3.0.6. Spare Part List 3
3.0.7. Special Tool List 0
3.0.8. Deviation & Clarification Sheet 0
3.0.9. Inspection Test Plan 0
4.0.
02 Jul. 2020 A4 4.0.0. Catalogue IFP 1
Catalogue
Notes:
Vendor instruction Abbreviation :

1. This index shall be updated and submitted at the same time of each R For review
submittal of vendor drawing and data. I For information
P For proposal
A For Approval
F For final,
FC For Construction
AS As Built
H.M LEE J.K SUNG H.J KIM Issue for Proposal 02 Sep 2020 4
H.M LEE J.K SUNG H.J KIM Issue for Proposal 19 Aug 2020 3
H.M LEE J.K SUNG H.J KIM Issue for Proposal 02 Jul 2020 1
H.M LEE J.K SUNG H.J KIM Issue for Proposal 09 Jun 2020 0
ISSUED CHECKED APPROVED DESCRIPTION DATE REV.
1.0. INTRODUCTION
Doc. Type: PID Package: M Discipline: INS Status: IFP Date: 09 Jun 2020
PROJECT :
1.0. INTRODUCTION
Document Review
(A) Approved without Comments
(B) Approved with Comments
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
(D) For Information Only
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Jun.09.2020 Rev. 0
SAMIL INDUSTRY
ISSUED CHECKED APPROVED DESCRIPTION DATE REV
1.0. INTRODUCTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
No. Sub Title Page Remark
1.0.1. Introduction
1.0.2. Contact Point
1.0.3. Project Organization
Notes:
1.0. INTRODUCTION
1.0.1. INTRODUCTION
SAMIL INDUSTRY CO., LTD. (herein after SAMIL) is pleased to present our offer for Flow Metering
System for FUJAIRAH F3 INDEPENDENT POWER PLANT PROJECT.
Since SAMIL was established in 1979, we are a leading Level gauge, Sight glasses and Flow elements
manufacturer and also serving to famous company such as Power generating, Gas transmission,
Petroleum refining & Chemical processing companies.
In line with the goal for Enterprise Technology Solutions, SAMIL also provides Process Solutions and
System Integration Services.
To enhance our capabilities still further and include the Liquid and Gas Industries, SAMIL is extending
this experience and expertise in measurement, regulation, project management and construction to
serve the Liquid and Gas Industry by providing excellent solutions and support to the customers.
We take this opportunity to thank you for giving us a chance to participate in the referred project by
submitting our proposal against the RFQ as referred in the cover sheet.
You are one of our valued customers and we are committed to offer our best services for
implementation of the various projects being undertaken by you in this region.
SAMIL specialize in the design and build of metering systems for both liquid and gas. During the past
decades we have consistently grown and now compete internationally throughout the world. This
requires us to be innovative commercially, economically and technically.
One of the main goals of our company is to improve customer satisfaction. In order to revitalize this
performance, all of we will make a total commitment to provide better quality goods for your needs.
SAMIL always aims to offer our clients the “best” solution. This usually means the most economical
solution for the specified system in terms of capital cost, but we always endeavor to tailor our offers to
best satisfy the clients stated needs.
Over the years we have lead our industry in introducing new technologies which offer real benefits to
our clients and encouraging new entrants into the market.
“Our dedication to accurate and reliable

measurement & control solutions continues to add
Customer’s added value”
1.0.2. Contact Point
Technical & Commercial
Mr. Ho Jin, Kim - Head of MCS Division / Managing Director

Tel. +82(70) 4648 3160
Mobile. +82(10) 5388 5810
Mail Admin.MCS@SAMILind.co.kr
Address (#44B-12L,13L,16L) (Nonhyun-Dong) 310, Namdong-Daero, Namdong-Gu,
Incheon, Korea (Zip. 405-848)
1.0. INTRODUCTION
1.0.3. Project Organization
Client
EPC Contractor
EPC Contractor
Business Development
Local Agent
& Coordination
Quality
Project Engineering Fabrication Procurement HSE Logistics
Assurance
Manager Manager Manager Manager Manager Manager
Manager
Project Instrument Welding QA

Buyer
Engineer Engineer Part Engineer
Inspection
Cost Mechanical Assembly
Expeditor & Test
Engineer Engineer & Test
Engineer
Project
Electrical Painting
Schedule
Engineer Part
Engineer
Document MSC
Control Engineer
Test &
Comm.
Engineer
CAD
Operator
2.0. DESIGN
PROJECT :
2.0. DESIGN
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Jun.09.2020 Rev. 0
SAMIL INDUSTRY
2.0. DESIGN
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.0.1. Design Basis
2.0.2. Scope of Work
2.0.3. Sizing Calculation Sheet
2.0.4. System Description
Notes:
2.0.1. DESIGN BASIS

PROJECT :
2.0.1. DESIGN BASIS
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Sep.02.2020 Rev. 4
SAMIL INDUSTRY
2.0.1. DESIGN BASIS

DESIGN BASIS Rev.
1 Tag No. To be updated

2 Service Custody for Main Fuel Gas Metering
GENERAL
3 Type of Flow Meter Ultrasonic Flowmeter

4 Meter Run Configuration 2 x 100% (Z-Configuration)
5 Line Schedule SCH. 60
6 Piping Class / Flange Rating FB2 / ASME 600# RF
7 Fluid Fuel Gas
SERVICE CONDITIONS
8 Flow Rate 3.6 / 108 / 122 Sm3/s

9 Operating Pressure Min / Nor / Max 25 / 50 / 59 barg
10 Operating Temperature 5 / 46 / 60 °C
11 Design Pressure 64 barg
12 Design Temperature 65 °C
13 Density -
14 Viscosity -
15 Molecular Weight -
16 Area Classification Zone 2
PROTECTION
17 Certification Requirement Eex ‘d’ & ‘e’

SAFETY
18 Ingress Protection Min. IP 65

19 Heat Tracing N/A
20 Insulation N/A
AGA Report No. 9 – Measurement of Gas by
21 Flow Measurement
STANDARD
Multipath Ultrasonic Meters

22 Programmable Logic Controller N/A
23 Operating Condition for Process ANSI/ISA 571-04-1985, IEC 654 Part 1 & 2
24 General Instrumentation ISA
25 Design Code: Piping / Structural ASME B31.1 Power Piping
STANDARDS
CODES&
26 Corrosion Allowance 1.6 mm

PIPING
27 Piping Material A106 Gr. B

28 NACE Requirement N/A
29 Material Certification Yes
30 Pressure Test Hydrostatic
31 NDT Requirement Yes
TESTINGS
32 Hardness Test N/A

33 PWHT N/A
34 Impact Test (Charpy) N/A
35 Positive Material Identification (PMI) N/A
36 Skid Leak Test Yes
Notes
2.0.1. DESIGN BASIS

DESIGN BASIS Rev.

2 Service Upstream of Intermediate F/O Tank
GENERAL
3 Type of Flow Meter Coriolis Flowmeter

4 Meter Run Configuration 2 x 100%
6 Piping Class / Flange Rating HB2 / ASME 150# RF
7 Fluid Fuel Oil
SERVICE CONDITIONS
8 Flow Rate - / 316 / 325.4 t/h

9 Operating Pressure Min / Nor / Max 0 / 3.5 / 6 barg
13 Density (Min / Max) 820 / 845 kg/m3
14 Viscosity (Min / Max) 1.64 / 3.8 cP
PROTECTION

SAFETY

19 Heat Tracing N/A
20 Insulation N/A
API MPMS 5.6 – Measurement of Liquid
21 Flow Measurement
STANDARD
Hydrocarbons by Coriolis Meters

STANDARDS
CODES&

PIPING

TESTINGS

33 PWHT N/A
Notes
2.0.1. DESIGN BASIS

DESIGN BASIS Rev.

2 Service F/O Supply to #11 GT Fuel Oil Skid
GENERAL
3 Type of Flow Meter Coriolis Flowmeter

4 Meter Run Configuration 1 x 100% w/By-Pass Line (6 Sets)
6 Piping Class / Flange Rating HB2 / ASME 150# RF
7 Fluid Fuel Oil
SERVICE CONDITIONS
8 Flow Rate - / 125.5 / 130 t/h

PROTECTION

SAFETY

19 Heat Tracing N/A
20 Insulation N/A
API MPMS 5.6 – Measurement of Liquid
21 Flow Measurement
STANDARD
Hydrocarbons by Coriolis Meters

STANDARDS
CODES&

PIPING

TESTINGS

33 PWHT N/A
Notes
2.0.2. SCOPE OF WORK

Doc. Type: PID Package: M Discipline: INS Status: IFP Date: 19 Aug 2020
PROJECT :
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Aug.19.2020 Rev. 3
SAMIL INDUSTRY

SCOPE OF WORK
1. INTRODUCTION
The document provides the general specification for the Custody Metering System.
Custody Metering System will include all the equipment specified in the Customer
Specification, attached P&ID(s), as well as Piping, Instruments, Valves, Control Devices and
other accessories as to form a complete and functional unit, including the following items as
minimum.
The main items included in Vendor scope of supply are:
- Gas Ultrasonic Flowmeter, Coriolis Flowmeter

- Air Eliminator for Liquid Metering System
- Pressure & Temperature Instruments (Transmitter & Gauge)
- Manual Operated Ball Valve w/Limit Switch (24” Ball Valve) & Manual Gate Valve
- Vent, Drain and Nozzle Valve
- Gas Chromatograph & H2S Analyzer
- 3-Side Shelter w/Sampling System & Sample Probe
- Manual Gas Sampler
- Laptop with Software (Special Tool)
- Flow Computer with Metering Panel
- Supervisory Computer System (=HMI System)
- All Network accessories to connect Flow Computers to the network
- All Field Instruments pre-wired to skid mounted JB
- Commissioning spares as required
- List of 2-years maintenance spares
- Inspection & testing
- Start-up/commissioning
- F.A.T. / S.A.T.
- Training
- As Built documentation
Participating in various meeting such as Kick of meeting, Design review, HAZOP & review
meeting at Client or Client nominated consultant office.
2. ENGINEERING SERVICES
Supply engineering services, which shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the
following:
Resolving engineering queries relating to all equipment and components.

Ensuring that all equipment and components meet the requirement of this Specification and
cited specifications, standards and codes.
Performing all calculations, analyses, etc. required for a complete system.
Functional check of each hardwired I/O points and also interface signals with Client PLC
system.
Supervise the Site construction contractor during laying & termination of cables from skid
mounted vendor JB's to Local Control Panel.
Providing all documentation, drawings, loads, utility consumption list, calculations, analyses,
etc. for Client's review and approval.

SCOPE OF WORK
3. EXTENT OF INTEGRATION & LIASONING
- FUJAIRAH F3 Independent Power Plant Project unit shall perform various functions and run
applications as detailed & indicated in the specifications.
- Integration of Control Panel to Supervisory computer.
- Integration of Supervisory computer to Client DCS or PLC system.
- Liaison with Client automation team and site construction team for seamless integration of
package.
- On-site support to Client personnel during initial operations.
4. GUARANTEE
The equipment shall perform satisfactorily under the operating conditions specified in this
requisition and shall be fit for the purpose intended. Vendor will guarantee the equipment as
follows:
- Process design as specified in process data sheet attached with this requisition.
- Mechanical design, structural integrity, material and workmanship.
- If any defect is observed during the guarantee period, vendor will make all necessary
alteration, repair or replacement free of charge.
Guarantee period shall be 18 months from the date of delivery of equipment to site or 12
months from the date of commissioning of equipment whichever is earlier.
5. DELIVERY
Vendor's scope of supply will include Manufacturing and supply of equipment. (FOB KOREA)
6. CODES and STANDARDS
Relevant standards of OIML, API, ANSI, ASME, IEC, ISO, if there is any conflict of statements
among the standards, Customer Specification and rule.
7. PROJECT DOCUMENTS
Relevant Project Documents and P&IDs, General Assembly Drawing.
8. GENERAL
- The Custody Metering Package proposed are for the Fuel Oil & Gas.
- The Custody Metering Skids will be assembled as a skid and will include all the equipment
piping, valves, instrumentation and controls necessary for operation. The skids will be
suitable for installation in the site area.
- All the piping and tubing connection for interfacing with customer piping will be brought to
the skid edge and terminated with appropriate connections.
- All the cabling/wring connection for interfacing with customer cables will be terminated to the
junction boxes.

SCOPE OF WORK
9. STRUCTUAL MATERIAL
The skids will be installed on the skid frame. The pipes will be suitably supported by the
structure. The equipment and instruments will be installed on the skid bases for the ease of
access. The structure material will be as per Customer specification or equal.
10. METERING SKID
- Each skid(s) will be supplied as per the enclosed P&ID’s & GA Drawing.
- The rail car loading skid will be strict in compliance with
AGA Report No.9 – Measurement of Gas by Multipath Ultrasonic Meter
API MPMS 5.6 – Measurement of Liquid Hydrocarbons by Coriolis Meters
- As per Project Specification, Flow is considered in one direction.
11. SCOPE of DOCUMENT
- Design documents like GA drawing, Structure drawing, etc. as specified in the Document
Issue Schedule and agreed upon.
- Engineering documents like P&ID drawing, Loop schematic, Hookup drawing, Data sheets,
Sizing calculations (if applicable), etc. as specified in the Document Issue Schedule and
agreed upon.
- Fabrication documents like WPS/PQR, NDT procedure, Hydro-static test procedure and
Painting & Blasting procedure, etc. as specified in the Document Issue Schedule and
agreed upon.
- Quality control documents like Inspection and Test Plan, Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
manual, etc. as specified in the Document Issue Schedule and agreed upon.
- Submission of design, engineering, fabrications and quality control documents for
approval/review as specified in the Document Issue Schedule and agreed upon.
- Generation of “As Built” documents
- Manufacturer’s Data Records including material certificates (as applicable), Factory
Test/Calibration certificates (as applicable), Operation and Maintenance manuals (as
applicable), etc. as specified in the Document Issue Schedule and agreed upon.
12. EXCLUSION from SCOPE of THIS PROPOSAL
- Process piping beyond Skid inlet and outlet connection

- UPS & Non-UPS Power Supply to Metering panel including power supply cables.
- Area lighting.
- Multi-pair / multi-core Instrument cabling between metering skid JB's to Metering panel
mounted Flow computers and supervisory computer. However, Vendor shall provide cable
schedule, cable block diagram & termination wiring details for the same.
- Lugs and Glands of the cable supplied by others.
- Interconnection of Earthing bosses & Earth bar (on skid) to plant grid earth conductor.
- Site erection and Commissioning work.
2.0.3. SIZING CALCULATION SHEET

PROJECT :
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Sep.02.2020 Rev. 2
SAMIL INDUSTRY

01) Custody for Main Fuel Gas Metering – Gas Ultrasonic Flowmeter (24” ASME 600# RF)

02) Upstream of Intermediate F/O Tank – Coriolis Flowmeter (8” ASME 150# RF)

03) F/O Supply to #11 GT Fuel Oil Skid – Coriolis Flowmeter (6” ASME 150# RF)
2.0.4. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

PROJECT :
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Sep.02.2020 Rev. 4
SAMIL INDUSTRY

1. Introduction
The proposed custody transfer metering system will consist of the following major components:
Metering System – Quantity: 8 Sets
• 2 x 100%, 24” ASME 600# Ultrasonic Flowmeter Streams  1 Set

• 2 x 100%, 8” ASME 150# Coriolis Flowmeter Streams  1 Set
• 1 x 100%, 6” ASME 150# Coriolis Flowmeter Streams  6 Sets
 Custody for Main Fuel Gas Metering – Design Parameters
Fluid : Fuel Gas Gas

Flow rate : 3.6 / 108 / 122 Sm3/s
Design Flowrate : 135 Sm3/s
Operating Pressure : 25 / 50 / 59 barg
Design Pressure : 64 barg
Operating Temperature : 5 / 46 / 60 °C
Design Temperature : 64 °C
USM Velocity : 24.43 m/s
Pipe Velocity : Approx. 22.3 m/s
Pipe Size : 24”
Outside Diameter : 610 mm
SCH. : 60
W.T : 24.61 mm
 Upstream of Intermediate F/O Tank – Design Parameters
Fluid : Fuel Oil Liquid

Flow rate : - / 316 / 325.4 t/h
Design Flowrate : 120 kg/s
Operating Pressure : 0 / 3.5 / 6 barg
CM Velocity : 5.792 @ 324 t/h m/s
Pipe Velocity : 3.3 m/s
Pipe Size : 8”
Outside Diameter : 219.1 mm
SCH. : 20
W.T : 6.35 mm

 F/O Supply to #11 GT Fuel Oil Skid – Design Parameters
Fluid : Fuel Oil Liquid

Flow rate : - / 125.5 / 130 t/h
Design Flowrate : 50 kg/s
Operating Pressure : 0 / 5.3 / 7 barg
CM Velocity : 6.177 @ 139.75 t/h m/s
Pipe Velocity : 2 m/s
Pipe Size : 6”
Outside Diameter : 168.3 mm
SCH. : 40
W.T : 7.11 mm
2. General Specific Applicable Metering Standards:

• API MPMS Chapter 5 Section 1 – General Considerations for Measurement by Meters.
• API MPMS Chapter 5 Section 6 – Measurement of Liquid Hydrocarbons by Coriolis Meters
• AGA Report No. 9 – Measurement of Gas by Multipath Ultrasonic Meters
• ISO 5168 Measurement of Fluid Flow - Estimation of Uncertainty of a Flow Rate Measurement.
3. Sizing of Metering Systems

Based on the process data detailed above, we propose to use the configurations as detailed in P&ID,
General Assembly Drawing and Data Sheet. Flow meter streams for package system.
We had sized the Ultrasonic & Coriolis Flowmeter to handle the maximum flow capacity based on flow
volume & velocity at the worst case condition.
The proposed design is 2 x 100% & 1 x 100% configuration for fuel gas & oil metering system. Temperature–
Pressure instruments will be provided with the pipe work. Full supportive calculations where applicable will be
presented for the project in accordance with the agreed vendor documents requirements schedule.
4. Mechanical Design and Fabrication

Fuel Gas & Oil metering system consists of Two (2) working stream mounted on skid bases. The proposed
general arrangement is for the metering to be mounted on skid base frames c/w pipe supports etc.

5. General
Piping for process and vent/drain connections will generally terminate at the skid edges. Instrument vents
and drains where the amount of fluid to be vented is small will terminate adjacent to the instrument, large loss
vents/drains will be piped to closed headers. Screwed vent/drain connections will be fitted with valves and
flanged vent/drain connections with blinds.
As an option we will be pleased to offer vents piped to open/closed vent headers for sour service or to meet
specific project requirements. In this instance instrument tubing will be used downstream of the vent isolation
valve.
Walkways, access ladders and handrails (where applicable) will be installed in accordance with applicable
standards and regulations to ensure safe access to equipment, if required.
Access shall be provided for onsite inspection, calibration, operation and maintenance for all major items of
equipment and instrumentation on the package. In the case of low maintenance items, this may be by
temporary access ladder as is normal practice. Flange breaks will be provided where necessary to facilitate
removal of the meters for periodic inspection or replacement. Due to the limited space available, it is
assumed that maintenance lifting facilities will be supplied by others on a temporary basis.
6. Main Equipment List

Custody for Main Fuel Gas Metering
• Inlet & Outlet Connections: 24" ASME 600# RF
• Meter Stream Size: 24" ASME 600# (2 x 100%, Z-Configuration)
No. Quantity Item Description

1 2 ea Gas Ultrasonic Flowmeter 24” ASME 600# RF
24” ASME 600# RF
2 5 ea Manual Operated Ball Valve w/Limit Switch
(Top entry, Trunnion type, DBB)
3 2 ea Pressure Transmitter w/DBB Function Block V/V 1” ASME 600# RF, 4~20 mA
4 2 ea Temp. Transmitter w/Thermo-Well 1 1/2” ASME 600# RF, 4~20 mA
5 2 ea Pressure Gauge w/DBB Function Block V/V 1” ASME 600# RF
6 2 ea Temp. Gauge w/Thermo-Well 1 1/2” ASME 600# RF
7 1 Lot Vent, Drain & Nozzle Valve Manual Ball Valve (1” & 2” ASME 600# RF)
8 1 Lot Junction Box Analog & Digital J.B
9 2 ea Gas Chromatograph Emerson, ABB, Siemens or Equivalent
10 1 ea H2S Analyzer AMETEK, E+H or Equivalent
11 1 Lot Sampling System for Analyzer SAMIL
12 1 Lot Manual Gas Sampler SAMIL
13 1 Lot 3-Side Shelter SAMIL, 5.000 w x 2.400 d x 2.800 h mm
14 2 ea Flow Computer Emerson, OMNI or Thermo-Fisher
15 1 Face Metering Panel RITTAL, 800 x 800 x 2,200 mm
16 1 Set Supervisory Computer System (=HMI System) 17” Touch Screen

Upstream of Intermediate F/O Tank

• Meter Stream Size: 8" ASME 150# (2 x 100%)

1 2 ea Coriolis Flowmeter 8” ASME 150# RF (10” Body & 8” Flange)
2 2 ea Air Eliminator 8” ASME 150# RF
3 4 ea Manual Operated Gate Valve 8” ASME 150# RF
4 2 ea Pressure Transmitter w/Diaphragm seal 1/2” NPT, 4~20 mA
6 1 Lot Vent, Drain & Nozzle Valve Manual Gate Valve
7 1 Lot Drip Tray SAMIL
8 1 Lot Junction Box Power, Analog & Digital J.B
Fuel Oil Settlement Metering Skid for GT Unit

• Meter Stream Size: 6" ASME 150# (1 x 100% w/By-Pass Line, 2 Streams)
Note. The quantity is calculated one metering skid. (Required 3 sets of metering skid, Total 6 [six] skids.)

1 2 ea Coriolis Flowmeter 6” ASME 150# RF
2 2 ea Air Eliminator 6” ASME 150# RF
3 8 ea Manual Operated Gate Valve 6” ASME 150# RF
4 2 ea Pressure Transmitter w/Diaphragm seal 1/2” NPT, 4~20 mA
6 1 Lot Vent, Drain & Nozzle Valve Manual Gate Valve
7 1 Lot Drip Tray SAMIL
8 1 Lot Junction Box Power, Analog & Power JB
9 2 ea Flow Computer EMERSON, OMNI or THERMO-FISHER
10 1 Face Metering Panel RITTAL, 800 x 800 x 2,200 mm
11 1 Set Supervisory Computer System (=HMI System) 17” Touch Screen
7. FLOWMETER
7.1. Type
We offer Ultrasonic & Coriolis Flowmeters manufactured by KROHNE or Equivalent. Ultrasonic & Coriolis
Flowmeters is offered to duty stream flow meters. Flowmeters are sized as per process parameters.
7.2. Linearity (Accuracy): ± 0.1%
7.3. Manufacturer’s standard calibration (Traceable to International Standards) is included in our base proposal.
The test may be witnessed by the client and/or client’s representatives (at extra cost) if so required. We have
included calibration on a similar fluid whose composition and quality is similar to that being measured to
confirm maximum accuracy for flowmeters.

8. PRESSURE INSTRUMENTS
8.1. Isolation
All pressure instruments shall be isolated from the process lines by pipe spec. block valve sunless
specifically noted otherwise. An instrument valve manifold (2V, 3V or 5V as detailed) shall be fitted to each
pressure instrument. Valve manifolds shall be close pattern wherever practicable.
DBB Function Block Valve for Gas Application, Diaphragm Seal for Liquid Application
8.2. Pressure Transmitters
Pressure transmitters will be ‘Smart’ type electronics capacitance strain-gauge type. Standard High Side Left,
Low Side Right / Std Head Orientation. Output shall be 4-20mA HART Protocol.
8.3. Pressure Indicators
Solid front safety pattern cylindrical case with blow out at the back, Connection: 1/2NPT (M), Lower.
Dial size: 100mm, Accuracy: ±1.0% of F.S.
9. TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENTS
9.1. Thermo-wells
Thermo-wells gauges will be installed on meter run. Thermo-wells, and all process line mounted temperature
instrumentation will be mounted in flanged wells constructed in accordance with the enquiry specification.
The outside diameter of the thermo-well shall be plain and machined to manufacturer’s standard design,
unless noted elsewhere in this document. The design of thermo-wells using collars is not included in this
proposal. It includes the following:
• Process Connection: 1 1/2”

• Material: Alloy 825 or 316/316L
• Construction Type: Drilled bar tapered
• Insertion Length U: Refer to Instrument Data Sheet
9.2. Temperature Transmitters

Temperature transmitters will be installed on meter run. It includes the following:
“Smart” Temperature Transmitter
• Transmitter Housing Type: Field Mount Housing (Dual-Compartment)

• Communications Protocol: 4~20mA with Digital Signal based on HART protocol
• Measurement Type: Dual Sensor Input
• Certifications: ATEX flameproof approval
• Meter: LCD display
9.3. NDT/ NDE AND CERTIFICATION

(1) Pipe work NDE/NDT - Main Process Lines
• 100% Visual all welds
• Full Radiography butt welds

DPI/MPI for fillet and socket welds - frequency as for radiography
• 100% Hydro-test

(2) Pipe work NDE/NDT - Drains and Vents

Drains & Vents shall be as for main process lines to first process block valve. Downstream of first process
block valve shall be 5%. Hydro-test will only be performed on closed drains & vents. Where radiography is
impracticable MPI or UT or DPE will be substituted. Radiographic acceptance criteria (ASME B31.3) will be
that considered for ‘Normal Service’.
(3) NDE – Valves
As required by national standards
(4) NDE – Base frame
• 100% Visual all welds
• 100% MPI on lifting lugs & pad eyes
• 10% MPI on other structural and critical weld

(5) Material Certification
Certification for process wetted pressure containing materials will be to BSEN 10204 type 3.1.BS EN 10204
(DIN 50049). 3.1 means tests by test house independent to production with certificate issued by
manufacturer’s inspector.
Type 2.2 certification will be supplied for Bolting on pipe work.
All other materials will be traceable through normal SAMIL (or sub-supplier) company QA procedures to a
specified project only as 2.1 certificate of conformity. (e.g. for Bolting on valves and equipment, Instrument
class filters, Density meters, Samplers, Analyzers, Switches and Transmitters (DPS, PT, TE), Pressure
gauges, Pressure switches, Pneumatic Instruments, Instrument Tubing and Fittings, as applicable)
Non-Certified for miscellaneous bulk items (support brackets, cables, cable trays, etc.)
9.4. BASE FRAMES

The package base frames will be a simple open-frame unit fabricated from standard steel sections.
Materials of construction for the base frame will be to ASTM standards. The grades of structural steel are
given below:
• Main Beams, Lifting Beams, Secondary Steelwork

(Cross Members, Brace Supports for Piping & Equipment): ASTM A36
• Ladders & Handrails: ASTM A36
• Lifting Pad Eyes: BS EN10025-S355 J2 + NOR S275J0

The design criteria for the base frame are defined in AISC “Manual of Steel Construction Allowable Stress
Design 9th Edition”. Qualified welding procedures and Welding Procedure Qualification Records verified by
IIA (Independent Inspection Authority) will be submitted and approved before the start off fabrication welding
for critical welds as agreed at order placement. All approved welding procedures will be in accordance with
ASME IX and/or AWS D1.1.
NDE
• 100% Visual all welds.
• 100% PT on lifting lugs & pad eyes.

10. ELECTRICS & INSTRUMENTATION

10.1. Instrument Materials
Wetted instrument materials shall be 316 stainless steel unless specified otherwise. Some proprietary
manufacture instrumentation of proven design, may be unavailable or impracticable in the requested
materials, and in these cases we offer the manufacturer’s standard. In particular, this may well also apply to
the external instrument housing materials, which will be coated or plated where this is necessary to meet the
enquiry specifications.
Instrument first isolation valves on process lines will be in accordance with the pipe spec impulse line tubing -
316 stainless steel with screwed double ferrule compression fittings. We include for GRP (or steel)
sunshades for transmitters where required. Electrical Installation & Cabling.
All skid mounted instrumentation shall be wired to junction boxes at agreed locations on the edge of the skid.
• Cabling for Flowmeter signals, which will be terminated in the skid mounted.
Where conduit is stipulated it will be supplied as follows:
Conduits will be used for all instrument cables between the instruments and respective Junction boxes. All
conduits shall be Hot-dip galvanized as per NEMA RN 1, threaded, rigid steel per ANSI C80.1. All Flexible
conduits used in non-hazardous or Class 1, Division 2 and Zone 2 classified areas will be liquid-tight flexible
metal type. Explosion-proof certified flexible couplings will be used in Class I, Division 1 and Zone 1
hazardous locations.
10.2. Equipment Protection Ratings

All electrical equipment other than that mounted in designated safe areas (e.g. control room) will be certified
by the appropriate authority as suitable for:
• EEx “d” & “e” shall be considered.
• Environment protection: Minimum IP 65

The certifying authority will generally be BASEEFA/CENELEC, ATEX, CSA or FM.
11. Technical Proposal – Clarifications

(1) Training will be offered at SAMIL Standard per diem rates
(2) All site work / services will be offered at SAMIL Standard per diem rates.
12. OPTIONS & ALTERNATIVES

12.1. Options
We have offered as below list.
(1) Training will be offered at SAMIL Standard per diem rates.
(2) All site work/services will be offered at SAMIL Standard per diem rates.

13. QUALIFICATIONS & CLARIFICATIONS

13.1. General
This technical proposal describes the flow metering equipment offered by SAMIL to meet the requirements of
the customer’s inquiry documents. The proposal is based upon the project specifications, codes and
standards as received in the enquiry package. Where the named specifications include reference to sub-
specifications, which have not been sent to SAMIL, those sub-specifications are not deemed to form part of
this quotation.
13.2. Functional Specification
Metering Skid
(1) We assume that the fluid will be supplied ‘clean’ i.e. free of contaminants.
(2) Flowmeters are sized to handle the maximum flow capacity based on flow volume & velocity.
(3) Redundancy: Please note that we have quoted Pressure & Temperature instruments in each of the streams
as per the P&ID.
(4) Approved Vendor List:
For this proposal, suppliers have been selected from the client’s Recommended Vendor’s list provided as a
part of Project Specifications. For equipment which are not referenced on the list, these have been selected
by SAMIL from the SAMIL list of approved suppliers.
※ SAMIL VENDOR LIST
No. EQUIPEMNT MANUFACTURER

FLOWMETER
1 KROHNE
(ULTRASONIC & CORIOLIS)
WIKA
2 PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE GAUGE NAGANO
WISE
3 PRESSURE & TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER SIEMENS
NEWAY
4 BALL VALVE
SAMJIN JMC
DANIEL (EMERSON)
5 FLOW COMPUTER
THERMO-FISEHR
ABB
6 GAS CHROMATOGRAPH
EMERSON
7 METERING PANEL (ENCLOSURE) RITTAL

13.3. Scope of Work

(1) Please note that all cabling within the skid limit will be supplied by SAMIL. Cabling to/from metering skid and
the control panel & DCS will be by others.
(2) Lightening Protection is not included.
(3) SAT:
SAMIL is pleased to attend or carry out SAT for Buyer as requested, but this has not been included in our
base offer. Our commercial proposal presents the day rates for this work
(4) FAT:
All fabricated pipe spools shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test in the ‘black condition’. The complete
assembled metering systems shall be subjected to a ‘system’ hydrostatic pressure test, in accordance with
procedures outlined in ASME B31.3. However, due to the fact that the metering systems will be broken down
for transportation, no assembled skid hydrostatic test will be carried out on them.
13.4. Certifying Authority Design Review
Where it is agreed that an independent third party or certifying party is to review the project design, the
drawings P&ID and General Arrangement drawings would be submitted at an agreed stage of the program: It
is assumed that under this review the Certifying Authority will undertake a design appraisal only.
In-work surveys, certification and documentation review are usually at client cost and are not included. Since
the design review would usually be required at an early stage of the program to avoid manufacturing/design
delays, these documents may necessary be of a preliminary nature.
13.5. Insulation & Heat Tracing (N/A)
Trace heating and insulation is excluded from our base offer, although the system design clearances will
allow for it to be installed after delivery. Metering systems are invariably ‘broken down’ into sections for
transportation. In order to avoid damage in transit, insulation and trace heating is usually carried out at site by
others. We confirm that the insulation is not required for Factory Acceptance Testing. Of course we would be
pleased to offer installation of insulation and trace heating of the metering system should the project team
feel it was prudent to do so at our works rather than on site.
13.6. Piping Design Code
The package(s) will be designed and manufactured in accordance with SCT’s PMS & ASME B31.3 which are
explicitly the applicable piping standard for “piping which interconnects pieces or stages within a packaged
equipment assembly”.
13.7. Painting
Refer to the SCT’s painting specification. (Annex#5. 19CN-00GEN00-P04-0004_R0_Painting Specification)
13.8. Lighting & Lifting Work at site (N/A)
Skid lighting & lifting work are not included in offer
13.9. Testing
Metering system
We will carry out functional and operational test of valves, equipment etc. (as practicable). Works FAT will
include for operational and functional testing of individual components-meters, valves, Instrumentation
equipment etc. (as practicable). The tests are not designed to recalibrate individual instruments, but to
demonstrate the functionality of the system and its operation in accordance with the project specifications
13.10. Heat Soak (N/A)
Heat soak testing is excluded in our base offer
13.11. Supervisory Computer System (=HMI System)
The complete flow computing, metering control and alarm/reporting functions of the computer equipment will
be tested by procedures to be agreed as a part of the project.

13.12. Electrical Equipment & Instrumentation

All on-skid electrical equipment shall be tested at the manufacturer’s works to their standard company
procedures, and additionally during/after package assembly to ensure electrical safety, operation and
performance where applicable
13.13. Proprietary Items
Where these items are not addressed in the client’s specifications, SAMIL shall supply proprietary items in
accordance with manufacturer’s standard
14. QUALITY ASSURANCE & CONTROL

SAMIL is a BS EN ISO 9001: 2008 accredited company. The company has a formal Quality Manual, which is
available on request to established customers. Routine Quality audits are carried out by the SAMIL Quality
Department to ensure conformance with company Standards and Procedures.
A project specific quality plan will be produced and submitted for approval four weeks after the date of the
purchase order or three weeks from the date of the project kick-off meeting unless specified otherwise.
The quality plan will list stages of design, inspection and testing and the corresponding standards,
specifications and procedures to reflect the project requirements.
15. PACKING AND PRESERVATION

15.1. General
On completion of all testing in the factory the equipment will be prepared for shipment and storage.
Equipment and instrumentation that is contracted to be supplied loose shall be packed and crated for
transport. In addition, certain instruments susceptible to transport damage shall also be removed from skid
based on packaged systems for separate packing and crating.
The following list shows typical items that would normally be removed/packed separately:
Computer & Control Systems, Test Equipment, Flow-meters, Proving sphere & tools, Thermometers and
Special Tools. The remaining instrumentation will be left on the plant will be protected for transportation and
storage.
15.2. Typical for Metering Systems
It is proposed that a vapor corrosion inhibitor (VCI) will be used to preserve all wetted parts of the equipment
to be supplied on this purchase order. The ease of application, good penetration and long life of the inhibitor
along with excellent corrosion resistance for all process wetted materials makes this preservation system well
suited to the equipment to be supplied. The procedure for VCI fogging both liquid and systems is available on
request. (If required)
All in/outlet nozzles will be blanked and sealed using plywood blanks and Denso tape.
Screwed connections will be preserved by applying antirust compound and will be sealed using plastic
closures. On completion of all testing, the system will be left with all block valves in the open position and
actuated valves in mid travel.
Instruments exposed to damage will be removed and stored separately clearly tagged and preserved using
dehydrating compounds such as silica gel and by wrapping in sealed polythene bags.
All valve control units, instruments and valve position indicators, which cannot be removed, will be protected
with 10mm plywood plate boxes and foam type cushioning where necessary.
Where electrical instrumentation and junction boxes are involved dehydrating compound will be placed in
enclosures and sealed before the protective plywood cover is fitted.

Preservation and protection of junction boxes will be carried out in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations and standard company procedures. Silica gel will be placed inside the enclosure and
access doors/openings will be sealed using Scotch tape. The enclosure will then be covered with polythene
sheet and sealed
15.3. Storage Maintenance
All removed or loose instrumentation and equipment must be stored indoors. To ensure the effectiveness of
storage/preservation procedures, regular maintenance/inspection checks are required to be carried out by
SAMIL or SAMIL’s authorized operators at the buyer’s cost. To retain full warranty cover by SAMIL, a planned
inspection/maintenance program should be agreed with the buyer at time of equipment delivery
16. MANUFACTURER’S LITERATURE

Pertinent extracts of the major equipment manufacturer’s data and literature are presented overleaf for your
information.
2.0.5. PRESSURE DROP CALCULATION

PROJECT :
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Sep.02.2020 Rev. 3
SAMIL INDUSTRY

1-1. Gas Metering Station for Straight Run (without Flow Conditioner)

1-2. Gas Metering Station for Worst Case (without Flow Conditioner)

1-3. Gas Metering Station & Z-Configuration (without Flow Conditioner)

2. Oil Unloading Metering

3. Oil Process Metering
2.0.6. SUB-VENDOR LIST

PROJECT :
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Aug.19.2020 Rev. 2
SAMIL INDUSTRY

SUB-VENDOR LIST
No. Description Manufacturer Remarks Rev
1 Gas Ultrasonic Flowmeter KROHNE

2 Coriolis Flowmeter KROHNE
3 Air Eliminator SAMIL
NAGANO
4 Pressure & Temperature Gauge HISCO
WIKA
5 Pressure & Temperature Transmitter SIEMENS
NEWAY
6 Ball Valve
SAMJIN JMC
NEWAY
KSB
7 Gate Valve
KEYSUNG METAL
THT
EMERSON
8 Flow Computer
THERMO-FISHER
EMERSON
9 Gas Chromatograph ABB
SIEMENS
10 H2S Analyzer AMETEK
11 Metering Panel RITTAL
Note.
1. Instrument maker will be discussed with SCT after project award.
3.0. ENGINEERING
PROJECT :
3.0. ENGINEERING
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Jun.09.2020 Rev. 0
SAMIL INDUSTRY
3.0. ENGINEERING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.0.1. P&IDs
3.0.2. General Arrangement Drawing
3.0.3. Panel Layout Drawing
3.0.4. Instrument List (Bill of Material)
3.0.5. Data Sheet
3.0.6. Spare Part List
3.0.7. Special Tools & Validation Equipment
3.0.8. Deviation& Clarification Sheet
3.0.9. Inspection Test Plan
Notes:
3.0.1. P&IDs
PROJECT :
3.0.1. P&IDs
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Sep.02.2020 Rev. 3
SAMIL INDUSTRY
GENERAL DESIGN BASIC
ESF
DCS OUTSTATION DESCRIPTION CONDITION
SERVICE GAS METERING SYSTEM
FLUID NATURAL GAS / GAS

METERING PANEL
TIME SYNC
FLOW RATE (MAX.) 3.6 / 108 / 122 sm3/s
DESIGN PRESSURE 64 barg
S/W HUB DESIGN TEMPERATURE 65 °C

POWER SUPPLY BY SCT
(230VAC, 1pH, 50Hz) OPERATING PRESSURE 50 barg
OPERATNG TEMPERATURE 46 °C
VISCOSITY - cP
DENSITY 0.778 kg/Sm^3
HMI SYSTEM
CONVERTER
DISTRIBUTION FLAME
MOLECULAR WEIGHT -
SF
S600 S600 CONFIGURATION 2x100% (Z-Configuration)
FIBER
NOTE
CONVERTER
17" Touch Screen
SF
1. OUT OF SCOPE
1) 1) ELECTRICAL WIRING FOR JUNCTION BOX TO FLOW CONTROL PANEL.
2) FOUNDATION
CONVERTER
DISTRIBUTION FLAME
3) DCS & WIRING FOR CONTROL PANEL TO DCS
SF
4) ESF OUTSTATION & WIRING FOR CONTROL PANEL TO ESF OUTSTATION
FIBER
2. FLOW METER INSPECTION POINT.
CONVERTER
3. LINE DESIGNATIONS
SF
FLOW LINE
SIGNAL TERMINAL BLOCK
OUT OF SCOPE LINE
OUT
AIR LINE (PNEUMATIC)
INST. SHIELD CABLE (4~20mA)
SERIAL COMMUNICATION CABLE
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
RS-485 CABLE
MODBUS TCP / IP ETHERNET LINE
POWER CABLE
FIELD
4. VALVE & INSTRUMENT SYMBOLS
BALL VALVE NEEDLE VALVE
GATE VALVE BUTTERFLY VALVE

S
GAS METERING SKID DBB BALL VALVE 3-WAY SOLENOID VALVE
CHECK VALVE
GLOBE VALVE PNEUMATIC ON-OFF VALVE
FIBER DISTRIBUTION FLAME FIBER DISTRIBUTION FLAME LINE FILTER
SINGLE PRESSURE REGULATOR
POWER SUPPLY BY SCT 5. CONNECTION POINT (CALORIE METER)

ANALOG (230VAC, 1pH, 50Hz)
SF CONVERTER SF CONVERTER SF CONVERTER SF CONVERTER PDB PANEL 6. REGULATOR RACK
JUNCTION BOX
(UPS2, Normal 1)
PCV
230 VAC
000
F1
TO. UFM
H2S ANALYZER GAS CHROMATOGRAPH GAS CHROMATOGRAPH
7. ABBREVIATIONS
SAMPLE CONDITIONING SYSTEM AI ANALOG INPUT FC FAIL CLOSE
AO ANALOG OUTPUT FO FAIL OPEN
3-SIDE ANALYZER SHELTER CSC CAR SEAL CLOSED LC LOCK CLOSED
DIGITAL JUNCTION BOX ANALOG JUNCTION BOX
CSO CAR SEAL OPEN LO LOCK OPEN
DI DIGITAL INPUT NC NORMALLY CLOSED
4~20mA(TT, AI)
4~20mA(PT, AI)
DO DIGITAL OUTPUT NO NORMALLY OPEN
PULSE x2
SF SERIAL TO FIBER
D1~D2 D3~D6
FAULT ALARM A1~A2 MANUAL
SAMPLER
INDICATOR
To. 3-Side Shelter
LIMIT S/W DI D1
RS-485 x2
PT TT PI TI
FROM. PBD PANEL 001A 001A 001A 001A Note 6 Note 6
N2 PURGE POWER (24VDC) D5
1" NPT (M)
1" 1" 1" 1"
Min.3M
1" 1" 1" 1"
FT
001A Bleed Bleed 1" 1" 1" 1"
ZOC 1" 1" ZOC 1"
1/2" 1/2"
001A 1" 1" 001C
THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF SAMSUNG C&T CORPORATION
1" 1-1/2" 1-1/2" 1" IT IS NOT TO BE COPIED OR USED IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE COMPANY.
FLOW INLET FLOW OUTLET
24" ASME 600# RF 24" ASME 600# RF
24" 10D 3D 24"
24"
ULTRASONIC FLOW METER
D4
ZOC FOR APPROVAL

001E A 14 OCT. 2020 H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED REVIEWED APPROVED

OWNER
D2 24"
A1 A2
To. 3-Side Shelter
PULSE(FT, PI) 2
OWNER'S ENGINEER
RS-485 x2
PT TT PI TI
FROM. PBD PANEL 001B 001B 001B 001B
D3 POWER (24VDC) D6 CONTRACTOR
N2 PURGE
Min.3M
1" 1" 1" 1"

FT
001B Bleed Bleed
SUPPLIER
ZOC 1" 1/2" 1/2" 1" ZOC
001B 1" 1" 001D
1" 1-1/2" 1-1/2"

PROJECT NAME
24" 10D 3D 24" FUJAIRAH F3 INDEPENDENT POWER PLANT

24"
ULTRASONIC FLOW METER DRAWING TITLE
PIPING & INSTRUMENTATION DIAGHRAM

PROJECT DWG NO. SHEET REV.
19CN-J06-P00-DGM-0001 1/3 A
PROJECT NO. REF. DRAWING NO. SCALE REF.CODE
19CN SI-M0399-01SC NONE
A3 (420 X 297 MM)

DESCRIPTION CONDITION
SERVICE BACK UP FUEL OIL UNLOADING OPERATION METER SKID
FLUID LIQUID
FLOW RATE (MAX.) - / 316 / 325.4 t/h

DESIGN PRESSURE (OIL / LIQUID) 6 barg
DESIGN TEMPERATURE (OIL / LIQUID) 60 °C
OPERATING PRESSURE (OIL / LIQUID) 0 / 3.5 / 6 barg
OPERATNG TEMPERATURE (OIL / LIQUID) 1 / 46 / 55 °C
VISCOSITY 1.64 / - / 3.8 cP
TO. PLANT DCS DENSITY 820 / - / 845 kg/m3
MOLECULAR WEIGHT -
CONFIGURATION 2x100%
NOTE
1. OUT OF SCOPE
2) FOUNDATION
BACK UP FUEL OIL UNLOADING OPERATION METER SKID 2. FLOW METER INSPECTION POINT.
FLOW LINE
OUT OF SCOPE LINE
OUT
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
RS-485 CABLE
POWER CABLE
4. TEST CONNECTION POINT FOR SITE VERIFICATION, IF REQUIRED

1 Nos 230Vac UPS
COMMUNICATION JUNCTION BOX ANALOG JUNCTION BOX POWER JUNCTION BOX BALL VALVE NEEDLE VALVE
Provied by SCT
S
DBB BALL VALVE 3-WAY SOLENOID VALVE
CHECK VALVE
TO. EACH FLOW METER
R1 A1~A2
PULSE(FT, PI) x2
AIR VENT VALVE DIAPHRAGM SEAL
4~20mA(PT, AI)
6. INCLUDED DRIP TRAY (DRIP PAN)
7. ABBREVIATIONS
AI ANALOG INPUT FC FAIL CLOSE
CSC CAR SEAL CLOSED LC LOCK CLOSED
DI DIGITAL INPUT NC NORMALLY CLOSED
DO DIGITAL OUTPUT NO NORMALLY OPEN
R1
3/4"
RS-485
PI
POWER (24VDC)
002A PT TI
3/4" 3/4" 002A 002A
FT
002A
1-1/2"
FLOW INLET M FLOW OUTLET
12" ASME 150# RF AIR ELIMINATOR 12" ASME 150# RF
12"x8" 8" 8" 8"x12"
CORIOLIS FLOWMETER
1" 8"
1"
R1 A1
8"
PULSE(FT, PI) x2
A2
3/4"
THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF SAMSUNG C&T CORPORATION
IT IS NOT TO BE COPIED OR USED IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE COMPANY.
PI
002B POWER (24VDC) PT TI
3/4" 3/4" 002B 002B
FT
002B
1-1/2"
M
A 14 OCT. 2020 FOR APPROVAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM
AIR ELIMINATOR
8" 8" REV. DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED REVIEWED APPROVED
CORIOLIS FLOWMETER OWNER
1" 8"
1"
OWNER'S ENGINEER
CONTRACTOR
SUPPLIER
DRIP TRAY FOR DRAIN DRAIN OUT

3/4" ASME 150# RF 1" ASME 150#RF PROJECT NAME

DRAWING TITLE

19CN-J06-P00-DGM-0001 2/3 A
19CN SI-M0399-02SC NONE
A3 (420 X 297 MM)

ESF
DCS OUTSTATION DESCRIPTION CONDITION
SERVICE BACK UP FUEL OIL FOR PROCESS (GT#11 SUPPLY) SETTLEMENT METER SKID
FLUID LIQUID
METERING PANEL
TIME SYNC
FLOW RATE (MAX.) - / 125.5 / 130 t/h
DESIGN PRESSURE 7 barg
S/W HUB DESIGN TEMPERATURE 60 °C
POWER SUPPLY BY SCT
(230VAC, 1pH, 50Hz) OPERATING PRESSURE 0 / 5.3 / 7 barg
OPERATNG TEMPERATURE 1 / 46 / 55 °C
HMI SYSTEM VISCOSITY 1.64 / - / 3.8 cP
DENSITY 820 / - / 845 kg/m3
MOLECULAR WEIGHT -
S600 S600 CONFIGURATION 1x100%
NOTE
17" Touch Screen
1. OUT OF SCOPE
2) FOUNDATION
2. FLOW METER INSPECTION POINT.
SIGNAL TERMINAL BLOCK FLOW LINE
OUT OF SCOPE LINE
OUT
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
RS-485 CABLE
POWER CABLE
FIELD 4. TEST CONNECTION POINT FOR SITE VERIFICATION, IF REQUIRED
BALL VALVE NEEDLE VALVE

S
BACK UP FUEL OIL FOR PROCESS (GT#11 SUPPLY) SETTLEMENT METER SKID (3 SETS) DBB BALL VALVE 3-WAY SOLENOID VALVE
CHECK VALVE
AIR VENT VALVE DIAPHRAGM SEAL

COMMUNICATION JUNCTION BOX ANALOG JUNCTION BOX POWER JUNCTION BOX
6. INCLUDED DRIP TRAY (DRIP PAN)
4~20mA(PT, AI)
7. ABBREVIATIONS
PULSE(FT, PI) x2
ANALOG INPUT FC FAIL CLOSE
TO. EACH FLOW METER
R1 R1
1/2" AI
CSC CAR SEAL CLOSED LC LOCK CLOSED
RS-485
DIGITAL INPUT NC NORMALLY CLOSED
PI DO DIGITAL OUTPUT NO NORMALLY OPEN
003A
PT TI
003A 003A DI
3/4" 1/2"
3/4" FT
003A
1-1/2"
FLOW INLET M FLOW OUTLET
8" ASME 150# RF 8"x6" AIR ELIMINATOR 6" ASME 150# RF
6" 6"
CORIOLIS FLOWMETER
3/4" 6"
3/4"
6"
TO. SIGNAL TERMINAL BLOCK
DRAIN OUT
DRIP TRAY FOR DRAIN 3/4" ASME 150#RF
3/4" ASME 150# RF
BACK UP FUEL OIL FOR PROCESS (GT#11 RETURN) SETTLEMENT METER SKID (3 SETS) THIS DRAWING IS THE PROPERTY OF SAMSUNG C&T CORPORATION
IT IS NOT TO BE COPIED OR USED IN ANY WAY DETRIMENTAL TO THE COMPANY.
COMMUNICATION JUNCTION BOX ANALOG JUNCTION BOX 4~20mA(PT, AI) POWER JUNCTION BOX
PULSE(FT, PI) x2
TO. EACH FLOW METER

R1 R1
1/2"
A 14 OCT. 2020 FOR APPROVAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM
RS-485
REV. DATE DESCRIPTION PREPARED REVIEWED APPROVED

PI
003B
PT TI OWNER
003B 003B
3/4" 3/4"
1/2" FT
003B
OWNER'S ENGINEER
1-1/2"
FLOW INLET M FLOW OUTLET CONTRACTOR
8" ASME 150# RF 8"x6" AIR ELIMINATOR 6" ASME 150# RF
6" 6"
CORIOLIS FLOWMETER
SUPPLIER
3/4" 6"
3/4"
PROJECT NAME

6"
DRAWING TITLE

19CN-J06-P00-DGM-0001 3/3 A

DRIP TRAY FOR DRAIN DRAIN OUT
3/4" ASME 150# RF 3/4" ASME 150#RF 19CN SI-M0399-03SC NONE
A3 (420 X 297 MM)

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FIELD 3-SIDE SHELTER OUTSIDE 3-SIDE SHELTER INSIDE
NOTES:
1. BY CUSTOMER BY VENDOR
2. PROCESS SAMPLE WETTED MATERIALS ARE 316SS, TEFLON, VITON OR GLASS

UTILITY WETTED MATERIALS ARE 316SS, TEFLON, VITON OR GLASS
3. SUPPLIED BY VENDOR / INSTALLED BY CUSTOMER
A A
B B
ATM. VENT
FLARE VENT HEADER
SCS ENCLOSURE FLARE VENT
1/2"
C C
GAS CHROMATOGRAPH
1/4" SAMPLE TO ANALYZER
1/4" CALIBRATION TO ANALYZER
BYPASS FLOW SAMPLE FLOW SAMPLE FLOW

FI1 0~2 NL/MIN FI1 0~100 CC/MIN FI1 0~100 CC/MIN
SET AT 1 NL/MIN SET AT 50 CC/MIN SET AT 50 CC/MIN
LINE SIZE: 1/4" O.D
316SS
F4-2
SUPPLY 0~100 °C
PG
PG TI
SAMPLE IN 1/4" BF4-10
SAMPLE IN
BV4 PR4
600# RF
SET AT
2 0.1 MPAG
D TAG NO. : -
PRESSURE : - MPAG
D
TEMPERATURE : - °C
FLUID : -
NV4
CARRIER GAS (He) IN
1/4"
CALIBRATION IN
E E
BV4
CV4 CV4
BV4 BV4 BV4 BV4

3
FT4
FT4 FT4 2 13. AUG. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM
PG
CPR4
SET AT 1 02. JUL. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM
CPR4 CPR4
0.1 MPAG
PG
0 09. JUN. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM
CAL. He He PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED COMPANY

REV. DATE DESCRIPTION
F BY BY BY APPROVAL F
CONTRACTOR
VENDOR
PROJECT
FUJAIRAH F3 PROJECT
G TITLE G
SAMPLING SYSTEM DRAWING
FOR GC ANALYZER
DWG NO. REV. NO. SCALE SHEET
A3
SI-M0399-SCT-01SC-1 2 NONE PAGE
1 of 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NOTES:

A A
B B
ATM. VENT
FLARE VENT HEADER
SCS ENCLOSURE FLARE VENT
1/2"
C C
GAS CHROMATOGRAPH
1/4" SAMPLE TO ANALYZER
1/4" CALIBRATION TO ANALYZER
BYPASS FLOW SAMPLE FLOW SAMPLE FLOW

FI1 0~2 NL/MIN FI1 0~100 CC/MIN FI1 0~100 CC/MIN
SET AT 1 NL/MIN SET AT 50 CC/MIN SET AT 50 CC/MIN
LINE SIZE: 1/4" O.D
316SS
F4-2
SUPPLY 0~100 °C
PG
PG TI
SAMPLE IN
BV4 PR4
600# RF
SET AT
2 0.1 MPAG
D TAG NO. : -
PRESSURE : - MPAG
D
TEMPERATURE : - °C
FLUID : -
NV4
CARRIER GAS (He) IN
1/4"
CALIBRATION IN
E E
BV4
CV4 CV4
BV4 BV4 BV4 BV4

3
FT4
FT4 FT4 2 13. AUG. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM
PG
CPR4
SET AT 1 02. JUL. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM
CPR4 CPR4
0.1 MPAG
PG
CAL. He He PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED COMPANY

CONTRACTOR
VENDOR
PROJECT
FUJAIRAH F3 PROJECT
G TITLE G
FOR GC ANALYZER
A3
1 of 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NOTES:

A A
I.A HEADER
B AFR4
I.A IN
B
SET AT
PG
(HOLD)
H2S ANALYZER
CV4
FLARE VENT HEADER
SCS ENCLOSURE FLARE VENT 1/4"
1/2"
2
C C
SUPPLY
G.C SAMPLE IN 1/4" SAMPLE TO ANALYZER 1/4"
600# RF
TAG NO. : -
PRESSURE : - MPAG BYPASS FLOW SAMPLE FLOW
FI1 0~2 NL/MIN FI1 0~1 NL/MIN
TEMPERATURE : - °C
FLUID : - SET AT 1 NL/MIN SET AT 0.5 NL/MIN
LINE SIZE: 1/4" O.D
316SS
F4-2
0~100 °C
1/4" DRAIN
PG
PG TI
BV4 PR4 3BV4

SET AT
0.1 MPAG
D D
ZERO SPAN
3BV4
NV4 NV4
1/4" 1/4"
ZERO SPAN
GAS IN GAS IN
E E
FT4 FT4
PG
PG
CPR4 CPR4
SET AT SET AT
0.5 KG/CM2 0.5 KG/CM2
PG
PG
CAL. CAL. SLOPE 2 13. AUG. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM
1 02. JUL. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM
BV4 PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED COMPANY

CONTRACTOR
DRAIN
VENDOR
PROJECT
FUJAIRAH F3 PROJECT
G TITLE G
FOR H2S ANALYZER
A3
1 of 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3.0.2. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING

PROJECT :
3.0.2. GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Aug.13.2020 Rev. 1
SAMIL INDUSTRY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
NOTES
1. SIZE : 5000(W) x 2400(D) x 2790(H)
2. MATERIAL
1) BASE : 150x75x6.5/10t C-CHANNEL, GALV. STEEL
2) FRAME : 100x50x2.3t HOLLOW SQUARE
A 3) INTERIOR SHEET : 2.0mm GALV. STEEL A
4) OUTER SHEET : 2.0mm GALV. STEEL
5) CANOPY : 2mm GALV. STEEL
6) ROOF : 2.0mm, GALV. STEEL
7) FLOOR : 4.5mm CHECK PLATE GALV. STEEL
3. PAINT SPEC.
1) MARINE EPOXY FINSHED FOR INSIDE
2) EXTERNAL COLOR : HOLD
3) INTERNAL COLOR : HOLD
4. WEIGHT : HOLD
B B
CANOPY 5600
300 SHELTER 5000 300
C C
CANOPY 500
FOR GC
CARRIER CARRIER CARRIER CARRIER
SCS ENCLOSURE SCS ENCLOSURE SCS ENCLOSURE He He He He
CAL. SPAN ZERO
ROOF
2
SUPPLY BY OTHERS FOR CALORIMETER

ANALOG JB ZERO
SPAN
2 H2S ANALYZER SPAN

CANOPY 2400
D CALORIMETER PANEL SPAN D

GASCHROMATOGRAPH GASCHROMATOGRAPH BY CLIENT
SPAN
SHELTER 1800
230 VAC 50Hz

NORMAL PDB
LED LIGHT(32Wx2) LED LIGHT(32Wx2) LED LIGHT(32Wx2)

230 VAC 50Hz
UPS PDB
E E
100
PLAN VIEW
2 13. AUG. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM
PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED COMPANY

CONTRACTOR
VENDOR
PROJECT
FUJAIRAH F3 PROJECT
G TITLE G
PLAN VIEW DRAWING
FOR 3-SIDE SHELTER
A3
1 of 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
C A
A A
ATM. VENT
APPROX. 1000
2650
2400
500 2650 SHELTER 5000 300
SHELTER 1800 100
SLOPE LIFTING LUG 3-SIDE SHELTER

0640-AS-001
LED LIGHT(32Wx2) LED LIGHT(32Wx2) LED LIGHT(32Wx2)
150
B FLARE VENT FLARE VENT B

1" ANSI 150# RF 1" ANSI 150# RF
100
400
NORMAL PDB UPS POWER JB UPS POWER JB GAS CHROMATOGRAPH GAS CHROMATOGRAPH
230 VAC 50Hz 230 VAC 50Hz 230 VAC 50Hz
SCS ENCLOSURE ANALOG
JUNCTION BOX
AMETEK
H2S ANALYZER
CALORIMETER PANEL
BY CLIENT
2539
2692
900
ELECTRONICS
2550
ENCLOSURE
2200

C C
SPAN
900
GROUNDING LUG
GROUNDING LUG
150
150
GROUNDING LUG
VIEW "C" VIEW "B"
D D
ATM. VENT
LIFTING LUG
"B" SLOPE
150
FLARE VENT
1" ANSI 150# RF
SCS ENCLOSURE
E E
SAMPLE IN SCS ENCLOSURE SCS ENCLOSURE SCS ENCLOSURE ANALOG JB
SAMPLE IN SAMPLE IN
1/4" OD FOR H2S 1/4" OD FOR G/C 1/4" OD FOR G/C
CARRIER CARRIER CARRIER CARRIER

He He He He
100
16MM THK
∅50 2
16 50 50
2 SUPPLY BY OTHERS FOR CALORIMETER

3
16MM THK PLATE
SPAN SPAN SPAN SPAN ZERO ZERO ZERO SPAN CAL.

FOR GC
900

DETAIL "B" PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED COMPANY
CONTRACTOR
"A"
GROUNDING LUG
GROUNDING LUG
VIEW "D" VENDOR

125
VIEW "A"
25
12 BOLT HOLE PROJECT
FUJAIRAH F3 PROJECT
25
6
50
75
G 2-C6
GROUND CABLE TITLE G
(BY SEC)
GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWING
FOUNDATION LEVEL
FOR 3-SIDE SHELTER
DETAIL "A" A3
1 of 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
b
-
6200
600 SHELTER 5000 600
700 2400 2400 700
A A
550
600
B B
1900
3000
SHELTER 1800
C C
"A"
600
550
a
-
6-M16
ANCHOR BOLT B/N/W
I TYPE
FOUNDATION VIEW
D (BY VENDOR) D
700 700
6-M16 SET ANCHOR BOLTS

I TYPE
T.O.C 150
E E
DETAIL OF SETS ANCHOR BOLT

SECTION a
-

HOLE FOR CONNECTING WITH PANEL
( 15 HOLE X 2 POINTS) 0 09. JUN. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM
SUS ANGLE 10t 550 550
100 PREPARED CHECKED APPROVED COMPANY
F 25 50 25 6-M16 SET ANCHOR BOLTS
BY BY BY APPROVAL F
CONTRACTOR
I TYPE
100
50
10
VENDOR
FRONT VIEW
SIDE VIEW
20 ANCHOR BOLT HOLE
PROJECT
50
100
FUJAIRAH F3 PROJECT
50
TOP VIEW
G b TITLE G
SECTION FOUNDATION VIEW DRAWING
DETAIL "A" - FOR 3-SIDE SHELTER

A3
1 of 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3.0.3. PANEL LAYOUT DRAWING

PROJECT :
3.0.3. PANEL LAYOUT DRAWING
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Sep.02.2020 Rev. 2
SAMIL INDUSTRY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GENERAL DESIGN SPECIFICATION

DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
PANEL MAKER RITTAL
SIZE 800*2100*800(WHD),
(INCLUDED BASE 100mm)
A A
800
MATERIAL SHEET STEEL
THICKNESS DOOR 3mm, SIDE 3mm
COLOR BODY - RAL7035 (PALE GREY)
PLINTH(BASE) - RAL7022 (UMBRA GREY)
PROTECTION IP42
NAME PLATE LAMINATE, 2T
CUSTODY METERING PANEL
[ TAG NO ] BACKGROUND COLOR : BLACK
METERING PANEL
LETTERING COLOR : WHITE
FIXED BY EPOXY RESIN
B B
FLOW COMPUTER
[-]
NOTE
S600 S600
C C
17" Touch Screen

2000
D D
ü x
E E
2 02 SEP. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM
1 13 AUG. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM
POWER RECEPTACLE
[ 230V AC 50HZ ] 0 09 JUN. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM

CONTRACTOR
TAG NO. -
PRODUCT SERIAL NO. -
RATED POWER 220VAC, 50Hz, 1p
PROTECTION IP 54
APPROX. NET WEIGHT 280 kg
MANUFACTURED DATE JUN. 2020
COUNTRY OF MANUFACTURE MADE IN KOREA
MFR.
www.samilind.co.kr
VENDOR
www.samilind.co.kr
PROJECT
200
FUJAIRAH F3 PROJECT
G TITLE G
PANEL LAYOUT DRAWING
[ FRONT VIEW ] [ REAR VIEW ] [ RIGHT VIEW ]
FOR NATURAL GAS METERING SYSTEM
A3
SI-M0399-SCT-01PL-1 2 NONE PAGE
1 of 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PANEL MAKER RITTAL
SIZE 800*2100*800(WHD),
A A
REAR COLOR BODY - RAL7035 (PALE GREY)
DOOR
2 PROTECTION IP42
12 NAME PLATE LAMINATE, 2T

0° BACKGROUND COLOR : BLACK
B B
NOTE
C C
FRONT DOOR
[TOP VIEW]
D 640 D
80
492
E E
15x10
GLAND PLATE (MULTI-PIECE)
3
664
615
540

150
0 09 JUN. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM

CONTRACTOR
200
660
VENDOR
PROJECT
(BOLT SIZE : 8mm)
FOR SCREW-FASTENING WITH CAPTIVE NUTS
FUJAIRAH F3 PROJECT
G FOR SCREW-FASTENING WITH CAPTIVE NUTS TITLE G

(BOLT SIZE : 12mm) PANEL LAYOUT DRAWING
FOR NATURAL GAS METERING SYSTEM
[ CHANNEL BASE VIEW ] DWG NO. REV. NO. SCALE SHEET
A3
2 of 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PANEL MAKER RITTAL
SIZE 800*2100*800(WHD),
A A
800
COLOR BODY - RAL7035 (PALE GREY)
PROTECTION IP42
NAME PLATE LAMINATE, 2T
FUEL OIL METERING PANEL
[ TAG NO ] BACKGROUND COLOR : BLACK
FUEL OIL METERING PANEL
B B
FLOW COMPUTER
[-]
NOTE
1. ONE PANEL CONTAINS TWO SKIDS AND THREE SETS.
S600 S600
C C
17" Touch Screen

2000
D D
ü x
E E
4U
POWER RECEPTACLE
[ 230V AC 50HZ ] 0 09 JUN. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM

CONTRACTOR
TAG NO. -
PRODUCT SERIAL NO. -
RATED POWER 220VAC, 50Hz, 1p
PROTECTION IP 54
APPROX. NET WEIGHT 280 kg
MANUFACTURED DATE JUN. 2020
COUNTRY OF MANUFACTURE MADE IN KOREA
MFR.
www.samilind.co.kr
VENDOR
www.samilind.co.kr
PROJECT
200
FUJAIRAH F3 PROJECT
G TITLE G
PANEL LAYOUT DRAWING
[ FRONT VIEW ] [ REAR VIEW ] [ RIGHT VIEW ]
FOR FUEL OIL METERING SYSTEM
A3
1 of 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PANEL MAKER RITTAL
SIZE 800*2100*800(WHD),
A A
REAR COLOR BODY - RAL7035 (PALE GREY)
DOOR
2 PROTECTION IP42
12 NAME PLATE LAMINATE, 2T

0° BACKGROUND COLOR : BLACK
B B
NOTE
1. ONE PANEL CONTAINS TWO SKIDS AND THREE SETS.
C C
FRONT DOOR
[TOP VIEW]
D 640 D
80
492
E E
15x10
GLAND PLATE (MULTI-PIECE)
3
664
615
540

150
0 09 JUN. 2020 ISSUED FOR PROPOSAL H.M.LEE C. D. LEE H. J. KIM

CONTRACTOR
200
660
VENDOR
PROJECT
(BOLT SIZE : 8mm)
FOR SCREW-FASTENING WITH CAPTIVE NUTS
FUJAIRAH F3 PROJECT
G FOR SCREW-FASTENING WITH CAPTIVE NUTS TITLE G

(BOLT SIZE : 12mm) PANEL LAYOUT DRAWING
FOR FUEL OIL METERING SYSTEM
[ CHANNEL BASE VIEW ] DWG NO. REV. NO. SCALE SHEET
A3
4 of 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
3.0.4. INSTRUMENT LIST (BOM)

PROJECT :
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Sep.02.2020 Rev. 4
SAMIL INDUSTRY

INSTRUMENT LIST / BILL OF MATERIAL

Station
No. Description Manufacturer Q’ty Unit Remarks Rev.
No.
1 Gas Ultrasonic Flowmeter KROHNE 2 EA
Top entry, Trunnion,
2 Manual Operated Ball Valve w/L.S NEWAY 5 EA
DBB Isolation Valve
DBB function
3 Pressure Transmitter SIEMENS 2 EA
Isolation Valve
4 Temperature Transmitter SIEMENS 2 EA
CUSTODY FOR MAIN FUEL GAS METERING
DBB function
5 Pressure Gauge NAGANO 2 EA
Isolation Valve
6 Temperature Gauge NAGANO 2 EA
Tag No. To be updated
7 Vent, Drain & Nozzle Valve NEWAY 1 LOT
8 Junction Box WEIDMULLER 1 LOT
9 Gas Chromatograph EMERSON 2 EA
10 H2S Analyzer AMETEK 1 EA
11 Sampling System for Analyzer SAMIL 1 LOT
12 3-Side Shelter SAMIL 1 LOT
13 Manual Gas Sampler SAMIL 1 LOT
14 Flow Computer EMERSON 2 EA
15 Metering Panel RITTAL 1 Face
16 Supervisory Computer System SAMIL 1 Set

Notes

INSTRUMENT LIST / BILL OF MATERIAL

Station
No. Description Manufacturer Q’ty Unit Remarks Rev.
No.
1 Coriolis Flowmeter KROHNE 2 EA
UPSTREAM OF INTERMEDIATE
2 Air Eliminator SAMIL 2 SET

3 Manual Operation Gate Valve NEWAY 4 EA

F/O TANK
4 Pressure Transmitter SIEMENS 2 EA Diaphragm Seal
7 Drip Tray SAMIL 1 LOT
1 Coriolis Flowmeter KROHNE 2 EA
2 Air Eliminator SAMIL 2 SET

F/O SUPPLY TO #11 GT FUEL OIL SKID
3 Manual Operation Gate Valve NEWAY 8 EA

4 Pressure Transmitter SIEMENS 2 EA Diaphragm Seal

Note.1
7 Drip Tray SAMIL 1 LOT
9 Flow Computer EMERSON 2 EA
10 Metering Panel RITTAL 1 Face
11 Supervisory Computer System SAMIL 1 Set

Notes
1. The quantity is calculated one metering system.
(Required 3 Sets of metering system, Total 6 Skids for GT Unit)
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

1PROJECT :
3.0.5. DATA SHEET
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Sep.02.2020 Rev. 4
SAMIL INDUSTRY
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

PROJECT :
FUEL GAS SETTLEMENT METERING SYSTEM

(CUSTODY FOR MAIN FUEL GAS METEIRNG)
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

GAS ULTRASONIC FLOWMETER Rev.
1 Tag no. To be updated

2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL
3 Service Fuel Gas Settlement Metering Skid

4 Line no. / Skid tag no. -/-
5 Pipe Size(inch) SCH ID(mm) 24” / SCH. 60
6 Pipe Material A106 Gr. B
7 Piping Service Class Piping Class FB2 / ASME 600#
9 Fluid / State Fuel Gas / Gas
10 Stream Flow 3.6 / 108 / 122 Sm3/s
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
12 Temperature 5 / 46 / 60 °C
15 Density Range - kg/m3
16 Molecular Weight - g/mol
17 Manufacturer KROHNE
18 Model ALTOSONIC V12
19 Size & End Connection 24” ASME 600# RF
Body & Flange A333 GR. 6 & A350 LF2
20 Material Transducers Titanium
ULTRASONIC FLOW METER
Converter Housing Stainless Steel 316

21 Number of Measuring Paths 6 Path
22 Accuracy ± 0.1%
23 Process Temp. & Ambient Temp. -20 to 100 °C & -40 to 60 °C
24 Cable Entry M20 x 1.5
25 Electronics Mounting Integral Mount
26 CPU / Display / Keys Full I/O, with Display
27 Electrical Approvals Ex de ma IIB T6… T4, IP66
2 x Modbus RS485, 4 x digital output,
28 Communications
1 x Current Output
29 Power Supply 24 VDC
30 Power Consumption ≤ 10 W
31 Flow Directional Uni-Directional
32 Calibration Test MFR Standard Test
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

MANUAL OPEATED BALL VALVE Rev.

2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow 3.6 / 108 / 122 Sm3/s
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
17 Manufacturer NEWAY or Equivalent
18 Model To be updated
19 Size & End Connection 24” ASME 600# RF
MANUAL BALL VALVE
Body, Bonnet A105 or A216 WCB

20 Material Ball (Trim) 304SS
Seat PEEK
21 Type Full Port Ball Valve, Top Entry
22 Mount Trunnion Mounted
23 Test & Inspection Code API 6D & API 598
24 Operation Gear Box
25 Basic Design Code API 6D & ASME B16.34
26 Face to Face & End Flange ASME 16.10 & ASME 16.5
27 Limit Switch MFR & Model i-Tork & ITS 300 Series or Equivalent
28 Limit Switch Enclosure Explosion proof Ex d IIC T6, IP67
Notes
1. Fire Safe / Anti-Static is applied
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

PRESSURE TRANSMITTER Rev.

2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow 3.6 / 108 / 122 Sm3/s
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
17 Manufacturer Siemens or Equivalent
18 Model 7MF4033
19 Measurement Type Absolute
☐ 0.58 to 58 psi (0.04 to 4 bar)
☐ 2.32 to 232 psi (0.16 to 16 bar)
☐ 9.14 to 914 psi (0.63 to 63 bar)
20 Pressure Range & Sensor Limit
■ 23.2 to 2,320 psi (1.6 to 160 bar)

21 Transmitter Output 4~20 mA w/Digital Signal Based on HART Protocol
PRESSURE TRANSMITTER
22 Process Connection Style 1/2” NPT Female

23 Isolating Diaphragm ■ 316L SST ☐ Alloy C-276
24 Sensor Fill Fluid ■ Silicone ☐ Inert
25 Housing Material ■ Aluminum ☐ SST
26 Conduit Entry Size ☐ 1/2” NPT ■ M20
27 Mounting Bracket Bracket for 2-in. Pipe or Panel Mounting, All SST
28 Product Certification ■ ATEX Flameproof ☐ IECEx Intrinsic Safety
29 Display ■ LCD Display ☐ N/A
30 Hardware Adjustments Zero and Span Configuration Buttons
31 Transient Protection ( Surge Protection ) ☐ Transient Protection Terminal Block ■ N/A
■ Calibration Certificate
32 Calibration Certification
☐ Calibration & GOST Verification Certificate
33 Calibration Range (barg) Zero Span 0 65
34 Power Supply DC 24V (10.5 to 42.4 Vdc)
12.5 mA (Basic), 15.5 mA
35 Power Consumption
(Max. Current in event of fault)
36 Accuracy (% of URL / Year for 5 years) ☐ ± 0.065% ■ ± 0.075
37 Accessory DBB Function Isolation Valve w/3-way Mani. Valve
ETC
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

TEMPERATURE TRANSMITTER Rev.

2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow 3.6 / 108 / 122 Sm3/s
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
17 Manufacturer Siemens or Equivalent
18 Model 7NG3136
TEMP. TRANSMITTER

22 Measurement Configuration Single-Sensor Input
26 Stability ± 0.1% of reading or 0.1 °C
27 Transient Protection ( Surge Protection ) ■ Transient Protection Terminal Block ☐ N/A
29 Calibration Range (˚C) Zero Span 0 65
30 Accuracy ± 0.025% of Span
31 Power Supply 12 to 42.4 Vdc
32 Manufacturer WISE, NAGANO or Equivalent
33 Model R311
RTD
34 Wiring Configuration 3-Wire

35 Input RTD, pt100 ohm at 0 °C / “A” Class
36 Sensor Mounting Type Spring Load Type
37 Manufacturer WISE, NAGANO or Equivalent
38 Model A6100
THERMO-WELL
39 Style Flanged
40 Flange Size (inch) & Rating 1 1/2” ASME 600#
41 Material 316 SST
42 Stem Tapered
43 Weld version ■ Double fillet weld ☐ Full penetration
44 U-Length (mm) To be updated
45 Wake Frequency Calculation As per ASME PTC 19.3
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

PRESSURE GAUGE Rev.

2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow 3.6 / 108 / 122 Sm3/s
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
17 Manufacturer NAGANO or Equivalent
18 Model LV42-163
19 Blow Out Disc Top
20 Mounting Stem Mounting
21 Dial Size ■ 100 mm ☐ 160 mm
■ Glycerin
PRESSURE GAUGE
22 Sensor Fill Fluid ☐ Silicone

23 Process Connection Size 1/2” NPT (M)
Case 304 SS
24 Material Bourdon 316 LSS
Socket 316 LSS
25 Dial Aluminum, White, Black Lettering
26 Pointer Aluminum, Black
27 Window Material Laminated safety glass
28 Calibration Certification Calibration Certificate
29 Accuracy ± 1.0 % of F.S
31 Accessory DBB Function Isolation Valve w/3-way Mani. Valve
ETC
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

TEMPERATURE GAUGE Rev.

2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow 3.6 / 108 / 122 Sm3/s
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
18 Model TB44-002
TEMP. GAUGE
20 Type Bi-Metallic
21 Case & Stem Material 304SS & 316SS
22 Nominal Size 100 mm, Adjustable stem and dial
23 Unit °C
24 Process Connection 1/2” NPT
25 Stem diameter 6.4 mm
26 Enclosure IP 66
27 Calibration Range LRV 0, URV 100, UNIT °C
THERMO-WELL
30 Type Drilled Bar Stock, Straight
32 Material 316 SS
33 Tip Out-Dia. / Bore Size / Root Dia. 23 mm / 7 mm / 35mm
34 T & U-Length (mm) To be updated
35 Wake Frequency Calculation As per ASME PTC 19.3 Ver. 2016
ETC
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

GAS CHROMATOGRAPH ANALYZER Rev.

2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow 3.6 / 108 / 122 Sm3/s
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
17 Manufacturer EMERSON or Equivalent
18 Model 370XA
19 Detector Type Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD)
20 Instrument Range To be updated
21 Calibrated Range To be updated
22 Accuracy ± 1% of Heating Value
23 Operating Pressure 65 barg
GAS CHROMATOGRAPH
24 Operating Temperature -20 to 60 °C

25 Sample Temperature 30 °C
26 Calibration Gas Yes
27 Sample Conditioning Yes
28 Process Connection Type Flange
29 Process Connection Std DN25 600# RF
30 Enclosure Material Aluminum
31 Enclosure Rating IP 65
32 Communication Protocol HART (Smart)
33 Conduit / Cable Entry M20 x 1.5
34 Local Indication LCD
35 Installation Method Wall Mounting
36 Explosion Classification Ex d IIB+H2 T6, IP65
37 Power Supply 230 VAC 60 Hz
38 Response Time 4 Min
39 Tubing Size and Material 6 mm / 316SS
40 Pressure Regulator Model and Setting To be updated
41 Filter Port Size and Mesh To be updated
SAMPLING
42 Calculation Sheet Reference To be updated

43 Process Connection DN25 600# RF
44 Sample Probe Yes (RETRACTABLE)
Electric Tracing / 15 meter / 30 °C
45 Heat Tracing / Length / Maintain Temp.
(Dew Point -82 °C @ 0.2 Mpa)
46 Tapping Distance / Lagging Time 15 meter / To be updated
47 Probe Isolation Valve (Ball Type) 1” ASME 600# RF / A105 or A216 WCB
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

H2S ANALYZER Rev.

2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow 3.6 / 108 / 122 Sm3/s
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
17 Manufacturer AMETEK or Equivalent
18 Model 5100 HD Gas Analyzer
19 Typical Operating Range 0-300 ppm min / 0 to 100% max;
20 Accuracy Typical ± 5ppmv or 2% of reading
21 Ambient Temp. -20 to +50 °C
22 Electrical Classification 120/240VAC, 47-63Hz or 24VDC
23 Relative Humidity 0% to 90%, non-condensing
H2S SULFUR ANALYZER
24 Sample Flowrate 1-2 LPM 92.1-4.2 SCFH)

25 Sample Cell Pressure 1 to 25 psia
<1 sec. photometric response.
26 Speed of Response Total system response is dependent on sample
flowrate
Display and Keypad, Fast Ethernet supports
Modbus over TCP/IP, rs485 serial port, isolated
(supports Modicon Modbus RTU)
27 Outputs (1) Isolated 4-20 mA analyzer or loop-
powered analog output 94) dry relay
contacts. Contact rating 30VAC, 60vdc,
100VA resistive
28 Power Supply 120VAC; 47-63hz or 240VAC
29 Power Consumption 25-45W without Heater, 425-445W with Heater
30 Enclosure IP65 and Type 4X
31 Approval Class I Div 1, Bcd t3; Ex de IIB+H2 T3 Gb
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

FLOW COMPUTER, HMI SYSTEM & METERING PANEL (1 of 2) Rev.

2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow 3.6 / 108 / 122 Sm3/s
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
17 Manufacturer / Model Emerson or Equivalent
18 Model FloBoss S600+
19 CPU Type 50 MHz
20 Display 8 lines of 20 characters with back light
21 Keypad 29 Key
22 Security Multi-level password control
16MB DRAM, 4MB Flash,
23 Memory
Battery Backed SRAM 2MB
AGA 3 (Volume and Mass), AGA 5, AGA 7, AGA 8,
AGA 10, GPA 2172 & 2145, ISO 5167, ISO 6976,
ISO12213 – 2 & 3, GOST 8.563.1 & 2 (97), GOST
24 Calculation for gas
8.586, GOST 30319, PR 50.2.019, NX 19, NX 19
FLOW COMPUTER
Mod, S-GERG, M-GERG, VDI/VDE 2040, PTZ,

Annubar, V-Cone.
API 2540 (Tables 5, 5A, 5B, 5D, 6, 6A, 6B, 6C, 6D,
23, 23A, 23B, 23D, 23E, 24, 24A, 24B, 24C, 24D,
24E, 53, 53A, 53B, 54, 54A, 54B, 54C, 54D, 59A,
59B, 60A, 60B), API 11.1, API 11.2.1, API 11.2.1M,
API 11.2.2, API 11.2.2M, API 11.2.4, API 12.2.1,
25 Calculation for liquid API 12.2.1M, API 12.2.2, API 12.2.2M, ASTM
D1555 & D1555M, GPA TP15, GPA TP15M, GPA
TP16, GPA TP25, GPA TP27, Steam & Water
IAPSW 1967, NPD, Propylene API 11.3.2.2,
Ethylene IUPAC, NIST 1045 & API 11.3.2.1,
Downer, ISO 91/1 (IP2), ISO 91/2 (IP3).
Analog Controlled active current sink 4-20 mA
26 Signal Output Digital Input Opto-isolated inputs
Digital Output Opto-isolated outputs
Analog 1 ~ 5V, 0 ~ 5V or 4 ~ 20mA, 0 ~ 20mA, Opto-isolated
Pulse DC coupled, opto-isolated, 0 to 10 kHz
27 Signal Input
Densitometer Pulse DC coupled, opto-isolated, 0 to 10 kHz
Detector Switch Voltage
Notes
To be continued
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

28 Transient/Over-voltage Protection Reverse voltage protection, 2.5A anti-surge fuse

29 Communication RS232 / RS485 / RS422 / Ethernet / HART
30 Accuracy for Analog Input ±0.02% of FSD
31 Power supply 20 to 32 VDC.
FLOW COMPUTER
32 Power Consumption Max 48 Watts

Measuring of Gross, Compensation of Temp and
Pressure and Calculation of Net Volume,
Totalization of Stream, Batch and Station, Batch
Recalculation, Automatic Prover sequence control,
33 Main Function GC Interface, PID Control, Communication with
Supervisory Computer and DCS, Pressure,
Viscosity, Automatic Calculation of Meter Factor
Value, Alarm Indicating of Abnormal Meter Run
Condition, Control output and status input.
34 Manufacturer DELL, HP or Equivalent
36 Type Panel Mounted
CPU Intel i5 or Latest Version
- Memory 16GB
HMI SYSTEM
37 Instrument Specification - HDD 1TB

- Key & Mouse & OS Win10 Pro 64bit
- Kepware OPC Server for MODBUS
38 Display 17” Display, Panel Mount
39 Software InTouch Runtime 1K Tag without I/O
- Graphic & I/O configuring work
- Package install disc & full set user’s Manual
40 Programming work
- Report Programming
- MS SQL Server Express 2019
41 Manufacturer RITTAL
42 Model 8808 Series
43 Material Steel sheet
METERING PANEL
44 Thickness Rear Door 2T, Side 1.5T

45 Color Body : RAL7035 and Plinth : RAL 7022
46 Panel Size 800W X 800D X 2,200H ( Included Plinth 200H )
47 Door Glazed front and Steel rear door w/ Handle
48 Fan Location ☐ Roof fan ■ Rear door fan
49 Protection ■ IP42 ☐ IP54 w/ Door Fan
Lamp, Drawing pocket, Door stop bar, Door filter,
50 Accessories Thermostat, Circuit breaker, DC 24V Power supply,
Power redundant unit, Name plate, Eyebolt, Etc.
Notes
1. Panel Configuration: One (1) Control Panel w/Two (2) Flow Computer & One (1) HMI System (1 Set)
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

PROJECT :
FUEL OIL OPERATION METERING SYSTEM

(UPSTREAM OF INTERMEDIATE F/O TANK)
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

CORIOLIS FLOWMETER Rev.

2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL
3 Service Fuel Oil Operation Metering Skid

7 Piping Service Class Piping Class HB2 / ASME 150#
9 Fluid / State Fuel Oil / Liquid
10 Stream Flow - / 316 / 325.4 t/h
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
17 Manufacturer KROHNE or Equivalent
18 Model OPTIMASS2400
19 Size & End Connection 10” Product & 8” Connection 150# RF
METER (SENSOR)
Measuring Tube SS UNS S31803 (1.4462)

Flange SS316 / 316L dual certified
20 Material
Outer cylinder SS304 / 304L dual certified
Enclosure Die-cast aluminum w/Polyurethane coated
21 Flow Range 103.5 to 325.4 t/hr
22 Flow Accuracy ± 0.10%
23 Flow Repeatability ± 0.05%
24 Pressure Drop @ Max Flowrate 0.131 barg
25 Cable Connection 1/2” NPT-F
26 Process & Ambient Temp. -45 to 130 °C -40 to 65 °C
30 Model MFC 400 C Ex
TRANSMITTER
31 Mounting Integral
32 Local Display LC Display, Backlit White
33 Power Supply 100 to 230 VAC, 50/60Hz
34 Power Consumption 22 VA (AC), 12W (DC)
Pulse output, frequency output,
35 Input & Output
and/or status output
36 Enclosure Material Die-cast aluminum w/Polyurethane coated
37 Protection / Enclosure IP 66/67, II 1/2 G Ex d IIC T6…T1 Ga/Gb
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

MANUAL OPEATED GATE VALVE Rev.

2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow - / 316 / 325.4 t/h
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
8” ASME 150# RF
GATE VALVE
19 Size & End Connection

20 Material
Trim 13CR+STELLITE
21 Type Outside Screw & York Bolt Bonnet
22 Design Code API 600, API 603
23 Operation Hand Wheel
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET


2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow - / 316 / 325.4 t/h
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
17 Manufacturer SIEMENS or Equivalent
18 Model
☐ 0.58 to 58 psi (0.04 to 4 bar)
■ 2.32 to 232 psi (0.16 to 16 bar)
☐ 9.14 to 914 psi (0.63 to 63 bar)
☐ 23.2 to 2,320 psi (1.6 to 160 bar)

12.5 mA (Basic), 15.5 mA
37 Accessory Diaphragm Seal Type
ETC
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET


2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow - / 316 / 325.4 t/h
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
18 Model TB44-002
TEMP. GAUGE
20 Type Bi-Metallic
23 Unit °C
26 Enclosure IP 66
THERMO-WELL
32 Material 316 SS
ETC
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

PROJECT :
FUEL OIL SETTLEMENT METERING SYSTEM

(F/OP SUPPLY TO #11 GT FUEL OIL SKID)
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

CORIOLIS FLOWMETER Rev.

2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL
3 Service Fuel Oil Settlement Metering Skid

10 Stream Flow - / 125.5 / 130 t/h
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
18 Model OPTIMASS2400
19 Size & End Connection 6” AMSE 150# RF
METER (SENSOR)
Measuring Tube SS UNS S31803 (1.4462)

Flange SS316 / 316L dual certified
20 Material
Outer cylinder SS304 / 304L dual certified
Enclosure Die-cast aluminum w/Polyurethane coated
21 Flow Range 40.2 to 130 t/hr
22 Flow Accuracy ± 0.10%
23 Flow Repeatability ± 0.05%
24 Pressure Drop @ Max Flowrate 0.1258 barg
25 Cable Connection 1/2” NPT-F
26 Process & Ambient Temp. -45 to 130 °C -40 to 65 °C
30 Model MFC 400 C Ex
TRANSMITTER
31 Mounting Integral
32 Local Display LC Display, Backlit White
33 Power Supply 100 to 230 VAC, 50/60Hz
34 Power Consumption 22 VA (AC), 12W (DC)
Pulse output, frequency output,
35 Input & Output
and/or status output
36 Enclosure Material Die-cast aluminum w/Polyurethane coated
37 Protection / Enclosure IP 66/67, II 1/2 G Ex d IIC T6…T1 Ga/Gb
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

MANUAL OPEATED GATE VALVE Rev.

2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow - / 125.5 / 130 t/h
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
6” ASME 150# RF
GATE VALVE
19 Size & End Connection

20 Material
Trim 13CR+STELLITE
21 Type Outside Screw & York Bolt Bonnet
22 Design Code API 600, API 603
23 Operation Hand Wheel
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET


2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow - / 125.5 / 130 t/h
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
17 Manufacturer SIEMENS or Equivalent
18 Model
☐ 0.58 to 58 psi (0.04 to 4 bar)
■ 2.32 to 232 psi (0.16 to 16 bar)
☐ 9.14 to 914 psi (0.63 to 63 bar)
☐ 23.2 to 2,320 psi (1.6 to 160 bar)

12.5 mA (Basic), 15.5 mA
37 Accessory Diaphragm Seal Type
ETC
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET


2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow - / 125.5 / 130 t/h
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
18 Model TB44-002
TEMP. GAUGE
20 Type Bi-Metallic
23 Unit °C
26 Enclosure IP 66
THERMO-WELL
32 Material 316 SS
ETC
Notes
3.0.5. DATA SHEET


2 P&ID no. -
GENERAL

10 Stream Flow - / 125.5 / 130 t/h
CONDITIONS

SERVICE
17 Manufacturer / Model EMERSON or Equivalent
18 Model FloBoss S600+
19 CPU Type 50 MHz
20 Display 8 lines of 20 characters with back light
21 Keypad 29 Key
22 Security Multi-level password control
16MB DRAM, 4MB Flash,
23 Memory
Battery Backed SRAM 2MB
AGA 3 (Volume and Mass), AGA 5, AGA 7, AGA 8,
AGA 10, GPA 2172 & 2145, ISO 5167, ISO 6976,
ISO12213 – 2 & 3, GOST 8.563.1 & 2 (97), GOST
24 Calculation for gas
8.586, GOST 30319, PR 50.2.019, NX 19, NX 19
FLOW COMPUTER
Mod, S-GERG, M-GERG, VDI/VDE 2040, PTZ,

Annubar, V-Cone.
API 2540 (Tables 5, 5A, 5B, 5D, 6, 6A, 6B, 6C, 6D,
23, 23A, 23B, 23D, 23E, 24, 24A, 24B, 24C, 24D,
24E, 53, 53A, 53B, 54, 54A, 54B, 54C, 54D, 59A,
59B, 60A, 60B), API 11.1, API 11.2.1, API 11.2.1M,
API 11.2.2, API 11.2.2M, API 11.2.4, API 12.2.1,
25 Calculation for liquid API 12.2.1M, API 12.2.2, API 12.2.2M, ASTM
D1555 & D1555M, GPA TP15, GPA TP15M, GPA
TP16, GPA TP25, GPA TP27, Steam & Water
IAPSW 1967, NPD, Propylene API 11.3.2.2,
Ethylene IUPAC, NIST 1045 & API 11.3.2.1,
Downer, ISO 91/1 (IP2), ISO 91/2 (IP3).
Analog Controlled active current sink 4-20 mA
26 Signal Output Digital Input Opto-isolated inputs
Digital Output Opto-isolated outputs
Analog 1 ~ 5V, 0 ~ 5V or 4 ~ 20mA, 0 ~ 20mA, Opto-isolated
Pulse DC coupled, opto-isolated, 0 to 10 kHz
27 Signal Input
Densitometer Pulse DC coupled, opto-isolated, 0 to 10 kHz
Detector Switch Voltage
Notes
To be continued
3.0.5. DATA SHEET

28 Transient/Over-voltage Protection Reverse voltage protection, 2.5A anti-surge fuse

29 Communication RS232 / RS485 / RS422 / Ethernet / HART
30 Accuracy for Analog Input ±0.02% of FSD
31 Power supply 20 to 32 VDC.
FLOW COMPUTER
32 Power Consumption Max 48 Watts

Measuring of Gross, Compensation of Temp and
Pressure and Calculation of Net Volume,
Totalization of Stream, Batch and Station, Batch
Recalculation, Automatic Prover sequence control,
33 Main Function GC Interface, PID Control, Communication with
Supervisory Computer and DCS, Pressure,
Viscosity, Automatic Calculation of Meter Factor
Value, Alarm Indicating of Abnormal Meter Run
Condition, Control output and status input.
34 Manufacturer DELL, HP or Equivalent
36 Type Panel Mounted
CPU Intel i5 or Latest Version
- Memory 16GB
HMI SYSTEM
37 Instrument Specification - HDD 1TB

- Key & Mouse & OS Win10 Pro 64bit
- Kepware OPC Server for MODBUS
38 Display 17” Display, Panel Mount
39 Software InTouch Runtime 1K Tag without I/O
- Graphic & I/O configuring work
- Package install disc & full set user’s Manual
40 Programming work
- Report Programming
- MS SQL Server Express 2019
41 Manufacturer RITTAL
42 Model 8808 Series
43 Material Steel sheet
METERING PANEL
44 Thickness Rear Door 2T, Side 1.5T

45 Color Body : RAL7035 and Plinth : RAL 7022
46 Panel Size 800W X 800D X 2,200H ( Included Plinth 200H )
47 Door Glazed front and Steel rear door w/ Handle
48 Fan Location ☐ Roof fan ■ Rear door fan
49 Protection ■ IP42 ☐ IP54 w/ Door Fan
Lamp, Drawing pocket, Door stop bar, Door filter,
50 Accessories Thermostat, Circuit breaker, DC 24V Power supply,
Power redundant unit, Name plate, Eyebolt, Etc.
Notes
1. Panel Configuration: One (1) Control Panel w/Two (2) Flow Computer & One (1) HMI System (3 Sets)
3.0.6. SPARE PART LIST

PROJECT :
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Aug.19.2020 Rev. 3
SAMIL INDUSTRY

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS LIST for START-UP & COMMISSIONING

Recom
Mfr.’s Parts By-out Spare Re-
No. Unit Category Description of Parts mended Rev.
Number Mfr. Type marks
Quantity
Ultrasonic
1 ea Fuse & O-Ring 1
Flowmeter
Gas Sample Shut-Off Valve

2 Set 1
Chromatograph Repair Kit
Gas Spare Filter for Carrier &

3 ea 2
Chromatograph Calibration Gas
Gasket for Metering

4 Lot Gasket 1
System
5 ea Flow Computer I/O Board 3
Bolt, Nut, Gasket for

Main Isolation
6 Lot Main Isolation Valve 1
Valve
(Each Size per 1 Sets)
Notes

RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS FOR 2-YEARS OPERATION

Recom
Mfr.’s Parts By-out Spare Re-
No. Unit Category Description of Parts mended Rev.
Number Mfr. Type marks
Quantity
Ultrasonic
1 ea Fuse & O-Ring 1
Flowmeter
Ultrasonic
2 Pair Transducer 1
Flowmeter
Coriolis Enhanced Core

3 ea 2
Flowmeter Assembly
4 ea Flow Computer I/O Board 1
Gas
5 Set Replacement Valve Kit 1
Chromatograph
Gas Replacement
6 Set 1
Chromatograph Detector Kit
Gas Valve, Proportional,

7 Set 1
Chromatograph Solenoid
Gas 6-Port Valve Diaphragm

8 Set 1
Gas Sample Shut Off Valve

9 Set 1
Gas Assembly, PCBA, CPU,

10 Set 1
Chromatograph XA Platform
Gasket for Metering

13 Lot Gasket 1
System
Power Supply
14 ea H2S Analyzer 1
180W 7.5 X 24VDC
Converter, D-D, 24V

Input, 5V Output, 5 Chan
Kit Replacement
MEMBRANE Filter
O-Ring Viton for Genie

Filter Model 120
18 ea H2S Analyzer KIT O-RING 5100 NCM 1
Assy PCB over-Temp

controller Board
Assy PCB Analog

Interface 5100 HD
Notes
3.0.7. SPECIAL TOOLS LIST

PROJECT :
3.0.7. SPECIAL TOOLS & VALIDATION EQUIPMENTS
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Jun.09.2020 Rev. 0
SAMIL INDUSTRY
3.0.7. SPECIAL TOOLS LIST

SPECIAL TOOLS & VALIDATION EQUIPMENTS

Mfr.’s Recom
By-out Spare Re-
No. Unit Category Description of Parts Parts mended Rev.
Mfr. Type marks
Number Quantity
1 ea Special Tool Laptop 1
Notes
3.0.8. DEVIATION & CLARIFICATION SHEET

PROJECT :
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Jun.09.2020 Rev. 0
SAMIL INDUSTRY
J.K SUNG H.Y PARK H.J KIM Issue for Proposal 09 Jun 2020 0

DEVIATION & CLARIFICATION SHEET

Specification Specification or SAMIL’s
No Cat. Rev.
or Document no. Document requirements Comments & Reason Justification
There is no detail information.

Piping Material Piping material specification Samil applied the piping material spec,
1 C
Specification (Piping Class, Piping Schedule following data sheet.
for all size, etc.)
Provide heat conservation
insulation on piping and SCT shall be progressed whole piping
Insulation equipment with surface temp. insulation work.
2 Annex#2. General C
exceeding 60°C during normal So, We recommend to insulation work
Technical Requirement
operation. Piping will be supply by EPC or others
insulated with mineral wool.
Samil applied Samil’s approved vendor

3 Approved Vendor List There is no information. C
list.
Notes
3.0.9. INSPECTION TEST PLAN

ROJECT :
3.0.9. INSPECTION TEST PLAN
Document Review
(Re-submit)
(C) Disapproved
Result:
Date: Name:
Remarks(Comments):
EPC:
FOR PROPOSAL
Jun.09.2020 Rev. 0
SAMIL INDUSTRY

f3 Technical Po Documents - fuel Metering (Samil) - 삼일 사인본

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

f3 Technical Po Documents - fuel Metering (Samil) - 삼일 사인본

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FOR CONTRACT

A For Contract 03.SEP.2020 J.H. BAK K.M LIM S.W CHOI

Rev Description Date Prepd Rvwd Appd

FUJAIRAH F3 INDEPENDENT POWER PLANT

TECHNICAL DOCUMENT OF PURCHASER ORDER FOR

FUEL METERING SYSTEM

1 ORDER OF PRECEDENCE ............................................................................

2 TECHNICAL BID EVALUATION SHEET & SUMMARY SHEET 2

19CN-00EZU00-J30-0001_MR for FUEL METERING SYSTEM_RB

Annex#1. 19CN-00GEN00-G09-0001 General Technical Requirements-General

Annex#2. 19CN-00GEN00-M02-0001 General Technical Requirements-Mechanical

Annex#3. 19CN-00GEN00-J02-0001_R0_General Technical Requirement-I&C

Annex#4. 19CN-00GEN00-E02-0001_Rev.B _General Technical Requirement for Electrical

Annex#5. 19CN-00GEN00-P04-0001_RC_Piping Material Specification (PMS sheet is extracted

Annex#5. 19CN-00GEN00-P04-0004_R0_Painting Specification

Annex#5. UAE F3 Painting Product List_Rev.0

Annex#7. F3_Minimum document submission requirements

Annex#9. Fuel Gas & Oil Specification and Analysis

Annex#10. Meter Arrangement and Meter Details

Att#1. 19CN-00EZU00-J34-0001_Technical Specification for FUEL METERING SYSTEM_RA

Att#2. Preliminary Configuration for FUEL METERING SYSTEM_RA_Final concept_200830

Att#8_Owner's Requirements for Fuel System (add)

4 SUPPLIER’S TECHNICAL PROPOSAL DOCUMENT (FINAL) 4

Doc. Title : N/A Rev. A

Doc. Title : N/A Rev. A

3 TECHNICAL BID EVALUATION SHEET & SUMMARY SHEET

Doc. Title : N/A Rev. A

Item closed. But Bidder to explicitly bring out

Noted. The signals from field electronic

4) Smart type Yes x Not applicable Bidder to comply Comply Noted

1. Flow conditioner to be excluded.

Noted, Bidder see revised requirement as T3 or T4

Please confirm below output

5) Smart type Yes Comply Noted Comply Noted, closed.

The default unit shall be Sm3. Please consider

HMI in Metering panel to be considered.

HMI in Metering panel to be considered.

2.3 CONTROL PANEL

1) Ingress Protection ( Indoor / Outdoor) IP32 / IP 54W IP42 Noted, closed.

HMI in Metering panel to be considered.

9) Document Pocket Required (A3 size) Comply Noted, closed.

1. We understand below provision bidder has

Pressure Transmitter with Accessories

2) Quantity set 2 as minimum Comply Noted, closed.

3) Isolation Valve (DBBV) - Required Comply Noted, PID to be revised accordingly.

Pressure Gauges with Accessories

Noted, Maker to be discussed during detail stage

Noted, Maker to be discussed during detail stage

2) Quantity set 2 as minimum Comply Noted, closed.

To maintain uniformity in plant 3 wire type shall be

316 Stainless Steel

Temperature Gauges with Accessories

Noted, Maker to be discussed during detail stage

2) Quantity set 2 as minimum Comply Noted, closed.

316 Stainless Steel

Gas Chromatograph with Sample Probe

Noted, G.C analyzer needs to be enclosure as

6) Analyser Accuracy % Bidder to Specify A* Bidder to reply ± 1% of Heating Value

Bidder to comply with I&C GTR as Panel

2nos 230Vac UPS and 1no 230

Flow Computer for Fuel Gas Metering

3-side Analyzer Shelter

3.2 BACKUP FUEL OIL UNLOADING METERING SYSTEM - OPERATION